rr) Slops'
:Kaa>tp
► x^
f. Wahanga XX. Hnr.ut re 2" tC2(k Naiua I f
|
t t * |
||||
|
t |
' Wtit\ |
";.■':.-:..'. ■;■ ;'?< . |
f -TTT*5 |
|
|
% |
9 ^ngMgriM |
\: r |
"^T-w |
|
|
% |
«p i i |
; | (ii- Ii-.-r? _ |
-*<*,.. |
|
|
'I |
' IS |
- .<,, ■..-■ - .:,,. |
Kote MAHI KAMURA o te KARETI M. A. C. Kotc kai-whukaako ko Erata E.L. Paraone.
"Kia mahia ta koutou niahi ake e tera,
e tera: ho o koutou ringaringa the ano
hei mahi, Kia rite ki ta maiou i ako ai hi
a koutou." Teharonika 4 : 11.
T+++++++** : •:.++*+++*+**+'H"M''»
c
4iC6 KWRSRfc"
WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO
Kl TE ETITA
i le Kauwhau H
He Panuit
Ko nga Powhiri Qui Pari ha
Ko te Hui o Puketapu
KO NCA TUHINCA MAI
11 Mo • hu no ti \\ h in o [h ti ,«
Ko nga '1 uhituhinj \ ,
Kou- Maaka Tuarua 2\
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI
•I MAHI KURA HAPATI
Con< erl Recitation
Intermediate Department ,0
Korero a Ngakaa
\l mi -i Tlit-olo^ir.il .,
I'ikcli.i Theological
Postlud<
Prelude .
Priraar) Department ,
SUNDAY SCHOOL NOTICE
• ■ ill be noted, lessons arc now outlined in IV Karere forthree Pakeha classes Name!) Hi ■ Primary, Intermedial* •iml rheolog cal The n | ikeha Theological has
already been started in some of the larger branches we hope 1,,al others Wl11 ,('11"^ suit. I ntendenc3 and reach-
hould meel ;|v soon "" wh< ther they
enou«n student! new class. When no new
i lass is started on account of ihe « mallm ss oi the branch ii is preferred that theclass tak of Morm mM outline
1 he "B >ok ol Mormon" is giv n for tin lo anrj -B].;
blical Character. " for the mccel. This < hange will
cut the present Intermediate CI is* in two.
IQtrptP
WAHANGA 20 WENERE1, HANUERE 27. 1926. NAMA I
ffla.ri Agricultural College Hastings. H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni,
> Hahi o Ihu karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei.
Me tuku atu o kouiou reta ki te lu.tr, o te Karere, M. A. C, Hastiigs, H. B.
Ko te ulu it.o TE KARERE i te Uu e nir* heicni, e (£s).
Iko fe CiKanfla Ccnci:
lf»e malua utu mo leu pepa ka vJhiv hi si.
J. H. Timkini, Tumuaki MtJu.ua Maridna K. Ewutuna, Etila. Twfa Wttihna, hiita Boa AiihhuL
Ko vga Kai-'l uhUMai (cpei ial U ; iters) Wiremu A. Koura Reihami H. Karala
ncabiliuura ifcapati.
PRELUDE
Sloicln trith expression. S ft.
Tracy Y. Cannon.
f- ■* 1 Ij7 • \ ==:tF f ' | - — tr^~^
SACRAMENT GEM FOR FEBRUARY, 1926
[n memory of the broken flesh we eat the broken bread;
And witness with a cup, afresh, Our faith in Christ, our Head.
POSTLUDE
Soft Hft.
mrf-tm&SjE
Mj' il
m&kJ F ^d
l l kAKi-Kh 1 lanii< re _';. 1926
CONCERT RECITATION IOR FEBRUARY, 1926.
Matthew, 5th chapter, 4Sth verse. uBe ye therefore perfect, even as your Father which in heaven is perfect.'1
KORERO A NdAA.l Uu PEPUKRE, 1926.
I a Matm, te 5 () n.u' 1 upoko, te 48 0 nga rarangi. "N.i, kia tika koutou, k a pera me to koutou Matua i te R jingi e tika ana."
MAORI TtlhOLUtiiCAL
Ratapu tuatahi, Pepnere 7, 1926.
He akoranga mo te ra nono puku.
A,/ Tiata {V. Witehira 1 w/iakamuori.
Ko te tiiio putakc 0 tenei akoranga koia tenei ; He aha ahau i whakapono ai mehcmea ko tatou nga tangata <• tumanakotia nei e te Atua me whakakahorc tatou i <> tatou he me 0 tatou ngoikorctanga .'
I uiua atu 0 te I mere 0 tetahi tangata ki tana liaerc i niohio ia ko hra ia liaere ai. Me mohio la kei tc hiahia ia ki te liaerc ki aga maunga, ki nga taha moana, ki tc taone, ki te awa, ki lira ranei. I te wa ka mohio ia ko hea ia haore ai ka moliio Ia me pehea te timata. Ka mohio ano hoki i;i he alia nga mca c mini e ia. Ki tc mca he haere roa ka whakaritc i;i i nga mca mana i mua 0 tana timatanga. Kngari «• korc ia <• 111 at ait mc pi hea, a hei te hea huarahi hci timatanga mchemea horc ia i moliio <• anga ana ia ko hea.
Meite tac nga tau 0 tetahi tangata ki tc 18, 20 ranci e tika ana kia wliakaaro ia c, he aha tana mahi nui a taihoa. Ahakon ho kamura, he Italian rakau, he kuti hipi, he kai-tango malii, he mahita ktrra, he kai-mahi paamu, he parakimetc, he aha ranci. ! muri 0 te kiteatanga 0 tana mahi nui ka mahi ia i nga mi a hei timata i taua mahi.
Mi it- kite tatou i tctalii tangata 0 hacrc ana i tetahi wahi
liaiiiirrcj;, 1926 Tk. K.ARERE
kahore nei ia e niohio ana e anga ana ia ki.hea o taua huarahi, ka mea tatou he porangi tera tangata.
Meit~ kite tatou i tetahi tamaiti i roto i tc kura nui kahore e niohio ana he aba ia me ana niahi a taihoa, a i timata ki te ako niinita a ka tiini hei kura roia, a i reira hei kaiwea, ka mca tatou e kore e oti i taua tamaiti he mahi nui.
[ tukua mai tatou e te Atua i te rangi ki te whenua. Kua homaitia ano hoki e la te Rongo-pai hei whakaatu mai i te haurahi ki te rangi he mea kia hoki ai tatou ki reira. Ki te tikanga 0 te hahi e kore tatou e hoki ki te rangi engari "kia tika tatou, kia pera me to tatou Matua i te rangi e tika ana."
Km te hiahia te Ariki kia hoki atu tatou ki ko i a ia raka noho ai. Koia raka i homaitia ai ano e ia te hahi i tangohia ra i nga wa 0 mua. E kore e kitea e tetahi te huarahi ki te rangi mehe kahore he mapi. Ko te Rongo-pai te mapi hei whakaatu mai i te huarahi ki a tatou.
Ko te [lunga Tapu kei te hiahia kia riro mai i a ratou te mea nui 0 nga manaakitanga, a ka riro mai tenei mea meite rapu tatou i nga huarahi o te Ariki, me te u, a taea noatia te niutiinga, ehara i te mea hawhe te huarahi; no reira me whakareri tatou mo tenei haere roa. Me whaka-u tatou, kaua hei poka tat a kei tapepa tatou ki te taha 0 te huarahi a ka ngaro. Me ako tatou i a tatou mapi ka tiaki ai i nga wa kat >a hei ako i a tatou hei whakaatu hoki mehentea kei tc huarahi tika tatou, kahore rarici.
Ko ni^'A tangata e noho ki a la ko nga niea e haere ana i 1c tika a tac noa te mutuhga o taua huarahi. Kei te hiahia tatou ki te haere kia noho tahi ki to tatou Ariki, no reira ka main tatou a taea noatia te mutunga 0 nga huarahi 0 te Ariki. Te tikanga 0 tenei he taea e tatou te takahi 0 tatou hara me 0 tatou ngoikoretanga taea noatia kia tu hara-kore tatou ki mua i a la i to tatou Ariki. .Meite kore tatou 0 niahi i tenei e kore o tatou wainia e taea te tupu.
1 o tatou takahi.katoa e wJiakatata ana tatou ki te vrafci e haere nei tatou. la wahi iti 0 te hinu e tahuna ana i roto 0 te liiiu.i e whr.katata ana i te tiima ki te wapu. Pera ano hoki nga t ' c 0 te Hahi he mea e arahi i a tatou Ida tata ki te
mulling! <: te huarahi e haere nei talon, ara ko i;ma mut.ung:<
4 IK KAKKKL II. urn
koia ko te tino tika
Te O.an^a m2 te Mahi o nga Apotoro a lh j Karaiti
Te Kajpapa: Ko (e Kawe.iata Hou \,/ Whcmni . Kaa rmta ko'Vokr Watcnei wliakaritc
Ratapu tuarua, Pepncre 14, WW* Akoranga 2
[ 11-. Petekoha Nga Apiti mai ki te iiaiii
1. I whakakitea te Wairua Tapu.
(a) Te ra o te Petekoha. Rewitikuha l'.'I: 15-20.
(h) Te whakakitcnga o te Wairua Tapu. 3 Niwhai
12: 1-2. Whakaaturanga i a Matin 3: 11. Te
iriiringa ki t»' kapura. (c) Pororarutanga o nga Ilurai whakaaro i te liomai-
tanga »> nga reo ke. Vga Mahi 2: B-7. Ka vvhakapaea e haurangi ana nga Apotoro. Mahi
2: 13-15.
2. [Cauwhautanga tuatahi o t»- Rongo-pai i muri <> te kakenga.
(a Whakaaturanga mo te poropititanga a Qoere.
Ho< re 2: ^'i; Nga Mahi 2 : 16-20. b Tutukitanga o tetahi wahi Kaore te Wairua Tapu i ringihia ki runga ki nga kikokiko katoa. Hoere 2: *J.'>. Tirohia t<- Peara Utu Xui mo te taha ki a Hohepa Mete me \r Anahera me Moro- nai. Rarangi 41 "Nga Tuhituhinga a Hohepa Mete."
(c) Ka whakapaea te iwi Din te ripekatanga i a to
Karaiti. Nga Mahi 12: 12;i-l2U ; Kuka 23 : 12;
1 Niwhai 1 1 : 32. ••Mr aha matou?" \Tga Main 2; 37, K'»: 30. Ka Kauwhau a Pita i nga tikanga tuatahi o te
K<>iiLr<>-p:ii. Whakanuinga ake <» i f?a tuema. Nga Mahi 2: 41-17. Ka whakamahj nga Apotoro i nga liomaitanga whaka-te-wairua (spiritual Lrir'ts . \^a Mahi 2: 42-43.
Han-uere 27, 1926 TE KARERE
Ratapu tuatoru, Pepuere 21, 1 92<> Akoranga 3
TE MAH] I HlRUHARAMA
1. Te whakaoranga 0 te tangata kopa 0 tuna whanauiiga mai,
e to kaha 0 te Tohungatanga. Nga Mahi 3: 1.10; Hoani 9: 1-3; Arami 15; 3-12; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 42 : 43, 44, 48.
(a) Ka kauwhau a Pita ki nga Hurai mo runga i ta ratou i ripeka ai (te Karaiti).
1. I meatia e ratou i roto i te kuaretanga. Nga Mahi
3: 17; Hoani 16: 3; Ruka 23; 34; 1 Nnvhai 11 : 28-32.
2. Ivo te whakaatn ka murua ano ta ratou, engari "kia
tae mai ra ano nga wa 0 te whakahokinga 0 nga mea katoa." Tirohia Nga .Main 3: 19-20.
2. Pita raua ko lioani i mua i nga Toliunga.
(a) Nga Ilaruki me te Aranga mai. Matiu 22: 23. (h) Uiuinga 0 te mana 0 nga Apotoro. Mahi 4:7; Matin 21: 23.
(c) Te whakahoki a Pita. Mahi 4: 10-12; Hoani 15: L6.
(d) Ko te whakapono i roto i to kaha o te ingoa 0 te
Kai-Whakaora.
1. Iriiringa. Matin 29: L8-20 ; Moronai 7 : 34.
2. Whakauunga (Confirmation). Moronai 2: 2.
3. Whakaritenga (Ordination). Ako, me nga [\a\ve.
107: 40-52; Moronai 3; 2-:).
4. Whakaoranga. Ilcnii 5: 14; Ako, me nga Kawe, 42:
44. f>. Inoi. Hoani ir>: l(i; Arami 14; 26; 3 Xiwhai 19:8. (i. Pci i nga Rewera. '■> Xiwhai 7: 1!>; Maka 1(>: 17. 7. \'g;i manaakitanga. Ako, me nga Kawe. L32: 46. N. Mo te riri iho (roblike) i a Ilatana. Ako, r.10 n •■.-.
K&v e, rue to < Aranga 0 I lohepa Mete. 9. Whakatapunga i te Hakaramete, Moronai te 1
te 5 0 nga ivpoko; Akoranga tne nga FCawenatu
20: 77, 7!). 10. Vlaronatanga. Ako. me nga Kawe. 132: hi.
i, I k .. II.. 1,1.
I\;i riria nga Apotoro kia kaua e kauwhau i a to
karaiti i rip< katia. Mai ill Ka kauwhau ratou i te kupu i runga i te maia. .Malii 5: 28-29. Whukariteritea enei rarangi tetahi I . Te Pita o te w a o te ripekatang •_'. Te Pita u te ra o nga Apotoro. Mahi 4: 1
3. Te putake o te whakahoutanga o tona ngakau h
Ratapu tuawita, Pepuere 28, 1926 Akoranga l Ik TURE I ) TE WHAKATAPl NGA (CON
Mahi 4: 32-37; Ako. me nga Kawe. Wahanga 51. (a I huihui noa Lho nga uiea katoa a te hunga whakapcno.
Mahi 4: 32j 3 NTiwhai 26: 19. (b) Te whakatapungs me te mahi Tuari. Ruka 16: L-13.
Waiata 24: 1-2; Ako, me nga Kawe. 5] : L9 ; 4 Niwl ai
1 : 3.
M;i te ture <> I • Tiki-o-rangi a Eliona e hanga. Ako nga Ka w e. l(,-"> : 5. I. Niona ko te hunga ngakau ma. Ako, me nga Kawe.
97: 16-21. ■_'. I igakau ma ka kite i te Atua. Matiu
3. Kia whiwhi ki te rungatiratanga o te Tikitiki-o-rangi, me pupn ri tatou i te 1 ure <> te Tiki; iki-o- Ako, me nga Kawe. ss : 22. (d) Te hokohokouga n nga rawa. Mahi ! : 34-37; 2: !'
Ako, me nga Kawe, 42; 2! (a) To raua ngakau-rua-tanga. Mahi5: 1-2. h Ka ni ia <• Pita.
I. Ka vvhakakiia ratou • llatana kia korero teka. lloa i
8: 14 : Kenehi 3 •J. Ka aroha te Atua ki 1" kni-hoa1 u n .. i ' •
liari I c!k cri'i'.i initi 9 : 7.
: o Auanaia me I lapaii a. Mahi 5 : 5- 11. 1. I-; koie to Atua ! akainatautau ki te kin >.
Hanuerc 27, iy^6 TE KAKEKK 7
Henri 1 : 13. 2. "Ko ta to tangata hold i rui ai, ko tenei tana e kokoti ai." Karatia 6: 7-9; Arami 41 ; 4-5.
PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS"
First Sunday, February 7, 1926. Uniform Fast Day Lessou
Subject: Why do J believe that if we are to become the kind of people the Lord has intended, we must aim at perfec- tion9
No one would set out for a trip without an objective; in the mountains, to the resort, into the city, out into the country, for a fishing trip, etc. Once the objective is decided upon, the traveller pursues a course that will take him to it. if the trip is a long one, more preparations are necessary than when a nearby point is the goal. So it all depends on what and where our destination is, as to the kind of preparations we make, and the course we pursue.
When a young man readies the age of IS or 20, he wishes to have rather clearly in mind what he is going to do in life; whether he will go into architecture, or whether he will go into business, or become a builder or a tradesman. When his mind is made up, he can then concentrate and direct all his energies to that end.
[f a traveller was going through the country, and had no destination in mind, and would take any road thai his fancy suggested, his sanity would he questioned.
What would we say of a boy in college who would switch from course to course, or from school to school, without pur- pose? Would he ever achieve success in any profession? The Lord has placed us here upon the earth, and b\ I ica ts of the Gospel, has point'"' oul to us the path or course we \\w to
puisne it' we are to come back into His presence. And to coir.
and live wit1 Llim means thai we "must be perfed even as our Father in i 1 aven is perfect. "
ft i the lord's plan thai we do come back to Flim; thai
<L
8 1 k KAKI I I. mm M ?7, l< 26
is why He re-established His Church. No one can travel the road back without having a guide-hook, and the Gospel BUp- that.
Latter-da} .^..i.,:> waul to enjoy the great esl bl( within the gifl of the Lord, viz., to he privileged to find the path, and 1 > pursue il 1 1 its vcrj end. Therefore, we l» « l a 'c for thai long journey; we must equip ourselves For it ; we must in»' make de >i rs; we must not abandon the course; \ i« dare not lose our guide-book the Gospel plan.
Only those who take this entire journey and reach the lation are pleasing unto the Lord. We desire to please the L > ■■<!. therefore we have s 1 ou1 to reach our Heavenly home
I . ricctioii. Nothing less will fulfil the Lord's plan as it affects La1 ter-day Saints.
.Just as every step forward brings the traveller nearer his g >.•'! ; just as ea< h drop of fuel drives the machines toward the mid of the journey so, too, the observance of each and i law and requiremcnl embodied in the Gospel plan bring us
II \-i .-«■.• to our g >;il perfection.
Intrr duction to Second Year Ljssons.
The work of the Second Year Theological class for the \ ear 1926 will be a study of characters from the < M<l Testament. Tl e aim of the course will be two-fold : first, to study the greal men and women of the Old Testamenl as individuals. The life of each person will be analyzed with the idea of determi what there was in the life of thai particular individual which made him or her greal among the people with whom he or bIic lived. No attempt will be made to conned the history of the people of which these characters are a pari, excepl as the lives '»f thes? individuals establish such connection. Second, t*« study the principles of the Gospel which were given to llm world through the individuals studied and to observe the
:h and development of the principles through the sul i|iien1 dispensations.
The lessons covering the course will be prepared from the liihl. . and Bible references will be given as the Lessons are published in the "Karere." it follows tint every teacher of this department will necessarily become, if no1 already, a sub-
rLuiueiv 2/, 1 9-0 ii: KAKERE
scriber to "Te Karere.''
Some other books used as helps in the preparation of the lessons arc: John Lord's "Beacon Lights of History," Volume 11.; Geike's "Hours with the Bible"; "Josephus"; Standard Church Works, Smith's "Old, Old Tales from an Old, Old Book"; Bryan's 1926 Teach or- training Text.
Second Sunday, February 14, 1926. Lesson 1. — Adam: Who He Was.
Objective: To show Adam's spiritual and physical relation- ship to Ood and mankind.
Adam was a spirit son of God — a spirit brother of Christ and mankind — the physical father of mankind.
References : Genesis, Chapters 1-4; 1 Old Testament. Studies. Chapter 1.
1. The spiritual and physical relationship of Adam to
1. God the Father.
2. Jesus Christ, .'). Mankind.
11. The great plan of creation and Adam's earth birth. Questions for Teachers.
1. Give three sources of proof that Adam actually lived and functioned as a man.
2. Give three reasons why yon think it is necessary to understand the spirit life of Adam in order to appreciate his earth life to the fullest extent.
Third Sunday, February 2 1, 1926. Lesson 2. — Adam, the First Man.
Objective: To show thai Adam was the first man and thai there was greal purpose in his mission. I. Adam born to earth life.
1. formed physically by the Father.
2. Eve, a part of him given as ;; companion f:> work
mil 1 lie purposes of ( Jod.
•'!. liden, his lirst abode. 4. The stale of Adam and Eve in Eden. II. Th. fall.
1. How accomplished
10 I E K H.uii!
_. The purpose of i he fall. I Mven fi "in Kden.
Questions for Teachers. 1. Did Adam know and realize the effects of the fall when lie partook of i he fruil offered by E\ «• '
•J. What w iis the change, physically and spiritually, m roughl upon Adam i s e resull of the fall .'
Fourth Sunday, February 28, I02(i. Lesson 3. — Adam Begins Actual Earth Liu.
Objective: show thai through Adam God began making
kn )\\ n to man his ureal plan and purpose in tlm earth, I. The first iii-rat commandment.
1 . \n\. ti» be complied w it h.
2. Adam a father.
.'5. ( liven dominion over t he earth. 1 1. The < rospt 1 bestowed upon Adam. 1 . ( 'onii.iand to \\ orship Uod. 'J. To make offerings of firstlings of flock.
His absolute faith in the commandments, as evi- denced h.\ the compliance, without knowledge. ':. Instructed as to the mission of the Son of God.
4. Mis baptism.
5. The Holy Ohosl given him.
Questions fcr Teachers.
1. Nairn- three elements of greatness thai Adam exempli- fied.
2. Maine the four most important truths made known to Adam l>\ God after Adam began his actual earth life.
INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT IH1 BOOK OF MORMON"
First Sunday, February 7. 1926
Uniform last Day lesson
'I he Uniform Fast Day 1 this class will be the
same as those given tor the new I lav.. See page 7.
Hanuere 27, iy^6 TE KARERti
Introduction to the Year's Work
The Book of Mormon is to be the text-book in the Second Year, Second Intermediate Department for the coming year.
It is the aim of the year's work to stimulate a desire within every pupil in these classes throughout the Church to read the Rook itself, that in their youth they may feel its spirit, and that its teachings may bear fruit in their lives.
With this in mind, the lessons for the year begin at once from the text-book. If possible, a Book of Mormon should be in the possession of every pupil, in which he can mark striking- passages that are to be discussed in the class. This will no doubt add to interest in reading the book.
Ln order to teach the Book of Mormon with real results, the teacher must himself glow with interest in his subject. The characters who play their parts in the history should be in his mind as of those acting before him on that stage with its long- ago settings. If this be so, he can flash from his mental pictures striking headlines before his pupils in such a way that they will be anxious to read the book for themselves.
We can truly say there is no other book like it in all the world. Not only is it a wonderful history ; not only is it full of stories of thrilling interest; not only does it teach the Gospel of Jesus Christ in its fulness, but it holds forth within itself a promise that those who read it with prayerful hearts shall feci the spirit of it and know that the things written in it are true. (Read Moroni 10: 2-4.)
There is one thing of which we may be sure in awakening a love for the Book of Mormon, and thai is, Hint thai love shall grow and strengthen with years. The Book itself never fails to fascinate those who study it. President (irant read it in his youthful days and this is his testimony: "When 1 was a boy I read the Book of Mormon. 1 fell in love with Xephi, who. more than any man thai 1ms ever written i r preached whose wor Is and utterances I have read, bi iiirr < nly the Saviour— 1ms been the guiding star of i\ life. "
Parley P. Pratl early writer and missionary of the Church, writes as Poll >v s of his first reading of the Book of Mormon :
1 L K \ K •' • I i.4 u.
•• For the first time uiy < . Mormon
book of books thai record which reveals the antiquities of the *iit w world' back to th reiuoti and which
Ida the destinh i of its p ople and the world for all time to conic-, thai book which contains Lhe fulness of the
el of b crucified and risen Redeemer; thai book which Joseph, and was the means i:. tin 1 and ! he enl ire course of my future life.
"I opened it with eagerness, and read its title pag read the I several witnesses in relation to the
manner of its being found and translated. After this I com- menced its contents by course. I read all da} ; eating w burden, 1 \\,n\ no desire for food; sleep was a burden when nighl came, for I preferred reading to sleep.
"As I read, tin Spirit of the Lord was upon me, and I knew and comprehended thai the book was true, as plainly and manifestly as a man comprehends and knows thai he exists. .My .joy was now full, as it were, and I rejoiced sufficiently i >
e than pay nie for all the sorrows, sacrifices and toils of my
life."
There are many more such testimonies to be found and thai might be c ted to aw k n a de in within the boys and g rls of io-da\ to read and gel the sp:rh of this wonderful hook.
The struggles thai Joseph Smith and those who helped him went through in the work of publishing the Book of Mormon should be briefly reviewed now and .-main during the course, with the thoughl in mind thai oul of these struggles and hard- ships came a hour, thai Latter-day Saints, young and old, should taki greal pride iti reading, with the prayerful desire to gain the promised testimony of its divinity. I Read the foot- note commencing on page 75, History of the Church, Vol. I.)
Second Sunday, February I -l, 1926
Lesson 1. — Lehi and Kis Family Called to Leave Their Heme.
.• : I. Nephi, Chapters 1 and 2. Objective: To teach thai (Jod is near to those w ho call on llim.
Snpplenien arj Ri er iicch Books eontuinintr descriptions
Hanticre 27, 1^0 TE MAKERS 13
of Jerusalem and its people long- ago; Canon Farrar's Life of Christ; Ben Hur; Bible Dictionaries: II. Chronicles. 36: 17-20; Jeremiah 39: 1-9.
►Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
1. Make a general assignment for the class to read
the whole text.
2. Special assignment for one pupil to tell the story
of the lesson. '■). Striking passages should be memorized by the
class members, such as I. Nephi 1-20; 2: 9-10. 4. The teacher should prepare supplementary ma- terial — description of Jerusalem — family life among the Jews. etc. Note: These lessons in the beginning of the Book of Mor- mon are more or less familiar to the pupils. The assignment of the story to tin1 pupil should be in the understanding that it is to be told in the best possible manner, after real preparation by the pupil.
Questions for Teachers.
1. What strong points in Lchi's character are brought out in this lesson :;
2. How may a study of the experiences of Lehi be a means of strengthening our faith in C>>d.'
Third Sunday, February 21. 1926
Lesson 2. — Obtaining- the Brass Platos.
Text: I. Nophi, Chapters 3, 4. 5.
Objective: To Heel thai the Lord opens the way for His children to keen His commandments.
Suggi stions on Preparation and Presentation :
1. Ask all pupils to read the text.
2. Three special assignments might be made of the
text.
(a) The attempts to obtaiu the plates by their own efforts. I Chapter .'J. )
(b) Success through the guidance of the Lord. (Chapter 40
i <• i The worth of the plates to Lehi 's family .
1-4 1 1-- KAKfc ui. I lanucie .:,
I The teacher might supplement this lesson with ineid inu Mir importance of r<
keepi arl iele in Sec D
inent, this is* \. Have pupils mark and memorize I. \ephi 3: 7:
i: 13; 5: 19. irge upon the w >rds of NYphi 3: 7 by illustration, Questions for Teachers.
1. Name the important things gained by Lehi and his family in having the brass plat< s in their possession.
2. What importance lias been placed upon record-k< in our own day?
Fourth Sunday, February 28, 1926
Lesson 3. — l3hmael and His Family — Lehi's Dream.
Texl I Nephi, ( 'hapters 7 and s.
Objective: To know that Faith gives power, an<l thai i Lernal life can be gain* <l by overcoming temptation. ingestions on Preparation and Presentation; 1. Genera] assignments of both chapters to the pupils. 2. Special assignment of the story in each chapter
to r pupil. '■'>. Have tiie pupils mark in their books and memorize such passages as I. Nephi 7 : 12, 13. Mote: There may be pupils who could make a fair illustra tion of Lehi '-> dream <>n a charl .
Questions for Teachers.
1. Mention the qualities of character shown by Nephi on journey from Jerusalem with the family of Kin lael!
2. \Tame som< other importanl dreams given to servants of the Lord, as recorded in the scriptures.
PRIMAL DEPARTMENT
First Sunday. February 7, 1926.
I nilorin Fast Ua\ lesson.
Topic: Wlij do I believe that we hitisl aim al perfection
Hanuere 27, 1926 TL KARERE 15
if we are to become the kind of people the Lord has intended I
Objective : To teach that we should overcome our faults and failings and become masters over the physical if we want to follow in the footsteps of Jesus.
Rest Exercise: Lead children to suggest where the Christ- mas trees come from. In going after a tree, be careful not to take more than one, nor to destroy other trees. Suggestions to Teachers.
It will be necessary to lead the child from his knowledge to that which he does not know. Mere are a few suggestions as to how to handle the work, and a story may be told to Illustrate the thought.
One Christmas, a little girl received a beautiful doll from Santa Ciaus with a note inside of the box which read: "Please take care of this baby doll and don't let it get dirty, nor broken. You can play with it, but take good care and keep it clean for ten years, then I will send for the doll, and it it is just as good when 1 send for it ten years from now, you shall he considered the cleanest and nicest little girl in the whole country." Ten years later the doll was sent for, and this little girl had a dream. She dreamt that she went to Santa's home. She found her doll in a beautiful parlour where Mr. and Mrs. Santa were. She went up to Santa and asked why her doll was there. Why weren't other dolls there?" "Well," said Santa, "I'll show you." He took her into several other rooms, where there were stacks of dolls of all kinds; but they were dirty and broken. "When the dolls come back, it they are not just as clean as when I send them out, I don't want them to be in the same room with me. They have to slay there in these rooms until they have been cleaned and prepared."
Lead the children to sec thai Heavenly Father, when He sends the spirits down to this earth, wants them to return as perfect as lie sent them out, so they can live with Him in tils house. Lend the children to see what they can do to keep perfect. No1 to think nor sa^ naught words; to be kind happy; always have n s nil , and sing when things go wrouj not to gel angry. Lead them Lo see how we can keep our bodies clean, which h >lps to keep a clean mind ; that our bodies I he kepi ; I .l:i the inside u ii h proper Pood and tho
f> IL KARERH I lanm
uglj thoughts make ugly features; liappy, good, kind thoughts
make | > I « ; i s . il 1 1 r.
Second Sunday, lebruarj 14, I92(i
Luke 2: >unday Morning in the Kinder-
garten," I . - on 35
Topic : The stop} tit' t lie shepherds.
Objective: To teaeli thai l>\ giving gifts, we express our love for friends and family. Res1 Exercise :
I Hi. why do hells for ( 'h natulan ring, Wli\ do little children sing, i hi i liis brighl ( 'hristmas Day .' The b< lis do ring and children sing To say thai Chrial was born on Christmas Day. Have the children take presents to poor children and then ■< peal the above v< rsc and ring bells.
Suggestions to Teachers. The birth of the Saviour was made known to the lowly as well .-is the rich and educated, to show the Father's Love was for all. Thai He treated all alike is the big theme of thin In telling the lesson, when yon reach the part of the story where the shepherds heard voices, have someone Rin» softly, "Par, Far away on Judea's Plain." It makes the story very effeel \\ e.
Bring it down into the child's life, thai he may share whal lie has with someone who hasn't. As the shepherds took a laud) (a very simple gifl in comparison with the gifl of tin wise mi no matter how small.
The greatosl joy comes in giving. "It is better to give 1 1 an to receive.
Third Sunday, February 21, 1926
Tex1 : "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Lesson :!ii. Matt. •': 111.
Topic : Tin- Visil of the Wise Men.
etive: To teach thai wo arc made happier by giving to
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 17. Through a mistake on the part of the editor, this page was overlooked and had to be inserted after the rest of the Karere was made up.
They hated to let him go away, but they did want him to be happy and well. Ned's departure was a sad one.
He travelled a long way to a home in a forest. Arrived at new home. Xed still cried, "Everything is wrong." A beautiful little girl, with bright smiling eyes,
entered. She was beautiful and happy. Ned stopped crying and looked at her. (She was like a fairy. ) She came close to Xed and sang, ''Jesus Onee Was a
Little Child." (Teacher sings.) Xed asked her to sing it again. (Teacher and children
si tig. ) Ned asked her, Who is Jesus?
She tells of the Christ Child sent to earth to show us how7 to be happy, cheerful and helpful, not to be selfish, etc. i Tells how we can forget our ugly disposition by singing, etc., being happy, doing kind deeds, etc.; Xed wants to be like Jesus.
Spends a week in this happy home.
Seems to be happy, cheerful and helpful.
He smiles now instead of being cross when things do
not suit him. He feels better all over. He learns to speak kindly. Back at his own home.
lie look hack the most priceless gift in the whole
world, the Christ Spirit - Do and say what is
right.
Suggestions: Place strong emphasis on the song in the stor^
and the message thai the Christ Child brought to the earth, so
that the children can't help but apply it in their daily lives.
Peel it yourselves, teachers; don't merely tell facts, gel the
message and then give it. Yon ean'i deliver a message unless
\ on make it yours first.
Hanuere 2 7, iy^6 TK KAKERK 1 7
others.
Suggestions to Teachers.
The Wise Men's love for Jesus was shown by their taking the best presents they had to give to the Christ Child. They didn't care for the hardships they knew they would encounter on their journey. Their love was so great that they only thought of finding the Christ Child and presenting their gifts.
Bring it down into the child's life and help him to see that if we are doing a task that seems hard when it is for those we love, we should enjoy doing it. The harder the task. if done with a willing spirit, the greater it will prove our true love. Lead the children to see what they can do in the home to jwove their love for brother, sister and parents.
Present each child with a picture of the AVise .Men. [I these pictures cannot be obtained, then just use cut-outs from drawing paper, as the rest of your pictures have been. You can obtain patterns from any primary grade teacher.
Fourth Sunday, February 28, 1926
Subject: It's what we really do that counts. Objective: To teach that if we are to become the kind of children the Lord intended, we must do and say what is right. Story: The Little Hoy Who Learned to Smile. A Beautiful Home.
Parents and children
Were all happy except Xed.
They all tried to please him.
lie was ill ways cross and unhappy,
lie felt sick, his head ached, etc
His parents advertised for someone who could make him happy.
People came from far and near.
Broughl beautiful pictures, toys, music, money,
These failed t<> make Nied happy. A st ranger appeared I a Ladj
This Lady could help.
I te must <>n to her home
I lis parents lovo£ Idra very much.
1 8 L'K K.AKJ 14 .• m
He Morehu no te Whare o lharaira \\. K< ) \(;.\ ING< >.\ HIPERU
I roto i aku tuhituhinga ki a koutou kua whakamarama, kua whakaatu aliau ki a koutou i te ahuatanga o oga ingoa Maori, ara he mea whai tikanga, vvhai take nga ingoa Maori katoa; otira, tera pea, lie moumou tuhituhi kia whakaatu ahau ki a koutou i te ahuatanga o nga kupu Ifaori, no te mea U « - i te mohio tonu koutou ki to koutou ake rco me te ahuatanga o <» ■ i ingoa Maori. Ka1 i.
I i-oto i tenei tuhituhinga ko taku liialiia kia whakaatu ki a koutou i te ahuatanga o nga ingoa i to rco Hiperu. Ki taku mohio kahore koutou kia mat an ki te tikanga o nga kupu Hiperu no reira, e kore e taea te kii he moumou tenei tuhi- tuhinga.
Kua korero koutou i te Paipcra, kua korero koutou i te ]» ikapuka a Kenehi mo te hanganga o te ao, a kua kite koutou k > te ingoa o te tangata tuatahi ko Arama. \a. tera pea, kua patai ranei koutou ki a koutou ano he aha te take i whakai- ngoatia te tangata tuatahi ko Arama te ingoa. .M<- patai au, I e alia te tikanga o taua ingoa .' He aha kihai i whakahuatia tona ingoa ko Hohepa, ko Hoani, ko Wiremu ranei'? He aha kia wliakahuatia tona ingoa ko Arama .' \'a me rapu e tatou to whakahokinga ki enei patai \
\] ki ana te karaipiture, "A ka mea a Arama, katahi ano ki tenei te wheua o roto o oku wheua, me te kikokiko o roto n oku kikokiko: me kua ia he Wahine, nona hoki i tangohia i roto i te Tangata." Kenehi 2: 2.3. Xa ka kite tatou i ingoa Mao ita tuatahi me te wahine tuatahi.
u i kahore kia whakamaoritia ana kupu Hiperu ki le reo Maori, kua penei te rarangi nei." — : me hua ia he fsha, nona hoki i tangohia i roto i te Uh."
\a. Hie timata te korero i te Paipcra no te rarangi tuatj ' i o Kenehi tae atu ki te rarangi Is o te upoko tuarua <> Ke kahore v kite ai te kupu Arama, olira i v*>u> i te rarangi 19 ka kitea tuatahitia te ingoa Arama. Mi whakahua • • au ngj rarangi 18 me 10. "Xa ka mea a Ihowa. te Atua, K kore c pai kia n >ho U ; me hanga <• ahau tctahi hoa
Hanuere 27, 1926 te kakere 19
pai mona. Xa he mea whakaahu mai na Ihowa, na te Atua, i roto i to oneone nga kirelr katoa 0 te parae, me nga manu katoa o te rangi; a kawea mai ana e ia ki a Arama, kia kitea ai te ingoa e huaina e ia kia ratou : ko a Arama i hua ai ki nga mea ora katoa, hei ingoa era mo ratou."
Na ko Arama (Adam) he ingoa Hiperu. Te wliakamaori- tanga 0 tana kupu ko Te Tangata. No reira te rarangi ki
runga ake ka whakamaoritia penei," ; a kawea mai ana
e ia ki Te Tangata, kia kitea ai te ingoa e huaina e ia ki a
ratou: a ko Te Tangata i hua ai . " No reira, ka kite
tatou ko te tikanga o te ingoa 0 te tangata tuatahi ko Tangata, ara ki te reo Hiperu ko Adam (Arama).
Tera hold, ko tetahi atu wliakamaoritanga 1110 te kupu Adam (Arama) ko Kura (Whero), no te mea i whakaaro nga Hiperu i harigaa te tangata tuatahi i te oneone whero. (See Works of Josephus.)
Xa, ka whakaaro tatou lie aha i whakahuaina te ingoa o te Kai-Whakaora ko Ihu (Jesus). Te whakahoki tenei, ko te kupu Jesus he kupu Kariki, tona wliakamaoritanga ko Kai- Whakaora. Ki te reo Hiperu ko taua ingoa ko Joshua (Hohua) ara k:> Jeshua (Plehua). (Xehemia 3: 13.) Na ko enei kupu katoa c taea te wliakamaoritanga ki te reo Pakeha ko Saviour; ara ki te reo Maori ko Kai-Whakaora.
Ko te riuinga o nga ingoa i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito i roto i te Paipera Pakeha, he Hiperu aua ingoa. I roto i te Kawenata Hon he Kariki te nuinga o nga ingoa. Xa ki te Paipera Maori, ko te nuinga o nga ingoa i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito he hawhe kaihe Hiperu .Maori; i roto i te Kawenata Hon he hawhe kaihe Kariki Maori.
Ko tenei te ingoa Kai-Whakaora ki nga reo katoa e mohio- tia ana a ahail,
Elipcru— Joshua. Jeshua Samoa — Faaola
Kariki .Jesus Tahiti Faaora
Pakeha Saviour Hawaii Mea e Ola 'i
.Maori Kai-W liakaora Toga Fakamoui
\'a. e hoa ma. kahoiv ahau e ki ana ko taua tangata a Hohua i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito me le Karaiti a Ihu i te Kawenata Hon i to tangata kotahi, engari ka rua aua tangata.
ARERii
L<> t< ingoa rit t* tonu.
E ho a ma, kei te mohio ranci koutou ki te tikanga o t«- kupu " Aniciic. " lie kupu Uiperu tikanga ara le
whakamaoritanga o taua kupu. n Amen, ko Pumau, ara ko Pono.
li atu ingoa Hiperu 1 roto i te Kawenata Tawhil Deuteronomy Tiut< ko tuna whakamaoritanga ko
' Te w hakahuatanga ano o te t ure
Tetahi atu ingoa Hiperu ko Dragon (Tarakona) : ko le whakamaoritanga ko ,lTol]ora,M "Ngarara," "Taniwha."
lie kupu Hiperu hoki tcnei, r Hallelujah [Iarimii whakamaoritanga, "Whakamoemititia koutou i te Ariki."
Tetahi atu kupu Hiperu, Hosanna (Hohana) ; te whaka- maoritanga* "Whakaora Lnaianei."
I a koutou ,■ korero ana i una karaipiture ka kite koutou i
korero mo nga kohatu e rim te I rimi me te Tumirae. N'a he ingoa Hiperu ano enei, ara 1'iiin and Thummin; k< whakamaoritanga ko "Te maramatanga me te tino whakari-
B karangatia ana te Ariki ko to Arepa, te Omeka i t*oto i r.ga karaipiture. He kupu Kariki enei, Alpha and Omega. Ko te tikanga o enei kupu e penei ana. K<> te Alpha (Ajvpa reta tuatalii o te reo Kariki ; ara penei me te A te ret a tuatahi ki te reo Pakeha. Ko te Omega te rota whakamutunga ki te reo Kariki; ara rite ana ki te Z ki te reo Pakeha. Ara ko I
whakamaoritanga o enei kupu Alpha and ft m (Arepa,
( urn ka ko te A me h Z. Ara te tuatahi me te \\ hakamutunga Ko te Ariki ko te tuatahi m< te whakamutuuga, no r< ira la Is i 1 h tkahual ia te i i < pa, te < mieka.
Kati. He nni nga kupu mo tenei wa. A taihoa ka tuhituhi hakahua i etahi atu ingoa I Mpei te w hakamaoritanga <> ana kupu.
\'a, kia mohio koutou, kahore ahau i tito noa i r.ei kupu. ongari kua whiwhi ahau i toku mohiotanga ki ioi I liperu no roto i te " Bible Dictiona
E ki ana te Hunga Tapu ko I iwj Maori he morelm whare o Eharaira. Na, ka kite taton ko nga ingoa Maori It- men what tikanga whai take; a rite tonu hoki ko nga ara ingoa Hiperu he mea whai tikanga, whai tak • hoki. K<>
Ilamiere 27, 1^6 TE KARLRE 21
tenei tetahi atu whakaaturanga ko te iwi Maori he Morehu no te Whare o Iharaira.
NA WIREMU A. KOURA.
Rupert, Idaho.
Ko te Maaka Tuarua
E torn nga maaka i roto i te Rongo-pai e kore nei e hapa, Ira —
Tuatahi — I hanga i runga i te Toka o te Whakakitenga.
Tuarua — I whakararotia ki te mana o te Tohungatanga.
Tuatoru — I whakakakahatia ki nga Akoranga a te Karaiti. Hei te Tohungatanga e whakamarama. He aha te Tohungatanga? Ko te mana me te kaha o te Atua kua homai ki te tangata kia tnahia nga tikanga 0 te Rongo-pai. Ki te kahore taua Tohungatanga ka pehea? E kore nga mahi 0 te Rongo-pai e tirohia mai e te Atua, e kore hoki e mana. E rua nga patai nei me nga whakautu nei. Ko nga Karaipiture e tautoko ana i enei whakautu. Hei u patai tuarua e whaka- marama i te tuatahi.
I te wa c kauwhau ana te Karaiti ka whakamarama la ki nga Akonga, i te mea kua kite ke la tera i muri mai i a la he maha nga tangata e mahi i nga tikanga 0 te Rongo-pai mana- kore — "He tokomaha e mea mai ki a an a taua ra, E te Ariki, e te Ariki; kihai koia maton i poropiti i ton ingoa, i pei rewcra hoki i runga i ton ingoa? He tini hoki nga mahi uui i meatia e matou i runga i ton ingoa?" I pchea te whakautu a te Karaiti? I penei, "Ko reira ano ahau mea ai ki a ratou, Kahore rawa ahau i mohio ki a koutou; mawehe atu i a an, e nga kai-mah] 0 te tutu." Matin 7: 22-23.
Titiro ki te wa i a Molii te mana 0 te Tohungatanga, tera tetahi ropu ko Koraha, ko Ratana, me Apirama tne 1a ratou whakaminenga i whakahihi i tr mana i a Mohi, puia mai ana te ?'iri a Ihowa ki a ratou mahi hara, whakangaromia ana ratou katoa ki rare 0 te whenua nie a ratou taonga katoa. Tauan;ta 16.
Tera tetahi mahi rucrekara i>«i rewera i mahia e Paora : i te kitenga 0 nga tama tokowhitu me tetahi Hurai, ka hiahin hoki ratou Id te pei rewera i runga i te ingoa 0 Ihu Karaiti i
' kino
i ; ■ • A pa.
. tapu i to A.tua, kin , n i en si
u'etia, kia
•
i! v\ hakaiM
. •-■ Mill)
i .Kiiiiiu' ki a
" lliperu
! '. la niana i inaroto mai i te Hohi,
►to mai i tana poropiti ki ;i A K 14; 16 27.
piH'i ra ii | , i ti-
urai i i ki a tatou ki tc llui
ienga 1
'• tenei rapu nana.
;' . :- ! i take ! io 1( : i a ; 1 1
■
Ilanuere 27, i926 TK KAKERE 23
I tae mai hoki a Molii raua ko Iraria ki runga i te maunga ki te whakamana i a te Karaiti ki tc Tohungatanga. Maka 9: 2-1. Na te Karaiti Ana Aputjro i whakamana. "Kaliore kyutou i whiriwhiri i a au, engari naku k out 011 i whiriwliiri, a naku ano koutou i mea kia haere, kia whai hua." Hoani 15: 16. Na nga apotoro etahi atu i whiriwliiri. Nga Mahi ] : 23- 26; 6: 5-6; 8: 1-3 me etahi atu. Xo te \va i patupatua ai nga apotoro i tangohia atu tana Tohungatanga, no te tau 1829 i whakahokia mai taua Tohungatanga ki a Hohepa Mete. Xo reira enei rarangi karaipiture e- kitea ana ki te kaliore te ToJiungatanga e kore nga mahi tapu a te Atua e niana, a ma te Tohungatanga ka mana nga mahi o te Rongo-pai. Kua kitea lie pono nga vvhakautu ki nga patai e rna raka.
E te Hunga Tapu, whakahonoretia te mana tapu kei wae- nganui i a tat on, kia kaha ki te rapu i 011a tikanga ; he taonga hohonu rawa tenei, kaliore oiia timatanga, kaliore ona mutunga. lleoi ano, na to koutou teina.
MAEAEROA. IIORI MAPI.
i Ko nga Tuhituhinga Cnamata
IK PUKAPUKA A APP:RAHAMA
, 1 He mea i t.ingohiirniaj i te "R'estoratyan of the Gospel," i tuhia e ( ). J. P. Widtsqe. Na Erii T. Cooper i whakamaori.
I a Hurae, 1835, ka riro mai ki roto ki nga ringa 0 1c l>oroj)iti o Hohepa Mete etahi -tuhituhinga tino nui, 1 tuku iho no 1c \va ra 0 nga tipuna. Tera i tc Ian PS2S, tctalii Wiwi, ko Anatonio Heporo tonp ingoa i whakaetia e Mehemeti Arai (Mehemet Ali) te kawana 0 Ihipa, kia rapua e Icuci tangata nga tukunga ill > onamata i tc whenua 0 Ihipa. K3 lorn nga Ian i niuri mai, ana i l<i Ian L831, ka kitea c tenei Heporo nga tonio i 1c wahi i In ai telahi laoiic no mua, ko Tepe 1c ingoa (Thebes). Tekau ma lain nga tinana tupapaku (mummies), a e man lonn ••ma 1c pai, i mcalia lici man maana ki Parihi (Paris). I a ia 0 hoki aln ana ki Parihi ka peta ia ki Tiriehe (Triest) panghi ana c te male, a hei'no ilm ki reira. Ilcoi ka tukua atu nga tupapaku n i ki tona vvhanaunga tata ki tona iramutu nei ki n llanara (01 amllcr). Ko lona kainga i tenei wn ki Amerikfl am Piraterepia (Philadelphia), otira i pohehetia kei Airana ke in,
24 i i KAKi.i:!. I lunueri ; . 1926
1 ira i ! uri haere enei tupapaku ki Airana, mai 1 reira ki Amerika ki Xiu [aakaara ki a Mikacra Hanara. I t Irohanga i ciu'i tupapaku ka kitea i te taha 0 etahi 0 nga tupapaku tokorua ho takai pukapuka. I wherahia li<>ki aua pukapuka, ano te pai <» nga tuhi, lie vvhoro, he ruangu, ka< •<• ano hoki t etahi wahi <> « nei pukapuka kia kino noa.
I a Hanara e mntekitaki ana i aua tupap. ;u ka ki ake tetahi tangata ki a ia kia kimihia e ia te poropiti 0 nga aloro- Liona a Hohepa Mete. Il«' marama hoki taua poropiti ki te whakamaori i nga tuhi tuhi nga 0 onamata. He tauhou rawa hoki a Hanara ki tenei tangata i korero atu nei ki a ia uio te poropiti. Otira i uhakakitckite haere a Hanr.ra i nga tupa- paku nei i nga taonc nui <> Amerika. me te malia hoki <> nga tangata i haere kia kite. 1 ki hoki una tangata matauranga he tino tuturu aua tupapaku, he tika hoki nga tokai pukapuka. I tuhia lioki etahi 0 ratou he tiwhikete whakapumau i a ratou korero he tika aua tupapaku me n.^a tuhituhinga.
No te toru n tiurae 1835 katalii ano ka tae .1 Hanaro ki Katarana me ona tupapaku, i rapua hoki c ia te Poropiti a Hohepa Mete. E wl.a nga tinana e ai la te Poropiti, me nga \liil.a vvhakairoiro, ara nga tuhituhinga tahito. "I te mea ok] a Hanara ka taea e au te whakamaori, lea
lauria mai e ia kia kite au, kia whakamaori hoki i etahi 0 aua tuhituhianga. Xaku hoki i hoatu 1>- whakamaoritanga, te tu i 10 '> te tangata whakaaro rangatira homai ana <■ ia te tiwhi- k ic c w hai ake nei nga korero : :
11 ' Katai ana, 6 rlurae. I8JM.
" *ll i v hakaatu tenei ki te lnuna katoa e hiahia ana kia 1 lohio, mo te alma 0 te mohiotanga 0 Elohepa Mete, tamaiti, ki te whakamaori i nga tuhituhinga hipiana onamata kei rote
oku ringa, kua whakakitekitea ioki <■ au ki nga tangafei 1 ■•■ tan (• nga taonc nunui; »> nga m< I iotangs i kohikohia e au, ;i : iatau ranei au. kua kitea iho hoi i e au e rite tonu ana te matauranga 0 Hohepa Mete, tamaiti, ki to ratou i nga ahua
• 'M1KAERA II. I1ARANA, " cKo ia te rangatira < ngi Tupapaku [hipiana, te U '• kite hoki.' "
I muri mai i te homaitanga a Hanara i te tiwhikete nei ki
Hanuere 27, 1926 TE KARERE 25
a ia ka hokona mai e etahi o nga Hunga Tapu o Katarana nga tupapaku nei me nga takai tuhituhinga. I taua ay a ano ka timata te whakamaori a te Foropiti i aua tuhituhinga rereke, ko Wiremu W. Perepe me Oriwa Kautere ona kai-tuhituhi. Tino pupu ake te koa i roto i ratou ngakau i a ratou e whakamoari ana ka kitea e ratou ko etahi o enei pukapuka lie tuhituhinga na Aperahama. Ko tetahi wahi anake, ara ko te tiniatanga, i oti te whakamaori. Ko etahi he tuhituhinga na Hohepa, tera i hokona nei e ona tuakana ki nga Ihipa. Ko te wahi i whaka- maoritia e whakaatu ana mo nga ahuatanga i pa ki a Apera- hama i a ia i te kainga o ona matua koropiko whakapakoko, me te ahua hoki o tona putanga mai i reira ano he merekara. E whakaatu ana ano hoki i te hanganga 0 te ao me te ahuatanga o nga Avairua i mua atu 0 taua hanganga 0 te ao. I whakakitea mai ano hoki te ahuatanga o tona matauranga ki te titiro whetu. Ko te Pukapuka a Aperahama he mea whakamaori i runga i te whakaaturanga 0 te wairua pono.
Koia tena te nuinga 0 nga tuhituhinga e man na i roto i te pukapuka e kiia nei "Ko te Peara Utu Nui." Ko nga puka- puka kei reira nei nga tuhituhinga a TTohepa. te ahua, kaore i oti te whakamaori.
I nga hunga tapu tonu hoki nga tupapaku nei, ahakoa haere ki hea, man liaere tonu, a tae noa ki te wahi i whaka- noho kainga ai ratou, ara i Nawu e kiia nei ko te Ataahua. \ Avhakakitekitea hoki i roto i te whare nui na te Poropiti nei i hanga. I muri mai i te matenga 0 te Poropiti ka taka enei tupapaku me nga takai pukapuka ki roto i nga ringa 0 ona whanaunga, a hokona ake. [ riro hoki i tetahi ropu, a i whaka- kitea mo tetalii wa ki liana Eui (St. Louis). T hokona hoki e taua ropu ki te whare whakakitekite i Tikako (Chicago). 1 te Ava i wera katoa ai a Tikako i te tan 1870 ka kainga taua whare AYhakakitekite e te alii, ko te whakaaro hoki i wera ana puka- puka me nga tupapaku, enei whakaaturanga 0 nga main 0 mua. Heoi ano e hoa ma, ko te wahi 0 enei korero tawhito i toe mai ki a tatou ko nga tuhituhinga e man na i roto i te Peara Utu Nui. Kna whanui ra te mohio-tanga o te Hunga Tapu mo nga main a to Atua ki Ona iwi onamata. Ka tapiria atu enei ki era atu 0 nga tuhituhinga karaipiture kei roto nei i nga ringa o te llalii <> pupuri ana.
Ko nga kai wh tkattko o te Kareti niton ko ti Tumuaki
o te Kareti me tona hoa wahine mc ta raua pepi me
Mi re. Ko te Tumuo i Mihmui ano hoki me tona kai-
awhina me Harehana\
Hanuere 27, IQ26 TE KARERE 2%
ilvi te i£tita
Ko te Hui 0 Puketapu
I te Paraire ka lac mai te Tumuaki 0 te Miliaria, me tona hda wahine, me la raua tamaiti, me nga kaumatua 0 Akarana, me nga kaumatua 0 Hauraki, me Hemi Whautere, me te Tumuaki 0 te Peka 0 Moawhango takiwa 0 Taihape, he tino nui nga Hunga Tapu me nga hoa arolia, me te Kuini Maori ara te. wahine a te Kingi Maori. I tae mai nga Hunga Tapu pakelia 0 Hamutana me nga pakeha 0 Hanatere, me nga rangatira 0 To Kuiti, he hunga waho katoa ratou.
Ao ake i te ata 0 te Rahoroi ka timata to matou Hui Pariha, 10 a.m. Xa te Tumuaki Takiwa i whakahaere to matou karakia kauwhau. Xa Erata Elarehana i whakahaere nga himene, te 7 me te 11. Na Erata Skinner te inci whakapuare. 1 muri 0 tena ko nga kai-kauwhau. Tuatahi ko Karena Takoro, he mihi ki te Tumuaki Mihana hou me tona hoa wahine me ta raua tamaiti me nga kaumatua, tae atu ki nga Hunga Tapu i tae mai ki tenei Hui Pariha, I muri 0 tena ko Poutu P. Kupa, he mihi ki nga pononga a te Atu a, mo be mihi ano ki nga hoa aroha, me te whakamarama i nga tikanga 0 te Rongo-p.ai 0 iliu Karaiti. I. muri 0 tmia ko Tukino Hakopa, he Tumuaki in no te Peka 0 Moawhango. E tino whakapono ana in koia tenei ko te hahi 0 Iliu Karaiti. E whakapono ana in ki a Hohepa Mete ko te poropiti pono a 1" Al na.
Kaati, i muri ko Hemi Whautere, "E te Hunga Tapu me nga hoa aroiia, kaore ah an e mohio ana me pewhea he korero mnku. Kaati, ka inoi ake ahau ki te Atua kin awhinatia mai ahau he men e whai kaha ai ahau ki te kauwhan i ota1 i atu take. Kaati, me korero e ahau i toku taenga atu ki te Tense- para 0 Hawaiki. Kaati, i rongo korero ahau i enei mea katoa. Kaati, no taku taenga atu ki Hawaiki ka kite kanohi ahau." Kaati, pau katoa i a in nga malii 0 tc Temepara. K ki ana i tino tapu nga mahi 0 te Temepara 0 Hawaiki. Pau katoa i .- '••1 te whakamarama \\>j:;\ turc katoa 0 tenei hahi. Kaati, he tino "iii nga take i whakamaramatia e in. Kore i mutu te hiahia 0 nun tangata ki nun kauwhau a Hemi Whautere. I muri 0 1r|in ko Ki«) Tarawhiti, he tautoko i nun kupn katon l;nn
ik K VR£R£ Hanuere 27, 1^26
ill, 1 1, oi ;iii<>,
■ lia 0 Wuikatn. mi tirata Paapiti, \. i- Awe Ponga, Hekeretari n te llui.
lie Kauwhau Haere
Ki T i. 1 koe i roto i te .Merc Kirihii
I iapi \ul 1 kiu • i. Ma te Al ua koe e t iaki
i roto i tan malii uui. Kaati tena.
\To i ka haere maua ki Poke - takiv n
hi Pukekohe. Ka uui nga Maori 0 u nei whenua. I
0 nga mea e wliakarongo mai ana ki nun kauwha whanau tino pai. Kaliore e kai \vai])iro, tupeka f'ol.i. alma 0 te kauwliau ki a raton penei.
I haere mai a te Karaiti ki te ao nei ki tc vvli ! huarahi 0 te Atua. Ka oti i a !;i te tinana maoi
katia, kua tae la ki te hunga wairua, kua oti ki te
wairua, kua ara mai fa, kua kake ki te Rangi. Ka to u enei mea tino nunui kua oti i a la. fleoi ano la 1 ari i
Tana hokinga tuarua mai ki te ao 1110 ake ak Kn
1 ga liahi katoa nei kotahi ano te Atua. Ko ta a Atua nei ano,
0 T'ona rereketanga tirohia nga hua 0 te [fahi 0 llui Ra 0 M ui-i \Yi rieoi ano ka mutu riga kauw hau i run tono mai ratou kia lioki atu ki te tirotiro i a
I I 'i ano ka mutu, ua ta koulou mok ii tiu! ine t( • to i t< R raiti.
Tii
Ii c I' a 11 u i t n n g a M at 1 : 1 ii ) \\i Til) R \ 1 1\; \
Ka "6 ona tau. !;. te Hunga Tapu, e nga hoa aroha >puna
t rnariki a tenei tangata, tenei a H. I . K tirm kua in x» i te m >enga roa.
He tangita mhiotia nuitia am i 1 •• rtira Maori
inga ne>, tae atu ki ng 1 P.ikehn mnhi pan mil
1 1 ; t in ; ita n >hio k te win i n% \ nv»hi ihu-
i 1 i, mi'ii hipi, mahi kiu. I! 1 1 n-rati whanui ona
laro i ng 1 tunga mil 1 nui e
Hanuere 27. 19-6 IE KAKEKK 31
pa ana ki ona iwi me ana tamariki, me nga tikanga whaka- ono hoki. Ko ona whakaaro whdnui e kore mwa e taea te miu. Mate atu ia me ona whakaaro rangatira katoa. Ka iui te taugi te arona ki a ia.
Te ahua o tona matt nga. I te ata o te 24 o Tinema i ahua rereke tona ahua, haere ia ki te takuia, tirohia ana e te takuia, kei tona ateate tona mate, vm hok ki te kainga takoto ai, whakangaa ai. 1 tae mai ia ki te taone i Hastings haereere ai a ahiahi noa. Ka eke ,i ^anga ka, ka hoki ki Koparakore, tae atu ki te Paki- paki kua ah a taumaha tona tinana. Ka mea ia kia tu te k .. 1 ona hekenga atu ki r«ro o te kaa — hemo noa atu. . e w.iak 1 ponotanga o tenei tangata ki te Hani o L iu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. i lino rapu . e tenei tanga te pono o tenei hahi. Mo te. t, .1 va roa, n iku atu i te tekau tau ia e whinwhiri ana. Ka in.i k roio i te Hahi o Ihu Karaiti, e rima tonu nga wiki o to ia ir iritanga ka mate nei ia. Ko nga whakaaro o tenei tangata ki ana tamariki mokopuna kia urn ki roto i te Hahi o ihu K >rait .
Ona whakaaro. Kua mohio noa atu ia ka mate ia. Tona whakaaro kia lut;'uii o^ia tamariki mokopuna i le ra o te Kirihimete. He >u.a*e kortro ana i mua o tona matenga. Tona whakaaro . a hangiia toratau whare-kai kia nui ai to ratau marae mo ga karangaranga Hui Par. ha, Hui Tau ranei, me etahi atu hui.
Rokohangi ka mate, otira kua mohio ke ona tamariki mokopuna ki ona wh.ikaaro. Ki.a tautokona hoki e ratou kia hang ina taua whare.
Te tapuketanjja ki Te Haukc, Koparakore. Ko nga whakahaere katoa o te whiunara o tenei tangata 1 1 Timuaki o te Peka o Korongata, Rawiri Kamau me te Hunga Tapu kato,) i whakahaere. No te 27 o Tinema i ta- pu»etia. Ntra kai-kauwhau o tenei karakia nui ko Wiremu Takana, ko Eld r Sells, Timuaki o te K;mti, ko Paraire Tomo na. Na Reupena Parahi i whakahaere nga hm.ene me te ko^ea. Na Wiremu fak ma i whak tapu te rua. Nuku atu i te lorn ttrkau ng 1 motokaa, motorc i\ i hacie ki te la_ puketanga o tenei langa.
Tino nui te aroha me te tangi o te Hunga Tapu mo te matenga o trnei tangata, otira ko te Atua kei te mohio ki taua t ng.ia e man ai Ia. Heoi ano, kia ora ona whamiu- nga. Na Rawiri Kamau
Kote MAUI KAMURA o te KARETI M.A.C. Kote kai-whak lako ko Erata R.L. Paraone.
K»» nga Powliiri Hui Pat ilia
NO WAIKATO Ki Te Karere: Mau e panui atu tenei powhiri ki nga Hunga Tapu o te motu nei ki rma iwi ki nga reo ki nua hui- huinga tangata e noho mai na ki nga pito e wha o te motu nei. He powhiri atu tenei ki a kontou ka lu to ma ton Hui Pari ha ki te Peka <> Hoeotainui a te 20 me te 21 o nga r.i o Pepuere. No reira, haere mai ki te whakarongo, ki te whi- rl whin hoki 1 nga tikanga pai me n^ra tikanga tika me nga tikanga pono hoki ki te aroaru o to t a toil Mama nni i te Ra- ngi. Kia whangai hoki 0 tatou tinana ki n^a mea whaka- te-wairua. Katahi ano hoki ka tu tetahi Hui Pariha ki taua takiwa 0 Waikato, no reira haere mai.
kei te tino moliio matou tera ka tae mai to tatou Tu- muaki Mihana ki te whenua e karangatia ana ko "Waikato Taniwharau, hei Piko hei Taniwfia hei Piko hei Taniwha."
E hoa ma kia matara to ngakau kia hohoro kia rite ai ki tenei kupu, "Kai maata whiwhia maua riro ke." No reira, e te marama, Haere mai, Haere mai, ki to tatou huinga.
Na Reberi D. Paapiti, Tumuaki Takiwa
Hanuere 2j, 1920 n: KARERE $$
NO TE TAl RAWHITI
He powhiri atu tcnei na matou ki nga Hunga Tapu me nga hoa c.roha o te motu nei kia haere mai ki to maiou Hui Pariha e tu nei ki Tamata-o-Tapuhi, Waiapu, a te 6 me te 7 o nga ra o Pepuere, 1926. Haere mai e nga kai-kauwhau katoa o te Mihana nei. Haria mai to koutou matauianga nui. (Ma ia tangata, ma ia tangata, ano hoki e man mai i tona ake kakahu moe.)
E penei ana te whakaaro a te iwi nei o te Tai Rawhiti, "Kua kore te Hahi Momona te kake haere i runga i te motu nei." No reira, haere mai, e hoa ma, ki te awhina i a matou ki te whakaatu atu ki a ratou e kaha tonu ana tatou. Ki ta matou whakaaro ka tae mai te Tumuaki Mihana me tona hoa wahine ki to matou Hui Panha. No reira haere mai, haere mai.
Na L. S. Tamihana, Tumuaki Takiwa
NO NGAPUHI
Ki Te Karere: Man tenei e panui atu ki nga m;rae katoa e tae ai koe.
Tena ra koutou e nga iwi katoa e noho ana i te Waipou- namu me te Ao-tea-roa nei. Tenei maiou te powhiri atu nti ki a koutou me haere mai koutou ki ta matou Hui Pari ha o te takiwa o Whangarei me te takiwa o Pei Whairangi ka tu nei ki Kaikohe, Pei Whairangi, a te 2r, 27, me te 28 p nga ra o Pepuere nei.
Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai. H; tie mai e tt upc ko o te ika a Maui Tikitiki o Taranga. Haere mai e te kopu o te ika. Haere mai koutou katoa e nga kai-wrakaako 0 era atu o o tatou akoranga maha e tau nei i n.nga i cnei motu e rua. Ki konei tatou korerorero ai mo nga taha e rua, ara mo te taha whaka-te-tinana, me te taha whaka-te-wairua, "E kore te rakau pai e ahei te hua i te hua kino, e kore ano te rakau kino e hua i te hua ataahua."
Haere mai ki te hiku o te ika. "E kore te pi ku e ahei le man i te tinana, engari ma te hiku e man te linana." Ua< re mai kia whivvhi koutou i nga taonga nunui.
Na reira hat-re mai, haere mai, haen mai.
Haere mai koutou i runga i nga whakaaro pai, koa; i runga lioki i te rangimarie. Kia tae a tinana mai koutou ki ta matou Hui \T li ka tu nei ki N'^.ipui.i.
i E KAKERE I lanuere 27, [926
Na reira haere mai, ha< re mai, haere mai. \.i o koutou teina,
na Rinehi K. Tamati,
Tumuaki Takiwa 0 Whangarei na R. K. riwinihana,
Tumuaki Takiwa 0 Pei Whalrangi
flDabi ibm Htawbaf,
AKORANGA MO PEPUERE
TE WA O MOH1 ( IV roanga atu)
Wahi Tuarua. Nga wahine 0 te wa.
I. Ko Miriama.
(.1). Nga koreroQ tona ahuatanga oranga hoki (Bio- graphy). Ona matua no te iwi o Riwai 1 whiriwhiria ki te whakarite i rolo 1 nga tikanga whaka-te wairua i whaka- ingoatia ai taua Tohungatanga Iti i mini iho. Tona whanau- tanga e torn ran e wha tekaq (340) [>^'» tail i muri 1 te puta- n^a mai 0 lharaira e whitu tekau nei n^a wairua i Ihipa. I a ia e kotiro ana e waru nga tau, 1 in ia nei heteri tiaki i a Mohi i nga pareng 1 6 te awa 0 te Naera (Nile). 1 marena ia ki letahi toa o lharaira, o te hapu o Hura ko Hum tona ingoa, na ra'ua n'ei koAronaj pupuri ake nga ringaringa o
Mohi, a toa noa a Inaraira (Ekoruhe I / : I I - 1 ^ ). A he wh.it a hoki ia i roto 1 a Inaraira 1 te whakaatu i a Ekoruhe 31 : 2. Na ana 1 arahi nga wahine o lharaira i te nn a v waru tekau ma whitu ona tau, i roto i te waiata i te kanikani, mo te toa- nga he whakautu mo te waiata, na nga tane nei te tuatahi o te whakaaturanga. (Tirohia Ekoruhe 15:21). Kotahi ia te mea i he ai ia 1 te koratia. ! rirohia Tauanga 121. I mate ia i te wa whakamutunga <> ta ratou haeienga i te koraha, ko- tahi ran e nn tekau ma rua nga tau.
(1)). Ona ahuatanga. I roto i te ahua 0 nga mahi me tona oranga ka kitea ko Miriama he wahine tino ren ke tona ahua. i whanau hoki ia i roto 1 te mataiifa>nga nei ka-i-arahi. Tirohia te mohio 0 tana patai ki If wahine rangatira lhipia- na i te wahi kaukauranga. Te putake hoki 0 tona kaha ki te tu atu ki a Mohi 1 rolo 1 tona (to Miriama) pohehetanga, 'he tohu ki te marama. 0 te kaha 0 tona hinengaro, koia nei tona ngoittoretanga. He tikanga kua takoto whakakapo i njja kanohi ki n^a whakawakanga whaka-te-wairua. I turi hoki
Hanucre 27, 1926 TE KARERE 35
ia ki nga komuhumuhutanga a te wairua i ki ai, ata noho marie i te wa i kape ai te arero ki ta te Atua i whakawahi ai, tatari atu ki te matauranga o te Atua, koia nei kei te kite me te marama hoki o tana vvhakarite whakawa, i a era atu ta- ngata, a mana nui atu hoki i ta Iharaira katoa ki te whaka- haere mo ana i whiriwhiri ai. I roto i enei ahuatanga ko ta te tangata whakatikatika he whakahawea ki te Atua. I te taha whaka-te-wairua i riro i tenei wahine whakamiharo te karangatanga he wahine poropiti. (Tirohia Ekoruhe 15: 20.) Te mahi i whiwhi ai ia, i whakaaetia ai hoki e te Atua, i runga i tenei whakarite i a ia a tetahi o nga poropiti o Iha- raira ko Miriama tetahi o nga kai-whakaputa i a Iharaira. (Tirohia Mika b: 3, 4).
2. Ko Tepora.
E rua tekau nga tau i hapai ai a Iharaira i te tukino- tanga a Iapini kingi o Kanana, he whakawhiu mo to ratou tahuritanga atu i te Atua. I karanga ake hoki ki te Atua i runga i te wairua maru kia whakaputaina ratou, otira kua taka ratou i nga ahuatanga i tu ai hei kai-arahi. Ko te aro- ha ki te whenua me te whakapono ki te Atua kua oti te rahui ki roto i te ahua me te oranga o Tepora. I whakawhirinaki te iwi ki a ia, i whakahaere hoki te Atua i a ia. He wahine poropiti ia, a na ana i whakahnere nga mahi i riro ai hei take whakaputanga mo Iharaira. (Tirohia Whakariterite 4). He whakamarama tenei i te pono o te take ki te mea ka turi, a ka kore ranei nga tane e pai ki te arahi, i te mea e hiahia- tia ana etahi kai-arahi, ka whakarite kai-arahi te Atua i roto o nga wahine.
3. Te tamahine a Iepeta.
Nga korero o te putake nana i nui ai tenei wahine kei roto i tenei akoranga kaore te Atua e ahuareka ki nga oati ma roto i te whakahaere a te tangata. Te ahua i whakaae ai te tamahine ki te putake o te oati a tona papa e whakaatu ana i tona aroha, whakaiti, a ngohengohe hoki ki nga oati whaka-te-wairua. Tona inoi hoki kia tukua kia okioki mo tetahi wa kia tangi ai ia mo tona wahinatanga, ehara hoki tona pouri i te mea no te whakakahoretanga o tona oranga. E whakaatu ana tenei i te tino hiahia o nga tamahine ranga- tira o Ihanrra. (Tirohia Whakariterite 11:30-40). Mo tc whakatutuLitanga 0 te oati. e kore e taea te tino mohio, e- ngari ko te walii maramatanga iti i roto i te rarangi 39 hei homai tumanakotanga i runga i tenei ture whakamamae a
Ko te ropu tamariki kura (student body) o tc Maori
Agricultural College, ratou ko nga kai-whakaako
/tic te koka-whangai imatron).
Hanuere 27 iv-h ^E KARERE 37
nga Ihipiana i whakahengia nei e te Atua, kihai i tutuki.
4. Ko Rutu.
He tauira a Rutu mo te whakaatu 1 te mau o te piripono. x\ga tu ahuatanga takijua o te piripono, i roto i te whakaho- ki a Ruta ki a Naomi. ( 1 irohia Rutu 1 : L6-17); Te tuatoru ko te whakaritenga a Rutu i te whakaaro a Naomi. (Rutu 3)-
5. Ko Hurura.
He poropiti vvahine i Hiruharama e nemo ana i te k-areti he vvahine kura i runga 1 nga tikanga whaka-te-atua, a nana i hoatu te kupu a te Atua ki te kingi o Hura. (Tifohia K Tuarua 22).
6. Ko Waliati.
Ahakoa ehara ia i te Iharaira, i whakarite ia i eta hi tika- nga nunui i roto 1 nga whakahaere mo Iharaira. Tana wlia- kahaerenga i te tikanga whakahoki mai 1 te ngbhengohe kj te tane i roto i nga vvhakahaunga tika anake. Ko tana i whai ai kia riro ia he vvahine ktiini pai, karauna-kore, i te wahine kuim kino, whai karauna. (Tirohia Ehetere I).
7. Ko Ehetere.
tie pam 1 te Limatanga ake 0 tona oranga. I whakatupu- ri . akt i ro:o i te wa 0 te whakaraunga ki Papurona e te ira_ mutu tane p tona papa. I whakaritea hei kujr.i i runga 1 tona ataahua i ngohengohe tona ki tona matua-whangai 1 whakaora hoki i te kingi i nga kai-tuku whakamate toko- rua, me te whakar U' i tetahi nohopuku mo tona jwi, Ka tata te whilkaft^aro 1 tona ake oranga 1 roto i tona mahi wha- k iora mo ton.' iwi. Te toanga ki runga ake i te tino hoariri o nga Hurai. He v\ ihin [haraira whakaaro. He wahine tu p kari, kauie e ngohe tona whakapono e whakawhirinaki noa a tu tetahi ki runga ki tona matauranga, e kore hoki e taka tona piripono. ( rifbhia Ehetere 2 : 8-9).
Te kai-arahitanga o nga wahine o roto i te wa o Mohi, p ra mo i n/s 1 wa 0 mua atu, ehara i te mm whaka-u ki te t (hung ata n 1 1 1 manakohia iho e te Atua i tau;l
ga mai i a Miriama ki te awhina ki te whaka i a [haraira, me te w h 1 katutuk itanga i te ooropii taie a te poropiti wahine aroh.M pono ki tona wh< nua, »i fepora, me te wha k iho
38 ii karkke Hanuere 27, 1926
whakaaturanga i whakaritea ai i runga i tona ingoa e te wahine poropiti kura e Hurura. I te mea e manaaki ana te Atua 1 nga wahine kai-arahi pai, i kino ia ki nga wahine mahi raweke i nga mahi o ana pononga.
NGA PATAIMENGA PUTAKE WHAKAHOK1
i. Whakaingoatia kia wha nga wahineote wa o Mohi i tua atu i nga mea i roto nei i tenet akoranga.
2. Pehea te whakaahua a ton hinengaro mo Miriama i hettri nei mo Mohi. Hrohia Ekoruhe 2:4.
3 Whakahuatia te waiata whakautu a nga wahine m > te waiata a nga tane i te Moan a Whero.
4. Whakamaramatia te ahua o Miriama ano e kite ani koe 1 te whakahaerenga i te Moand Whero.
5. Pehea te ahua 0 te whakahua i te pohehetanga o Miriama inaianei i roto i te Hahi.
(>. Korerotia a Mi ka 6 : 4 te whakaatu ko Miriama he mt a karanga na te Atua ki tona mihana.
7. Whakaatnr.a kei te karangatia kei te tonoa hoki nga wahine 0 tenei wa pera ano me Miriama.
8. He aha nga tautoko ko Tepora he mea tohn e te ha
0 te Atua hei kai-whakarite whakawa mo Iharaira.
9. Korerotia te whakaatu a Hurura (2 Kingi 22:15-20); whakaaturia hoki nga hua 0 tana whakaatu (2 Kingi 2} : 1-T7).
10. L hea te wahi i whakatakoto ai a Ehetere i tona ora- nga ki rnnga ki te aata, kia whakaorangia ai tona iwi.
1 1. Ma Ehetere te whakaaro kia whakaritea he nohopuku e \c iwi. Pehea te k ircro a tana wh.ikaaro mo tona akonga
1 te kainga me nga ture 0 nga Kurai i roto i te kainga.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO HAERE MO PEPUERE. rlei korerorerotanga ma nga mema i roto i 9 hui mahi, a whakahaere hoki 0 nga mahi.
Xga pai nga mo te tamaiti a kotiro hoki; korero whaka- riterite mo nga take e what ake nei.
lie pehea te awhina, te pupuri mai ranei a te k ura i te tamaiti, kotiro ranei i runga 1 nga tikanga o te ora.
1. Mo nga kanohi (eyes) kaha. me nga kanohi ngoikore.
2. Mo nga niho kino.
$. Mo nga kai kaore i te tika (improper food). He mahi tenei ma tatOU ki te tirotiro mo em i aliuatanga, me te whak itikatika i ana ahna.
Ko nga ropu taknta me nga ropn naahi kei te koa tonu ki te homai i nga tohutohu ki a tatou i runga 1 enei take, a he mahi tenei ma tatou kia ako i enei mea, kia kaua ai a tatou tamariki e puritia mai i roto i a ratou mahi o te kura.
Xa Kora S. Tinikini Na Toke Watene i whakamaori.
Hanucie 2J, 1926 TE KARERE
KOTE
TAU 0 TE HAKI 0 IHU KARAITI 0
TE HUNGA TAPU 0
NGA RA 0 MURi NEI,
MIHANA 0 NIL IIRENI.
Ka tu ki Nuhaka a te 2 me te 3 0 Aperira, 1926.
\Khki-.
KO NGA PUXAPUKA HEI HOXONCA
. etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei I <>. fea ki rtu.i mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko Nga mea e hiahia ana ki i jjiik.ipnk.i uu- tuku .tin ki 1 liu.\ J2, AiitkUimt
STANDARD CHURCH WORKS Teachers B R ady Reference, Leather
imeni & kctdy Reference, Leather n i>
Hook ol Mormon, Cloth 2 1
, Ball Leather •• " •• , Leather 10-O ^150
Pearl of, Great Price, Cloth., j-u
DoctrineS Covenants, Cloth =;-o
. v\ Pearl ol Great Price, Lcuthel MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS Maori Read} Reference, ( loth 2 0
, Leather .> b
Ko Pe Kaweruta Hon, Cloth 1-9
" Me Nga riin.cne, Leather 3 in 1 ji-m
•• Pukapuka a Moromoua. Cloth 5-0
•' , Leather .. 15-0
Akoranga Me N^;i Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 3-J
Leather 15 0
( 0 nib iuation of A, B, & C Tracts, L« aiher, Sp< 1 . < Jffer 1 0
SJNDAf SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
Restoration of the Gospel 4 0
\\ li u Jesos la ugh I 3 p
Knnlrik.ntt.-ii Plan Book, Keslei & Morris .- 0
Sunda) Morning in the Kindergarten, S*ortun 4-0
SO AZ BOOKS
Songs ol Zion, Cloth
Leather
Desei e1 Song Book:*, Cloth 3 0
•• , Leather Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0
DDCT7INAL AND REFERENCE WORKS A rtii Its ol Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Ttiim/ige 8 ; \'i'.,lit\ ol Mormonism | 6
S niii'ic Aspectsof Mormon am, Xelstm 0-0
Restoration of the Gospel, M idtsm 40
u hi ncs y<>
the V oung, \\\,.i lesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage
nt id Is in Church History, Smith o-u
Bible Read 2-0
i- tltilln 1 el. Mai is b-0
KOJ. H. IIVU'IXI TEKAJTA ME TE KAI PANTI HOKI M ^ r KORONr,ATA. HASTINGS. H. JR.
<arra>
*■ ^Sc<^
l-l-l-l-l-l-l
-l-l-l -l-L-l-
l-l-l- -l-l-l
WAHANGA XX APERIRA 21, Iy2&> NAMA IV
KOREROTANGA
- 1
-i
RIPOATA NO WHARE KAURI
NA IRIPARETE POxMARE 1 Mil
rE AKORANGA O TE MANAWA NA ERUT. KUPA I VVHAKAMAOR]
TE ATUATANGA O TE KARA1I1 I I1C KAUWHAU NA TETAH1 0 NGA AFOTORO
-l-l-l-l-l-l-i-l- - I - I ~ l-l-l -l-l-l-l-l-l-
CS KflRSRS"
WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO
Wharangi.
Kl TE ETITA
Ik- Ripo.it. i mo te Kareti 1 3 *
Ko te llui \'ui a Ngati Porou i-')
Ripoata no te SVhare Kauri i-7
KO NCA RONCO KORERO
Kti nga Hokinga atu ki Hiona i lo
KO NCA TUHINCA MAI
Te Akoranga oteManawa 137
Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti ij6
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI I»2
MAH! KURA HAPATI
Concert Recitation 1 1 2
Intermediate I department 121
Korero .1 Ngakau 1 12
Maori Theological 1 15
Mother's 1 )ay Program 1 12
Pakeha Theologii al 118
Postlude in
Prelude 111
Primary Department 1 23
Sacramenl Gem 1 1 1
ffixcpw
WAHANGA 20 WENErfEl, APERIRA 21
fflaori agricultural College
1926. NAMA 4
Hastings. H. B-
E tukua atu ana ia rnarama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni,
Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Mini Nei.
Me tuku atu o koutou reta ki te Etita o te Karere, M. A. C, Hastings, II. B.
Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni, e (5s).
Iko te Sikanga Senei:
flle matua utu mo tcu pepa fcu vtfhiwhi ai.
J. H. Timkini, Titmnaki Mihana Mariana K. Ezvatana, Etita. Tuita Witch ir a, Etita Hoa Awhina.
Ko te Kai-Rtpoata Te Tuati Meha
Ko nga Kai-1'uhi-Mai (Special Writers) Wlremu A. Kotira tru T. Kupa
fiDabi ikura ibapau.
Prelude.
A IfegrHln.
Arr. from S.::iurert • by T. Y. C.
p 8ft.
# *
SACRAMENT GEM FOR MAY, 1926
I come to Thee nil penitent, I feel Thy love for me;
Dear Saviour, in this Sacramenl I <1<> remember Thee. Postlude.
p soft 8 ft.
[mm i m m i ■ i ; \ i i
l E KAfcERE Ap< rira 21, [926
CONCERT RECITATION FOR WAY, 1926.
(John, Third < "mpter, l<Hfth Ver "Jesus answered, Verily, verily, I say unto thee, E a man !>.• born of water and of the spirit he cannol enter into I lie kingdom of < lod. "
KORERO A NGaKaI Ml) MEI 1926;
I a Lluaui .; : 5. "Ka whakahokia c Ihu, lie pono, he pouo taku c men ki a koe, Ki te kahorc he tangata e whanau i te \\ ;: i , i tc Wairua hoki, c kore ia c ahei tc tomo ki tc rangatiratanga b 1 • Atua."
PROGRAM FOR MOTHER'S DAY 9th MAY. 1926.
The following is a suggested program of items for presenta- tion, and it is hoped that all Sunday School Superintendents and Teachers will co-operate to make this day of remembrance the success it merits. Other items in place of those sir-. hereunder may be used; remember (he spirit of the occasion and endeavor to preserve it.
PROG R A M.
1. Appropriate preliminary music. 10:25 a.m.
2. Beading of abstrad of minutes. !(>.•".() a.m. :!. Notices.
-!. Opening song: X<>. 93, "O My Pal her," or No. 46, "Love
al Home." :,. Prayer: By member of the Theological Class expressing
appreciation for God's gifl :<> man a Mother.
6. Sacramental song: No. 129, "Behold the Grcal Redeemer
Die."
7. Administration of Sacrament: Prelude, Gem, Postlude. Concert Recitation: ••Hearken unto thy father that begal
thee and despise n<»t thy mother when she is old."- Proverbs, 23:22.
Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARERE JJ_3
9. Singing practice: (To be conducted as a regular song, reverently and impressively, and not as a practice), No. 23, "Where is My Wandering Boy To-night."
10. Appropriate remarks (5 minutes) by a member of the
Superintendence, concerning the origin and purpose of Mother's Day.
11. Primary (Kindergarten) Song: by members of Primary
or Kindergarten, "Oh, I Had Such a Pretty Dream. Mamma."
12. Recitation by intermediate pupils: "Mother."
MOTH i: R.
'.'Who is it knows just what to do, When tilings go wrong- and life looks b!ue1 Who is it sings amid her care, And smiles when shadows bring despair? Who is it through her changeless day Unchanging goes her faithful way? Who is it keeps the light, the home, Still sweet howe'er her loved may roam? Mother.
' ' Who is it wins the crown she wears, When love lays wreath-' upon gray hairs, And joys on wings of softest gleam Leads home her little ships of dream? Who is it, though she goes not down Each day to business in the town. Still lifts her burden, toils hep share, Fulfills her trust and meets her eare Mother. "
13. Speech, by n member of the Theological class on the Life
of one (or two) of the following Mothers :— -Eve, Sariah, Rachel, Hannah (mother of Samuel). Mary (the mother of Christ ).
14. Recitation: by Primary pupils — "Mother — An Acrostic"
( children, each bearing a large letter: M,0,T,H,E,R.)
MOTHER— AN ACROSTIC. For six children, each carrying a large letter.
First Child
Mother's always read}
To help d fellow out. A mother's mho a dandy,
Of that tin ie i« no doubt.
Second child Our mothei b are nlw a.} - w illing
'I*., rlo v hate Vi 1 he\ r»nii: To help lis in 0U1 |'l;i.\ .
< >i tio dim wok To plan.
i4 1 1. k \k, Apt rira ilt [926
Third I hi!.! To all mother* in nil 1
lii- .!;i\ will r'.i |>e g We want tn give th. in honor bcre, \v> o\\ they 're |.i:i- .1 in la aven.
r'ourtli Child I lome n other,
And we wil And love the nam*' of motlior
On tins and
Fifth I Kadi one here has
And each will wish to >ay That we are glad they're with us
On this liri8 l>ay.
Sixth Child K 1 1 :. 11 ■ ! . -i ever, mol hi i s
Thi t t hougli \\<- 're pomel imea w We 11 ally would not grieve you,
Our love 1- evei strong.
1"). Song: by [intermediate pupils. No. BO, "Forbid Them Not."
16. Distribution of white flowers to Mothers (also married
sisters) by little children (girls) dressed in while. After distributing the flowers theystand in front and repeat: ••s.i let out flowers bright and fair, A I >\ in- greet ing to you bear, And may the fragrant flower* Glad welc all 011 M thei '> Oay."
17. One minute of silence in honor of the Mothers who have
passed beyond.
1 duet, or chorus) by Theological Class pupils. Select Prom : " Mother Maehree, " "Silver Thcads amonp. the Gold," "That's Whal God Made Mothers For," "Mot In p Divine," " Dear < Mil Mother of Mine'"
19. Speech: by one <>f the besl s])eakers I U> minutes kiThe
Place of Mothers in the World."
20. Response b> ■■• Mother.
'_ I. Remarks by the Superintendent.
22. < ''Resting Now Prom Care and Sorrow."
■J".. Benediction: By a member of the Theological or [ntcr- mediate < Hass.
NOTE. Have children dressed in while wherever possible
deavour to procure Mothers to hang in eon
spicuous place; arrange for decorations, flowers, etc.
Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARERE 115
MAORI THHOLOGICAL
Ratapn tiiatahi, Mci 2, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU.
Na Tiala W. Witehha i whakamaori.
Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- toria nei e Ihu hei mahi 111a tatou.
KO TE IRIIRINGA A IHU.
"Tukua ra aianei; ko te tikanga hold tenei ma taua kia whakarite i nga mea tika katoa." Matiu 3: 15.
Te Whakaatu: J a Matin, te torn 0 nga upoko; i a Maka 1 : 1-11; i a Ruka 1 : 5-25, 57-80 ; 3 : 2-2 ; i a IToani 1 : 6-36.
Te Wa: I a Ihu e torn tekau ona tavi.
Te Wahi: I te Awa 0 Horano.
Te Take Nui: Tera te iriiringa nunaki he walii no nga mahi a te Atua, a me ma hi hold e tetahi na te At 11 a nei i whakamana ; a meite kore tatou e mahi i tenei e kore hoki tatou e "whakaritc i nga mea tika katoa."
Ko te iriiringa o Ihu i whakaaturia i roto 0 nga karaipi- ture lie nui noa atu te tikanga ki nga tangata e noho i te Y7hcnua. Me i wliakaaro nga tangata 0 te ao ki tenei mea, me i inoi ratou, me i rapu ratou e, me aha tatou tenei tauira kua liomai nei e Ihu, he nui noa atu nga uiano tangala e haere kia iriiria ki retc I te Uahi 0 Ihu Karaiti 0 te llunga Tapu 0 nga I?a 0 Mui-i Nei.
Engari ko nga tangata 0 te ao kahorc c wliakaaro ki enei mea. Kei te ta 0 ratou manawa ma nga minita e wliakaaro ana mo ratou — ko etahi e arahitin ana e 0 ratou ngakau whakahihi rae era atu ahua taikaha. Pera me nga matapo e aru ana i 0 ratou kai-arahi.
Korerotia kia polo te ahua 0 IToani me tana mihana mo te tai.aa i tutaki ai La ki a te Karaiti i nga parenga 0 llorano. lie aha te mea i homai hei mahi ma tatou i roto i tenei tauira? He aha te mahi i wail mo nga mea kna neke atu i te
»/ani tau a kahore ano kia iriiria \ Lie aha te mahi i waihotia mai ma nga matua whai tamariki kahorc nei ano i tika te wa kia iriiria ;'
Il<' alia te mahi kua waihotia mai ma ngfl mea kua mate
__ I !•: KARERE Apcrira 21, iy26
nei o ratou tupuna i roto i te ku R o-pai .'
Kia tino poto te taitna mo enei kia mii ai !•■ tail 1a ma nga rue ma o te karaihe hci korero i o ratou nei haringa ma roto
i:.-ii nei i o ratou iriiringa a in- una pehca hoki i riro mai ai
i ;i ratou te tutukltanga 0 te kupil \\hau;iari. " K i te pai tetalll
tangata ki te mea i tana e pai ai, <• matau ia ki te ako, na te Atua ranei, he korero naku ake ranei." Ifoaui 7: i7.
Ratapu tuarua. Mel 9, 1926, Ra o nga Whaea. Tirohla Wlur.mgi 1 1 1
Ratapu tuatoru, Mei 16, 1926
AKO JIANG A 11.
"Te Whakatcinga i Hiruhanima."
1. Ta I *i + a karo o tana mahi minita ki nga Tauiwi.
Whakaaturauga i tana whakakitenga ki nga Elurai i whakataliuritia. Nga Mahi 1 1 : 1-18.
(b) Te whakapono o nga Ifurai. Ko nga llurai anake c W'lliwlii ki te w liakaoranua. Wliakaatu i a li<.ma 1 : Ki.
2. riV whakaaro tukino o llerora Akaripa I.
ia i Km tukino i nga akonga a te Karaiti, Nga Mahi 12: 1.
Whakaiitenga i te Apotoro i a Ucmi kia mate (tuti kana <> Uoani); N'ga Mahi \-l: '2. Whakaritea ki le wliakaatu i a Moltia, lTpoko 17. Whakaritenga kia maka a Pitn ki roto i te whare- herehere. Nga Mahi Vl. -\-\.
3. Te wha kaput un pa a merekara u I'itn i t<- wharelierelietv.
N'ga Mai.i 12: G II. ,i Ka tvhakaputa a I'ita ki u- wharc <» Mori. Vm
Main 12: 17. b) Ka w h;ik;i\\ l:in;i te Kai-tiaki o ic wliarohoreliere ki
t«- ritonga <> te ture i nga Roma, n'<> to tukuuga
kia puta nga herehere. N'ga Mahi L2: l!>. me t<-
whakaal ti NTga Mahi 21 : 42,
(c) Te matengn <> Flerora. Nga Mahi L2: 20-24.
Ratapu luawha, ,Mci 23, 1926 AKORANGA 12.
Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARKRE 117
"Te whakatahuritanga o Faora, me tana niihana tuatahi."
1. Tc whakatahuritanga 6 J Faora.
(a) Tona whakaaro pono ki tc whakahinga i nga akonga. Nga JMalii 9: 1-2, me Nga Malii 2*2: 3-5.
(b) Te haerenga ki Ramahiku me nga ahuatanga i tupono kia Arami tamaiti. Mohia, Upoko 27.
(c) Te tutakitanga o Anania kia Haora i Ramahiku. Nga Main 9: 10-]!).
2. A Pa ova kei Ramahiku me Arapia.
(a) Nga mea i tupono i Ramahiku. Nga Main 9: 19-25.
(b) Ka whai i a ia nga whakatoiuga. Nga Mahi 9: 23- 24, whakavitea tcnei ki te niihana tuatahi a Arami tamaiti. Arami, Upoko 14.
(c) Kei Arapia. Karatia I : 15-JS.
3. Ka hoki ia ki Ramahiku, a ka oma ki Iliruharama.
(a) Ka whakatakoto whakaaro nga Hurai ki te whaka- mate i a Paora. Nga Main 9; 23-24.
Ratapu tuarima, Mei 30, 1926 AKOkaJn&A 13.
' 'Whakatahuritanga 0 Paora, a tuatahi hoki 0 tana mahi mihana haere." Te roanga atu.
1. Tona haerenga ki Fiiruharama. NTga Mahi !) : 2(> 27.
(a) Ka whakamohiotia a Paora c F*anapa ki nga
Apotoro: Nga .Main 9; 27. (I)) Ka whakamaharatia a Paora i roto i tetahi kitenga
kia haere atu. Nga Mahi 22: 17-21. (e) Tc Apotoro ki nga Tauiwi. NTga Main 9: 1."); 22:
21. Whakarifcea hoki tc whakaakoranga i te L*uka-
puka a Moromona ia I Niwhai 10: 11-14.
2. Tc haerenga 0 Paora ki Tarahu. Nga Mahi !> : 30.
(a) Tc vvahi i whanan ;ii ia. Tirohia Nga Mahi 21: 39.
(b) A Tarahu he pa no nga Roma i tc wa i yvhakahu.i ai a Paora i a i;i ano he Roma. Nga Mahi F(>: 37-38; -2-2: 2o-2s.
(c) 1 noho ia ki tenei wahi 0 t<- whenua mo nga tau c 5 c ;ii ki nga whakaatu 0 tona oranga.
(<1) Ko 1<' ki ;\ nga 1 n i» «_j ;i 1 ;i tik;i \vli:ii-iii;in;i. no tenei
i [S i E KARERE Aperira 21, [926
wa i whakaturia ;ii nga hahi ki Hiria me Kirikia
Malii 15: 41.
— 0-
PAKEH4 THK0L0G1CAL "GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS"
First Sunday, May 4, 1926. UniTorm Fast Day Lesson
The example of Jesus: \vlia1 it bids us do. The Baptism of Jesus.
The incident which forms the basis of to-day's lesson is of t e greatest imporl to every living soul.
It' the world could 1)-' 'brought to a serious, analytical, and prayerful consideration of it with the thought in mind "The example of Jesus — What it bids us do." what a tremendous increase in church membership would follow!
However, as the greal majority of the peoples of the world are "carried about with every wind of doctrine, by the sleight of men, and cunning craftiness whereby they lie in wait to deceive" we may nol expect such a result so Long as individual initiative give3 way to blind following.
A brief recital of the birth, characteristics and great mission of .John (called the "Baptist") and of the epochal scene Oil the banks of the Jordan, should make an excellent setting for testimonies from those who have Imd the supreme joy of having been "born again*' born of waiter and of the Spirit — and received the fulfilment of the promise, "If any man will do His will, he shall know of the doctrine, whether ii be of God/' etc. (John 7: 17,. Then, in application of the matter, consider- What does this incident bid us do: As to those who ar< old enough but have not yet been baptized; as to parents upon whom pests primarily the duty of teaching and preparing their children for baptism: as to adults upon whom the Spirit of Elijah should be resting, and whose hearts turn to their fathers: what does it bid us do?
Care must be taken that recital of facts and comment upon tlie personnel of characters participating in such facts, shall be, brief, leaving the major jortion of the time for testimonies and making the application.
Ape lira 21, 1920 IE KARERE 1 19
Suggested Outline.
Topic: "Suffer it to be so now, for thus it become th us In fulfil all righteousness." (Matt. 3: 15.
Text: Malt. 3; Mark 1: 1-11; Luko 1 : 5-25, 58-80; 3: 2-22: John 1 : 6-36.
References: "Josus the Christ" (Talmage), pages 121-127: ''Life of Christ" (Farrar), pages 93-102; "Life of Christ" i Papini ), |>;i<ics 54-a7.
Time : When .Jrsus was i hirty.
Place: The River Jordan.
Aim: That baptism by immersion by an authorized servanl of God is approved of the Father and necessary in order to fulfil all righteousness.
Outline:
I. Tin1 Forerunner.
1. A child of promise.
2. His work and characteristics.
.'1 His declarations as to One mightier than ll<\ II. At the Jordan.
John baptizing. Ml. Jesus prt scnts Himself.
1 . Applies For bapti
2. John '« denial.
I Y. " Suiter it i" lie bo now.
Jesus' re pi j . V. The double Baptism. < rod 's <ip|H(i\ al. Illustration and Application: To be supplied l-\ each depari ment suitable to its needs
Second Sunday, M:i\ k), 1926 Mothers' Day Program. Sec page 1 1 2
iiiini Sunday, M.u 16. 1926
R< >!ew Questions.
I. N'ame an attribute of character that you admire in Adam, Enoch, Koah and Abraham, and tell «rhj you admire the p I,; icular al 1 ribut< j on Belecl .
\.-i. tie a gospel truth «>!• doctrine made prominent in
TE KARERE Aperira 21, 19-0
tii- llw . . i each of the prophets listed in the foregoing question and < ■ ' ' 1 the truths and doctrines so selected.
Fourth Sunday, May 23, 1926 1 . on K). Abraham as a Father and Servanl of God.
( ienesis, ( 'hapter 22. etive: To teach that in life and death God is supreme will make us equal to every test if our faith in Him is
■ .!t.
! upplementary References: All reference works heretofore • ;'.- ■ ted.
ingestions on Preparation and Presentation: !. Abraham forced to send Hagar and Fshmael forth. Why was this necessary ! ! . Abraham commanded to sacrifice Isaac.
1. A supreme test of his faith.
Walked three days from his home to the mountains where sacrifice was to take place.
2. He obeyed every direction given him, even to the raising of the knife to slay his son.
Questions for Teachers.
1. How do you explain Abraham's great faith.'
2. Summarize the life of Abraham and enumerate at least, ihvee great oustanding atributes of character his life exemplifies.
Fifth Sunday, May 30, 1926
Lesson 11. Isaac a Man of Humility, Love and Faith.
Text • < ienesis 21 :27.
Objective: To show that God's purposes are carried forward by those who arc obedicnl and faithful.
Supplementary References: Joscphus 13-16-18-22. Vol. 1, Hours with the Bible, Geikie, Chapter is.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Isaac a son of promise.
A link in the chain of posterity through which God has accomplished Mis great purposes. :'. :.,•(• a \xung man of greatesl obedience and faith.
Aperira 21, 1920 lh. K.ARERE 121
1. When told by his father that ho was to he the sacrifice
according to Clod's command he was 27) years of am1, hut he never fal+ered. See Josephus, chapter 13.
2. Zealous in the exercise of every virtue adhering 1o his
parents and in the worship of God. — Josephns.
I I I. Isaac in his manhood.
1. A counterpart of his great father in
Simple devoutness. I). Purity of life.
2. A contrast in
His passiveriess of character.
IV. Isaac blessed of God and known as a strong man to those about him. Sec Genesis, chapter 26:13-33.
Questions for Teachers.
1. What purposes do men like Isaac serve in carrying forward Go ! 's work !
2. Name three virtues exemplified bv the life of Isaac.
INTKRMF.DMTE 1)1 PvlM.MI VI 'I ill. BOOK OF MORMON"
first Sunday, May 2, 1926
Uniform Fast hay Lesson
Sams rs I'akeha Thechgtcal Class. Sec |>a£e 1 18
General Subjccl : The example of Jesus: whal i1 bids us d<>.
special Topic: The Baptism of Jesus.
Le1 the class members relate the incidents connected with the baptism of the Saviour. See what they are actually think- ing and believing (1) as to its reality, (2) as to its necei Why do they think that baptism is an ordinance to which all 111 a iik i n< I. after the 3 ears of accountability, should submit 1 Lei them quote Prom scriptures to Bupporl their b 1 daj
the teacher is to direct, develop and inspire discussion, nol to dispense information. He is trying to find out what the class itself, in an independent way. is thinking and believing about these fundamentals of our faith. Well thought-out questions Prom the teacher should 1<« ep the discussions in the proper line of thought.
i E KARERE Aperira 21, 19:6
Second Sunday, May 9, 1 920" Mothers' Day Program. Sec page 1 ! 2
1 bird Sunday, May 16, 1926.
Review Questions.
i. Tell of some of the difficulties Joseph Smith had in
.1.: forth the Book of Mormon. :. Name two things you like best in Ncphi. i. Recite one of the passages you have memorized.
..Hiite frequently in the review the pupils will be asked to [■ lie passages they have memorized. This may be an incentive ally make them their own.
Fourth Sunday, May 20, 1926 Lesson 10. An expedition Sent Out. —The Story of Zenifr.
Text: Omni 1:27-30; Mosiah, chapters 7-10.
Objective: Tc tench that those who trust in the Lord nn.y t ;pect His help in times of need.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: il) General assignment of the text. I 2 ) special assignment,
(a) The first expedition. (Omni l;27-30.)
(b) Amnion's first experiences in Lehj- Nephi. (Mosiah Till chap. )
(c) The twenty-four i_^< > i < 1 plates. (Mosiah, chap. 2.)
(d) Zeniff, a righteous king. (Mosiah 7:33; 8:15-18; 9:17; 10:11.
Questions fcr Teachers. 1. Point out characteristics in the La man it es, which plainly show they were led by the spirit of Satin.
•J. What lessons are to be Learned from Zen'ffs struggles?
Fifth Sunday, May 30, i<)2<> Lesson 11, A Wicked King A Prophet's Warning.
Tc -1 : Mosiah, 1 Itli to 17th chapters.
Aperira 21, 1926 TK KARKRE I2J
Objective: To make impressive the fact thai the Lord shows His niercy towards His children by inspiring His serVants to <-a!l tlie wicked to repentehec.
Supplementary References: Book of Moses 1 Pearl of Great Price), chap. 8:19-24. Acts 6:8-15; 7:50-60.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1 1 ) General assignment of th:^ text. i 2) Special assignment :
(a) Noah's wicked wa}*s. (Mosiah 11:1-19.
(b) Abinadi sounds a warning. (Mosiah 11:20429.)
(c) Trial of Abinadi. (Mosiah, chapter 12.)
(d) Abinadi spared to deliver bis message. (Mosiah 13:1-10.
A b ladi's death. I Mosiah, ITtli cha] (3) AH Ihe teachings of Abinadi cannot be covered in the class period, bill should be read at home by \hv pupils, and certain passages? discussed. Have class mark and memorize Mosiah 15:15-18.
Questions fcr Teachers.
1. Contrast the state of happiness of the people under the rule of a kii g like Noah ami one like Benjamin.
'2. flow did Abinadi show (rue courage?
3. Name the direct proj h •■ es ^"'i1 by Abinadi regarding the peoj !o of Xoah.
PKl.MAKY DEPARTMEN1 lirst Sunday. April 4, 1926, Uniform Fast Day Lesson.
Topic : The I'.apt ism of Jesus M att. 3; li
Texts: Matt. 3; Mark 1:1 11; Luke I : 5-25. :>7 BO; 3 .John 1 : 6-36.
References : "J Tain ag< |>p. 121-127 ;
" Life of Christ " I Karrar), pp. 93 102; "Litv of < 'hrist " pi'ii i. |»|». .'. '
Time : When .Jesus v as i hirty,
! 'lace : LV cr Jordan
< Jbj( eti /e: 1 ih that Baptism bj imnn i
I E KARERK .\|m i ir.i 21, 1920
! » • - tibership in the Kingdom of God.
-est ions : As we read the texl what causes us to think thai John the [1 1 ist fell that baptism was necessary for entrance into the 1 . 1 '/<lom of God !
Why did Jesus Ohrist ask to be baptized by John.' Why Jesus insist that John baptize lliml What causes us to think that JesuR was baptized by immer-
.;'. ill '
Tell in which way Our Rather in Heaven showed His ■ >proval of Christ's baptism. Lead the children to see that us not only taught others what was necessary for salvation. Iso set the example. [11 the lesson of Jesus ami Nicodemus lie told others what to do, but to-day's lesson shows us how it must be performed. Jesus was greater than John, but Jesus recognized John's calling.
Stimulate the children to look forward to the time when they will be old enough to he baptized by some one in our Church having the righl to baptize.
Have the children tell how the members in their homes were baptized and by whom they were baptized.
Memory (Jem : Use same suggested for story of Jesus and Xecodeiiius.
Song: "Baptism" page '21 — Francis K. Thomasson's
Primary and Kindergarten Sonus.
licst Exercise: The hi*r thought is obedience to law. Let the children suggest ways and means by which Heavenly Father sends us helpers to prepare the "round for planting; the warm wind to melt the snow and to earry off the dead leaves from the garden bed; the sun and the rain. After the discussion on each topic let the children represent the wind blowing, the sun shining and the rain falling.
Second Sunday, May 9, 1926. Mothers' Day Program. See page 1 I 2
Third Sunday, May 19, 192(> Topic: ( liris Feeding the Five Thousand.
Aperira 21 192b TE KARERE 1 25
Texts: Matt. 14: 13-21; Mark 61 30-44; Luke 9: 10-18; John 6: 1-13.
References: " Jesus the Christ" (Talmage, pp. 332-335; "Life of Christ" (Weed), pp. 172-177; "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, " Lesson 44.
Time: The Feast of the Passover. Place: On a mouiit near Sea of Cralilec. Objective: Seek ye first the kingdom of Cod and all else will be added unto you.
Suggestions: Show picture of Christ feeding the five thousand. Lead the children to see thai these people had heard of the good works of Jesus and wanted to know more about Him. Help them to realize that Jesus was tired, and when He found oul that the people wanted more spiritual food, and were willing to forget their physical selves to gel it lie U'i\ them physically as well as spiritually. Memory < fein :
" 1 'in glad my blessed Saviour \V;is once a child like me, To show how pure and holy 1 lis little oii< s mighl be : And if I try to follow ilis Footsteps here below ! I" never w ill Forgel me I because he loves me s<>. "
Hniilj II. Mill.-. Songsi 'Little Purple Pansy" D. S. S. Book, p. 127. "Jesus (Mice Was a Little Child*' Primary So
Rcsl Exercise: Carrying over the thoughl From last Sun- day, lead Ihc children to see thai the ground is ready For 118 to ,|() our part, l, i the children suggcsl what we do firsl the soil, rake, pick ou1 the Btones). After they have suggested le1 them sing and dramatize the Following words to the tune of "Here We Go Round the Mulherrj Bush":
"This is the way we dig our ground, dig our ground dig our ground. So early Monda; morning. M
Then change the wrordfi to raking, planting and spri
melody. I,,. i ||M. rhildren ftuggest the kind of seeds ih.\ want to
I 26 TE KARERE A pel ijru 21, L926
plant.
Fourth Sunday, May 23, 1926;
Topic : Tlie Raising of the Daughter of Jairus.
Time: While preaching to Publicans and Sinners.
Place : Nazareth.
Texts: Matt. !) : 18, lit. 23-26; Mark 5: 22-24. 35-43; Luke 8: 41, 42, 49-56.
References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Les- son 45; "Jesus, the Christ," pp. 313-315; Weed's "Life of ( Ihrist," chapter 31.
Objective: To teach that we must have faith and trust in the power of God and His servants if we want to be healed.
Suggestions: Show the picture to the children, let them tell what they can see in it. Then let them tell of the members of their family, or themselves; of how they have been adminis- tered to by elders. Lead them to see even if JesUS was taken from the earth, lie left Tlis power to heal with our Elders.
Show the children how necessary it is to have faith and to trust in this wonderful power. And that when we ask to be healed we must feel that Heavenly Father will heal us if it is best, but sometimes we pray and feel badly when our prayers are not answered. We must trust our Heavenly Father an 1 know that He will give us what is best for us.
Memory (Jem: Same as last Sunday.
Songs: "The Heart Garden" — Francis Iv. [Thomasson's Kindergarten and Primary Sony Book.
Rest Exercise: Have children name the kind deeds they may do for each other; for brothers and sisters; polish shoes, wipe dishes for sister, amuse the baby, etc. Let the children dramatize these suggestions.
Firth Sunday, May MO, 1926
Topic : Jesus and the Children.
Time: .Just after .Jesus had delivered His sermon on shores of Galilee.
Place : Borders of Judea.
s: M itt. !9: 13-15; Mark 10: L3-16 ; Luke IS: 15-17.
Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARERE 127
References: " Jesus the Christ" (Talmajre). pp. 47"). 476; Weed's "Life of Christ," chapter 52.
Objective: To teach that by being pure in heart we shall return to the presence of our Heavenly Father.
Suggestions: Show pictures of Jesus when twelve and then as a man. Let children look at them, then tell what they see. Then tell the story leading them to see how much Jesus loved little children, because they were pure and innocent, and that they should always remain pure and free from evil if they want to return to Heaven and live with Heavenly Father. Lead them to see how they will be blessed if they have pure, clean thoughts. If they don't think naughty things they won't be naughty; good thoughts make good boys and girls. Stimulate them to want to be like our great men and women. All of our great men and women, when little children, had good thoughts and a great desire to be something worth while. Lead them to see that our thoughts make us. The people in penitentiaries to-day are there for no other reason than they had the wrong kind of thoughts when small. Jesus was great, good and kind when a boy, so He couldn't help being the kind of man lie grew to be.
Memory Gem: Same as last Sunday.
Songs: "Jesus Once Was a Little Child," Primary Soul: Book; "Dearest Jesus, May 1 !>><■," I-Yaneis k. Thomasson'fl
Soii<j Book.
Rest Exercise: Heavenly Father Loves all the children so much, and lie wants to make them happy, so He has given them a beautiful place in which to live. Ask children to name same of the beautiful things in nature at this season that He his given us. Where have the binls been) The little plains
awakening; the tiers rocking in the warm winds. Lit them dramatize them as they Buggesl them.
Iki tc Etna
Ripoata No le Whare Kauri Ki T< Karen Tena koe, inahau c nanui atu enci kupu
1-8 TK KARERK Apcrira 21. 1^26
mania ki nga walii katoa e tae ai koc. E hari ana te ngakau in > maua ko Elder E. II. Anderson i tae ki W-hare Kauri ara Chatham Islands ki te kauwhau i te Rongo-pai o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Xci, i rite ai te kupu a te Karaiti ki ng.\ Hurai, "He hipi atu ano akn, ehara nci i tenei koiiiga., me arahi mai ratou ki konei kia urhakakotahitia te kahui, kotahi ano hepara." Kei a [loan! te whakamarama 10: 10.
No reira, e nga Hunga Tapu, e ki ana ahau he Itonore mii tenei ki ta U Atua titiro, ki a tatou ano hold ki nga Hunga Tapu. Kua iriiria e maua e ono nga mema hou, e toru kua manaakitia ki roto ki te Hahi, a kua whakatungia lioki he peka mo ratou. Ko Te Han Mataira te Timuaki o taua peka, ara e kiia ana te iugoa o taua peka ko Taupeka.
Ko etahi o nga Hunga Tapu o te WJiare Kauri E hoa ma, i tiuo manaakitia maua e nga tangata 0 tend whenua. He hunga tenei kaore i te mohio ki te whakapono. E ai ki te titiro te alma ko te atua kei te whakapono ratou ko nga whare waipiro. Tino nui atu to ratau hiahia ki tera mahi i to ratou ki te whakapono ki te Atua. Ko tenei to atua nui kei a ratau ko te waipiro me era atu mahi kino. Otira i te mca kua tae maua ki waenganui i a ratau c tino manaakitia am maua e rrtau, e vhakarorgo ana etahi o ratou ki a maua !: ur.vhnn. Kati :'-i;i nno tetahi mea nui i wliakaritra ki i«-
Aperira 21, 1926 IE KAKHRE I 29
peka, ara i te whakatunga i to peka ka whakaritca he Kura Hapati mo ratou. Kia mohio ai, <• nga llunira Tapu, he lino mahi nui ta maua mahi ko Rider B. II. Anderson ki re whakaritc i nga mea katoa e tika ai mo tenei peka i tenei taima poto. Ko to maua roa ki tenei wlienua kauwhau ai e i-iina nga wiki, otira i to maua liialiia ki tc hoki ki te Bui Tau ka tere to maua haere atu i tenei wlienua i roto i nga mahi ki te Atua.
Me whakapau te taima, e nga Hunga Tapu, i tc mea kua tino lata tc ra 0 to tatau Ariki 0 Iliu Karaiti. Ki te puta te whakahau a te Timuaki 0 tc Mih ana kia haere ki te kauwhau i te Rongo-pai, me haere. Kanaka tenei ki, "He raruraru,'- ehgari wnakaritea te mahi ki te Atua. Kati tenei,
XA [RIPARETE FOMARti.
-0-
\u) tc 1 1 ui Nui a N^:iti Poroo (He ro&nga atu)
No te Tuiei te LG p nga ra <> LVpuere, i te 3 0 nga [mora 0 te ahiahi ka kawangia te Whare-karakia Men e te Pihope
0 Waiapu. Dr. Sedgwick. Kati, i te hui ki Tikitiki ki roto i te Whare-karakia, he Diea ata wliiriwhiri te hun<_ra na ana i iomo. 1 uru maua kp Rriata Nopera ki tana whiriwhiringa.
I If tiiuiu 0 mua e npho ana te Kaw ana-Tiana ra. a Sir Charles LVrguson, me Lady Alice Kergusou, me tetalii 0 a raua lama ; La<ly Pom arc, me te Ai<!r-<|c-( 'amp 0 tc Kawana.
1 te nohoanga 0 muri mai ko te Hon. Joseph (iordon Uoatea (Premier), me .Mrs. Coates, te Hon. Sir Maui rnin;iiv, Miss Pomare, Mrs. Sherratt. I te muri mai K. S, William, me era atu o nga pakeha rangatira 0 tc Tai Rawhiti.
Tino papal npa kupu a tc Pihopa. Vo konei ka rongo atu tc tauhou, ko tc tangata tuatahi 0 Vgati Porou na ana i
hopu tc w liakapmi... na ana hoki i man mai ki MM IWl ko
Taumata-a-kura. Ko tc wrahi i tiria ai te purapura o tc whakapono ko Rangitukia, kei tc wahapu 0 Waiapu. reira, aranga tonu mai tc Ingoa 0 tc pari ha ko Waiapu, i raro
i te Pihopa 0 Waiapu. I muri <» te Karakia kawailga ka piki
katoa atu 1 fa ki tc wahi c tu ana tc Kohatu Whaka*
IjO TE KARLUE Apcrira 21, [926
maharatanga. Na fc Kawana-Tianara i takiri te ulii. lie mca hattga kia rite te alma ki te hoia. Ko nga korero kei runga e penei ana :
"He wlui' amaliar i:iii; -... ki ngo hoin n !\gati Pormi, ki u<>;.\ nic;» i hinga ki te pae <• lo pakangii ki 1114a mum lino hoki i ora mai."
I whai kupn hoki tc Kawana-Tianara. 1 penei etahi 0 ana kupu: "Ko nga in at u a o nga tamariki kua hinga atu ra ki te marae 0 tc riri kei te hoki 0 rat on whakaaro ki a ratou tamariki. Kei te kite ratou i nga wa e pakupaku ana ana tamariki na ratou i whakatupu. Ko nga hoa 0 ana tamariki, i tipu ug*itahi nci ratou, kei te kite i nga wa i hacreere talii ai ratou, i takoro lain ai. Kei t<i rongo ratou i tone! ra i te mokemoke. Na reira, e milii ana ahau ki a koutou, mo koutou i kaha ki te whakaara i tcnei whakamaharatanga whakaniiharo ki a koutou tamariki, ki o koutou hoa aroha. Ahakoa, kua ngaro ratou, kei tc ora ano ia ratou. Heoi, kia man tatou ki ta ratou whakanro rangatira, ara, kia mahi tatou tetahi mo tetahi."
lie imi atu ra ona kupu papai. No te wa i tangi ai te "Last Post," kore i taea te pupuri nga roimata.
Ka muiu i konei nga mahi 0 tenei ra. Ka tangi te pere, ka lmi ngn iwi katoa ki te kai. Ko nga hoia i wchea he kainga mo ratou ki roto i te maaki imi. Ko nga mano i haere ano ki te taiiia-i'iiuma, i whakamarama ake ra an e T50 tangata c eke ana ki runga i nga teepu i te kainga kotahi.
K<> tc Kawana-Tianara, ko tc Pirimia, ko Pomare, ko te Pihopa o Waiapu, ko te Timuaki (Tiata .Jones) Kai-whakawa 0 te Kooti Whenua Maori o Nin Tireni, ko te Wiremu, mema i te Paremata, n«;a tino manuliiri a nga hoia i ta ratou tina. Te alma nuku atu i te 300 nga hoia — Pakeha, Maori. Ko nga" apiha whakahaere ko Capt. Tutepuaki Pitt, raua ko Major Te Rangihiroa Buck.
Tino papai nga kupu i pnta i roto i tenei hakari. lie inaha an > nga "toast" i whakahonorctia. Ka imitu tc kai, ka hoki tc Kawana mc tona ope ki te Matahiia, tc kainga 0 te Wiremu. Ko te Pirimia raua ko tona wahine i nolio ih<>.
No tc po ka tu he kanikani wluikanui i tc Pirimia raua ko tona v.ahinc. Ka kitea i ko*.ui te tokomahn 0 tc tamariki
Aperira 21, 1926 TE KAkERE 131
0 Ngati Porou. E koa ana ta':u ngakau, nioku i kite kei 1«- tipu taton te Maori. Tera ano tetahi ahua i mini ai ahau ki nga taniariki 0 tend iwi, ara poto ratou katoa lie tamariki kura anake. I tupono an ki etahi tamariki kei nga tin<> whare wananga 0 to matauranga e kura ana. Kaore ter.ei mea te kuaretanga i a Ngati Porou.
Tino pai te kanikani. Kaore lie ahau hianga i kin;). Te
1 nu lioki o te Piriniia raua ko tona wahine ki te "-I;!//.." I karan«;atia ano nga kotiro 0 te Arawa kia vrhakamatakitakia nga "Jazz" hou. Ka matakitaki ra tenei tauhou ki nga kani- kani o cnei ra. 10 kore rawa e man i te tangata, lieoi ano <■ man ai pea ma nga tangata anake kaore e niahi ana. E kore e mau i te tangata e nui ana te whakaaru ki 011a kan miraka,
No te Wencrei te 17 0 nga ra 0 Pepuere, ka lioki mai niaua ko Eriata Nopera ki te whai i te llni Parilia <> Waikato i in nei ki Te [Ioe-o-Tainui i te 20, 21 <> Pepuere 1926.
No te 4 o nga haora 0 te ata ka paheno niai niaua i Tikitiki, i te hawhe 0 te 11 0 1" po ka tae mai tnaua ki Nepia. A.0 ake te i'a, te IS, ka haere maua ki Waikato. Kaore i moea te kainga. I te ata 0 te Paraire i<- 1!> ka tae ki Huntley, abialii rawa atu ka tae ki te marae 0 to hni. I to ata <> te Hatarei ka 1 imata te I liii Pariha <> Waikato.
\.\ TE 11 A II MEHA
He kipoata mo te Karttl
lie ripoata mo te almatanga 0 te ora, <> if mate 0 te kura .. te M.A.C.
R 7') nga tamariki kua tae mai kei 1.' kura i tenei tau.
i\o te iiiii ma te tamaitj kotahi te '.'Hi i i< tau, !<• utu mo ana
p kapuka i te tau e C2/2 ■, te moni mo n'.r;i ngahau wlmiupooro
era hi E2. Ilui katoa ;ii le muni «• tika ma te lamalti te
£18,
K te l! mga 1 . 11 in' i' ■;• (uia aroha, tae utu k m out ere <» te moa • n nga latua taane, matua vvaliine 1 tamariki kua tae mai iu! kei tc u v < ' Kia marama te titiro ilio 11 p koutou kauohi 1 ic te « liakaaro iho ano i hinongaro mohio ki te 1 h ii 1 I
132 I \i i VKi KE i.i 21, I926
i te i:.« a ifl 1I1011 ki a i male te mate kai. Ki tc
korc lie kai mo le koopu u le langata ka mate ia, male rawa. M 1 tetal i 11 r,i atu ranci moln kaa, ki te korc lie himi mo roto i a ia kore rawa ia < h, i lm . [e riringi ra ano lie liinu. kafahi a. 10 kj hacre. Ivei a koutou rami enei alma tangata e ora cna in.; tc I:;. a c wiia ■: Mi kn ora ai .' B aku teina, tuahino, me i:gj hod aroh.t, kaua tat 011 c noho i roto i te kuaretanga 0 a te Aiua vvhakaakoranga. No reira ahan ka tono atu ki a koutou, tukua mai nga moni e mohio na koe lici utu mo to tamaiti i tukuu i.iai nei e koe ki tc kura. Kaore ho kai niana, e korc hoki e tika ko nga lamariki a ntra matua kua ulu hei tango kai ma to tamaiti. Ka mate enei alma tamariki mo taliau. K Loa ma, Play the game! Ki te waiho koia nei te ahuatanga i.!o 1a tat, iii kura. pa tonu inaianei tenei mate te mate whawhati lata c ki ana te pakelia "heart failure." Kua kore he kai. Ka mutu te nganga.
1 iiiuri mai 0 tc !lui Tan i tac aliau ki tc titiro i nga kan* • 0 nga moni kud tac mai a i,i tamaiti a ia tamaitL Kitea c an e C148 nga moni kua tac mai, c £071 1- (» nga mea c toe ana. Ka kite ill ■ koutou e te Ilunga Tapu i tc mate Ko te tikanga tac tae mai te 61120, ka tika ai kci ohorere koutou v te Hunga Tapu ina whakaiiokia atu a koutou tamariki. K kore hoki c t-iea te pewhea, e korc hoki e ora i tc hau hei kai. I tc mea ko an auake tc mema 0 tc Poari kci kowi, no reira ahau ka t iku i 1 n i ripoata ki Tc Karere. Khara i 1<i mea c patipati ana ai.au i a koutou, kaore, 0 tuhituhi (onu ahan i te mate ka pa I.i te kura me tookn karangatanga he mema mi te Poari 0 tc kura. Taku hiahia kia rongo whakautu i roto i Te Karere. NA RAWIR1 M. K AIM AT.
-0 -
flDabi Ibui Htawbaf.
\a Toke Wateite i whakamaori. KORA S. TIXIKIXI. Tumuaki llui Atawliai.
AKORANGA MO MEL NGA MEA I HOMAI I TE V/A 0 MOHI.
A. Kga inea whaka-ts-Atua.
1. Ko nga ri a. c ICotahi Tek*; .1.
Aperini 21, 1920
1 b K.AKKRE
(a) Te Ture Tuatahi: 'Ana tetahi atua ke atu mou ki luua atu i a ail." lie mea kia vvhakapaua te ngakau i runga i tc pono 0 te karakia ki te atua. 1 whanau nei i runga i Te whakaaro pumau, i te aroha whakananukorc, me te pono te taea tc whakakorikori.
(b) Te Tu re Tuarua: "!\ci hanga koe i te whakapakoko mou." Ko tenci wkakahaunga, he ture e arai ana i te karakia whakapakoko. lie maha nga whakaaturanga mo nga tamariki a Iharaira, i roto 0 tc 400 tau i noho ai i Lhipa. I whakapokca ratou c nga karakia 0 uga tauiwi. He tikanga hoki i tino tau ki to raton alma. Ko tenei wliakahaunga e whakaatu ana kia kaua tetahi mea arai kei vvaenganui i te Atua me te hunga e koropiko ana kia la. Ta una whakapakoko he whakararuraru i nga paanga atu a te wairua.
(c) Te Ture Tuatoru: "Kei vvhakahuatia noatia e koe te in go a o Ihowa <> ion Atua; c kore hoki ;i rhowa »• mea, lie hara- korc tc tangata <• whakaahua noa ana i tona ingoa." lie karanga whakaatu tenei e tono ana kia hopohopo. E whakaatu ana ki te nni <> tc hara 0 te whakanoa i 1c ingoa <» tetahi wairua tika. Ko < n"i ahua whakahuatanga katoa, he whakaiti, lie whakakino 1 tc Atua. K<> tc kohukohu, he whakahua rorirori
;i liauraic. i.
Te Ture Tuawlia: "Km mahara ki te ra hapati kia whakatapua." K rua nga tikanga «» tenei wliakahaunga, ko ciici "kaua c mahi," ko tc main me te whakaritc mo nga ra e one i main ai, 1 kotahi pa mahi mo te taha whaka-te- wairua »• w haka-u ana i te take v. hakamul nnga nei.
Te Ture Tuanma : "Whakahonoretia tou 1 » .• 1 1 > • 1 me tou vvhaea." Ko te tuturitanga i roto i tenei vvahi <> nga Ture Kotahi Tekau he tono me te kupu whakaari. K rite ana t«- whai tikanga <» !.• tutu ki nga matua I." le mntamua i peia atu i i« Whenua «» (<■ Kupu Whakaai i
i I 1; n : ' ' Kaua v pal 11 " E inia nga 1 1
arai 1 roto i tenei wliakahaunga. I! tiaki ana i te ahua <• t<- noho pai a te katoa, n <• arai ana i te hara nni otu i katoa, te whakamal taki kon i te oranga o tetahi. K whakaiti alio i;i i ;i i;i i !<• i v. i raili i • W li.ik;,i»i ana 1 tc nni i
!■• w had 1 ikanga hoki <> t< 0
I <■ Ture Tn.iw hi! 1; "• l\;: 1,1 , plMTIUU " i\<
134 TE KARERE Apci ira 21, L926
c lata tullll ana Li te w 1 1a knit i a he tino pono hoki.
1 1 1 ) Te Ture Tuawaru: "Kaua c tahae." Ivo t < *i h 1 whaka- haunga e avai ana i le tango pokanoa i tetahi mci. He tikanga hoki e panai ana i te tohu 0 te rawa-koretanga ; kino atu i to te pinono liaci-c. He lure lioki kei runga nei e ta 1 ana te kai- Uakitanga 0 nga take taonga katoa. Ko te tango kia kotalii hea (share) uuu <» roto i te nninga lie ahuatanga aim no te tahai .
Te Ture Tuaiwa: "Kaua a whakapae teka ki 1 >u hoa." ko te whakiiaiii a tenei whakahaunga c arai ana kia kaua e takalii oati, u korero whakakinokino, a korero ranei e mama'/ ai tetahi. (Co tc korero teka mo era atu tangata kaore c tan kia karangatia tona ahuatanga he kai-tangata. Xa konei ano i arai ai te A1 ua i tenei m< a.
( j i Te Ture Tekaii: " Kaua e hiahia." I te mea lie wha??a- liau la te ture tuatalii kia tino tika, no rcira ko ta te in ,:i whakamutunga kia pono ia\\a. E tika ana kia kiia peneitL . koia c hiahia ana. a e whakaaro ana ranei kia whiwhi take-korc i:i i tetahi mea, kua tahae ke i roto i tona ngakau.
X^-.i Ture Kotalii Tekau eJiara i te mea he tino tikanga awliina ki te taha karakia anake, lie tikanga awhina ano lioki ki nga kawanatanga.
L>. Era atu ahuatanga.
(a) Te hoatu i te pai mo te kino. "Ki te tutaki koe ki te kin a tou hoa riri, ki tana kaihe ranei e atiti noa atu ana, me at a v. hakahoki e koe ki a ia." Ekoruhe 23: 4.
(b) Te hoatu i tc awiiina mo 1«' kino. "Ki tc kite koe i te kaihe o tou hoa riri e takoto ana i raro i tana pikaunga, a. 1.. ngakau-kore koe ki to whakaara, me ata xrliakaara tahi e
, n.a. " Ekoruhe 23 : f>.
( c ) Kia aroha ki tou hoa tata. "Arohaina ton hoa tata ;• 0 ko koe" Rewitikuha 19: IS.
C. Mo te korero pukp"_ka.
(a) \'i;i wli-i korero a Mohi e mohiotia ana kei tc rite tonu ki ii" ■. wliai korero a nga tangata matauranga 0 Roma me Karilu, ara ki nga whai korero a Teniotini me Hihero. Nga tauira Tiuteronomi !) me tc 28 >.
(I)) Nga Waiata a Rawiri, ko tc 23 mo tc 24 nga mea e tino paingia ana.
Apcrira 21 1 926 TK KARERE 1 J5
(c) Nga waiata me nga whakatauki a lloromona e tino kiia ana he pukapuka whai matauranga.
(d) Te pukapuka a Hopa, 0 kiia ana. "kaorc lie pukapuka whiriwhiri pai atn i roto i tc ao 0 nga pukapuka."
(e) Nga korero mo Hutu raua ko Ehetere, kci te riterite ki nga korero 0 nga pukapuka c kitea ana.
D. Mo nga korero o nehe.
(a) Ko te pukapuka nui atu 0 nga pukapuka tr.pu o nehe e mohiotis ana a c whakamihi ana lioki tc ao 1110 te nui e era korero, a pukapuka hoki he putake hoki no nga whakamara* matanga me nga whakaaturanga ko te Paipera Tawliito, e tut um ana ko tetahi o nga hua o te Wa 0 Molii.
E. Nga painga ki te tangata.
(a) He whakaaturanga whakahe i to oranga 0 te iwi 0 mea ana ko te pono ki te Atua te huarahi e piki ai, a ko tc tuku ilio ki te hara lie taki mai i te whakaraunga.
(h) Ko tc whakakahanga i ikm iwi whaka-te-nota i ma roto i tc huin.ua 0 nga toto Hiperu.
(c) Te whakaputanga mai 0 nga wahine tokorua i ora, c lino paingia una.
1. Te whaen nana te poropiti nui atn i whanau mai.
•J. Te what ;i a tc Tama :i i< Atua.
NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE HEI WHAKAUTUNGA.
1. Ilomai he tauira 0 te whakapau katoa <> te ngakau ki te korokipo ki te Atua, 0 tc whakaatu i roto 0 tc Turc Tuatahi.
•J. Homai he tino whakaaturanga i riro nga tamariki a lharaira i nga karakia whakapakoko 0 nga Ihipiana.
:;. lie aha ic mea kua pti tc whakaatu ki te ao i runga i tc tikanga 0 tc whakahua poke .'
4. Ko a wai in.ihi «• malii <■ tatou i roto i nga ra c linol
'). Whakaaturia ko tc tuku kia tutu nga tamariki lie tino tikr.ngu whakav hiu ki ;i ratou
G, Korero whakaritcritc i !«• hara 0 tc patu whakacnecne i poto ' cnei ra.
7. Korero \ kakariterite, ko tc turc tuaono «• whakaatu
WaWC ana nm tc tiaki i I ora. Ko tc tnawhiln «• uliakaaln ana
mo te oranga 1 1 ika ai kia 1 iakina.
Whakaaturia k<» !«• ni.-ihi <• h 'ala ana : iua ko te tUff
136 IE KAKKKK AprriKi 21.
tuawaru.
9. Elonoa te lure tuaina ki tc korero a bincngaro, "Ko te whakahua i nga korero katoa e rongo ai tatou kei raro rawa atu i tc vvlmkaaro rangatira."
. •• lu. Ko tohea i<' wa tahac o 1<- tangata a kaore c man atu i tetahi mca .'
11. Whakaatuna ko tc tnana hoatn i tc pai tnc tc kino o nga Karaitiana, rac tc tnahi pai ki tc liunga e kino mai ana ki a koutou, me tc aroha Jvi ton hoa lata ano ko ko koc, e tika ana kia wfhakaritea i tc Wa o Mohi.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO.
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
m ANGANGA 0 *E HAHI.
Ko tc Halii a Inn FCaraiti o nga Ra o Mm ri \<i, le tikanga lino tika atu o tona vvhakatunga i ninga i tc ao i tcnci wa. A. Whakahokinga mai o te Tohungatanga.
1. Tc Tohungatanga <> Arnna. ia' \Tga Uikona.
( b) \Tga Kai-\Vhakaako.
(c) Nga Piriti.
id) I lc nialii vvhakaritc ma tcnci ma tcnci,
2. Tc Tohungatanga o Merckihercke. i a ) Nga Apoiora!
(I>) Nga IVtcrjaka, ara Kai-lvai'w ljau. (c) Nga Tohunga Xui illai L'iriti). i«lj Nga Wliim Tckaiu c ) Nga K;ium;itua.
F) lie malti \v;bakariic ma tcnci ma tciKii. B. Na te mana o te Tohungatanga i whakaturia ai ano te Ilahi o Ihu Karaiti.
1. Xotialica i whakaturia, | I.
2. I whakaturia ki lica.
3. Xa wai i whakatu.
C. Nga tino mana whakahaere o te Hahi.
J,. Ko tc Tumuakitanga Tuatahi.
2. Ko t«' Runanga o nga Ap.otoro.
•'). Ko tc Petcriaka Whakahaere. (Kai-manaaki.)
-I. Ko uga Tumuaki Tuatahi e Whitu o nga Whitu Tckau.
Aperira 21, 1926 te karere 137
5. Ko tc Pihopa AVhakahaere (Tino Pihqpa.)
(». Ko nga mahi whakarite ma tenei ma tenoi.
D. Nga Kai Whakalrtere 0 te Takiwa.
1. Ko to Takiwa.
(a) Ko tc Tumuaki Takiwa. (10 Ko to Ruminga Xui. (c) Ko nga Peteriaka Takiwa. (d) Nga malii ma tenei ma tend.
2. Ko te Peka.
(a) Ko te Pihvpatanga. {)>) Nga Piriti. (e) Xga Kai Whakaako. (d) Nga Rikona. (0) Nga mahi ma tenei ma tenei.
D. Nga tikanga awhina whakahaere.
1. Ko t<- II ui Atauhai.
2. Ko !c Kura llapati.
.'{. Ko nun Uopu 0 tc Miutara.
4. Ko te Paraimere. ijiopu tamaiiki.)
Ta te Manawa Akoranga ki a Tatou mo ietahi Ture a te Atua
Improvement Era, Febrmry 1926, na Harold L.Snow.
Na Kru 1 . Cooler i wnakamaori<
"Rapa-tapa, rapa-tapa, rapa-tapa," tc ngaangaa a te manawa ora 0 ia tane, wahine, tamaiti lioki he tinana ora nei o raton, i mnga i te whenua,
II ■ iti rawa tc whakaaro 0 t<- tungata mo tc mate c pa ki a ia ina tu tc mahi a tenei inihini, ahakoa mo tc v. a potO, tenei mihini mnpti 0 te tinana, e pupuri nei i te oranga 0 tc tangata.
(>:ira v 1:1:1 1 j i ana tc manawa ki tc mapu i mnga i nga almatangn c pa una ki a ia. Tatou ka titiro i nga tikanga •• u tonu ;:i tana mahi. Me tana hoki e tango ana hei whakantu 1. 10 tana mahi.
Tuatahi, ko it" a nei O h.iahia ana tc manawa mo tana
mahi; kia whiwlii mil tonu ia i tc toto lici mapunga. Tuarun kia kore lie nawe, kia kore hoki 0 pangia e te mate; 1 ko tc inatoru, ko te tikanga tino nni hoki; mo whiwhi tonu ta manawa, hei oranga mo 011a wahi akc lv i to wahi whakat n n",i toto katon i puta mai i roto i ;i in
i;vS TE KARERE Aperira 21, 1920
I te putanga atu 0 te toto i te manawa, kia korereiia ki nga wahi katoa 0 te tinana kia whangaia ana wahi ki te kai v hua mai ana i roto i te toto, ki te okiliana lioki (oxygen), tera nga kcrere e rua e hopu mai ana i te walii whakatckau n if toio. ka korcretia atu ano ki nga pareparc 0 te manawa whangai ai.
1 etahi wa ka pangia tcnei tnapu maihara e to male ka kuiti liaere nga ara toto. Ka hold iho hoki i te wahi whaka- tckau nga toto e koreretia ana he whangai i nga niaihara 0 te manawa. K at a hi ka ngoikorc liaere to manawa, ki te liiahia te tinana kia omaoma. Kia piki ranei i te ara what a ki te porou 0 runga, heoi kua kore e kaha, kua ngoikore kc tenei niihini ki te mapu i nga toto whakakaha ki te tinana.
I tino rite tatou ki te manawa, e malii ana i ia ra, i ia ra, i ia marama, i ia niarama ki te v> hakapukai oranga mo tatou ko a tatou tamariki. Ko te Kai llomai i nga mea katoa, kci te liiahia kia lioatu e tatou te wahi whakatekau 0 nga hua 0 a tatou main. Ki te kore tatou e pangia c te mate hopo. Ki te kore hoki e rite atu ki nga huarahi toto kua kuiti; kua pangia ranei e te mate. K tika ana tatou kia titiro whakainua, ki nga manaakitanga hohonu c ahu mai ana i te "Manawa Nui Rawa," te putaki mai 0 nga mea pai katoa e tika nci kia whiwhi tatou.
Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti
HE KAUWHAU NA TETAH1 O NGA APOTORO
Improvement Era January I9?6 Na Robert Turnbull i whakam: ori.
Ki te Etita, tena koe. I korero an i tera rangi atu ra i te kauhau i kauhautia ai e tetehi 0 nga Apotoro 0 te Tekau ma Rua i te liui nui i tu ki te Pa Tote hei whakanui mo te pahemotanga 0 te 50 tau mai ano i te timatanga 0 te Miutara.
Ko te kauhau nei i kauhautia e Krata Orihana V. Witini 0 te Tekau ma Rua i te 7 o nga ra 0 Hune 1925. Kci to mohio an ka pai nga kai-korero 0 te Karere ki te korero i ana korero.
I korerotia hoki e te kaumatua nei e Witini te pakanga
nui c pakanga mai nei i roto i te nuinga 0 n<ra hani o Amerika.
Kci te pakanga I < Id ngj rainita 0 te hahi 0 te Pcreliipatiriana
i ' "■ ■• ; 1. v>" ' !:"! • : *?. 1 *' hi tnua, I: ) nga tangata kaorft
Aperira 21 1 926 TE KARERK 1 39
e whakapono ana i whanau mai a te Karaiti i roto i to wahine puhi, a kaore ano hoki 0 whakapono i mahi merekara te Karaiti i roto i nga tangata, e tika ana kia hatcpoa atu i te Iiahi. 1] ki ana tenei talia ko nga minita e kore e whakapono ki te atuatanga 0 te Karaiti me te pono 0 Ana mahi nierekara lea whakakorea atn raton i a ratou mahi minita.
Kci te korero tetehi taha kaore ratou <■ whakapono i whanau mai a te Karaiti i rotu i te ])iilii, a kaore hoki i mahi mcrekara. Kaore e pai kia akiakina e nga minitia Pcrchipati- riana o raton iwi kia whakapono ki nga mea lie. Ko end wahanga e rua e mahi ana kia pnta tetehi ki waho o te hahi. Ko te wahanga tuatoru e ki ana ko te hahi te mea nui. R inca ana ratou he pai rawa me mutu te ngangare, engari ko to 1110a pai mo liari ki to kooti o le hahi kia kit en ai ko tewhea te mea tika.
E mea ana a Witini kei le koa tona ngakau kaore e ngangare ana te Elunga Tapu 0 nga Ra 0 Muri Nei. Kei te whakapono katoa tatou i whanau mai a lira Karaiti i tc wahine puhi, a i mahi mcrekara hoki. I tohungia atu e Witini Id a ratou te kara nui 0 tc Miutara, i tuhituhia nei ki runga te whakatauki 0 to Miutara nei, "K tu ana matou i runga i te kotahitanga kia whai whakaaturanga ia tangata 0 matou ki 1 • Atuatanga 0 lliu Karaiti. M
I] ki ana i;i koialii anake to huarahi e mohiotia ai c tatou ko tc Karaiti he tama na tc Atua. 10 kore tatou e tin > mohio ma te korero pukapuka anake, a c kore hoki tatou c tin;) moliio ki te ha ere ki nga kura; a e kore ano hoki tatou c tino mohio In- tama a te Karaiti na te Atua i roto i rtohi a1 u tangata.
Ko to ai.i anake <• mohio ai tatOU, C kite ai tatou, ma tc
ano c whakaatu mai ki a tatou. Ko tenei matauranga c liomai ana e 1'' Aiua ki etehi o tatou i roto i t<' moemoea, i tc whakakitcngj ranei. Ivatahi tatou ka mohio.
Ka mea a Ihu ki tetehi 0 Ana akonga nui, "Ko v\ .»i an ki ;i koe!" Ka whakahokia e Pita. "Ko tc Karaiti koe, k<
tama a tc Aiua or;i." Katahi a lliu ka mc;i. "Ka koa ko
llaimona Parahona : chara hoki i '<• kikokiko, i tc toto, nana
tenei i hura U 1 e koe, engari na loku Mania i t«' rangi " I ;i
Maliu I.",: 111 IT
140
1 E KAKERK
Api i ira 21 n 20
X.i ivirn n Pita i moi.io ai- na i<i whakakifpiigii, a lt»ra
ki tatou i mohio ai ki to uiahi tatou i njra malii v moa ana
Atua kia rualiia e tatou. Koto u hakaaturanga tino nui e
•o mai i a tatou ko to V/airua Tapu !<• Kai Whakamarie i
ci ai to. Kai Whakaora ki Ana akoaga, hoi whakamahara i a
atou ki njra inea kna paliomo, a ki nga moa hoki i i.r..a i a
atov..
(Tar!a te roanga)
Ko nga Hokinga atu ki Hiona
Ko Erata A. Kiiti llarihana
A peri la 21, I 926
TE KAKI RE
141
Ko Erata A. KEED HALVERSON (A. Riiti Harihana) c> Spanish Fork, Utah. I lai mai a ia ki Akarar.a i te 90 n^ra ra o Mane i te tau IQ22 a i \\\ akaritea ki te Kareti ki te mahi kai-wiiakaako. J te 12 o n^a ra o Oketopa, K22 ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa o Haur. ki, a whakaritea ana hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa i te 1 o n*ja ra o Mei, 1923. I te hokinga atuo Angiha T. Raiti i te 120 Mei ,1925, i whakaritea ko ia te kai- whakahaere <> te Mih; 1 a i taua w a tai mai ki te taenia mai o te tumuaki hou o Tu-nuaki Hoani 1 1. I inikini, i te 10 o nga ra o Akuhata. 1925, katahi I a meinga ia te ho 1 haere a te Ti- nikim i a ia e tuiio 1 ac rt ai a i 1 •. a \ a hi a te Mil ana. 1 te lb o n^H ra o Oketora, 1925, ka whakaritta a Harihana hei Tun auk i n.o te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te \} 0 nga ra 0 Aperira ka tukua ho.'ioretia kia hoki am kr toiia kainga.
1 Id, r CI renre I . R;i«n 1
1 Irvin \V Evi
KoErata < l\l I \< I I RASMUSSEN (Rahimahana) 0 ( >g<Jen, U ah. I 1. « mai a ia i \v 20 o nga ra o I lune 1 a ka whakaritea ki te takiwa oWaikato. I re 3 o nga ra 0 P
puce- I02p ka nukuhia aln ki te takJWil n II |
1 1 ".1 ra 0 \p< rirn, 1925, Ka nukuhia ano ki tc takiwa 0 Haki
142
1 K KARERE
Aperira 21, 1920
Pei. I te 28 0 nga ra Kune, 1925, i whakaritea a Rahimahana hei I umuaki mo te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te 16 o nga ra o Oketopa ka nukuhia atu hei Tumuaki mote takiwa oTarana- ki. I tukua honoretia atu i te 1 3 o nga rn o Aptr.ra, 1925.
Ko Erata IRVIN W. EYRE (Erata Ea) 0 Minersv.lle, Ut- ah. I tae mai a ia i te 20 o nga ra o llurae, 1923, a ka whaka- ritea ki te takiwa o VVhangarei. 1 te 17 o nga ra o Hurae,
1924. ka nukuhia atu ki te takiva o Mania, a whakaritea ana hei Tumuaki mo ta.ua takiwa i ie 17 o nga ra o Akuhr.ta, 1924. I te 23 o nga ra o Oketopa, 1024, ka meiega a Ea hei kauma- tua haereere mo te takiwa o Ma hi a, a i te >2 o nga raoHunc,
1925, ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa Wairarapa. Whakaritea ana ko ia te Tumuaki o Wairarapa i te 90 nga ra o Hepete- ma, 1925, a i te 130 nga ra o Aperira, 1926, ka tukua hono- retia kia hoki atu ki H it 11a.
Ko Erata THOMAS W. HICKMAN (Hikimana) o Og-
ilen, Utah. I tae mai ia i te 27 o nga ra o Tihema, 1923, a whakaritea ana ki te Kareti ki te M. A. C. I a ia e mahi ana i te Kareti ko ia h >ki te kai-whakahaere o te mahi wluitu po- oro. I te 6 o ng 1 ra o Oketopa, T924, ka nukuhia atu ia ki Wairarapa mahi ai, a i te 3 o ng 1 ra o Hune, 1925, nukuhia mai a no ki te Kareti. I te 8 o nga ra o Oketopa, 1 925, ka whakaritea a Hikimana hei Tumuaki mo te takiwa pakeha o Manawatu, a i te 130 nga ra o Aperira, 1 926, ka tukua hono- retia atu.
Aperira 2[, 1926 TE KARERE
He Panui
Ki te Etita, Tena koe. Man e panui atu ki te HungaTapu, taku pukapuka ''Articles of Faith" i ngaro i te Hui Tau o Nu- haka. E rua nga ingoa kei roto; Atawiki Wiapo, Grace Hara- tua. Kua mate te kotiro nana i homai ki au he "keep sake''. Mehemea kua kitea me tuku mai ki te M. A. C, Hastings, H.B.
E whakataikiu atu ana au. Na Grace Haratua
HUI PARIHA 0 te takiwa 0 Haki Pei, ka tu ki
TAHORAITI, TANIWAKA,
a te 1, mete 2 0 nga ra 0
MEI, 1926.
(He powhiri tenei.)
No reira haere mai e te iwi.
Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai!
I E KARERE
Aperira 21, 1920
KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOXONCA
Ko enei et ihi o nga pukapuk;i e takoto ana kci te tari o te Miliaria hei ro- konga ki nga niea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga una e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72. Auckland. STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with^fceady Reference, Leathi New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather
Book of Mormon, Cloth
M " " , Halt' Leather
•' " " , Leather
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth
" ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather MA03I BOOKS AND TRACTS
Maori Ready Reference, Cloth
" " " , Leather
Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth
Me Nga tiimene, Leather 3 in I II
2 0 &
1 0-0 &
25-0
II 0
;<> 90 150 2-0
9-u
2 0 3-6 1-9 -6 5-0 15-0
5-J
150 1 0
4-0 5-0 ?6 4-6
" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth
u " " , Leather
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara l.'tu Nui, Cloth
u 1, u it «< « u^ Leat|lL.r
Combination of A,B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer S JNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of the Gospel
What Jesus Taught
Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton
SONG BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth
11 " " , Leather
Deseret Song Books, Cloth
" " • " , Leather
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book
DOCTRINAL AND REF£RENC£ WORKS Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmuge Vitality of Mormonism Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson Restoration of the Gospel, IJ idtsoe Joseph Smith's Teachings Life of Christ for the Young, Weed Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage Essentials in Church History, Smith Bible Ready Reference Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Morris 6-0
6 o 30 60 3-o
8-3
40 6-0 40 3-6 46 8-9 6-9 2-0
KO J. H. TINIKINI TE KA) TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A C. KORONCATA. MAS TINGS. M. P.
arotn>
j^T3^£iE£i££ZE^:i0^iO^ ^L^.i&^s-x^ '■_
Wuhanga XX Mei26, 1926 Numa V
KOREROTANGA
Ko tc Kmama Rikona Tuaiahi 0 Niu Tim
"C& KftR£R&"
WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO
Kl TE ETITA
He Marenatanga 161
Ko te Hui Nui a Ngati Porou 165
Kote Matenga o Metapere Matai 161
ko te Matenga 0 Tepora Kuru 102
Ko teTakanga Atu 0 teRongopai 163
KO NCA RONCO KORERO
He Ripoata no tc M.A.C. 171
KO NCA TUHINCA MAI
E Ono nga Take mo tc \vh;ik itekau 174
Kote Merekara o nga Karoro 177
Te Atuatanga o te Kara it i 108
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 158
MAHI KURA HAPATI
Concert Recitation 144
Intermediate Department 151
Korero a Ngakau 1 44
Maori Theological 144
Pakeha Theological 147
Postlude 143
Prelude 143
Primary Department 154
Sacrament Gem L43
NA TE ETITA
He Mihi 1/4
Ripoata Hui Tau 172
KSHW
WaHANGA 20 WENEREI. MEI 26. 1926. NAMA 5
Mazri w«rkullural Ccllcge Hastings, H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Alihana o Niu Tireni,
Halii o ihu karaiti o te hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri ISei.
Tukua juai o kuutou reta ki te Etita c Te Karcre, M.A.C., Hastings.
Ho l(! ut u mo TE KARERE i to tau e rima herein (.">/-).
KO TE TIKANGA TENEI.
file nutua utu mo tcu pcpa kc v?.ii\ hi ai.
J. 11. Tinikini, Tuniuaki Mtkana Mariana K. Ewatana, lJita. Tiala Witihua, hiita Hoa Auhina.
ho U> Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Mcha
Ko nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). Wiremu A. Koura Eru T. Kupa
MAHI KURA HAPATI. Prelude.
After Cowex.
Eiiymnj]
SACRAMENT GEM FOR JUNE, 1920 ■ in memory of I he broken Mesh
We eat the broken bread ; And witness with the cup afresh, Our faith in < Ihrist, our Read. ' Postlude.
Soft !>ft itop
^iplii^l
c l I : [I
144 TE KAIM.KK Mei :6, l<;-6
tOMCERT RECITATION I OR JUNE, 1926.
(The Beatitudes. Matt. Chapter 5, Verses .'I to 7.) Blessed are the poor in spirit; for thoir's is the kingdom of heaven.
Blessed are they thai mourn: for they shall be comforted. Blessed are (he meek: tor they shall ii»heri1 the earth Blessed arc they which do liungcr and thirsl after righteous- : for they shall be filled. Blessed are the merciful: for tlurs shall obtain mercy.
KOK.-RO A NGaKaU MO HUNE, 1926.
ITGA TAKE MO TE KOA. I a Matiu, 5: 3-7.
"Ka koa tc hunga lie fawa-korc nci tc wairua: n > raton Iioki te rangatiratanga o tc rangi.
"Ka koa te hunga c tangi ana: ka whakamarietia lioki ratou.
"Ka koa !;• hunga rigakau inaahaki: ka riro hoki i a ratou tc whenua.
"Ka koa 1c liunga o hiakai ana. c liiainu ana, ki tc tika: c makona Iioki ratou.
"Ka koa te liunga tohu tangata: c tohungia li >ki ratou."
MAORI THEOLOGICAL
Ratapu tuatahi, tttine 6, 1920. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. Na Tia/;a W. Witchira i whakamaori. Putakc: Ko nga vvhakahauhau a tc tauira i v.hakalako- toi i;> ii ti e Ehu hei mahi ma tatou.
Ta Whakaatu: I a Maka 1 : 12 ; ia liuka, 4: 1; i a Matiu,
4:1.
Tc Wa: I muri tat a mai o te iriiiinga. Te Wahi: I te'Koraha.
Te Take Nui: Ka tukua ilio <• tc Atu Ana manaakitanga ki runga i te liunga e \vh tkaatu ana i o ratou hiahia ki nga mca
Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE 145
wairua ma runga i tc taonga-karc 0 tc kikokiko.
"Mc i reira ka arahina a Ihu e tc Wairua ki tc Koraha, Ida whakamataiitauria c tc rcwera."
A l:a </': a llm tc iriiri ka liacrc In ki tc koraha, a mc ti> n >!.o ;;;;'::: mo 1;- rrha tcliau nga .a mc nga po. E korc nga karaipiturc v mca he a!. a Tana mahi, cngari ka wbakaarotia c tatou he hiahia Nona kia korc atu la i nga tangata, Ida korcro marie ai la ki Tona Matua. lie nui Ana patai ki te Matua. phara hold la i tc tamariki Liaiaaei. Kua mohio la inaiauei he mahi nui Tana hoi mahi; a ka hiahia [a kia moliio la ki i! m whakaaro 0 Tona Matua me pehea tc mahi.
K alici ai la tc korero ki tc Matua, ka kite la me whalra- kahore e la nga hiahia kikokiko.
Kahorc la i vvhakaatu ki a tatou he aha nga mca a tona Matua i korcro ai ki a la, cngari kci te mohio tatou ahakoa he aha ana m< a, i whakakaha i a la kia u ki 1c pono, 1c take kahorc la i ruarua mai i reira taca noatia Tona ripekatanga.
lie aha nga mahi i whakatakotoria mo tatou i tenci tauira ?
Koia tenci 1c Ra Noho Puku. 1 noho puku ano tatou i tenci ata, tera ranci kci te ngoikore te kikokiko? Kua noho puku 110a ilio ranci tatou, a kua noho puku ranci mc tc inoi? L] lika ana tatou mc korcro ki to tatou Matua, mcitc noho puku tatou, kia mohio ai he aim 1c mca e hiahia ana la kia mahia c laion. Mc inoi atu tatou ki a !a kia whakakabangia tatou ki te la i nga whakamatautauranga, mc tc homai i 1c hinengaro kalia po.io o te Lioilgo-pai, mc tc auhina i a lalou id te lu i 1c rcwera ma roto i :i tatou mahi pai. B tika ana tc moni c toe mai nci i a lalou i runga i to laiou korc nga <• kai me hoatu ki te tumuaki 0 te peka, mc penci hold ka tapiritia mai nga mana- akitanga.
Mcatia ngo mema o tc karaihe Ida korcro i nga manaaki- tanga kua riro mai ma roto i te noho puku, he mca pchca tc arahi i ;i rntou hi tc pono, tc hunga pangin e tc male i whakao- i,,'ii in !•• Wairun ' m i tan i ! ni hi ;i raton, ;i ' la ivliaka- ■ Li'ictia raloii i nj?.i sva 0 !■■ tiilmahatauga, ma roto katoa i te ii iho puku.
Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti
Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou A',; WitemuC Kaarau&koTokelVatim iwhakaritt
14> l u KARERfc Mei 26 i« 26
Ratapu t inrtia, liuie 13, I(J2(i.
AKORANGA 14.
"Te Tuatahi o ta Pa:ra Mahi Mihana Hicrc." Tg roanga atu
1. Te tutakitanga ano o Paora raua ko Panapa.
Ka haerc atu a Panapa i Anatioka ki Tarahu ki te whakatau i a Paoia. Main 11 : L9-25.
(b) Kotahi tan i pau i a ia ki Anatioka. Malii 11 : 25-26.
(c) I matua Luaina nga akonga lie Karaitiana Ki Anatioka.
(d) [va hacre a Paora raua ko Panapa ki lliruharama, he raea mau raw a ma nga teina i Hu:aa. Mahi 11 : 27.-30.
2. Tc hacrenga a Paora ki Anatioka me [Iiria.
(a) Ka karangatia a Panapa raua ko Paora. .Mahi 13; L-3.
(b) He karangatanga c te Atua pera me Arona. Tiroliia Hiperu 5 : 4.
(c) Te tiikunga atu o nga kai-kauwhau tuarua. Main 13: 3; Mahi 6: 6.
Whakamarania : Whakamahia nga mapi o te Paipera ki te l.ica e taea ana, hei whakaatu i nga haereerenga o nga kai- kauwhau.
Ratapu tnatoru, Huns 20, 1926
AKORANGA 15.
' ' Tuatahi o ta Pac ra Ivlahi Mihana H iere. " Te roa r. ga atu.
1. 1 te motu o Kaipcru.
(a) I\ci Llarami e kauwhau ana i nga whare karakia. Mahi 13; 4-5.
(b) Nga mca i tupono i Papaho.
1. Te tutakitanga ki te poropiti teka. Mahi 13: (!.
2. Te whakatahuritanga o [Icrekiu Paora — he
tangata whai ingoa, c kiia ana nona te putake mai o te ingoa o Paora.
3. Te whakahuatanga tuatahi o tetalii o nga ingoa
o Ilanra. Malii 13: 9.
4. Te whakakiteatunga o te mana o tc Atua. Main
Mei 26, 1926 TE KARFRE 147
13: 9-12. Whakaritea ki a Aranii 30: 37-56. 2. Ki Percka i Pamapuria.
(a) Jui wchcwchc nga wliakaaro 0 Paora raua ko Hoani, ;:,.i 0 Maka. Nga IMahi 13: 13; Mahi 15: 37-38.
(}>) Ka haere atu a Hoani ara a Maka ki Hiruliaraina.
Malii 13: 13.
Whakamarama : Kaorc i te ruarama te take 0 te wehewc-
henga. Ki te wliakaaro akc, kaore a .Maka i tino pai ki ta tc
wliakaaro 0 Paora i kite ai te whanuitanga 0 te mahi i Aliia
Maina (Asia Minor).
Ratapu tuawha, Hune ?7, 1926
AKORANGA 16.
"Taatahi 0 fct Paora Mahi Mihana Haere." Te roanga atu.
1. Kei Anatioka i Pihiria. (Tirohia te mapi.)
(a). Ta Paora kauwhau ki nga Hurai me te hnnga <> wehe ana ki te Atua. Mahi 13: 14-41.
(b) Ka whakakahoretia ta raua e nga Hurai, ka tahuri atu raua ki nga tauiwi. Mahi L3: 42-49; Mahi 28: 28; Ihaia 4!); G.
(e) Ka lu ano nga whakatoinga — ka haere atu raua i Anatioka. (d) Kei roto i te wharc karakia i Lkoniunfa. Mahi 14: 1-6.
2. A Paora raua ko Pauapa kei Raihitara. Mahi 14; 6-7.
(a) Ka wlmkaorangia tctahi tangata kopa 0 Paora.
Mahi 14; 8-10; Whakaritea ki a :\ Xiwhai 17: 7-!). (I)) Ka whakapono nga tangata, ka mea he Atua raua.
Mahi 14: IMS. (<•) Ka akina a I'anra ki te kohalu. Mahi 14: 19-20, me
Nga Mahi !): KI; \Y ha ka ril ca ki a Araini 11:7.
::. I Berepc ki Anatioka i lliria, Mahi 14: 20-28,
PAKKIIA TMLOLOvilCAL
"GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS"
First Sunday, .1 u 11 c 6, I92G.
Uniform I ast Day lesson
The example of Jesus: what ii hi. Is us do.
150 l K kakkki-; Mei l6, k,-6
Question for Ten.hers.
1. I > i v I [he later lives of Jacob and Esau justify the ucin us through which Jacob received the greater blessings?
2. Did Jacob have a faith in (Jod thai Esau did not I Did he have a judgmenl of the real life values thai Esau did no, .'
Third Sunday, Jane 20, 1926. Lesson 13. Jacob as Father and Patriarch.
Texi • Ucnesis, Chapter 28.
Objective: To show that man reaches his highest development through faith in and service to God.
Sui>p!ementary Licfercnccs: Same as in previous lesson. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: I. Jacob leaves home.
1. I lis journey down to llaran.
2. His vision of the ladder.
II. Jacob's service of Laban, his uncle. Covering a period of '10 years. IN. Jacob's return home.
1. J I is preparation to meet Esau.
2. 1 1 is encounter with the angel. .*). lie enters the promised land.
IV. Jacob's family blessings.
1. Twelve sons.
2. His journey to Egypt.
3. He succeeded to all the blessings of Abraham. Jacob was a plain man, patient, thoughtful, shrewd, and
far-seeing, lie was also gentle, affectionate and home loving, Geikie.
Questions for Teachers.
1. Point mil the greal strength of Jaeohalong three lines.
2. Considering that Jacob was really called to his great mission the night of his encounter with the angel -how many years of preparation had lie had?
lourth Sunday, June 27, 1926 Lesson 14. Joseph, as a Youth end Young Man.
Tcx1 : (:<;.<• .i ;, Chapters .7 :0.
Mei 26, 1920 TE KARHRE 1 5 1
Objective: To show how faiih in God sustains us in times ot greatest trials and icmpialions.
Supplementary References: References as given. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: [. Joseph, son of Jacob and Rachel.
1. Born at Haran, Mesopotamia.
2. Mother died at time of birth of liis brother Benjamin. :). Jacob particularly I'ond of these two boys.
I i. Joseph as a Youth.
1. A handsome and promising youth.
2. As a youlh he was given knowledge of his leadership, bul he retained his innocence and humility.
-\. His duties as a youth at home. III. Joseph sold ami carried into Egypt.
1. The people buying him dcsccndcnts of Ishmael, the half brolher of his grandfather.
2. Sold to Potiphar in Egypt.
o. Tr;iiJspJa"ited from a simp!" pastorial lii'e to a complex I if.1 with its slaves, wine, immense riches ami idol go is.
4. Grew in a firm reliance upon God.
5. His power to overcome the temptation of Potiphar \s wife.
(I. The result.
a. His life in prison. I). His liiiiil release.
Ones'; ions for Teachers.
1. Arc the purposes of God always apparent 10 his chil- dren I I live examples.
2. Docs a righteous life inspire respect even in the unrig'ir-
l\T! UMI l)UTI |)| p\im;>ii \| mi: BOOK OF MORMON"
I i»->i Sunday, ■• 111 • -. * 926 l uiioi m 1 OSt Da) I t*SOfl
Same ,-s Pakeha Theological Class. Sec page M7
Teaehi
Rj nkilful (pic I ioninfl j on w .11 !•«■ uhle in have j our 1 hi
1 E K UtERE Mei 26, I
bc€ the fine distinctions between the temptations of Jesus
ppcals which Satan made to Him. In each instant- ■ hi in class gel tlie thoughl thai Ihey, too, arc tempted, along, i.e.. their vanity, love of power, greed, disloyalty, appetites etc. Have them point out the big value of their ability i<> resist temptation! How can Ihey acquire thai ability? How docs attendance at Sunday School contribu e to (heir power <>!* re- sisting temptation Let them show how the many activities and requirements in the Church all help to s rengthen the individual to rise above temptation. Probably some may eare to recite in- cidents wherein they were tempted, and over, ome the temp!ations.
Second Sunday, Jiue 13, 1926 Lesson 12. Alma and His People.
i : Mosiah, thrptera 18, 23, 21. Objective: To teach thai though "the Lord sccth fit to < Ii.is en His people . . . nevertheless whosoever putteth his Irusl in him shall be lined up at tha hist day." (Mosiah 23:21, 22.)
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: General assignment of the texl to all tli? pupils. Special assignment :
(a) Organisation of the Church (Mosiah 18:1-18.) (l)i Alma's teachings. (Mosiah 18:18-29.)
(c) Peace in the land of Helam. (Mosirh 23:1-18.)
(d) Trouble with the Lamanites. (Mosiah 23:19-30.) (c) In bondaj e. (Mosiah 24:1-9.)
(f) Relief through prayer. (Mosiah 24:10-25.)
(g) Noah's wicked acts bring th iir own reward. (Mosiah 1!) h chapter. )
Note: Bach pf the above stor'cs given as special assign- ments sh add be briefly told by the pupils, allowing about live minutes for each, in which time die mosl interesting points can be covered, with a view oi' rousing a desire on the part of all the pupils 'o read them in full.
Have class memorize Mosiah 18:C0; 24:11, 12, 13.
1. Mention the qualities of true leadership in Alma.
2. show the fulfilment of a part of the prophecies of Abinadi in the experience., of Alma and his people.
Mei 26, 1926 Tli KARERK [53
Third Sunday, June 20, 1926 Lesson 13. Limlri and People Blessed of the Lord.
Text : Uoyiah 20th, 21st, 22nd and 25th chapters.
Obj< cLive: To leach Lha1 mighty prayer brings forth blessings from the Lord.
Supplementary References: Hebrews, 11th Chapter.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: The whole text to be assigned for reading;
Special assignments:
1. Triable broughl by priests of' Noah. (Mosiah, Chapter 20). .
2. Limhi's people in bondage. (Mosiah 21:1-22.)
3. Plans for escape. ( Mosteh 22.)
4. A glad reunion. (Mosiah 25.) Passages to be memorised: Mosiah %21 :14-15.
Questions for Teachers.
1. How were the words spoken by Abinadi further fulfilled in the experiences of Limhi and his people.
2. Discuss the value of trials in bringing a people or indi\ iduals near to < lod.
Note:- -Ask from time to time how many are regularly reading the Book of .Mormon through, and occasionally have an expression from those who are doing so as to their iriferesl in i1 lo '!!:Imi ■". if |-.o ■ iihlc, those uh ) arc not reading ii to do so.
Fcurtii Sunday, Jane 27, 1920. I.c <>ii l!. Conversion of Alum. I he Younger, and the Sons of Mosiah.
Tcx1 : Mo: iali 27 and 28th Chapters.
Objective: To leach thai Faith brings tho soul "1o behold Ilic marvelous light oi' Clod," while the power of Satan leads
ii ;nio •■■!- <'••.!■■<
! n- ■" I Ions en Preparation and Pre entation : 1. Aatfgn ! 'in MiapterN i?iven in the text to l>< read bj all the clai 1
I • lit . :
154 TE KARERH Mei 26 1^26
a. Mosiali's proclamation to unbelievers. (Mosiah
27:1-7.) 1). Alma and companions visited by an angel. (Mosiah
27:7-20.) c Alma's confession. (Mosiah 27:2*11.) (I. .Mosiali's sons desire a mission. (Mosiah '28:1-!).) 3. Passages to memorise: Mosiah 27:13-15; Mosiah 27:3G, 37.
4. In all special assignments pupils should be eneouraged to quote Prom the book those passages thai arc striking. Questions fcr Teachers.
1. Briefly discuss the fruits of genuine repentance shown by Alma and Ihc sons of Mosiah.
2. What lesson is taught by Alma the elder in his altitude
towards his son .'
PRIMARY DEPARTMENT First Sunday, Jane 5, 1926.
Unifcrm Fast Day Lesson.
The Forty Days' Fast. Text: Matt. 4:1 ; Mark 1 :12; Luke 4:1. lleferenees: ".Jesus the Christ," Talmage, pp. 127-128; "Life of Christ*' (Papini), p. p. Gl-62; Sec Superintendents' Department, this issue.
Time: Immediately following the baptism. Place: A wilderness.
Objective: To teach that through fasting and prayer we gain physical and spiritual strength.
I. Christ's preparation by the spirit, a. After His baptism. h. Through earlier experience. IT. Christ in the Wilderness.
a. Pasted forty days. }). Was an hungered.
ITT. Christ attuned physically and spiritually — a. To overcome temptation.
b. To fulfil His mission.
Mei 26, 1926 TE KARKRE 1 55
Suggestions to Teachers
Lead children to see thai by fasting we put ourselves in a :,: . e : piritual attitude and are better able to < ommunicate with our 1.; vcnly Father. It is a physical sacrifice tor a spiritual blessing. We give up sonic one thing tor some thing on a higher plane. Lead tho children to see why we have Fast Day; to sacrifice, to give to others. 1 have often thought that too often we may fas! but we forget to give. The giving should go with 1 lie self-sacrifice. We \ hould be willing to give that others might receive, .'haw the children how they can save their pennies and take to Past Meeting. How much better to help some one who than to go to so many movies or buy candy. Think of (he joy you are giving and the joy you arc getting.
Hi >w pictures, where possible, of ( hrist in the attitude of prayer. Stimulate the children for the desire to seek their Heavenly Father. If it were necessary for Chrisl to seek Him, how much need we .'
Memory Gem. "Jesus friend of little children Be a friend to me; ( Juide my cleeds and ever keep me ( Hose to Thee. " 'n teaching ihe gem, show picture of Jesus blessing little children as point of contact.
Song: "Little Purple Pansy," p. 127; D.S.S. "Nature's Easter Story/' Tally Hill, p. 37.
Res1 Exercise: Carry out the thought of sacrifice by having the children, on Fast Day, instead of eating their breakfast, fast. They c:m lake apples, potatoes, etc., or else prepare a little i i with a little lunch in, to take [he Bishop or Reli< f Society to scud to some poor person. Have Ihe children tell where they keep apples, potatoes, etc. then let Ihem run quietly and get them. put ilicin in (he box or basket. Then take them h the H \u>v.
S cond Sunday, Jane 13, 1926.
The I ast Suppi r
I ' hi" ' Luke
156 IK KARERE Mei 26, 1926
22:7-20, 24 27 ; John 13:4, 5, 12-16; 34:14-15.
References: "Jesus the Christ," p.p. 592-597; "Sunday Morning in (he Kindergarten," Lesson -17.
Time : a1 (he Fcas1 of 1 lie Passover.
Place : Jerusalem.
Objective: To teach thai by partaking of the Sacra men 1 worthily we show our willingness to remember II im and follow [lis ic.'ii lungs.
Suggestions Lo Teachers.
Review, by asking questions aboul some of Ihe things Jesus did while on earili. lie was now preparing to leave the people here and re; urn to II is Heavenly Father. Bring out the im- portance of preparation. As lie sent His disciples to prepare Tor the least, to prepare for what was coming, so we too must prepare Tor what is before us, Jesus showed in how we must be willing to follow. That is why, when He broke the bread, blessed it, and passed it. Hi1 said, "'lake, eat in remembrance of my body. Drink in remembrance of my blood." When we think of His body and blood sacrificed for us. we can't help but think of His teachings, and when we think of His teachings, we must be willing to follow. Thai is our preparation for what is to eome.
Show picture, and lead them to see that this is why we partake of the Sacrament: because Jesus asked h;s disciples to. Bring out the eommandmcnl that Jesus gave them to love one another.
Memory Gem: Tn teaching the memory gem, lend Ihc ehil- ren to tell how the Sacrament was passed to Ihcm. and by whom. How they should partake of it : clean hands, righl hand, quietly, holding cups quietly.
Just a liny piece of bread
While I eat I bow my head ; Now a sip of water clear To show I leave my Saviour dear.
~Res1 Exercise: Bring out the thought of preparation in ihe home, making it a more beautiful place in which to live.
Dramatize the things that the children may do in keeping the home tidy and clean, picking up bits from the floor, dusting books, keeping things in order, setting ihe table in an orderly
Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE \'J
way.
Let this })iin?j.- oul i he thought that is brought < »nt in ihc \v :on of how ChrLsl net the example of preparing and having things in order, by sending th 2 disciples to prepare for the Last Supper.
Third Sunday, June 20, 1926 The Death and Resurrection of Christ.
Tcxl : Matt, 27:28; Mark 15 ;1 15, 21-47; Luke 23:24; John 1(J.
References: "Jesus the Christ," Talmage, chapter '■)'->: "The Life of the Master/' John Watson, chapter 29; "Sunday Morn- ing in the Kindergarten," Lessons 48, 4i).
Objective: To teacli that by being obedienl to the laws and commandments of God, we will have Life hereafter.
Time: When Jesus was thirty-three years of age.
Place: Golgotha, just outside of city of Jerusalem. Suggestions to Teachers.
Lead the children to see the big purpose of Chirst*s death. To rhow us there is no death. Bring ou1 the beautiful side of it, tiol the horrid. Remove from the mind of the child the dread - ;' being buried, show that it is only our body thai is placed in the grave; thai our spiril has gone to a higher sphere
e caterpillar gives np its stages of life to become a butterfly. When the caterpillar goes into the cocoon, we can'1 see it. It op pears dead, lmi ii isn'1 ; it is only preparing for a higher life. Its w,\\ of preparing is to cat certain foods and to grow. Out wu,y of preparing for a higher life is to do kind deeds, be prayer ful. Remember the (cachings of Christ, to love one another, etc Help the children to sec that there is a purpose back of everj
lhiii«:.
M • ■■ - Oem: Sing or recite the last verse of " Jesus Wants f ' f< r a- h'unbej 1," I -." v'. ! ' >nu I
■■ i i ■ as last Sum]
[test L u rcisc: To brinja oul the thoivxhl of "The Awaken Dramatize Nature's awakening, the warm south wind, the r.'Uiii" of the sunbeams, the caterpillar turning into butterfly, 1 h • li
'58 TE KARERK Mei 26, 1926
tor her babies. Or, sing and dramatize "Nature Awakening"
l\<ii\ Hill. p. 37.
fourth Sunday, Jane 27, 1920
Text: Luke 24 £0-51; Hi Nephi, chapters 11, 12, 27; 28: 13-15.
'rime: After the Resurrcetijn.
Places: On the American continent and in Jerusalem.
Objective: To teach that we musl be kind to all whom we meet, if we wish to return to our Father in Heaven.
Read carefully the references! Tell the children that Christ went to talk to the people in America (the Nephitcs) and to teach them the same things He taught the people in Jerusalem. Ilis great love extended to all people no matter where they were nor the kind of people, lie set the example "Love one another."
Lead t he children to see that after Christ taught the Americans lie then ascended up into the Heaven, just as He did in Jerusalem. When His mission wras performed He re- turned to His Heavenly Father.
Lead the children to see that they, too, have a mission to perform and prepare for their return to Heaven. Things we can do: grow kinder, to be more cheerful and helpful, and to do the things that Christ taught us. Sing and name the things in the song, " Jesus Once Was a Little Child." If we do these things we can return to our Heavenly Father as Jesus did.
Memory (Jem: The same as for the previous Sunday.
Songs: The same as for the previous Sunday.
Rest Exercise: Bring out the thought that during Ihe winter nature appears to be dead. She is just sleeping; now she is awakening.
Dramatize and Sing: ''Clouds of Gray" — Patty Hill, p. 22, and "-Nature's Awakening" — Patty Hill, p. .17.
0
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI.
CORA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Ilui Atawhai.
Na Tokc Watene i whakaniaori.
AKORANGA MO HUNE.
TE WA 0 TE TAIMA I RITE AI.
(Meridian of Time).
Mei 26, 1926 TE KARfcRE 159
Wa'.i !. To Matamua. (The Forerunner.)
A. lie tuwheratanga houtanga 0 to rangi.
To L.cnga mai 0 tc \va 0 t»i puaotanga tuaiahi 0 tcnei Rongo-pai liou. Ko to iononga mai i rnnga 0 te Anahcra 0 Kaparicrc ki a Hakaraia ki t<i inatua 0 Floani Kai Iriki. (Soc "Jesus the Christ," by Ifelmagc, pp. 75-77.)
C To orauga 0 Iloani Kai Iriiri.
1. I vvnauau ia he whakatutukitanga i nga kupu a te Anahcra a Kaparicrc. Ruka 1 : 57-58.
2. I whakaingoatia ia, he ngohengohetanga ki nga wliaka- haunga a te Anahcra. Ruka I : 59-64.
3. i wiiakaritca ia, i v/hakaingoatia, i ruraakina hoki, i a ia ano c tamariki ana. Alto, me nga Kawc 84-27-28.
4. I whakatupuria ake ia i tctahi wahi koraha 0 Ilnria, i ra; ■(> i to v hakahaerenga a te wairua. Ruka 1 : 80.
5. I karangatia hoki ia c tc Atua, hoi nvatamua (fore* runner) 1110 tc Kai Whakaora. Iloani 1 : 6-8.
(i. Xa ana i iriiri tc Kai Whakaora 0 tc ao ki te wai, i raro i Tana tino whakahau. .Matin .'> : 13-17.
7. I] kiia ana lioki ko ia tc poropiti nui atn kua wliunau mai. Matin 11 : 11.
lie kai-kauwkan maia hoki. Maka I: 4-7.
!). I hereheroa, i whakamatca hoki ia mo tona !•: we i ki te lii-i i te ha -a. Matin 11 : 3-12.
10. I ara ia i to aranga mai 0 llm Karaiti. Ako. me nga Kawc. 133 : 55.
11. X.i ana i whakahoki mai tc Tohungalanga 0 Arona i nga ra 0 muri nei. Ako. me nga Kawc Wahanga 13.
L2. I whakaatu hoki ia i tona hinengaro ki a llohepa Mete mo te taha ki te Atuatanga 0 Mm Karaiti. Ako. me nga Kawc. 93: 16-17,
! '. ' • hacrc i.ihi mai ia me te Ariki ki te an a i<- tino • 1 1 mai nui. ((ie .1 1 Ako. me
1 ; ; .
NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE HEI WHaKAUTUNGA.
1. Ko tehee wahi <» tc iriiringa «> llm. no Iloani i svliaka rite '
i E k \ki-.ri-; Mei L6, 19:6
2. Whakaaturia to rarangi karaipiture c tauroko a. in i ara ;i lloani Kai Iriiri i to aranga 0 to Karaiti, a ka lac talii mai lioki me la a tc tino aranga mai.
3. Whakaaturia to tautoko, i whakaatu a [Ioani Kai Iriiri i tona hincngaro kid flohepa Mote tno te taha ki a tc Karail 1,
1. Rapua i roto i a Matin 3 to tautoko I10 tangata ngakau mai.aki a I [oani Kai I riiri.
"). I pohea tc whanaungatunga 0 lloani raua ko lltti?
(J. Na wai, a nonahca lioki a lloani Kai Iriiri i tnantfakitia ai ! Ruka 1 : 7(i-77.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO.
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
KO TE WHAEA.
"Nga waliino 0 tauria ana ko nga wahinc koi a ral.m nci tc main mii ki tc rapu me te whakaki i aua aluiatanga niaori, pou tai gata 0 waenganui e karangatia uei e t <» t * >u ko te kainga. Ka 1u ka hinga tc tangata c rite ana ki to kaha, ki tc ugoho o tana pou." \a Ida Tarboll.
A. Tc wkai tikanga 0 to main a nga whaoa.
1. I runga i tc tikanga whakatupu ake i tetahi iwi.
(a) Ko tc whakaputanga mai i etahi ki tc ao lici tangata whenua mo nga wa e takoto ake nei.
(b) Te whakaakoranga 0 nga tamariki kia rile lici tangata whenua, e tan nui ana koi runga i nga whaoa.
2. I runga i te tikanga whakatupu ake i to kain.ua.
(a) Ko tc whaea tc waenganui (center), me tc kai wha- kaoiio ake hold i nga aluiatanga katoa 0 te kai nga.
(1*) I te manawanui 0 tc whaea, ki te raataara tonu, me te tupato ki tc whiriwhiri i nga kai c tika ana, i akci ai ia ki to whakaputa mai i nga tangata ora, kaha lioki i roto i tana wlianan.
(e) Kei tc whaea te kaha ki to whakau i to nana me to toa ki roto i tana wlianan. •".. I runga i te tikanga whakatupu ake i te Ilal.i.
(a) Ko te whaea te mea tnatalii ki tc ako i tc tamaiti i 1c kot iro ranei ki t;- inoi.
Mji 26, T926 TE K.ARERE l6l
1 1») Ko te whaca hoi hoatu tuatahi ki tc tamaiti ki te kotiro i 1c \\ liakraro mo 1c Atna.
(c) Ko te whaca hci hoatu tuatahi ki te tamaiti ki te kotiro i te whakaaro mo te Rongo-pai.
(d) Ka taca c tc whaca le kitc-kia iriiria uga tamariki i tc wa c tika ana, c i*iro ai ratou hci me ma mo 1c Ifahi.
(e) V) taca e tc whaea te whakahau 1c tamaiti te kotiro i-aua lahi ko tc papa kia whakaritc i nga malii o 1c Ilalii i.ic 1c pupuii i nga turc o te Kongo-pai.
o-
KI TE ETITA.
Ko te Matenga o Melapere Matai
Ki Te Karcrc, tena koe, man e panui alu ki nga marae o lac ai koe tc matenga o la maton tamaiti o Metapcrc Matai i mate atn ki te lloliipera i Painutana. \a nga mafauranga o tc pakelia i toho kin riro ki reira, ka kiia mai c tc Taknta me l.ai-i kia tapahia, ka oca. Ka patai a Sister Wai, "Ki te riro ki tc hohipera, ka ora ranei, Takuta?" Tc uin. "Ac!" I taua rnngi tonu i mauria ;ii, ka tapahia, kaorc rawa he painga akc. [' lorn n°;.! rangi i r.iu.'i mai ka tapahia ano, ka ma ai nga .•ml;.;. Ao manga akc ko te Ratapn tc 25 o nga ro o Aj -iM-ii-a ka licino hoki, korc rawa he painga o tc taknta, Ko tc male i whakakohatu ki poto, no tc tapahanga iho ka kitcn l.na pa k arn kc ki roto.
N'ui aiu to matou pouri mo te in ate ii ga o tenci kotiro. I whanau ia 1908 i a Ihnic te 7 o nga ra. [Co ona tan kci tc 17. hci a llnnc to 7 <■ heke ihu nei ka eke ona tan ki tc 18.
I mna aiu i lona matenga i wacnganui ia c hararci ana, i to kite o era morchu i to pai n n main o tcnei koti <> nni nt.u ' » raton manaaki, Kaorc o tukunn mai ana kia hoki mni, lie i ica tohu nakn ka hoki mai. K<» te matenga nei, <• ma marama ki roira.
Kaati, i muga i to pni o nga main n tenci kotiro, nni am nga lv;i i { no mni !:; !o tnnfji Id n la i \c ra i n »hu ni, I <• nni ai u
[62 i k KARi-ki- Mci 26, ig:6
iwi i tac mai. Pake ha, Maori. K<> Wiromu Takana raua ko to Pecti, e rua o raua hokinga mai. 1 te run o o raua hokingn mai ka haere mai te llui Atawhai o Tahoraiti me uga llunga Tapu. I te takiwa o te karakia na VV. Takana i whakahacro, nga kauwhau i a Tutu, fninita o te Mihingare, raua ko Kiriniwutu. Tcna koutou c uga iwi c tac ai teTici panui. Ma te Alna tat on e tiaki, v awliina, i uga \va katoa. Ka mutu. \:i to koutou tungaam ,
TAITOKO MATAF.
lie Marenataiiga
I in Ictchi marenatanga ki te Peka o Moawhango. Ko uga ingaa o uga inatua o tc mea taaue ko te Poihipi Teehi raua ko Iviiiha Teehi. KO uga ingoa o nga inatua o te mea wahine k*> lliaia Ototi raua ko Orfwa Ototi. Ko enei tamariki i nolio talii raua mo tctehi \\a roa, kihai rawa i poke, a i tino pumau to raua arolia ki a raua. Ko te mea taaue lie Elunga Tapu, a koia te liekerilari o te Kura llapati o te Peka o Moawhango. Ko le mea wahine no vvaho i te llalii. \a te Tumuaki o tc Mihana I'.uiii i marena, ara ua Tumuaki Iloani Tinikini. Tino pai taua uiarenatanga. Kii tonu te whare i te Pakeha i te Maori hold. I te taenga mai o te Tumuaki ki Moawhango i tino miharo ia, i tino koa hoki tona ngakau mo tona taenga ki te kainga i tae luataki mai ai ia i tona mihana tuatahi ara i te tau L906. I tenci pariha tonu ia e kauhau haere ana tae noa ki tona hokinga atti ki tona kainga tupu i te tau L910, ka hoki atu ia ki ona matua. I tona taenga mai i raua li> ona tau. Tino pai ona kupu whakaniaraina, tohutohu hoki ki te hunga i marciiatia.
lleoi aim. kin ova te Hunga Tapu, ua to koutou teiiia i roto i te Rongo-pai.
TE MAKO VVI1ARKMATIII1I.
Ko te iMatenga o Tepora Kuril
No te 4 o tiga ra o Mei, 1926, i mate to matou whaea, tipu- na, a Tepora Rum, i te Hohipera o Turunda. Tona rtiate, he numonia'pneum - ia), k >tah" .. '.: i takoto tiiroro ia i tona kai-
Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE l6j
nga i Uawa, ka iriauria Ltu ki tc Hohipera I Turanga i tc Ra- tapu, 2 o Mei, tona p >tiki e Ani Morete Watene, no te Tu- rei 4 o Mei, ka hemo. Haere e kui ki okiokinga. Na tona potiki me Lna mokcpuna me tona whanau.
Ani VVatene
Ko te T^kanga atu o te Rongopai
Koia tenei ko tc mca lino whai tikanga i roto i to hunga c rapu ana i te matauranga ki nga whakahacrc a te Atua mo Ana akc mahi i niahia e la ki waenganui i roto i te ao nei; [vo tonei kaupapa kua hoha ki te Hunga Tapu. 1 te mea kua whi nga taniwha me nga pu whakaaro 0 te hunga 0 waho ki Tc Karoro. No roira ka tino ohorerc ratou ki tenoi. Ara tuatahi i taka atu te Rongo-pai 0 ilui Karaiti me te maun tapu, i unit 11 ;:i tc malii 0 tc Wairua Tapu i roto i nga tar. gat a, ajc 1 1 «*: : 1 main mcrekara, me nga mana uhakaora i nga turoro. 1 tc \va tonu i patupatua ai nga Apotoro me te llunga Tapu, koia tonu te \\a i tangohia ai tc mana 0 te Atua i runga i te whonua tac noa ki te lau L823, katahi ano ka tohungia he tAngata c te Atua liei poropiti, hoi whakahacrc i tc kingitangn 0 tc Karaiti ki runga ki te whenua, aie te whakahokinga mai i tc Rongo-pai kia kauwhautia ki te ao katoa i roto i enei ra 0 muri nei. Ko tloliepa Mete taua poropiti, ko te Ilalii 0 Ihu Karaiti taua liahi, koia c kiia aci he Ilalii Moromona.
Kaati, kua kiia ake ra i tangohia te katoa 0 te Rongo- pai, Le Diana mc era atu. K<» tcnei takanga atu he mea wliakaatu <■ nga poropiti.
"Kua poke ano tv whenua i rnro i oini lang.ttn, 1<u:i takahia aoki iiga Hue, wkakaputaia kotiu akc c ratou to tikanga i tvhakatakotoria; ivhakataka una 0 ratou to kowennta onamata. Na roira i ainga ai to ivhcnun «• tc kanga, inokomoko iho ona tnugata; aa roira i worn :ii aga langatu 0 to arheuua, n he toruti ru to hunga i toe." Ihaia 24: 5-0.
Mi- to noi ano. "I titiro ahau, aa kna whaiwhni taua haona ki tc Han; '." ,< n tnoa una ratou 0 la; Taoa n«>:iii:i to taonga niai «• to
1 i< »Ii ikuwn ki tc liungn i mi
!. in |'ii.., mm 10 >•. 11 . ri ru ui to ki igitani n i Lo li
'| UpU, ' " 1 .* 1 r . 1 « • t : 1 " : ' I ' '
Lie nni nga karaipitttre <■ whakaatn ana i le takanga atu, lv«'i konci te whakapouo 0 tc Moromona: I taka ntu le \l<
pal, .; kun .. li. ! .' • ' "... 1. ai !.': .. I lc.ll | \]
TE KAKERE Mei .0, 19*6
[Caati te vvhakamarama i to takanga atu <» to Rongo-pai mo tcnei vva. Mc whakamarama i 1;- whakahckinga uiai <> to Rongo-pai me te whakatunga i Tona kingitanga ki runga i to mata 0 tc whcnua. Koi to tu tcnei kingitanga. 1 tiraata mai te tu L830, kci te tu Lnaianei i roto i to ao katoa. Koi tc Uunga rS"ii 1 > 1 1 0 nga Ra 0 Muri Nei tc m. ma whakahacrc i tenci kingi- tanga i faro i nga tohutohu a tc Atua.
Mo llohepa Mete, ae, koia tc matakitc whiriwhiri ma 1c Atua, he nica homai ki a ia Liga toliutohu mai i tc tan [823 tae n<>a ki tc taima i tino tu ai tc kingitanga, 1820, hacre tonu nga tohutohu a tc Atua ki tc Poropiti i tc alma ara i tc tauira
0 tc whakahaere i tc kingitanga, ua tc poropiti ki tc llunga Tapu, mc tc whakawhiwhi i tc I lain ki nga mana nunui, me tc liomai i nga kii c tuwhera ai liga rangi ki tc whanau <> [haraira mehemea ka ngohegnohe ki tc Rongo-pai b 11m Karaiti. E ki ana 1c Ariki :
"Whakatakina nga tikanga 0 nga karaipituro; c nica ana hoki koutou kei refra tc ora tonu mo koutou; ko enci hci kaiwhakaaiu moku." II 0:1 ni 5: 39.
Koia i tika ai ma nga karaipiture c wliakaniarania he pono ranci c tae mai he anahera ki to kawc mai i totalii Rongo-pai mc te wliakatu i te kingitanga 0 te Atua. mo te hangangn houtanga 0 Eliruharama, me te whakapumautanga 0 Eliona ki runga ki lenci vvhenua 0 Amerika i enei i*a 0 muri nci. Ac. ko tc kupu na [Iakaraia 2: 1.-5.
"I ango akc anb oku kanoki, i litiro, na k<> telahi tangata, lie aln ruri i tona ringa. Xa ka mea ahau, E haere ana koe ki heal A ka nica ia ki ahau, Ki te whanganga i Hiruharania, kia kiten ai tonn roa, tona vvhanui. Na ka hacre tc anahera i korero ra ki ahau, a ka puta ano tetahi anahera ki te whakatau i a ia. Na ka ki tcra ki ;i ia, Ltere atu, ki atu ki tc tamaiti nci. mea am, Ka nohoia a Eliruharama, ka rite ki nga pa taiepakorc, i tc tini 0 tc tangata, 0 nga kararehe i roto: A hci taicpa :ilii ahau, c ai t;i [howa, ki a ki ;t karapoi i,oa; hci kororio ano i roto
1 a ia."
Ko tcnei poropititanga kua tutuki ki a Hohepa Mete, koia taua tamaiti i ki nci te anahera, "Hacre, mea atu ki te tamaiti
nci ." Tekau ma tvha ana tail i tc wa i puta ai tc anaiiera
ki a ia. i te tan L823. .Mai i taua tail ki tc 1S44 i puta tmn mai te Atua ki a ia ki te homai i nga vvhakahaunga mc ngo
Mji 26, 1920 TK KAh'IRK 1 63
kawcnata rao to Langahanga 0 Uimliarama kua kiia niai pa Hakaraia i tc upoko rac nga rarangi kr.a kiia akc ra, hoi \.h ikatutukitanga an i h< ki ta ll.aia Poropiti --. 2-3:
".",'. Lcuci r.kc k<i uga ra v.hi.k-mu'tiirga ka ivhalrapumautia IP r.iannga (i io [howa vyliaro ki tc tihi o cga maunga, ka whakanckchia ake iiiio l.i rurga i i:ga pul;cpukc; a ka rcre uga iwi kat< a ki rcira. Ka hacrc h. ki n_,.i iwi in. ilia, ka mca, Llaero mai, tatcu ka hacrc ki rungn ki uv maunga o Ihowa, ki tc ivharc o tc Atua o Hakopa: kia wliakaakona ai tatou c ia ki ana lira; ka hacrc k >'.:i tatou i ana huarahi; no le mca ka puta i.i .i tc turc i Qiona, aic tc kupu a Lhown i tliruharama. ' '
Kei Araciika tenei Wharc Tapu mc tc "iliona. me tc whaka- tapungj o Liiiiihai'aina c LJrata OiSon Hyde i a ia i runga i liaunga O.iwa. I tukua atu ana inoi ki te Atua kia whakatapua lliruharama lici hokinga atu mo nga Ilurai.
Kua kiia akc ra i.a tc anahcra i kawc niai tc llongo-pai o te Karaiti ki a [iohcpa Aide. Ac, tirohia Whakakitcnga 14. (>.
''I kite ano alia.i i tralii atu analicra C rcre ana i wacnganui <> tc rangi, kci a ia tc llongo-pai man tonu hci kauwhau manna ki le hungj <■ noho ana i tc whenua, ki nga Lwi katca, ki nga hapu, ki nga rco, ki Ugii liuihuiugj tangata."
Kua tac niai tana anahera ki a [Iohcpa Mete i tc tan kua kiia akc ra. I aim niai tc Kongo-pai i Liiona i tc v.alii i kiia c nga poropiti tapu c puta inai tc kupu a [howa i liiona. Koia ti1 liango-pai v kauwhau nci te Moromona, koia ano tc llahi o te Karaiti.
i.a.:,. i.io leu. 1 v..:. iu |.» koutoil tcina i te Kongo-pai polio.
ncaim'iii m:\.\T.\.
Ko ie Hut N n i a Ngatl Porou (ite roanga am)
I inn* kalia o tatou tamariki inarama ki le ivhakatakoto i tctahi kaupapa ki te aroaro <> tc Pirimia. K<» nga take enei i tape 1.1 '.< Pirimia,
.',1 • i il Iro i ii.'n tin i.i : • pai o nga w lienuo a ' • i runga tonu ra i tc kaha <» tenei iwi ki tc ahu whenua. No rcira inc waiho tenei alma o Ngati Porou hci inohiotango ma tc Kawanatanga ko pcra ano hoki ctalii atu •» ago Iwi, cngari
WO aw liina 0 tc Kau Q n.il Ollfffl
K» i TE KARERE Mei 26, 1926
2. Mc wliakanohonolio hold nga Maori kore-whcnua, peia 1 !c nga Pakcha e whakaiu honohotia ana e tc Kawaiitanga. Ij tika ana Is 1 nga Maori c wliakaaro i r.iua atu 0 nga hckc c liaerc mai Dei i Ingarangi.
.'). I\o te turanga Minita Maori mc waiha tonu i tc Piidmia, ara i te Hon. J. <!. Coates. Ina tac ki te \va e vvhakaaro ai tc Pirimia kia whakamamatia ia i tern turanga, 111c lioatu ki tctahi 0 ona hoa Maori c nolio mai ra i tc Parcmata.
4. Kia whakaturia tetalii Komihana hci tirotiro i nga lake katoa c pa ana ki uga vvlienua Maori. Ko nga taitara ki nga vvhenua Ida hohoro tc takoto marama. Kaore c taea nga reiti te kohi i te raruraru 0 ng-i taitara. Tuarua, kaore hold <• taea lie raoni te tono, i tc takoto pcnei 0 nga taitara. Ma tc puta iaai hoki 0 te raoni hci awhina i tc iwi, ka taea ai v. nga .Maori 0 ratou vvlienua tc whakapai.
5. Mc wliakaaro c tc Kawanatar.ga tctahi talma moni hci awhina i nga kura Maori. Mc whakamotuhakc tana talma mo tera take anake. Mehemea ka. rite katoa tc liopu a tc iwi i tc matauranga, penei kua korc he whakahaere penci i to Ratana c mahi mai )\\ i tc Tai llauauru. Lie nui rawa tc taumaha ki nga 1 mtua ka tac ai nga tamariki ki nga km a. \.i reira tenci tono kia awhina mai tc Kawanatanga.
6. Kia awhina te Kawanatanga i nga tangata c man ana ano tc mohio ki uga main whakairo a tc Maori, me c.a atu taonga e ngaro hacre nei inaianei.
HA WHAKAUTU TE PIRIMIA:
''Mo n«>':i kupu a Ngata c pa nei ki uga mahi whakairo a tc Maori; Ac, ka tautoko tc Kawanatanga, ara kia mau tonu t ■ mohio ki ana tu mahi kci ngaro i nga ra c hckc mai nei. Kei tc koa ahau, moku i lac mai Id tenci hui, i rongo marama ai ahan i nga tikanga katca c pa ana ki a k >ut <>u ki tc iwi Maori. Ka nui nga take kua marama mai i 0 koutau kai-korcro, kaore i marama ki an i mua. No reira kci tc koa taku ngakau. Kei tc koa ano taku ngakau nio!:u ka kite, ka mohio hoki, kei tc tipu kouton tc Maori.
"] mua akc nei ka puta nga korero, kci te heke haerc koutou tc iwi Maori. Otira naku lean i kite i tenci ra. kei tc he tana korero.
"Mo tc korero wliakaiiohi :ic' 0 i utra hoia Maori. Ivi taku
Mei 26, 1926
TE KARfcRE
I/"
niohio I* tino waimaric tc korcnga c riro mai he ivhenua i a ratou. K;> 1 i take, i taua wa i te tino nui te vvariu <» nga wlici! •■ 1. Na, k<i tc ar.e nga Pakclia i J • mate kua pa lit -i ki a ratou i mu.'i mai. Gtira, kci t-.1 whakaae an kia i-ite touu te awliina a tc Kawanatanga i te Maori i te Pakeha, na te mea i tn talii raua i i*oto i nga ra 0 tc riri kua t alia nei. Kali, taku kupii ki a koutoii ka ata tirohia tetahi huarahi e taea ai tc lioia M iori te whakanoho ki i'ii 1 1 ir^i i tetahi whenua.
"Na, aio tc talia ki nga taitara ki nga whenua. K<> te tikanga tonu tea, ma te tino marama 0 nga taitara ka taca ai te tukn lie moni ki tetahi tangata kia taea ai e ia tc wliaka- raahi tona \vl:enua. Engari, ki tc t atari tatou kia marama nga taitara, tera tatou c laia.i mo nga tan L5. Kati, he roa rawa teuei. llcoi, uu matoii c whakamatau tetahi tikanga kia vvawc tc put a he l.ioni ki nga mea 0 koutou c ngakau nui ana ki te aim whenua. 10 kore c taea te whanga kia marama rawa nga taitara. Ka popokehu tonn i roto i tera alma raruraru, kore akc he painga ki a koutou. N'a reira, waiho ma matou e rapu he tikanga awliina i a koutou, ahakoa ra kore noa e marama te takoto 0 nga taitara. E rua nga tari whakaputa moni, ho to tc Kai Tiaki Maori, mc te "Advances to Settlers Depart incut. "
"Kii nga l.ialii whakatopu i nga paanga ka whakalu >ho- rotia.
'}] > te taha l:i "c la! i:a moni mo nga kura Maori, te.*a tetahi moni 0 £30,000. Kua tonoa mai c Ngata ma kia wchia tera hei tahua m<> nga kura. Kati, te £15,000 kua wehca mo Liingj i tera take. lOngari, kci tc mohio noa atu an. kaorc c rod ka tonoa mai 1 < CI 5,0C*J »• 1 ac ana.
"Kci tc nui noa atu taku ivhakaaro kia ivhiwhi koutou me a koutou nri i te mataurauga. No reira maku ano tenci take c whiriwhiri. Kci to matou aroa 'o tetahi take in<> te matau- raii"- ' - kiia in i lie Secondary Education.
" I ; .'.u.iui, ka kite an ko tc whakaaru kci tera T.-.i c ;■ "Kaua rawa he rori v mahia ma runga i nga, ^henua M. ■ K<» tc take (i tera vvliakaaro, he kore no koutou <• utu i nga rciti.
"Otira, kua kiti au kci tc lie tera whakaaro n tc Tari,
[68 TE KARERK M<
Pai ke tne i; iro te hunga kei runga i 1;' vvhcnua. No r< mehemea ka mahia lit- pori mo koutou, mc timata 1,1 ko ulu i nga reiti. "
Ko nga whakahoki cm. i a tc Pirimia mo runga i nga take 1 takoto atu ki tona aroaro. [Co te mea nui i kitea ih6, ho te hiahia (» tc Pirihiia kia awhina ia i a taua i te iwi Maori. No reira, kia ora te I*;; unia, kia ora hold e tic] kci te
mataki te ngakau ki nga hua nunui i puta ake i to luii uui ki Tikitiki, Pepuere L6, 17. 1926.
\'A TE TIATI MEI1A.
Te Atuata.nga o \z Karaiti (Te roanga atu)
I nga Poropiti o mua te Wairua Tapu hci artlii i a ratou. i kite ano nga tangata i tc Atua, a i tail ano Tana Wairua mana ki runga i a ratou, i mua 0 tc hacrenga ciai 0 tc Karaiti. Ko tc Rongo-pai i oti i mua 0 tc mahitanga 0 tc ao, a mai ano o tc wa o to tatou matua 0 Arama e hari aoi tc tangata i runga i nga manaakitanga 0 tenei Rongo-pai i nga wa katoa i puritia ai ona ture. kii tonu tc Karaipiture i nga wliaka- aturanga na ko tc Karaiti tc Tama a tc Atua. Xa runga i tnahi merekara, mocmoea, whakakitenga, mc etehi atu mahi whakamiharo ka kite tatou La Atua ano ia.
Mehemea kihai te Karaiti i main merekara ka mohio ano talon lie Atua la i runga ano i Ana mahi ako. Mehemea kihai i ora i a la nga turoro, tc pei rewira, nga matapo, nga liana, ka kitea noatia atu e tatou kei "ko atu Tona mana i to t2 tangata,
Kore rawa lie tangata i ako i nga tangata kia muru i ngn hara 0 p ratou hoa rir}, a ka inoi atu hoki mo tc hunga e tukino ana i a, ratou, a nga una katoa c pai ai koutou ki a maliia e nga tangata ki a koutou, mc mahi ki a ratou. [vaore he tangata e inoi mo tc hunga v/kakamato i a ia, kia riiurua 0 ratou hara. Ko retehi 0 Ana ako koia nei, "Kahore he aroha 0 tetehi i rahi ake i tenei, at a kia tuku tc tangata i a ia ano kia mate mo ona hoa." Kngari lie nui ke atu Tana aroha i tcra, i te mea i koatu ia i Tona tiaana mo 0:ia In a rirj.
Me\ 26, 1926 TE KARERE 169
Ko Ana apotoro nga kai-whakaatu ki te ao, kaorc i ranea kia mohio ratou ki a la ma te Wairua Tapu. Kia ahei i a ratou te korero i nga iwi 0 te ao, 11a i kite ratou i a te Karaiti, a i pa hoki Ona tunga i ona ringa. He lice hoki te whai 0 nga iwi ki nga tohu, otira he rereke nga ahuatanga i pa ki nga apotoro, kia mohio rawa ra ano ratou, kaorc i te ranea te wliakapono anakc. I moliio hoki a Pita i mua 0 te ripekatanga ko la te Karaiti. Engari kihai ctehi 0 ratou i mohio, a no l.uiri ka hoki mai ano [a, ka mea kia wliawhai te tunga i Ona ringa, i Tana kaokao. i tukua atu hoki e la te Wairua Tapu Id a ratou i te Ra 0 te P< tekoha.
1 wailiotia iho hoki e Hohepa Mete tona whakaaturanga ki te ao ko Lhu te Karaiti, te Tama a te Atua. J korero ia i te vva i kite ai ia i te Matua raua ko te Tama i te motu rakau i Paiaiuaira takiwa 0 X11 loka. I korero ano hoki a Hohepa i te wa i kite ai raua ko Iliriiu Rikitana i a te Tama a tc Atua c noho ana i te ringa matau 0 te .Mua, a tctchi i kite ano i a te Karaiti i ri\;n;i whakakitenga i a la ki a Hohepa Mete raua ko Oriwa K-autere i tc Temepera <> Katarana. Ka korero nga Llungu Tapu i nga whakaaturanga <» nga poropiti 0 mua a ka korero hold ratou i nga whakaaturanga 0 nga poropiti <> nga ■ a 0 muii nei. Katahi tc Wairua Tapu ka whakaatu ki a ratou uranga a nj a matua he pono.
E ki na .1 anga hold tana, In i apiti
I : ' I i : ' | 1
1 a ia e fcai-tamariki ana ka tukua La i runga i te uiihana ki Pen< haw< nia. Kihai ia i 1 tohio he pono te Rongo-pai, engari i whakapono ia, heoi ka inoi ia ki tetehi whakaaturanga. K<> te iiuinga 0 tana taima i wliakapaua ki i<i tuhituhi mo te nupcpa, waiho ake te ako i te Rongo-pai. Ka whakr.toia ia e tona h >a mo tc kore s a 0 i te R >ngo 1 ai, kia mohio ai ia ki tona t ika, otira he m . ko tana mca pai he tuhi-
tuhi ia i roto i te kari 0
■
t llku 1 lg»l. I I ■ ■ ;
a te -v 1 iki
i 0 la <• inoi ana. V 1 \Vi1 iiii i a La c in<»i ana. " I '.
toku Matua, ki tc mca «• ahei, kia pahcmo atu tenci kapa i ahau, a me inu
170
1 ;•: kAKERh
G » 26
;:, il.
I kiti ano 0 Witini i tc kanolii a to tatou Ariki '. a hi . i:ioi ana, me Ic rc/e ano hoki 0 O.iu mi mat a. I pa raai 1 aroha ki a ia, a ka tangi ia i to kaha 0 tana a^olia ki to Ariki, a ko tana hiahia i runga katoa 0 nga mca 0 to ao kia 110K0 tal.i ii ki a la.
Taro ilio ka kii ' ia i to Ariki c nialika ana, ka I. acre ki Ana Apotoro c warca ana i tc 11100. Ka ata whakaohoria 0 la, ka ui atu ki a ratou kia kotalii liaora ratou e titiro. Kaoiv a tc Karaiti i riri ki a ratou, engari i maniac la i to ratou alma ugoikorc. [lacre ana ano tc Ariki ki tc inoi. Ka mutu ka liacrc atu ano ki tc whakaoho i Ana Apotoro. E torn nga pencitanga mc tc titiro vvliakatau a Witini. Mol'io ]>u ki to a!iua 0 tc kanolii 0 tc Arild. ll<i tangata roa, lie kaha, '.Jiai.i i tc tanga ngoikore penei mc tc wahinc nci c kite nci tatou i ngj poitatanga 0 otol i 0 nga kai-pcita. lie tino At ia la 1 roto i nga tangata. Engari ko Tona alma i maliaki r.pji ilio penci in;' tctchi tamaiti nci.
Kihai taro kua korc ia c kite i tc Ariki 0 inoi ana, engari kci tc korcro tahi tc Ariki mc Ana Apotoro tokotoru. Kci tc takatu ratou ki te liacrc ki tc rangi. 10 ki ana a Witini ko e rawa ia c kaha ki 10 whakamanawanui, liaerc tonu atu ia i 1 ■■ walii i piri ai ia i tua 0 tc rakau, ka hinga atu ki nga waowae
0 tc Kai Whakaora, ka inoi atu ki a la U in I. aria ia ki to raugi ara ki to wain e liacrc ai la.
I niocinoca a Witini i tuoliu ilio tc Ariki, ka ata lia ,>ai i a ia, ka awhi i a ia. Mc *c mca nci ko to Ariki tonu, i ronyn hoki ia i tc maliana 0 Tona unia, a ka mca atu tc Ariki ki a ia, "Kao;v c taku tania. kua oti cnei ta ratou mahi, ka liacrO mai ratou i a! a::. Ko koc, mc nolio ki tc wliakaoti i tan naht." lie ahakoa man tonu a Witini ki tc Ariki, ka i:i atu ki a la. "\a mc oati Koc ka liacrc atu au ki a Koc i mr.ri nci." A ka mencnicnc ki tc kata, ka ata mea atu ki a ia. "Ko tenn, kei a koc tonu."
Katalii ia ka olio akc me tc hotuhotu, ko If ata to:in.
1 tana olionga akc ka korcro ia ki tona hoa, ka mca i ]>u mai i t;' Atua. Ka whakahokia e Witini. "Kaorc c tika kia korcrotia mai tona ki a an. kci tc tino moliio aliau."
Kiliai i.. i whakaaro v- apotoro ia a roto i nga ra, engari 1
Mei 26, 1926
TE KAKERK
171
mohio ia ko ia te apotoro hinamoe, i te 1110c lioki ia i a ia i tana malii. Mai ano i taua rangi ka timatn tona kaha ki tc ako i tc Karaipiturc, 1:1c tana tuhitulii ano hold mo tc nupepa, cnga.i hi tc; nuinga 0 nga korero c aim ana ki Dga Karaipiturc. Taro akc kua tika ia kia whiwhi i tc Wairua Tapu, a put a mai ana ki a ia tc wliakaatu ko tc mocmco i puta atn ra ki a ia i aim mai i tc Ai ua.
Kaoi'c tatou katoa c whiwhi mocmoca pai pai pcra i la Witini, engari mclicinea ka iaal.i tatou i a tatou main 0 tc llahi i tiinga i tc wliakapono, e whiwhi lioki tatou i tc Wairua ri'apu, lici wliakaatu ki a tatou lie pono tc Karaipiturc mi ko tc Karaiti h ■ Tama na tc Atua. LIcoi ko te ara anakc i wliiwhi ai tatou i Ana manaakitanga mc malii tatou kia whiwhi ai.
NA TE NGOl KA
He Ripoata no te M.A.C.
Ko tetalii men whakamiharo mc tc tauhou i maliia i tc Karoti i tc M.A.C. nei i a Maelic 7. L926. Ko taua mca ko tc whaka- tura:i;.: i nga Korama Rikona tuatahi ki tenei mihana ki \iu Ti;*c:ii. I whaknturia te nei mca i raro i tc whakahacrcnga a
1 11... mil- 1 1 1111k 'ii mi- i 2 I 11 111 nasi 0 tc Karri 1 1 I i at a EIcci 1
Kc te Korama Rikona Tuatahi
Koia enci ko nga ingoa 0 nga me in a mc nga apiha 1 korama 1 ropu 1 e rua. Tc mea 1 uatahi ko < 'li irl tc Tumuaki, Wero llercwini tc Kaunihera Tuatahi, I! Amaru te Kaunih • -a Tiiaina. Tnumata Uapuhi le II
I E KARERE
Mei 20, iy20
Ko nga me ma ko: Lala Lcti, Bcrty Brunt, (haia Harris. William Christy, Lester lliaia, Henry Shortland, .James Southon, me William Moon.
Ko te Kara ma Rikona Tuarua
Tc Korama Tuarua: Ko Vili Purccll te Tumuaki, V7i Pere Amaru tc Kaunihera Tuatahi, James .Joyce te Kaunihera Tua- i-u i, William Shortlanc! tc [Iekcrctari. \\°;a mema ko Richard ; li >."ll:iu(l. Dan Sou'.hon, Joe Hapi, Kcrcsoma Isaia, John O.'msby, Rieliard Watcnc, Mita Wateac, me Dave Thompson.
Ko n,".\ 1 tamariki o enci ropu he tino lamr.riki whakaar ) nui 1:1 o rain", karangatanga, me te wliakaaro hoki he mea tin > Klu nui enci karangatanga. Km te whakaritc raton i o rat on karangatanga kia tino rite. Teia nga painga maha ka ri:.' i te mi ropu, ko tc mea tuatalii hold tend o tona litcnga i tenci mihaua.
\a Tiata Witehira i whakamaori. \a IIOR1 IIKXIHANA.
7A TE ETITA.
Ripoata Hui Tau
Ivia pa 'a re ake n ?i to tatou Hui Tail o tc t.u 1926, cngc- ri ka maharatia tenei hi i roto i o tato 1 ngakau mo nga tau maha e tak >to mai nei. Kna whakapumautia tenei lake i ro- to i o tato 1 ngakau e n >;a mahi o t -w-' h r, ara kci te wa kc tatou inaiansi. Nui at 1 te pai o te wa e takoto mai nei i to tera i h >ri akc. Nui ntu te pai mc tc koa kci roto i tenei wa e 111 mai iul mo n.»;a mea 0 tatjj e w'aakaae nei kia mahi i
Mei 26, 1Q2j TE KARERE
n#a mahi kua whakatakotoria nei c to tatoj Ariki hei mahi ma tatou. Ko te mahi nui o to tatou kai whakahaere hou a 'I umuaki Tinikini hei whakakaha i te Tohungatanga me te whakatikatika i Qga whakaiitenga me nga ropu o te hahi kia tika te whakaiitenga. kua mahia enei mahi i mua, engari i whakapaua te talma o nga kaumatua ki te kauwhau ripenata ki nga mea kua oti noa atu te iriiri. He aha te take? He ngo- ikoretanga no nga Hunga Tapu. Inaianei kua whakamatau- tauria te Hahi, kua taka atu te nuinga o nga] mea ngoikore o tatou nui atu to tatcu kaha inaianei 1 era atu v. a. Kei te taka- tu tatou kia piki ake te mahi.
Ki te whakaaro o nga mea i tec, nui atu te pai o tenei Hui Tau i era atu Hui Tau i tu ki tenei motu ki Niu Tireni nei. Tuatahi ko te pai o te rahgi tae noa ki te whakanv tu- nga o te hui. Tuarua ko te pai o te u hakahaeretanga 0 te marae, tc pai o te kai, te pai o nga teneti moe, te korenga o tenei mea o te liaurangi me era atu tu hianga. Tuatoru, te mea whakamulunga me te mea tino nui hoki ko te wairua pai o nga huihuinga me nga mea whakamiharo i rangona nei e tat m.
Ko nga huihuinga i raro i te whakahaerctanga a Tumu- aki Hoani I ii ikini, a i tu ki roto i te hobro hou i hangaia e te Hahi ki Nuhaka. 1 tu te huihuinga tuatahi 0 te Hui Tau ; te 10 a.m. o te Paraire te 2 o nga ra 0 Aperira, a man tonu ana ic wairua tae nca ki tc huihuinga whakamutunga i te ahiahi o tc Ratapu. Ko te kupu kai | | nei hi i i
katak -toila nei e Tumuaki 1 inikini, "Me tu koutou i runga i nga t ranga t. pu." Tangi ana tenei kupu i roto o nga kau- whai tanga katoa <> tc hi i.
I in.;', ia e tc komiti mo it- Temapara tetahi putihana ki te Tumuakitanga luatahi kia whakaaetia te kohi moni hei ha- nga 1 emepara K 1 Niu 1 ireni nei. 1 hainatia tenei putihana e nga I li nga I . pti a tuku; . tu ana ki te fa I ote ki a 1 umuaki Karan; ta.
I«; rua nga < ilua i pa mai ki tenei hui Ara ko te mate" k( ke i "an t. te m; lii, a ruehu Pi >mai e, me
. ■ . ■ , i . • 1 1 n . K 4l I
11 rakau i tc w
kei te mohio tatou te Hunga fapu kaore e roa ka tutaki ano
tatou ki <> tatou hoa an >ha i i"i>- 1 t< ai anga mai.
K;i 1,1 te I Imi l .r. 111 1 te tau 10 ia takiwa
0 Waiksto Ko te tumanako o te Hunga I ipi .in,, te pai *> tc I Lui I au u i«) 7 1 to I
1/4 1fc kAKERE Mci . ( , i« .0
HE MIIII.
Tera tctahi whakaaro whanni, marama, kua Idtca c te Illita i waenganui o nga kai-tango o Te Karcrc. Ko tetalii o nga llunga Tapu o Ngapuhi, ka nui tona hihiko hi te kauwhau i tenei Rongo-pai ki tc hunga <> waho. \a i runga i tona hiahia kia rongo ti1 iwi Maori kat-oa ki nga tikanga nir.iui o tenei \vhakaponr>, i runga ano i tona kore e ahci tc haere ki nga wain tawhiti o tona kainga, ka whakaaro ia inc ntu e ia he Kare/e ma etahi rangatira o era. atu hahi, i.:a tc pepa c tuku atu ana kupii kauwhau ki a ratou.
lie tauira pai tenei ma tatou ma J.o hunga katoa c hiahia ana kia piki haere tc ma hi a tc Ariki i tenei svalii o Tona maara waina.
I'] \\ Iv.kamihi ana Tc Karere ki tona rangatira ki a Ngapuki ftenata mo tonoi niahi pai ana. 'via ora koc c Xgapuhl, kia l:a!.a ki ton inahi pai.
E Ono ng* Tzke mo te Whakatekau
ric men tnngohia mai i tc improvement Era, April, 192C, ua Qi Bunker, i tuhi, n:i ngn cita i whakaritc ki tc reo Maori.
1 Pita '■': 15. "Engari whnkatapua tc Ariki, to Atua, I roto i n koutou ngakau: kia rite tonu hoki te kupu i a koutou i nga wa katoa, hoi whakahokinga atu ma koutou i nga tan gat a katoa o ui ana ki a kontou ki tc mea e tumanakohia atu noi c koutou; ki.i mahaki ano ia to ngakau, kia wchi."
Pubake Tuatahi:
K utu whakatckau ana aliau, a e hiahia ano hoki toku wairau ki te herein.
Tuatahi : hei utu i aku nam a.
Tuarua: hei hoko kni. kahu, me tc utu i te kura mo toku
whanau. Tuatoru: he mea c alici ai aliau tc kohi i nga whakapapa
o okn tupuna, me te inahi whakaora hoki i ;i ratou. Maraki 3: 10 "Maun katoatia tc whakatckau ki roto ki te ton, kia wliai kai ai toku wliaro. wailio hoki tonci hci whakainatautan moku. o ai ta [howa p oga mano, mc kahorc o tuwhera i ahau nga matapihi o to rangi ki a koutou, n ka ringitin he mauaaki ki :i koutou, a kia kore ra ano he takotorauga. "
Mei 26, T926 TE KARERE ITS
Putake Tuarua:
E utu whakatckau ana a ban he mca U i n whai li«>.-i ,-ii all an i roto i toku malii.
Tuatahi: c korc c taea e au tc main ko au anakc. Tuarua: e whakapono ana ahau Id tc kotahitanga <> nga vvhakaaro 0 nga hoa malii, a e korc e taea e au 1*' mahi ki tc korc e pera. M.-imki 3: 11 Ka riria te kaiwhakapnreho, kei he i Q ia nga hua <> t<» koutou ouuonc; e korc ano e ma re re iioa nga hua p ta koutou vvaina i tc maaia, c ai ta [hown o nga nemo. "
1 Koriniti 3: (5-7. "Xaku i whakatoo, tin Aporo i whakamakuku; na tc Atn.-i ia i moa kia tupu. lleoi he korc aoa ilia tc kaiwhakato, he korc upa iho te kaiwhakaninkuku, engari te Atua nana nci i mea kia tupn."
Putake Tuatoru:
10 utu whakatckau ana ahau lie mea no toku hiahia kia tika, kia ppno. \a toku Ariki lioki tc wabi whakatckau o aku tnca.
1 Koriniti 10: _<'». "Xn te Ariki hoki to whenua, mo oua tini mca.'-'
Ako. mc nga Kawc. 119: l. "'I mini <> tona, k<> te hunga katoa koa (•ti te whakatckau mo utu ia tau, ia tau i tc wahi whakatckau <• aga i.inni o puta ana mai ki a rat on i te tau; a ka waiho tenei hoi turc ma tnku Tohungafanga ki to iwi mo ako touu atu, e ai ta te Ariki."
Ruka Hi: 10-11. "Ko ia c pono aua i te mea aohinohi rawa, e pono :ni<» i te moa uui: ko ia o koro o tika i tc mea aohinohi rawa, c korc o tika i tc moa uui. Na ki te kali >rc i pono ta koutou mahi ki tc tuonga ho, ■ i;i wai o tuku ki u koutou to Uionga | .'"
Maraki 3: 8. " !•: tahac ranoi te tangata i ta tc Atual Heoi kua tahnctia taku o koutou. A <• men na kontou. Il«- pehea ta inatou tnhao i i :.u.' Ko nga whakatckau rn, me nga whaknhcre." Pa take Tuavvha:
h] utu whakatckau ana ahau lie mea no toku liinhia kia ii ro mai ki a au lie kainga tupu i punga i tc whenua.
Matiu 5: 5, " ICn koo tc bungu ngakau mahaki: ka rjro hoki i r ratou tc w henun. ' '
I! • :, i I !: - ' '■
Uulu .: mc ! ■
Li !<■ mca i tctnhi wnhi hci tukungn ako inn koutou, I
; hau, ki tc tango i n koutou ki ahau; kii ho ni liokl I ton ki l<
o noho ni ahau."
\ ko mc ii gn Knwi
i;(» I E K IRERE Mei 26, [926
kahoro lie wnhi 0 tc takiwa i kore ho kingitnnga; :i kahoro he kingi i korc lie takiwa, ahakon kiugitangn nui, men iti rami. A koa h am ki nga kingunuga katoa he lure; ti ki nga lure l;at(.a kcJ tenn, kei li 11. 1 tor.a raana me tona tikanga."
Ako. nio ugn [vawe. ■ > .:>. "Me tenei ano, he p. .no taku 0 mea aiu mi ki q koutoiij kei Ic pupuri te whouua i te li.ro o to kiLgi»ai:g:i " Tikitiki-o-Rangi (Cclcsdal Kingdom), ina hoki kei te rite loan i 11 ia to mchua 0 tona hangangn, a kali, re c takaki i tc ture."
Ako. me aga Kawe. 119-0. "Ko taku kr.pu tenei ki a k on ton, ki tc kahoro tokn iwi e pupnri i tenei tare (te whakatckau), c whakatapii ia\\a ranei i taua turc, nia konci hoki ka meinga ai tenei wlienna, hoi Hi. ma ki an, hei tauilga iho 1110 aku tare me aku u liaka wak:. n^a, lie una
e lino tapu rawa ai, nana, ho pono taku e mea uei ki a koutou, e k< re ia. e meingn hei Eliona ki a kouti a.''
Ako. me nga K'awe. 88: 21. "A ko te huugn kahcrc i vvhakatapua ma roto i te tare kaa hoatu e ahau ki a koutou, a ra te tare a te Knraili, ka noho ratou ki tctahi atu kingitanga, ara ki te Kii;gitanga o aga Rangi Ta Halm (terrestrial kingdom), ki te k< re i rcLa ki te kingil
0 Bangi-Nui ( teles iial kingdom)."
Putake Tuarima:
\l u t u whakatekau ana ahau ho mea no toku liiahia kin
1 ;iiiii toku ingoa i loto <> ta te Rente pukapuka o te ora.
VVhakakitenga 21: 27. "E kore ano e tomo ki rotm te.alii mea whakanoa, e malii ana ranei i te mea w lia ka rihariiia, i te teka ranei: ko tc hunga anakc kua o.i te tuhituhi ki to to Rome puknpuha o tc ora."
Ako. me ne;a Kav.o. N.~>: 5. "Kia kore ano hoki C kiloa 0 lalou ingoa, aga iugoa ranei o aga aiatua, nga ingoa ranei o nga tamariki e tuhituhi iho i roto i tc pukf.puka o Lo tare o Le Aum. c ai ta te Ariki o nga Mmiio."
Ako. me nga Kiawc. 85: !'. "A, ko ratou katoa kali, re nci o ki.cn ki roto i te pukapuka o tc whnkamaharatanga, c koio e whlwhi ki te
v alii tap i i tana ra, Engari ka patua ratou ki tvacuga, ka whiwhi n",ata- lii'.ia a rat<. a wahi mo ratoa kei roto i te hunga wliakapono-korc, ki te wahi o te auelanga mc tc teteataugj o nga nilii."
Putake Tr.aono:
E utu whakatckau ana ahau, e kore hoki ahau <■ pai kin rite ki nga ta •u c kotia a ka panga ki te ahi.
M;;tia 1".: 24-30. "Tenei ake ano totalli kupu whakaritc i makaa e ia ki a rate u, i mea ia, Ka rite te rangatiratanga o tc raugi ki tctahi tangata i rui te purapura pai ki tana maara:A i nga tangita o moc ana, ka haere mai tona koa-riri, rui iho he taru kino waonga witi, a hearo ana.'' A ka mea !e rp.ngatirr i !*i ana por.onga, "Tukua kia tupu
Mci 26. 1923 TE KARERE 177
tahi, a taea noatia tc kotinga . . . ka mea ahua ki aga
kaikokoti, Matun huihuia nga tarn, . . . kin t:ihui:i; ko te witi in me kolii ki toku vvharc witi."
Maraki ! : 1. "Ta tc mea, nana, kci tc ha ere mai tc ra rite nci <» tona ngilia kci to tc oumu; na, tc hunga vvhakakakc katoa, mc tc hunga katoa C tnahi ana i tc kino hei kakau witi; a ka taliuna e tc la mcakc 1.1'i ]),Ha, c ai ta Ilioua o llga mano. c korc alio he pakiaka. he inangn •' mahuc ki a ratou. " ....
A.ko. mc nga Kawo. ('»!: •_';:. "Nana, tenci wahi e karangntia ana ko tenci ra (tae noa ki tc hacranga r.iai 0 tc Tama a tc tangata) a he pono he ra tenci no te patunga tapu, a he 1:1 md tc whakatckau <> taku iwi; no tc mea ko ia e vvliakatekauria ana <• korc c tahr.nn (a Tana hacrengn mai)."
Ko te Merekara o nga Karoro
[Ic men tangohia mai i te llitori o te Hahi "Essentials of Church
History," pages K>7, M58, tin Hohepa 1". Mete Apatoro i tnlii.
na Eru T. Kupa i whakamaori.
TE MATE PIHAREINGA.
Kua whakaiiHitiiniiitu kc tc raumati ka tac nga Paconia ki I *t a i tc tan 1847, he tino iii lioki nga luia i puta mai 0 roto i ;i ratou kai i tanu ;ii. hcoi ano ko ctahi purapura tacwa mania 11 i. Kci tc tumanako ratou ki nga ngakinga <> tc tau L849 lici ivliakaora i a ratou i tc matc-kai. H torn nga inirn kani rakau i vvliakaturia c ratou, kotalii tc inira kauoro kanga, witi, nic era atu kai pcra. Ko tc nui <> tc walii i maliia c ratou hci niaara kai c rinia mano kotahi ran c torn tckau ma torn cka, c \\\ ;i rati o ana cka i tiria ki tc v ii i. I tc mea kua <»1 i i a ratou tc hanga he ara wai ki ;i ratou inaara lici ivliakamakuku, no rcira whakaaro ana ratou U ra c tino Kua tc kai i 8 ratou. E nui ana tc koa 0 nga lln iga Tapu, R pai ana hold a ratou luaara katoa. Ka whakawkctai ano hoki ratou ki tc Ariki me tc mahi ano I:! !■ • roto i te ngakau papaku. I nga marania 0 Mci mc 1 1 mc ku k • ■ .•! ;•■■
! in.. 0 tenci mat< ki ii| .1 1 ukinotan 1 >.|>n
kino. I !• 1 iiri 1 piharcii ilio i iiga
1.1I1.1 tuaunga ki iiga rao ao ano lie tana tino nui c tvliakatutu ana ki Ic kokiri, na ka tahuri « n. i
inaara kai Ka pan l« na \. aiii \..\a 111 k. ki I. -J .1 1 ■ i al .1.
I/,; TK KARERK Mei 26 i 26
rawa hoki c roa kua mootii, kua rito ki lc koraha titohca. K ora ai tc iwi i tc mate-kai, me inahi ra ano tetahi tikanga hci vvhaka:autu i ta ratou pakanga. Ka o!:o ako te iwi katoa, k.i uru atu ki tenoi whawhai rerekc tc tangata ki tc ugarara. Ka karia e ratou he awa karapoti i nga maara, ka tukua atu lie wai ki roto hci pupu/i atu i nga ugarara, otira kore rawa i taca. Pera ano ki tc alii koi'o rawa i noho atu. I whakama- tauria ano ki tc arai atu ruo hauliau ki tc rakau, ki Lc pumma, me era atu patu pcuci, otira ahakoa he alia tc aliua karo c v\ hakaarongia ana e tc tangata hci arai atu, kore rawa he alia. Kore rawa he painga 0 tc iwi kainga ki nga ugarara nei.
TE LIEREKARA 0 NGA KARORO.
I te mca c pan katoa nga kai, kua tau mai lie pouri nui ki nga LIunga Tapu, otira i taua wa ano ka tirohia atu pango tonu te rangi i te karoro, ka rcre mai ki runga akc i nga maara tangitangi hacrc ai. Kua wbakaaro ettihi 0 ratou he pakanga ke ano tenci, tera hoki e vvliakapana c nga karoro nga toenga mai a nga piliarcinga, otira kaore i pera. Kaorc e taca tc kautc nga rupu karoro i whakatau iho, a ka tiinata lc kai i r.ga piliarcinga, ka pakanga hoki ko nga karoro ki nga piliarcinga, kia ora ai nga kai. Ka kai ana tc karoro kin ta;1 ra ano lei tc korokoro tc ki, ka rcre atu ai ki nga awaawa inn wai ai, katalii ka ruaki mai ai ki waho, ka hoki ano ki lc pakanga. lie penci tonu tc mahi i a i:\ ra tac noa Id te pannga o nga piliarcinga. Ka wliakawhctai tc iwi i konci, no tc mca he inci'ekara tenci ki a ratou. Ac ra. tino arolia tc Ariki ki a ratou, a ka tukua mai nga karoro ano lie anahcra aroha, hci whakaora hoki i a ratou. Mai ano i taua wa tac mai ki naianci c rite ana he maun tapu te karoro ki nga Hunga Tapu 0 nga Ka o Muri Nei, lie manu whakaora hoki. He mca paahi hoki he tui'e hci tiaki i enci manu, ki te patu kari noa tc tangata ka eke he lino lie nui ki runga ki a ia. I tc L3 o nga ra 0 Hepctcma i te tau 101,'), lie Pohatu Whakamaharatanga mo tenci i hurahia ki te Pa Tote. Ko tenci pohatu e karangatia ana ko tc Pohatu Whakamaharatanga Karoro, na Mahonorai AT. laanga i hanga, lie mokopuna hoki ia na Pirikamu laanga.
Mei 26, 1926 T£ KARERE ^_____
Ki nga Kai-Kauwiiau 0 te Pei Whairangi Ki Te Karere: Mau e panui atu tenei panuitanga ki nga kai-kauwhau katoa o te Pei Whairangi.
I te mea kua kore he hui takiwa mo tatou i roto i enei marama e toru, me haere ano koutou i roto i enei rnarama e toru e tu mai nei ki nga wahi i whakaritea mo koutou i tera kuata, kia tino pai ake nga ripoata mo to tatou hui ka tu nei i a Akuhata. Na to koutou teina,
R. R. Stevenson Tumuaki Pariha
E
"He rangi tc ao k a u h i a t he huruhuru te inanu ka rere."
/
Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE
NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA
Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto aim kei te tari o te Miliaria hei lo-
konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mca e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS
Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather no
Book of Mormon, Cloth 26 & 7-6
" " " , Half Leather 90
" " " .Leather 10-0 & 150
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0
" ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MA02I BOOKS AND TRACTS
Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 20
" " , Leather 30
Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9
" " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in I II-6
" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0
" " , Leather 15-0
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-J
" " " " " " ", Leather 15 0
Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer I 0 S JNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0
What Jesus Taught 50
Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 3-6
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6
SONG BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3
" " " .Leather 6 6
Dese ret Song Books, Cloth 30
" " " , Leather 6 6
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS
Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3
Vitality of Mormonism 4-6
Sc'entific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 6-0
Restoration of the Gospel, IV idlsoe 40
Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6
Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6
Tp^us the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9
Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9
Bible Ready Reference 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 6-0
KO J H. VINIK1NI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI .1. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. P-
I^ariftp
WuhMiga XX.
o o o — o
Thine 23, 1926. -O- O O—O -
Nama VI
O O O
I
I'o le Ngsherc Ttpu
"V\ te hrpa telahi o koutou i te ma-
11 tauranga, me inoi ia ki ie Atuaf
e homai pui nei ki te katoa, kahore
hoki ana tawai mai ; a ka homai ki a
ia." Hemi 1 : 5.
o o u
o o
O-
-o — o 00 — 00 00-
0
"C& KflRSRS"
WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO
|
Wha |
rangi. |
|
|
Kl TE ETITA |
||
|
He Manaakitanga |
207 |
|
|
He Ripoata Hui Tau |
198 |
|
|
He Ripoata mo te Rao nga Whaea |
||
|
Note Kirikiri |
203 |
|
|
No Korongata |
205 |
|
|
No te Mahia |
204 |
|
|
He Ripoata no Korongata |
||
|
Ko te Matenga o Koro Waerea |
206 |
|
|
"Ma nga Hua ka Mohiotia ai" |
206 |
|
|
Mo te Ra o nga \\ haea |
205 |
|
|
KO NCA RONCO KORERO |
Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona roj
KO NCA TUHINCA MAI
E Mahi ana Tatou mo te Aha? 2(k)
He W'hak'aahua Pai 200 Ko nga Mahi a te Kura Hapati hei
1'ainga ma Tatou 2rV
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 194
MAHI KURA HAPATI
Concert Recitation 180
Intermediate Department 187
Korero a Ngakau 180
Kindergarten Department 100
Maori Theological 1 80
Pakeha Theological 183
Postlude 179
Prelude 179
Sacrament Gem 179
Kaww
WAHA.JGA 20 WErtErfEl, HUNE 23. 1926. NAMA 6
Maori Agricultural ColUge Hastings, H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o ISiu Tireni,
Hani o ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri JNei.
Tukua mai o kcutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings.
Ko te utu mo TE KAItEEE i te tau e rima hercni (5/-).
KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. file matua utu mo tou pepa ka whiwhi ai.
/. H. Timkini, Tnmuaki Mihana Mariana K. Ewatana, htita. Tiata Witdiua, hiita Hoa Awliina.
Ko te Kai-R.poata Te Tuati Mc/ia
Ko uga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers).
Wiremu A. Koura i.ru T. kupa
MAHI KURA HAPATI. Prelude.
After Cowex.
*E4z
2S
3s=mmm
t—$r
■+■*■ ~. +- +
UliltiHi
SACRAMENT GEM FOR JULY, 1926
"In memory oi' the broken flesh
We eat the broken bread ; And witness with the cup afresh, Our faith in Christ, our Head." Postlude.
1 !•: k VRERE Hune 23, 1920
tONCERT RECITATION IOK JILY, 1926.
(Luke, Pourlli Chapter, Fourth Verse.) i Jesus answered him, saying, [1 is written, That shall hot live by bread alone, but by every word of God."
K0RERQ A NGAKAU MO HURAE, 1920.
I aRuka, 4: 4. "Na ka whakahoki a Diu ki a ia, ka men. Kua oil te tuhituhi, B kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, engari i nga kupu katoa a te Atua."
MAORI THEOLOGICAL.
Ratapu tuatalii, Hurae 4, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-FUKTJ.
Na li^ia W. V/iLshira i vvliakamaori.
Putakc: Ko nga whakahauhjiu a te tauira i whikatako- toi ia nei e [h-u hei main \ ia tatou.
TA HAT ANA WHAEAMATAUTAU&ANGA I A IUJ.
He iti rawa atu te korcro mo tenei whakamatautauranga 1 atald engari kei roto ia tetal.i whakaaturanga tino nui ki a tatoii. Ko te kai-whakamatautau ko taua Rutiwha ra ano ko te xama a tc Ata nana nei i aralii letalii wahi 0 nga mano 0 te llangi, i arahi ke. Koia auo hoki te mea i whakaiaatautau nei i a I \v i i roto i te Kari 0 Erene, me te mea i hanga mi i to kohurutanga 0 Kaina. Nana hoki a Rawiri te mea k:.li 1 i ai, nana hoki a Horomona te mea matau i whakapoke, nana hoki a ilopa te mea tika i whakahe ki te aroaro 0 te Atua. Ka haere tonu a Hatana ka malii i ana whakamatautauranga i nga Ilunga Tapu me nga hunga katoa hoki e aroha ana ki te Atua.
1 whakaara pakanga a 1 hit ana ko tc take i hiahia ia kia meinga hei kingi hei tu i te turanga 0 te. Atua. Kei te hiahia. tonu ia hei kingi ia a kei te mahi tonu ia i nga wa katoa ki te whakaniate i te kaha 0 te Atua. lie mea tino matau ia a he nui nga wa e ta< a ana e ia nga Hunga Tapu tino kaha. Kei te jitiro tonu ia ki 0 tatou ngoikoretan^a, n meite kitea e ia tetahi Wahi
Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE l8l
ka huri ia ka mahi i reira e kore e mutu, a, kia peia ra ano e t:itou kia ngaro.
1 whakaritea e ia te taima hei whakamatautau i a Ihu, ko to taima i a Ihu kua ngoikorc i te noho-pukutanga. He wha- kaatu tenei i tona matauranga. E mahi te tangata ahakoa he aha hei whakaora i tona hiakai. I hokona e Ehau tona mata- muatanga mo te kai. Ka whawliai nga tangata ano he kararehe mo te kai. I matau a Hatana ki enei mea katoa i te wa i haere mai ai ia ki a te Karaiti i a Ia e hiakai ana, a ka ki ia, "Ki te mea ko te Tama koe a te Atua, kiia iho kia meinga enei kohatu hei taro."
E kite ai tatou i te kaha 0 tenei whakamatautauranga me titiro iho tatou ki a tatou ano — ano to tatou hiahia ki te kai — nui atu i era atu mea mehemea kei te hiakai tatou. Ko te ture o to tatou Hahi me utu tatou i 0 tatou whakatekau, me haere ki nga huihuinga 0 te Hahi, engari i etahi wa ka nui pea te uaua ki te waiho i a tatou mahi rawe mo enei mea. Engari meite haere tatou i runga i nga tauira kua whakatakotoria nei e Ihu mo tatou ka taea noatia iho e tatou te takahi nga whaka- matautauranga a Hatana.
Ka whakahoki a Ihu ki a Hatana ka mea, "Kua oti te tuhituhi, E kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, engari i nga kupu katoa e puta mai ana i te mangai 0 te Atua."
Kei te mohio ranei tatou tera e kore te tangata e ora meite kahore te taro o te rangi? Me matua whai aroha te tangata me te pono, katahi ia ka ora, he taro anake e kore ia e ora.
Me whakapoto e te kai-whakaako o te karaihe te taima mo te rehana kia whai taima ai nga memea o te karaihe kia korero i nga manaakitanga kua tau ki runga ki tena ki tena i puta mai nei ma roto i te noho-puku.
Ratapu tuarua, Hurae II, 1926.
Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti
Te Kaupapa: Ko te Kawenata Hou
Na Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rapata Panapu i whakarite.
AKORANGA 17.
"Ko te Tautohetohenga mo te Kotinga."
I. Ko te ritenga 0 te kotinga.
(a) Ko te kawenata i waenganui i a te Atua me nga
I S 2 1 E K A R E U K Ihi.'K- 23, 1926
Fharaia. Ken. 'hi 17: 9-10.
ku nga men e tika ana kia kotia.
1. Ko nga tamariki lane katoa e warn nga ra te kaumatuatanga. Kenehi 17: 12.
2. Ko nga taurekareka 0 etahi atu iwi i hokona niai ki te moni. Kciiclii 17 : L2-13.
.'). Ko nga tauiwi e liiahia nei kia kai i te liakari 0 te Kapcnga. Ekoruhe 12 : 4-8. (c) Ko te kawenata qio ake tonu atu. Kenehi 17: 9-13. id) Ko te tapanga me te kotfriga i a Ihu. Ruka 2: 21. (e) K<> nga tUFC a Mohi he mea wehe ke na te Karaiti. Matin 5: 17; Karatia 3: 24-26. II. Ko te tautohetohenga — nga kotinga ki nga kotinga-kore.
(a) Ko te kotinga me te whakaoranga. Mahi 15: 1.
(b) Ko te runanga i Eiruharania. Mahi 15: 2-5.
(c) Ko te karonga a Pita i nga tauiwi nga kotinga-kore. Mahi ir): 7-11.
(d) Ko te tohutohu.'ki nga tauiwi. Mahi 15: 19-29.
Ratapu tuatoru, Hurae 18, 19_6 AKORANGA 18,
Ko te Haerenga Tuarua 0 Paora i te Mihana.
Te wehenga 0 Paora raua ko Panapa.
(a) Ko to raua liiahia lie torotoro i nga hahi. 15: 2G,
(b) Ko te lake 0 te tautohe. Mahi 15: 37-39; 13: 13.
(c) Ko te haerenga 0 Panapa raua ko .Iloani Maka ki Kaiperu. .Mahi 15: 39.
1. Ko te wahi i whanau ai a Panapa. Mahi 4: 36.
2. Ko te piringa 0 nga Karaitiana 0 tera takiwa. Mahi 11 : 19-20.
(d) A Paora raua ko I lira i Iliria i Kirikia. Mahi 15:41 ; 15: 23.
I Rerepe, i Raihitara, 0 Raikonia.
(a) Te tutakitanga 0 Paora ki a Timoti. Mahi 16: 1.
(b) Ko te kotinga 0 Timoti. Main 16: 3; I. Koriniti 9: 20.
(c) Ko nga whakahaunga a te Rununga 0 Hiruharama ki nga Tauiwi ; Mahi 16: 4-5.
d ) K'o te whakakitenga ki a Paora mo Makeronia. Mahi
Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 183
16: 0-10.
Ratapu tuawha, Hurae ?5, 1926 AKORANGA 19.
Ko te Haerenga Tuarua 0 Paora i te Mihana. Te roanga atu.
. T. A Paora me ana hoa i Makeronia.
(a) I Piripi i te pa nui, Mahi 16 : 32.
(b) Ko te whakatahuritanga me te iriiringa o Riria me tona whare katoa. Mahi 16 : 14-15.
(c) Ko te peinga 0 te wairua kino e te mana 0 te Tohu- ngatanga. Mahi 16 : 16-18.
(d) Ko te patunga o Paora raua ko Hira me te makanga ki te whare herehere. Mahi 16 : 22-24 ; II. Koriniti 11 : 23-27; Whakaritea ki a Mohia 17: 12-20.
(c) Ko to raua putanga i te whare herehere. Mahi 16: 25-26 ; Whakaritea ki a Arami 14 : 25-29. II. Ko te whakatahuritanga o te kai-tiaki herehere 0 Piripi.
(a) Ko tana whakamatakutanga me nga whakahoki kupu a Paora. Mahi 16 : 27-31.
(b) Kaore e nui te whakapono anake, engari me iriiri. Mahi 16: 32-33; Korerotia te upoko 30 0 Niwhai Tuarua.
(c) Te matakutanga 0 nga kai-whakawa, no te mea he tangata a Paora raua ko lliria no te pa 0 Roma. Mahi 16: 37-40.
PAKHH4 THHOLOGICAL
"GRKAT BIBLICAL CHARACTHRS"
First Sunday, July 4, 1926.
Uniform Fast Day Lesson
The example of Jesus: what il bids us do.
.Jesus Tempted. This firsi temptation, ;is reported by Matthew (4:3, li immediately following His forty days' fast, and while He was still in the wilderness, does not occupy much space, and yet contains n message <»r the most vital importance to every Living soul. The Tempter was the same "Son <>f the Morning"
T! K. A KKKK Himc 23, I926
Lucifer— who led away one-third of tlic hosts of heaven; who led Eve in the Garden of Eden; who made Cain a murderer. As Papini says: "He suborned David the strong, corrupted Solomon the wise, accused Job the righteous before the throne of God. And Satan tempts and always will tempt ail tlie Saints, all those who love God."
He has never abandoned the determination to rule, that was behind his rebellion, nor is he yet ready to admit defeat, but is always on the watch to tempt and destroy by use of all the wiles of the most subtle of all intellects.
Out- weak points are his vantage places of attack, nor does he retire so Long as we permit him to remain.
Subtlety is shown in the time chosen for this temptation, when Jesus was alone and weakened through the long fast. "Satan had chosen the most propitious time tor his evil purpose. YYhai will mortals not do, to what lengths have men no, gone, .11 assuage the pangs of hunger? Esau bartered h s birthri{ hi for a meal. Men have fought like brutes tor food. All this Satan knew when he came to Christ in the hour of extreme physical need, and said unto Him: 'If thou be the Son of God, command these stones 1o be made bread'/' (Tahnage.)
in putting it in this way there was a double appeal to the human — the challenge of the "It"' and to extreme hunger. If we turn our thoughts inward for self-examination, we cannot fail to recognise the power of temptation, and that we, too, are subject to similar ones. As mcmbeis '>f God's Church it is our duty to offer private and family prayers morning and nighl ; to observe, for instance, this day by lasting; to pay an honest tithing even though we seem to be deprived of luxuries long desired'; to attend Sunday School or Pr:oathood meetings requiring our arising earlier than our desires indicated ; to attend Sacramenl meetings instead of taking an automobile ride.
Je as answered Satan, saying: " It is written, man shall noi liv< by bread alone, but by every word thai proceedeth out of ;hc mouth of < lod."
Do we realise thai "No man can live without heavenly bread .' " "Man does no' live by bread alone, but by love, fervour, and trulh."
The Example of Jesus: whal it bids us do.
The stress o! this lesson is on the Ias1 line above. Teachers
Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 185
should see to it that 1he preliminary presenting of the facts of the story occupies but a few minutes, and that the balance of the time shall be given to class members in answering the question "What it bids us do," testifing to the joy and other blessings which have followed obedience to His example.
Each teacher should work out illustrations and applications that shall peculiarly fit his class.
Read Tannage's "Jesus the Christ," pages 127-129 ; Farrar's "Life of Christ," pages 63-70; Papini's "Life of Christ," pages 63-66.
Second Sunday, July II, 1926
Lesson 15. Joseph as a Ruler in Egypt.
Text : Genesis, Chapters 41-50.
Objective: To show how the great are made greater by maintaining faith in God and by serving Him.
Supplementary References: References as given. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation : 1. Joseph made a ruler in Egypt second only to the king, or, as the Lord says: "Prime Minister."
1. Time, 1700 B.C.
2. His success at once manifest.
3. He married the daughter of the high priest of the god of On.
II. As ruler in preparing for the famine he visited with al! the people, advising them to save.
1. They did not follow his advice.
2. lie stored all surplus. ill. When the I amine came he —
1. Sold the people corn for money. When their money was gone he —
2. Sold the people corn for Hocks. When their Hocks were gone he —
'>. Sold the people corn tor land.
4. At the end of tin1 famine the king held .ill moneys, Hocks and land.
5. He rented back tin4 (locks and hind ;ii a good rental and made everybody happy.
1 86 TE KARERE Ilnne 23. 1926
Questions for TeacLeis.
1. Djcs religion add to the power of statesmanship* Tliustraie.
2. Name:; three points upon which .Joseph demonstrated great strength of character, and explain why.
Third Sunday, July 18, 1926 LESSON 16. JOSEPH AS SON, BROTHER AND FATHER.
Txt: Genesis, chapters 42-50.
Objective: To show how love and faith in God lifts man above littleness and sin.
I. The famine required Joseph's brothers to go to Egypt.
1. They come to him for food.
2. Joseph's temptation to punish them for revenge because of their earlier treatment of him.
3. He overcomes the temptation and as a servant of God arises above himself as Prime Minister.
II. He receives his father with great affection.
1. His kindness to him evidence of his respect for him.
2. He took Jacob's body back to the promised land for burial.
III. His sons, Ephraim and Manasseh.
In spite of environment and a pagan mother, lie rear's them in a knowledge of and faith in God. Questions fcr Teachers.
1. Is marriage outside one's own religious belief condusive of right living and happiness? (Jive reasons.
2. Give five reasons why Joseph was a great leader and why we consider him as an ideal.
Fourth Sunday, .lu'y 25. 1026 LESSON 17. MOSES' BIRTH— EARLY MANHOOD.
.Text: Exodus, Chapter 1-4.
Objective: God is mindful of His leaders and trains them long and well for really good service. I. The birth and boyhood of Moses. 1. Conditions in Egypt.
Hune 23, 1920 TE KARERE 1 87
2. Time — latter part of 16th century, or the beginning of the 15th century, B.C.
0. Israel increasing alarmingly.
4. The order to kill Israel's babies.
5. Moses saved by daughter of Pharaoh. II. The training and education of Moses.
1. In the palace of the Pharaoh.
2. As leader in his armies.
3. An associate in his wise men. II. J\ loses driven to Midian.
1. He killed an Egyption task master.
2. He fled to Midian.
3. In Midian in training for forty years.
4. Supposed to have written Genesis there.
Questions for Teachers.
1. What two incidents in the early life of Moses impress you most and why?
2. What was the effect upon Moses of living so long in Midian? Compare with the preparation required of latter-day leaders.
INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT "THE BOOK OF MORMON"
First Sunday, July 4, 1926
Uniform Fast Day Lesson
Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 183
Teachers, as they study carefully the suggestive outline will find a wealth of material out of which to construct an interesting lesson.
All boys and girls in our department know the call of hunger. When they come home from school, they are "starving,'' al- though they have eaten lunch only a few hours before. They Can realise the force of this temptation.
The lessons they can draw are numerous. They can Forego food on Fast Day to strengthen their own character and to give to the needy. They can forego seeming pleasures during the week in ov(\i>\- to bc] more efficient in school work.
1 88 TE KARERI£ Hune 23, 1926
Physic;'.! well-being upon physical properties taken into our bodies. Abstinence from harmful, or excessive amounts 01* unharml'ul foods, conducts to greater physical strength,
Boys and girls, Like Jesus, are tested also in being asked to risk their safety or to break away from their ideals or from parental counsel for pleasure or tor power. This lesson offers an excellent opportunity to discuss the everyday temptations that interfere with living up to the Gospel. Have pupils indicate what these problems are and then lead them in a discussion of
l!,om- I.
Second Sunday, July 1 I, 1926. Lesson 15. Enemies of the Church and of the Nation.
Text : Alma, Chapters 1 to 3.
Objective: To teach that "every man receive! h wages of him whom he Jisteth to obey." (Alma 3:27.)
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation.
1. The teacher might briefly state the facts concerning change in government, as related in Mosiah, 29th Chap.
2. Special assignments:
a. Nehor slays (Jideon. (Alma 1:1-15.)
b. Peace in the Church. (Alma 1:16-31.)
c. An election held. (Alma 2:1-9.)
d. Victory through faith. (Alma 2:10-20.)
e. Amlicites and Lamanites combine. (Alma 2 :21-38.)
f. The curse of the Amlicites. (Alma 3:1-19.)
g. Another victory. (Alma 8:20-27.)
3. Passages to memorise: Alma 1:25, 29, 30 Alma 2:19.
Ques! on for Teachers.
1. What strong points stand out in the life of Gideon?
2. Mention the blessings that came to Alma and his people when serving the Lord.
3. Contrast the condition of those drawn away by Amlici.
Third Sunday, Jily IS, 1926.
LESSON Hi. MISSIONARY EXPERIENCES OF ALMA
AND AMULEK.
Text: Alma 9th to 15th chapters.
Huie 23, 1926 TE KARFRE 189
Objective: To teach that those who serve the Lord even while passing through afflictions are sustained by the Spirit of the Lord.
Supplementary References: Acts 12:1-19; 10:13-34; Latter- day missionary experiences.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
1. Chapters 9 to 13 should be carefully read by the teacher, and briefly discussed in the class. Special assignments should be made to pupils of passages to be read or memorized by them, such as Alma 9:26-28; 11-21-40; 13:21-26.
2. Story of imprisonment of Alma and Amulek for special assignment. Alma 14th chapter.
3. Conversion of Zeczrom. Alma 15:1-12.
A. Alma and Amulek return to Zarahemla. Alma 15: 13-18.
In making special assignments to pupils, teachers should wisely choose those who can take longer parts, while the more timid pupil may be assigned a short part. Always make assign- ment in writing.
Questions fcr Teachers.
1. Mention some of the characteristics oc Amulek that would class him as a true servant of the Lord.
2. Discuss the twTo visits of the same angel to Alma and the progress Alma had made between these visits.
3. Relate briefly a missionary experience similar to some that Alma and Amulek had.
Fourth Sundry, July 25, 1926 LESSON 17. ALMA AS MISSIONARY.
Text : Alum chapters 4 to 8.
Objective: To teach that in giving unselfish service one can rejoice even in the midst of trials.
Suggestions on Preparations and Presentation:
1. General assignment of text for home reading.
2. The teacher should give briefly to the class the in-
structions given by Alma (Alma 5th, 6th and 71 h chapters.) a. Ask one pupil to memorize and recite Alma 5:46-51, and another to recite Alma 7:7-13.
IQO TIC KARERK Hune 23, 1^26
1). Experiences of Alma in Ammoniliah. (Alma 8:6-32.) e. Opposition of the wicked. (Aima !):1-12.) Passages to be memorized: Aima 7:23-24. Questions for Teachers.
1. .Mention striking points in Alma's testimony of the di- mity of Christ.
2. AY hat trails in Aima mark him as a great missionary?
KINDERGARTEN DKPARTMHNT First Sanday, July 4, 1926.
Uniform Fast Day Lesson.
Subject: The Temptation of Christ. — "Man shall not live by bread alone but by every word that proceeded from the mouth of God."— Matt. 4:4.
Text: Luke 4:1-8.
Objective: Prayer and purity are essential conditions in preparing for membership in the Church of Christ.
Approach: I. Christ in the Wilderness.
. 1. lie goes to prepare for His ministry.
a. Through prayer.
b. Through fastings.
2. lie becomes an hungered. The hour of danger. II. Christ Tempted by Satan.
1. Jlis appeal to the appetite (an incentive alluring.) a. ''If thou be the Son of God command that these si ones be made bread." These stones shaped like loaves. 2. Christ's Reply.
a. "Man shall not live by bread alone, but by exevy word that proceedeth out of the mouth of Cod.''
b. The reply made possible as a result.
(1) Constant prayer.
(2) Purity j*i. thought and action. III. Christ's First Victory,
1. He gains power over evil.
a. Through self-renunciation.
b. When Satan turns to a new plan of appeal.
Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 191
2. He becomes one step nearer in being prepared for His ministry.
3. He sets a powerful example for others. Application: Every one of us must get ready to help our
Heavenly Father. What do we do every night when we go to bed, and every morning when we get up, that keeps us near to our Father in Heaven? When we are angry and naughty, words want to come into our mouth. What shall we try to do?
Second Sunday, July 1 1, 1926
Topic : ' ' Father 's Day. ' '
Text: Ex. 20:12; Deu. 5:16; Luke 2:51; Proverbs 1:8, 15:5 23 :22.
References: Juvenile Instructor, May, 1919, pp. 240-243, very good material; April, 1919, p. 452; March, 1921, p. 155, extra good; Sept., 1921, p. 501.
Objective: By honouring and obeying our earthly father we are obeying and honouring our Heavenly Father. I. Our Horn's Parents. Father. II. Father's Love for Family.
1. lie sacrifices to earn a living. <;. Is awa\ from home.
!:. Works hard.
c. Out in all kinds e£ weather.
d. Away early and late.
2. .Why he works.
To earn money.
( 1 ) For food.
(2) For clothes.
(3) For shelter.
III. How We Can Show Our Love.
1. By being obedient.
a. Doing the things we know he would wanl us 1o.
b. By being the kind of boys and girls in Sunday School, etc., that he wants us to be.
2. By being helpful in the home. a. Helping with the chores.
192 TE KARERE Hune 23. 1926
(1) Carrying eoal.
(2) Carrying wood.
(3) Carrying water, b. Deeds of kindness.
(1) Getting father's slippers.
(2) Running to get the paper.
3. Patting our arms around his neck and kissing him.
Suggestions: Prepare for this Sunday as you did for Mother's Day, letting different children participate. Invite the fathers, and singsongs, recite poems, and tell stories, all of which can be obtained from the references given.
Stimulate children to appreciate fathers as much as mothers, that they, too, are God-given, only they arc not with us to watch over us as our Mothers are. They have to earn the living.
Songs: "Daddy's Home Coming," p. 38, in Francis Iv. Thomassen ; Second verse of ''Father's Care," Patty Hill, p. 74.
Let children suggest what they can do; chop wood, carry coal, etc.
Third Sunday, .July 18, 1926
Subject : Father Lehi and His Fami.y.
Text: Lesson 51, "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten"; 1 Nephi 2; 3:1-9; 5;1-U; 7:1-5; 10 8-10; 16-26-29; 17:1-6.
Objective: The Lord blesses a. id directs those who try to do His will.
Suggestions: Why did the Lord ask Lehi to preach to the people of .Jerusalem, when He knew that by doing this Lehi might endanger his life?
What is there in I Nepl.I 2:4 which causes us to feel that Lehi and his family sacrificed much to do the will of Cod? IT ->w did the Lord direct Lehi (1) in escaping the destruction of Jerusalem. (2) In finding his way to the wilderness. (3) In obtaining the lecords of his forefathers?
The Lord made Lehi a promise that he should have many descendants. What plan did He direct to make this possible? Describe the Liahona and how it operated. Name some ways in which Lehi and the members of his family did the will of God. Name one way in which Nephi listened to the wishes of his father. Which wishes were also the desires of his Faihar in Hya\cn.
Hune 23, 192J TE KARERE 192
What are some ol: the things our parents ask us to do? How do we respond1?
Songs : " 1 )addy ?s Home Coming, " * i Love at Home, ' ' Deseret S.S. Songs.
Rest Exercise: A follow up of last Sunday. Have the children tell of what their father does to earn the money with v. hich to buy their food and clothes, and the comforts of life. Dramatize the various occupations as the children tell them. For instance, at the suggestion, "My Daddy is a farmer,'' dramatize plowing the ground, sowing the seeds, cutting the grain. "My Daddy is a Shoemaker, ' ' dramatize the repairing of the shoes — cut the leather, sew it, hammer in the nails, etc.
Fourth Sunday, July 25, 1926.
Subject: Nephi Obtains Food for the Family.
Text: Lesson 52, "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten''-; I Nepl.i 16:14-32.
Objective: God blesses those who strive earnestly to help others.
Suggestions: When Nephi and his brothers were striving to obtain food the second time for the family, what accident hap- pened ?
How did the hunters Ceel when they returned to cam])?
How did the members of the family, even Lehi, express their feelings of disappointment ?
What stand did Nephi take which influenced the family (o cease their murmurings?
Wha1 evidence is there that the Lord guided Nephi in the preparation for the next hunting expedition, and also that lie directed the way he should travel.
Why did lie do this?
Describe the scene of rejoicing at camp as result of Nephi 's helpfulness.
Memory Gem: "The Family,'' Emilie Poulson, Finger Play.
The (Jem on page Hi!), "Sunday Morning in the Kintcr- grgrten," under Lesson 53 — in June.
Songs— Same as Tor last Sunday.
Res1 Rxercise: Lead the children to feel thai we arc. showing our 1ove for mother sod father when we are kind and helpful to
194 TE KARERE Hune 23, 1926
our brothers and sisters — as Nephi showed his love for his brothers.
Dramatise: —
Wheeling the baby in the pram.
Lacing little brother's boots.
Brushing little sister's hair.
Putting on brother's rubbers.
Bring him play things
MAUI HUI ATAWHAI.
KORA S. TIN1KINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawliai.
Na Toko Watene i whakamaori.
AKORANGA MO HURAE.
Te Wa 0 te Taima i Rite ai.
(Meridian cf Time). A Ihu, te Tangata 0 te Wa.
A. Tona Ingoa.
Ki nga mea whaka-te-Atua kotahj ano te lhu, ko ta te karaipiture i whakaari ai, Nona nei hold te ingoa i te Rangi a i runga hoki i te whenua ko tona tikanga nei, "Kei a tatou te Atua. " Matiu 1 : 21-23. E whakaatu ano hoki te ingoa nei he Atua ano a Ihu i mua i Tona taenga mai ki te ao, inaianei, a ake tonu atu.
Ka marama i konei te whakaatu a Apinari Poropiti 0 nga Xiwhai. Mohia 15: 1. Te ingoa o Ihu he mea tapu, a kia ahua wehiwehi ano te whakahua. Ko te whakahua hopohopo i tend ingoa, he whakaatu tena i te whai-whakaaro 0 te hunga whaka- pono, me te karakia pono.
B. Whakamarama mo te Taha ki Ona Matua.
1. Tona Matua ko te Atua. Ko tatou katoa nga tamariki whaka-te-wairua a te Atua, engari ko Ihu anake te tamaiti kotahi a te Atua a te whaea kikekiko. Hoani 1 : 14.
2. Te whaea o lhu. Ko te whaea o Ihu lie wahina (puhi) i tanmautia me tetahi tangata whakaaro-nui. I tona whakaaro lei te iti 0 tona whakapono, e kore te tika 0 TTohepa e mau i a ia ki tona kainga hei wahine ma ana. Engari kihai tona nga- kau-nui i tuku kia whakaiti ia i a ia ki te aroaro 0 nga
Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 195
tangata, pera me etahi. Otira i tae mai he anahera, he karere no te rangimarie, me te korero mai ki a Hohepa ka riro raua tahi hei kai-tiaki mo tetahi tamaiti nui atu i te mana kikokiko. A i pupuri ia i taua kai-tiakitanga i hoatu ki i a ia, e marama ana i a ia ngohengohe ki te whakarite i nga whakahaunga a te Atua i te wa i whai ai nga tangata kikino ki te whakamate i te pepi i a 11m. Ko te whaea 0 Ihu te wahine manakohia nuitia atu o nga wahine katoa. Ko te whakaatu a Ihu Mona ake ko te Tama a te Atua, engari kei te karanga ano hold Ia i a la ko te Tama a te Tangata, e whakaae ana ki te taha tangata 0 Tona whaea.
C. Tona Whanautanga.
Ko te poropititanga a Ilakopa i a ia e manaaki ana i a Hiira kei te tino mohiotia. Kenehi 49 : 10, a tera hoki pea i a Ilerora e mau ana tenei mohiotanga i nga tangata matauranga i haere mai ai me te ui haere mo te tamaiti mo Ihu. No te mea ko Ihu te "Hiro," te Tama a te Atua, te Piriniha o te Rangimarie, ka mutu ko ia anake te Kingi 0 lharaira e kingi mo ake tonu atu.
D. Whakaaturanga a nga Tangata mo te Taha ki Tona Atua-
tanga.
1. Ta Himiona i roto i te Tcmepara. Ruka 2: 27-30.
2. Ta Hoani Kai Iriiri. Hoani 1 : 29-34.
3. Ta Pita. Matin 16 : 17-17.
4. Ta Erihapeti. Ruka 1 : 39-43.
5. T^ Ana i roto i te Temepaia. Ruka 2 : 36-38.
6. Ta Maata. Hoani 11: 27.
7. Ta Anaru. Hoani 1 : 40.
8. Ta Natanahira. Hoani 1 : 47-51.
E. Whakaaturanga a nga Anahera.
1. Ta Kapariere ki a Meri. Ruka 1 : 31-33.
2. Ta te Anahera me te ope tini 0 te rangi. Ruka 2: 11-14.
F. Te Reo 0 te Matua i te Rangi. Matiu 3 : 16-17.
G. Whakaaturanga a te Wairua Tapu.
1. I tona putanga iho i te wa 0 Tona iriiringa. H. Whakaaturanga a Ihu ano.
1. Ki Tona Whaea. Ruka : 48-49.
2. Ki a Ma'ata. Hoani 1 f: 25-26.
196 TE KARERE Hune 23. 1926
8. ki te Tohunga Nui. Maka 14: 61-62.
4. Ki te tangata kapo. Hoani 9 : 30-37.
5. Ki te huihuinga tangata. Hoani 10: 17-18.
Me Tana meatanga hoki, "Kahore he aroha 0 tetahi i rahi ake i tenei ara, kia tuku te tangata i a ia kia mate mo ona lioa." Hoani 15: 13. Tei'a atu etahi kua tuku i 0 ratou oranga mo runga i etahi tikanga papai, engari ko Ia te mea tuatahi i wliai kaha ki te tango ake ano i Tona oranga. No reira ko Tona aranga mai te whakaaturanga nui rawa atu mo te taha ki Tona Atuatanga. NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE IIEI WHAKAUTUNGA.
1. Korero whakariterite — Ko Ihu he tangata i kaha nei ki te tu atu ki nga whakamatautauranga, a he Axua i taea ai e [a tenei mea te mate.
2. Whakamaramatia — i whakaatu nga rewera mo te talia ki Tona Atuatanga.
3. No tehea wa i whakaatu ai to Wairna Tapu i te Atua- tanga 0 te Karaiti ?
4. I runga i tehea huarahi i rite ai te whakaaturanga ;i nga Hunga Tapu o nga Ra 0 Muri Nei ki ta Pita?
5. Korerotia te whakapaeng-a 0 Ihu kia whakaraatea 1110 te whakaaturanga i a la ko Ia to Tama a te Atua.
6. He alia te take hoi whakaponotanga he tane, ho wahinc tahi nga anahera i roto o te ope whakaatu i te whariautanga 0 te Karaiti.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO.
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
Ko Pirikama Iaanga.
A. Nga tino putake 0 roto i tona oranga.
1. Tona whanautanga me ona matua.
2. Tona whakatupuranga, whakaakoranga wawe hoki i tona taniarikitanga.
3. Tona huangatanga tuatahi ki te tikanga "Moromona."
4. Tona urunga ki roto o te haere i heke mai i Mihuri (Missouri).
5. Tona urunga ki roto 0 te haere i heke mai i Nawuu (Nauvoo).
C>. He Apotoro ia, he Tumiiaki.
B. Nga tino nutake 0 tana mahi mihana hoki.
Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 197
1. He kai-whakaputa, ho kai-arahi no tona iwi.
2. He kai-whakatupu ake i nga tangata 0 tona takiwa-
3. He kai-whakahaere kawanatanga.
4. He Poropiti.
C. Nga tino tohu a tona ahua.
1. He whakakitenga — he kalia ki te titiro whakamua.
2. Ko te kaha ki te whakariterite.
3. Ko te mail ki tona karakia.
4. Ko te kaha ki te whakawa tika.
5. Ko tona tahuri ki te whakahoa. Nga korero a Pirikama Iaanga :
"Ki te pono koutou Id 0 kouton karangataiigaj taku knpu ki a kouton, kaore he manaakitanga i roto i te ture 0 te Tiki- tiki-o-Rangi, o te Rangatiratanga o te Atria e kore ai kouton e kore te whiwhi ki te koa."
"He kahore noa iho tatou, heoi ano ko ta te Atua tonu e whakarite ai hei pehea tatou."
"Ki te kahore te niaramatanga o te wairua 0 te Karaiti, e kore tetahi tangata e ahei ki te whakarite tika i te tikanga 0 te ora."
"Ki a all an tonu toku karakia i te ata o tetahi Mane ki tetahi, huri noa te tail, ki te kore e kore la e korero mai ki a an."
"Te putake 0 tonei oranga Ida ako tatou, a kore nei e taea te mahi engari iti nei iti nei i te wa kotahi. "
"Kaua e mahi ki te Atua no te mea kei te welii koe i te reinga, engari whakarHea nga tikanga o to karakia no te mea ma reira koe e whiwhi ai ki te oranga tonutanga. E tohu ana hold ki taua oranga kaore nei he mutunga, tera atu huarahi 18 ki te whakangaromanga."
"E mea ana ahau ki te ki atn ki a koutou e oku hoa, kei te whakapono hiaton ki nga tika katoa. Ki te kitea e koe te pono i te whenua i te rangi i te reinga ranei, no to matou akoranga, kei te whakapono matou, no maton hoki, me ta matou pupuri ano.'''
Nga whakaaturanga kei \o "Biographical Encyclopedia*^; "Historical Record," na Jensen; "History of UtalVna Whit- ney; " Life of Joseph Smith," na Cannon; "One I In ml red Years of Monnonism," na Evans.
TE KARERE Hunc 23, 1926
-0-
KI TE ETITA.
He Ripoata Hui Tau
Tc pai 0 te whakahaere 1 nga mahi, 0 te hui, te nui 0 te kai, Die era atu, koia te arolia 0 toku wairua ki Xuliaka.
No te po 0 te Wenerei ka tatu matou ki te marae 0 te hui. I taua po ano ka tatu a Ngapuhi me Waikato. Ki auina ake ko te Taite te 31 0 nga ra 0 te marama, na katalii ano ka whakaeke nga ope a Ngati Kahungunu ki Heretaunga tae atu ki te Upoko 0 te Ika, huri noa a Manawatu, Whangahui, tae atu ki Taranaki, whiti atu ki te Waipounamu. Ko nga ope katoa enej i tatu ki te marae o te Hui Tau i tn nei te 1, 2, 3, 0 nga ra 0 Aperira ki Nuhuka. E kore e taea e an te tatan nga iwi i tae mai ki te hui, i te lini a te tangata ara 0 nga uri 0 Aperahama, 0 Ehaka, 0 Hakopa, 0 Hohepa i whakaraua atn ra ki Ihipa, puta mai nei ko Manahe, puta mai nei ko Riliai i tonoa mai nei e te Atu a Ida puta mai ki waho o te whenua 0 Hiruharama e 600 tau i mua atu 0 te whanautanga 0 te Karaiti, ka rere atu ratou ko tona whanau ki te whenua o Tawhiti-Nui ara ki te whenUa o Amerika, ki reira whakatipu ai i te peka hua i korerotia ra e Hakopa i roto i tana manaakitanga i ;t Hohepa. Xa ka ti])ii ratou, ka kapi am) lioki te whenua o Tawhiti-Nui i a ratou, a lea ara nga pakanga, nga tautoiic- tohenga i waenganui i a ratou, na ka puta te whakaaro i te Atua kia tohaia mai ratou ki runga i nga moutere 0 te moae.a. K 54 nga fan i mua atu 0 te whanautanga 0 te Karaiti ka tonoa mai e te Atua a Hakota i te whenua 0 Tawhiti-Nui ki Qawaiki Moutere e tau mai nei i te Moana-Nui-a-Kiwa. lie maha nga tail i muri mai ka heke mai 0 tatou tipuna i TTawaiki ki nga moutere 0 te moana a tae noa mai ki Aotearoa nei, ara ki te pito mutunga 0 tc ao nei. I tutuki ai nga kupu a te Atua ki 0 tatou tupuna i te koraha o Maunga Hinai i mea ai ia, "Ka ])eia atu koutou e au i konei a te pito wliakamutunga ra ano te ao. A maku ano koutou e tiki atu, e kohikohi mai i nga whenua i whakamararatia atu al koutou, a maku koutou e whakahoki mai ano ki o koutou ake oneone tupu."
E te Whare 0 Iharaira, e te Hnn.^a Tapu. ko awhe'a koutou
Hune 23, 1920 TE KARERE _^ 199
kohikohi ai, whakahoki ai ki to koutou oneone tupu? Maranga, whakatika, hamama, tupeke! Hamama atu ki a Ihowa ki to Atua. Whakarahia to rco ki to karanga atu ki a la. Kua tae mai nei Taana whakaoranga ki a koe, e te Whare o Iharaira, ara 0 te Hunga Tapu 0 nga Ra 0 Muri Nei. Ko te Ava tenei o te kohikoliinga. Whakarongo ake ki nga kupu i puta mai i roto i nga mangai 0 nga pononga, a te Atua. E niea ana a Tumuaki Tinikini i roto i te Hui Tan ka hori ake nei, e ki ana ia, ''Ka koa te hunga ngakau ma, e kite hoki ratou i te kanolii a te Atua. E tu ra koutou i runga i 0 koutou turanga tapu. Kua tata te ra 0 te haerenga mai e kingi ai a te Karaiti ki vvaenganui 0 tona Hunga Tapu mo nga tau kotalii mano."
Titiro atu, e te Hunga Tapu, ki nga mahi i mania e te Tumuaki 0 te Mihana, ki nga vvhakahaere 0 nga huihui, 0 nga tohutolm ki nga api-ha v/liakahaere 0 ia peka o ia peka. He tino niiharo nga whakahaere 0 tenei Hui Tau. E mohio ana an I.e maha te hunga i kite i nga mea kaore nei ia i kite, i rongo i nga mea kaore nei ia i rongo. E tohutolm ana i nga Tumuaki Peka me ona Kaunihera kia tahuri ki te whakapai i 0 ratou peka, ki te ngaki i nga taru 0 a ratou ngakinga. Kei tipu ake nga taru kino. Ara te Puremu, te Haurangi, te Tahae, te Whakapae, te Kohuru, te Korero i nga korero paruparu (ara e puta nan mo nga wahi ngaro o te tane 0 te wahine, nga haka paruparu. He nui nga haka lie pai nga kupu, he nui nga haka he paruparu nga kupu), te Hae, te Taunu, te Tawai ki etahi, ara atu o nga mea kaore nei e tika kia mahia e tatou. E te Hunga Tapu, i mahia katoatia e tatou nga main kua korerotia f,ke nei i mua atu i to tatou uuinga ki te wai o te iriiringa no reii'a pu ano koutou i horoi ai kia ma. Koia na hoki te take i hoatu ai te Wairua Tapu ki a koutou. T tana ra kua, rite koutou ki te Temepara, kua oti te whakapaipai hei nohoanga mo te Wairua 0 te Atua. E kore hoki te Wairua o te Atua 0 nolio i roto i nga temepara poke. He alia te temepara poke? Ko te tangata kaore c taea e ia te pehi nga hihikotanga 0 te Kikokiko, ara to Puremu, te Hae, te Kohuru, te Hiahia Taikaha, te Taunu, to Tawai tetahi ki tetahi, \c aroha-kore tetahi ki lotahi, te kore-ripenata, t<- korc-muru i te lie 0 ton teina. E te Hunga Tapu, inurua 0 koutou lie e koutou ano. Kaua v whaka- maun e koutou nga he a 0 koutou teina, ka whakamaua ano
200 TK KARERK Hunc 23, 1-26
a koutou e to koutou Matua i to Rangi. Murua 0 koutou he e koutou auo me koutou ano hold e mum nei i o te hunga e he ana ki a koutou. Na e te Hunga Tapu, ka mohio koutou ma koutou ano e mahi taua mahi, ara te mum i nga hara, te peehi i te hara kei pilii ake te kino. Na koia tenei ko te tangata tohe touu ana ki te mahi i te kino. Kaore nei e taea e ia te whakamanawanui i muri iho i tona iriiringa rumaki me te hoatutauga o te Wairua Tapu. Te temepara ma ko te tangata kua taea e ia te peehi nga hihikotanuga 0 te kikokiko i muri iho i tona iriiringa rumaki. he tangata whakapono, he tangata ngakau iti, ngakau maru, he tangata ngakau iro, he tangata manawanui ki te mahi i nga mahi pai, he tangata manawanui ki te kaupare atu i nga mahi kino kei poke ia, ko te tangata e ngohengohe ana ki te whakarite i nga tikanga tapu 0 te Rongo-pai, nga whakatekau. E te Hunga Tapu, whakaritea kia polio ai ta koutou mahi ki te Atua 0 to koutou tipuna 0 Aperahama. E Iharaira, kua tae mai te kupu whakatupato i a koe, "E tu ra koutou i runga i 0 koutou turanga tapu, kia rokohina mai ai koutou e te Tama a te Atua, kua rite mo te tomo ki te whare marena." Hei konei mutu ai nga kupu. Na to koutou teina aroha,
Xa WIREMTJ KARAKA.
He Whakaahua Pai
Na R.R. Tiwinihana
Ki Te Karere. Tena ra koe. Man e panui atu enei wha- kaahua tomtom nei ki nga tangata i nga wahi katoa ka tae ai tou maramatang.
Tenei ahau tetahi o nga kaumatua i whiti mai i te Moana a Kiwa te mihi atu ki a koutou katoa. I runga i te mea kua whiwhi ahau ki etahi whakaahua pai, a kahore taea e a.u ki te whakaatu ki a koat ju i enei whakaahua, ma te kai-panui o Te Karere e whakaatu ki a koutou.
Ko tatou nga Hunga Tapu, kua wh'whi ki tetahi taonga nui, a kei te hari hoki tat >u i roto i tenei taonga kua hornai ano e te Atua ki n?;a tangata. k'o te wawati nui hoki 0 o ta- lon ngakau kia kitekite tonu i nga mea hei whakakaha i o ta- tou whakapono i roto i te Rongo i'ai nei. Kua taka mai enei whakaahua ki oku ringaiinga, hei tino mea whakakaha ki a
Hunc 23, 1926
TE KAR1-RE
201
au. No reira i runga i te ! iahia kia kz erui mea hei painga ma tatou tal i.
:a ake tatou kua tukua
Ko tt Ngohcrc Tapu
Ko te whakaahua tenei o te Ngahere Tapu, ara te wahi i whakakitea mai te Matua raua ko te Tama, i a raua ano ki a Hohepa Mete i te tau 1820. E ta te whakaaro o nga Hunga Tapu i tuturi ai te tamaiti, a Hohepa, ki te taha o te Rekau nui, ki te wahi kua whaitohungia.
O aria te roanga)
0
He Manaakitanga
Ki Te Karere, tena koe, tenei au te tuku atu nei i tenei ripoata ki te manu tangi pai hei mau mana ki te hunga e tae ai ia.
Kaati tena, no te whitu o nga ra 0 Mei ka tae mai nga kaumatua, a Erata Paapiti, Tumuaki 0 Waikato raua ko Erata Karaitihana. I tae mai raua i runga i taku tono kia tae mai ki te iriiri i taku tamaiti. Xo te wild i te i wa o nga ra katahi ka iriiria. I te wa tonu i iriiria ai te tamaiti, te putunga ake i te wai ka huri mai matou ka liok mai, katahi to tatou whaea ka karanga mai, "Taihoa, e haere kia korero atu au i taku whakaaro ki a koutou. Xo reira e penei atu ana au kia koutou, mehe kaore koutou e whakaae me haere atu au ki roto i te wai tapu a te Atua." Katahi ka utua e au, "Kei to whakaaro te
232 Tli KARERK Ilune 2J, 1^26
whiriwhiri 1110 tena wahi." Ka tautokoiia c te Tumuaki. Katahi ka matika mai to tatou whaea ka kuhu ki te wai raua ko te kaumatua. E te Hunga Tapu lie tino ruruLi rawa to tatou whaea. E hoa ma e tata ana J.e pa o te ihu ki te wkcnua mebe ki te haere tu ia. Kati, e hoa ma i te wa i tu ai ki roto i te wai, c te Hunga Tapu e tia nei ka tekau ma ono ano nga tau te tika o te tuara i a ia e tu ana i roto i te wai. Tuarua i a ia ka puea tonu akc i te wai ka kite katoa atu oiatou i to kanohi e minamina ana ki te kata. Kati tena, no te ekenga mai ki uta, i te matao o tena rangi katahi ka hoatu lie kooti liei uhi i a ia i te matao, katahi ka karanga, "llei alia te kooti, kei mea mai koutou e maeke ana a an. Kaore an i te maeko. E tia nei te wai e mea nei i runga i a an he wcewera no taku tinana, te pai o te mahana ki taku tinana."
Kati tena whakamarama, tuarua o nga whakamarama ko tenei ruruhi kua kaumatuatia ki roto i nga tikanga Maori i roto i nga Whare Wananga o o tatou tnpnna. Kaati, i tenei ra kua kore ia e mobio he taonga ano era, ina lioki e ki ana ia. i a matou e heare mai ana ki te kainga, katalii a Kirika Toheriri ka puta mai ki waho ka maiolia mai ki to tatou whaea i te mea kaore i mohiotia ka iriiria i a ia i taua taima. 1 te mea e maioha mai ana katahi ka mea mai, ''lie aim te take o te maioha? Kaore lie hiia o tera mea o te tangi. Kna ruruhitia au e kimi ana i te kaupapa o tenei mea o te arolia, kite akc nei e au ko te whakapono ki to talon Kai Whakaora ki te Tanga Nana tatou i whakaora i te ao nei." No reira e 1c Hunga Tapu nui atu to matou koa ki tenei whakawhiwhinga a te Atna i a matou ki tenei iriiringa. lie tino manaakitanga nui tenei na te Atua i tenei takiwa o to tatou niihana.
No reira me mutu iho i konei cnei whakamarama mo te Peka o Aria o te Takiwa o Waikato. Kia ora koutou te Hunga Tapu puta noa te Mihana o Xiu Tireni. Ma te Ariki koutou e tiaki hei whakakaha i nga wa katoa, Aniene. Xa to koutou teina, tungane i roto i te TCongopai.
Na HERE TANGIHAERE.
POWHIRI HUI PARIHA No te Tai Rawhiti ; hei te 3, 4 o Hurae, ki te Muriwai. No te Wairarapa : hei te I 0, 1 1 o Hurae, ki te Kohunui, Fea- therston. E powhiritia ana tatou katoa.
Hune 23, [926
TE KARF.RE
203
KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA.
Elder H. Lester Petersen huier Golden J. Webster
Ko ELDER H. LESTER PETERSON 6 Rexburg, Ida- ho. 1 tae mai a Erata Pitihana i te 20 o nga ra o Hurae, 1923, a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Wairarcpa. No le 3 o nga ra 0 Pepueie, 192^, ka whakaritea ia Lei tumuaki mo taua ta- kiwa. Ka nukuhia atu ki te Kareti i te 2 o nga ra lihema, 1924, a i te 2 o nga ra o Maehe, 1925, ka nukuhia rno ki te takiwa o Foneke. Ka tu ia hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa i te l o nga ra o Hepetema, 1925, a tukua honoretia atu ana i a Aperira te 8 0 nga ra 1920.
Ko ELDER GOLDEN J. WEBS! ER o Kaysville, Utah. I tae mai a Erata Wepiha i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira 1924, a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Whangarei. I a Mei te 26 o nga ra 1925 ka nukuhia atu ia ki te takiwa o Poneke, a i te 15 o nga ra o Pepuere 1926 ka nukuhia atu ano ki te takiwa o Otago (Waipounamu). 1 te 8 o nga ra o Hune ka tukua ho- noretia atu ia kia hoki atu ki tona kainga.
0
He Ripoata mo te Ra o nga Whaea
NO TE KIRIKIRI.
Ki te etita o Te Karere, tena koe. Man e pamii atu enei korero. I tu te huihuinga whakanui mo nga whaea i te wiki tuarua te 9 0 Mei ki te Kirikiri nei (Takiwa 0 Hauriki). I hui mai Hunga Tapu 0 Omahu me nga kaumatua 0 te Thames a
23 ]._ Tlf KARERK Hune 2:, iy:6
Ex'ata Wehitoa raua ko Erata Teira. Tino pai tana huilminga, ahakoa te nui o te ua o iaua rangi. Nga tikanga nunui o roto ko te pai o te whakahaere a te Tuinuaki a Tiki Reihana mc tona kaanihera a te Wirihana Watene, me nga tamariki hoki i nga mahi i whakaritca ma ratou. Ko te tu-a-rarangi a nga tamariki tane, kotiro, me nga ret;::, M-O-T-TI-E-R, he pepa, he mea t&pahi, me te korero ano tena, tena, i tana raraagi. Me nga waiata hoki e rite ana. Te tuhanga o nga putiputi ki nga whaea. Te 1 meneti ata noho whakahonore mo nga whaea kua wehe ki tna o te arai. Toko-ono nga whaea i tu ki te korero ko Sister liaira Te Aue, Panikena, Whakamura, Kahukore, me Rose Watene. He nui te pai me te aroha o a ratou kupu i liaere mo runga i nga mahi a o ratou whaea, ki te tiaki me te mana- wanui hoki i te ao, i te po, ki te whakatupu ake i a ratou tamariki, me era atu painga, me te tangi ano o etahi. I tu hoki nga kaumatua a Erata Yv'eliitoa, he nui ana korero. Ko te whaea te hoa pai atu o te tamaiti, kotiro ranei. Ahakoa he aha te raruraru, ka piripono tonu ia ki tona tamaiti. Koia noki te kai-whakamarie ina tupono ia ki te raruraru. Ko tetahi o nga ture nui i homai, kia whakahonore tatou i o tatou wlmea. Ko Erata Tarapata, lie tautoko, he nui tona nama ki tona whaea. E whakaae ana hoki ia, kaore te whaea e moe ana ki te haere tana tamaiti, kotiro ranei, i te po ki nga kanikani ; kei te oho tonu ona mahara ki te rongo kau ki tetahi haruru, ka karanga ia, "Ko koe tena?" e mea kia moliio ra ano, ia, katahi ano ka tatu ona wliakaaro. I tu hoki a Erata Roiti raua ko Ahitarama, pera ano te aronga o a raua korero. I puta hoki enei korero, kaore tatou e tino mohio ki te nui o te painga o o tatou whaea me ana mahi papai, kia mate ra ano katahi ano tatou ka mohio mc te hoki ano o nga mahara.
Na ROSE WATENE. NO TE MAHIA. Ki te Etita o Te Karere, tena koe. Ileoi te mihi. I te 9 o Slci nei ka tu to matou karakia ki te Paratiamu lie wliakaaro H te Ra o nga Whaea ara Mother's Day. Na, e hoa ma, tetahi ra whakamiharo tenei ki a matou. No te mea he mea hou tenei ki waenganui i a matou ki nga Hunga Tapu o te Mahia nei. I whakaritetia e matou tenei ra i roto i te aroha ki a matou matua kua hinga kei te po. Ko te mea nui ki a matou kei roto
Hune 23, 1926 te karkre 205
i tenei ra ko te kotahi meneti e noho-puku ana, ara one minute silence. E lion ma, hold atu ana nga whakaaro ki nga whaea kna hinga kei to po. Ahakoa ra, eliara i to moa whatoro tenei ra i waenga parae, kaore. Tirohia Ekoruhe 20: 12. Kei reira 0 ki ana kia whakahonoretia ton papa me ton whaea, kia roa ai o koutou ra ki runga i to mata 0 to whenua.
Kaati, e te Hunga Tapu, kia ora koutou katoa i roto i nga manaakitanga a to tatou Matua i to Rangi. Kia kalia tatau ki te whakarite i o tatau karangatanga. Heoi na to koutou taina.
W. J. MATENGA, Timuaki o to Kura Hapati 0 to Mahia Peka Oraka.
He Rjpoata no Korongcta
Mo te Ra 0 nga Whaea.
E whakamarama ana tenei ripoata i nga mahi 0 tenei ra i whakahaeretia i roto i nga tauira i roto i Te Karere.
To in ah a o nga tangata i tao mai ki te whakanui i tenei ra, 105. Te in aba 0 nga whaea i roto i tenei ra e toru tekau ma warn. Xga apiha whakahaere 0 tenei ra, Hamiora Kamau me ona kaunihera mo Teiti Kamau, hekeretari.
E to Runga Tapu. tetahi tauira tino pai tenei kua oti e tenei llalii to whakatu hoi whakaako i a tatau tamariki ki to nni 0 to honore 0 tenei moa 0 to whaea. Ko tatau te iwi Maori, eliara 0 tatau whaea i to moa nui rawTa ki a tatau. He aha to take ? He kore kaore i akona ki te nui 0 ta ratau mahi ki te miramira i a tatau. Engari no roto i nga whakaakoranga 0 tenei Hahi, katahi ka kitoa te nui 0 0 tatau wiiaea ki a tatau i roto i nga Hui Atawhai mo nga roopu 0 te Paraimere no roto i tenei ra i te ra o nga whaea. Ka whakamaungia te tohii whakanui ki runga ia whaea, he putiputi. Katahi ka titirp whanui atu nga kanohi 0 to hunga ngakau papaku ki 0 ratou 11 ei whaea. Tino heke nga roimata me te hoki o nga whakaaro ki muri, ki to takawa 0 ora ana 0 ratou nei whaea kihai i penei to whakanui. Ka mohio tatau ka noho to ngakau whakahonore ki roto i a tatau tamariki inaianei ki 0 ratau whaea.
No muri ka hoatu to tohu whakaniaharatanga mo nga whaea kua mate, kotahi meneti 0 noho puku ana t«^ katoa. Tino
206 TE KARERE Hune 23, 1926
nui te urunga 0 te arolia ki roto i nga ngakau 0 te hunga i tae tnai i tenei ra. Ko te luia tenei 0 tenei mahi 0 te Ra 0 nga Whaea. Ka rite te ture, "AVhakahonoretia to papa me to whaea kia roa ai ou fa e homai ana e ton Ai-iki. "
Nga kai-waiata me nga mahi whakatangitangi na Dga tama- rika 0 to Kareti me nga kauniatua 0 te Pariha me te Karri i tae niai ki nga Hunga Tapn 0 Korongata.
Te Karakia Hakarameta, 108 nga tangata i tae mai. Nga kai-kauwhau, Erata Heera, Erata Paraone, Erata Piringihaate, Paora Hapi, Rawiri Kamau.
No te Miutara 175 nga tangata i tae mai ki tenei huihuinga. Tino njii nga mahi i mahia i roto i tenei Miutara, e kore e pau ki roto i Te Karere te tuhi nga mahi. Te knpu polo, e rite ana he Ilni Pariha.
Ko te Mateng'a 0 Koro Waerea.
E whakaatu ana ki nga whanaunga 0 tenei tamaiti, no te 7 0 nga ra 0 Mei nei ka mate a Koro Waerea. Tekau ma rima 011a tan, tona karangatanga i roto i te Hahi lie Rikona. He tamaiti pai tenei, kaha hold i roto i tona karangatanga tae noa ki te ra i mate ai ia. He nui te pouri i pa mai ki a matau ki ona matua. E kore hold, e warewaretia te pai o ana mahi me tona kaha i roto i tenei peka. Kua rite i a ia tona karanga- tanga, kua riro ia i tona Matua hei mahi i ana mahi i tua o te ai*ai. E hari ana e koa ana tooku ngakau mona i mate i roto i te ma, Kaore he raruraru. Koia nei lie tauira mo ona whanaunga. E kalia ana ahau ki te ripoata, ki te kore tenei tamaiti e whiwhi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua kaore hoki tetahi tangata atu e whiwhi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua.
"Ma nga H.ua ka Mohiotia ai."
E whakamarama ana tenei ripoata i tae mai a Takuta Te Rangihiroa ki konei ki te pokapoka i a matau i te 10 o nga ra 0 Mei. I liui katoa mai te Hunga Tapu kia pokapokatia. Ko Paraire Tomoana me Poke Henri me te neihi. 1 tino nui t>* jnilii a te Takuta Te Rangihiroa. 1 puta i a ia tenei korero, katahi te kainga whakanui i a ia 0 roto 0 Heretaunga nei. kaore he omaoma te ahua o nga tangata. lie aha ra te take i penei ai nga tangata o tenei kainga, i rereke ai 0 etahi atu kainga ? Te whakahoki ko tenei iwi ko te Hunga Tapu e haere ana i raro i te mana o nga kingi, o nga tinmaki, o nga ranga-
Ilune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 207
tira, 0 nga kai-whakahaere tikanga, c pai ana hoki matau ki te ngohehgohe, ki te tautoko hoki i te ture. He ture tenei i roto i to matau Hahi. Whenci he tohunga Maori 0 whakaakoranga kaore matau e whakarongc.
"E te iwi, e kore e warewaretia e ahau to koutou alma me la koutou manaaki i a ahau. E tino mihi ana ahau ki a koutou, te maa 0 to koutou kainga, te maa 0 a koutou tamariki, te ataahua 0 nga pakeke. E noho ana koutou i roto i te tupato, ma tenei alma ka taka atu etahi o nga mate e puta mai ana i roto i te paruparu. No reira koia nei te taonga nui 0 te Pakeha, he maa. E mihi ana ahau mo to koutou karakia Hahi "Momona." Ko au, kaore au i te tangata karakia. He aha te hahi, kaore aku whakahe, engari e puta ana he mahi pai he malii kino i roto i nga hahi katoa. No reira kua kite ahau i te pai o a koutou mahi pai i roto i to koutou hahi."
I timatatia to matau huihuinga ki te karakia. Ilimene tuatahi, Iloia o te Hahi ki te reo pakeha. Inoi na Katima Hakopa. Himene whakamutunga "Till We Meet Again," inoi wh'akamutunga na Rangi Kawea.
Na RAWIRI M. KAMAU.
KO NGA JVUHI A TE KUIM HAPATI HE! PAIN3A MA TaTOU
Na Te Ngoura i tuhi, na R.apata Tanapu i whakamaori.
Ki Te Karere : Tena koe. I a au e korero ana i te puka- puka 0 te Kura Hapati 0 Hiona (Juvenile Inst rue tor), ka korero au i te kauwhau i kauwhautia ai e Tumuaki Ilipa J. Karanata i te hui a nga kai-arahi o nga Kura Hapati 0 roto 0 te Hahi, i tu ki te Pa Tote i te wha 0 nga ra 0 Oketopa, 1925 Ka korero ia i te pai 0 te mahi e puta mai ana i te Kura Hapati ki a tatou ki te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Ned. E ki ana ia e awhinatia ana e te Kura Hapati nga tangata katoa e haere ana ki te Kura H-apiti tae atu ana ki te Tumiiaki Xni nei ki a Rawiri 0. Makei ki te katoa ano hoki 0 nga kai-mahi, kai- wnakaako, akonga, a ki nga tamariki ano hoki.
Na, ko tetehi ano 0 ana kupu e penei ana. Ko te niea nui i'awa e ahei i te tangata te mahi, he awhina i tetehi i runga i te aroha, kaua lie utu. lie nui ke atu nga kai-mahi a te Hunga Tapu e mahi ana i roto 0 nga Kura Hapati, i nga kai-mahi 0
203 TE RARER K Hune 23, 1^26
roto i etehi atu Iiahi penei ano i to tatou nai te nui. Kei etehi hahi he wahine nga kai-w hakahaere o o ratou Kura llapati, kaore he tane, c meatia ana hei kai-whakahaere.
Engari ano to tatou lialii e mahi katoa ana nga tangata
nunui, e whakaako ana, e arahi ana i nga mahi o te Kura llapati, awhiiia atu hoki i nga tuahine, me te tohutohu ano ki nga mahi. He niaha nga tangata o waho i to tatou Hahi e haere mai ana ki o tatou Kura llapati e chorere ana i te Qui o te matauranga o nga tangata whakaako, arahi, o roto i o tatou Kura llapati.
E ki ana a Tumuaki Karanata ehara i te mea ma te nui o nga kai c pau ana i te tangata e kaha ai tona tinana, engari ma te nui ke o te painga o nga kai e tapoko ana ki nga toto i te puku. Waihoki, ehara ano i te moa ma te nui o to tatou kaha ki te ako ki te korero pukapuka i roto i o tatou Kura llapati e puta mai ai lie painga ki a tatou, engari ma te nui ke o te puwerawera e riro mai ana i a tatou i roto i te Wairua o te Atua. Ko te kai-whakaako e ako ana i nga tamarika ki te pono o te rongopai, he pai ke atu ia i tetehi e mea hei me ako a ngakau te nuinga o te karaipiture. Ko te mea nui rawa i riro mai i a Tumuaki Karanata i roto i te Kura Hapati i a ia e tamariki ana ko tana whakaatu hinengaro ki te pono o tenei rongopai. He tino pai hoki tana kai-whakaako i ata whaka- marama ki a ia i nga ture i whakatakotoria ai ki roto i te karaipiture, me te korero atu ano hoki ki a ia i ana mahi i a ia i te miliana, i a raua e ako ana. 1 tino arohatia hoki tenei kai-whakaako e nga kotiro, e nga tamariki tane, a kore rawa i warewaffc i a ratou nga mea i akona ai ki a ratou a taea noatia to ratou matenga. Ko te kai-whakaako kaore e whaka- pono ki nga ture katoa o te rongopai, kaore c hiahiatia kia ako i roto i o tatou Kara llapati. E whakapono ana tatou tera ano he Atua, he Rewera. Ko a tatou mahi papai katoa i puta mai i runga i te whakapono ki te Atua, a ki ana mahi ako hoki, na ko nga mahi kino katoa e puta ana ki nga mea e whakarongo ana nga taringa ki nga tohutohu a te Rewera. He poi'opiti ano ta te Atua. he poropiti ano hoki ta te Iveweia. Tera ano hoki etehi whakaakoranga e mohiotia nei e nga tangata e nohoia ana e te Wairua o te Atua lie mahi na te Rewera. Xa he mea kia marama ai tenei ka korero a Tumuaki
Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 209
Karaiiata ki etehi mea i pa Id a ia i mua 0 tona tunga hei Tumuaki mo te HaLi.
Tokotoru nga tamariki a Tumuaki Karanata raua ko tana wahine, tino ngakaunui hoki nga tamariki nei ki 0 ratou matua.. Engari i mua 0 te kamautua-rawatanga ka mate to ratou whaea. I muri 0 te tapuketanga o to ratou whaea ka haria e Karanata ana tamariki ki te hacreere i nga whenua, ma tera pea e whaka- wareware te pouritanga i roto i 0 ratou ngakau mo to ratou whaea. I haere ratou ki nga taone nunui 0 Amerika. A i a ratou e noho ana i Wahingitana ka pangia ana kotiro tokorua e tetehi mate kirika 0 te korokoro ara e te tipitiria. I aua ra ki te pa ana tenei mate ki le tamariki e kore rawa e ora. Kore rawa nga takuta i niohio ki te rongoa e ora ai tenei mate. Ko tetehi 0 nga kotiro nei kua kino rawa te mate. Pewhea ra ka rongo a Tumuaki Karanata i te takuta e korero atu ana ki te neelii kia whakainungia te kotiro ra ki tetehi rongoa i nga tekau ma rima meneti katoa, 11a ki te hapa i a ia tetehi whakai- numanga kotahi nei, ka mate tonu atu te kotiro nei. Kore rawa a Tumuaki Karanata i moe i taua po, he mea mona kei wareware te neelii ra ki te iioatu i te rongoa ki tana kotiro. ( Faria te roanga)
E MAHI ANA TATOU MO TE AHA?
Improvement Era, April 1926, ua J.W. i whakamaori.
Ka korero atu te minita ki tetahi kaumatua "Momomi," "E lie ana koe 111011 i ki kei nga main te mea nui. Kahore rawa atu he take mo te main. I korero hoki a Paora, 'Na te aroha noa hoki koutou i whakaorangia ai i runga i te whakapono ; ehara ano hoki tenei i te mea no koutou he mea homai noa na te Atua: Ehara i nga malii, kei whakamanamanate tangata. ' ' Epeha 2: 8-9.
Ka whakahoki te kaumatua, "He tika i korero a Paora, engari kei te rarangi i raro iho e ki ana, 'He mahinga hoki tatou naana, lie mea lianga i roto i a Karaiti Ihu mo nga mahi pai i whakaritea e te Atua i mua hei haereerenga mo tatou.' Epiha 2: 10. I korero ano hoki a Paora, 'Whakaotia to koutou whakaoranga i runga i te wehi, i te wiri.' Piripai 2: 12. 1 korero te Rangatira, kei runga ake nei ia i a Paora, 'E mahi ana toku Matua a taea noatia tenei ra: e mahi ana ano ahau.'
2 0 TE KARERE Hune 23, I926
Hoani 5: 17. 'Me mahi e ahau nga uialii a toku kaitono tnai i te mea e ao ana : meake ko te po e kore e taea te mahi e tetahi tangata.' Hoani 1): 1. 'Tenei akc hoki ka haere mai te
Tama a te tangata, ratou ko ana anahera, i runga i te koro] La o tona Matua; a ko reira hoatu ai e ia ki tenei, ki tenei, 1c utn o tana mahi.' Matin 16: 27.
Ac, i runga i te whakamarietanga a to tatou Kai Whakaora ka ara katoa nga tupapaku. Otira e kah'a-kore ana tatou ki to ara mai, engari i roto i to arol.a o to Atua ka ara mai aua tinana kikokiko engari kahore nei ho toto. A ka hoatu nga kororia- tanga, to utu mo nga mahi a tena tangata a tona tangata. Kahore katoa 0 ara i to wa kotahi, kahore hoki e haere ki to walii kotahi. E ki ana to pukapuka pai, "Ka rite ano ki tana ake mahi tona utu e riro i tetahi, i tetahi." J. Koriniti 3: 8. "Kei whakapohehetia : ko ta te tangata hoki e rui ai, ko tenei tana e kokoti ai.". Karaitia G: 7.
Ko te kupu tenei a Tumuaki Pirikania Taanga, "Ko an nei ka whai mo te oranga tonutunga. " Kia ara mai i te ata tonu o te aranga mo to hunga tika, me te whiwhi ano hoki ki to kororiatariga o runga rawa. Kahore hoki tatou e pai kia Avhanga tonu tatou i te aranga tuatahi a pau noa te kotahi mano tau, hei pononga ma etahi atu mo akeake tonu, pora me te kororiatanga o nga wh'etu.
E nga taitama 0 te llahi, ko nga manaakitanga mo koutou hei kingi hei piriniha mo te Kingitanga o te Atua ki to mahi koutou. ]J]hara ranei i te mea lie utu nui tenei !
No reira matika "hei kaimalii ano koutou i te kupu, kaua hei kaiwhakarongo anake." Hemi 1: 22. Ma tatou ano 0 whakarite o tatou mihana, kahore e taoa 0 tetahi atu. Ko to rangi e whiwhi .tatou ko te rangi i taea e tatou ana mahi; engari mo te Tikitiki 0 Rangi me tino awhinatia rawa te tangata 0 te Atua i nga wa katoa katahi ka whiwhi. Kia mahara e nga Hunga Tapu i roto i a tatou mahi katoa kia mahara ki te Kai Hanga. Ko to mana 0 to kikokiko he mea kahore noa iho. \o reira ma inoi tatou ki to Atua kia aratakina kia awhinatia i roto i a tatou mahi, mo te hoatu ano i te whakamoemiti me to kororia ki a Ia i nga wa katoa mo ake tonu. Ko te hapai ra tenei 0 to waiata nei (keyonte) 0 te Hahi "Momona," To v/hakapono raua ko nga mahi.
Hune 23, 1926
TE KARERE
Ko nga Kai=kauwhau 0 Waikato
Ki Te Karere. Tena koe. Ko enei nga ingoa o nga kai- whai-mohoao o Waikato me nga wahi e haere ai ratou ki te kauwhau i nga marama o Hurae me Akuhata e tu mai nei.
Tu George Stockman Erata Reke Karaitihana Winieta Kapinga Erata Wiremu Oketana Here Tangihaere Erata Reke Karaitihana Walter Tangihaere Erata Wiremu Oketana
Henare Maiho Te Whare Hetaraka Hokio Tarawhiti Erata Reheri D. Paapiti Te Awe Pongo Ngaha Ratana Hoani Ormsby Tetahi Kaumatua Hemi Haki Te Whotu Apiti Karena Takono Hongi Rawhiti Pene Poutu Kupa Tetahi Kaumatua Tamati Honetene Totana Arona
\ Okahukura
J Matiere
\ Aria
i Taumarunui
1 Piopio
J Te Kuiti
I Kokohi
I Woodleigh
I Ngaruawahia
X Taur J Ohir
jpere
inewai
Matakowhai
Puke Tapu
Waingaro
Pukekohe
Frankton Tauhei
ka-
E hoa ma, e koutou no te takiwa nei kia ora koutou toa. Kei ware ware ki a koutou mahi i tenei wa.
I te mea ka tu to tatou Hui Tau ki Ngaruawahia, ara ki te kainga o Te Puea, a tera tau, me tino whakamohiotia ka_ toatia nga Maori ki nga ahuatanga o tenei taonga nui kua whiwhi ai tatou. Na tatou katoa no tenei takiwa te Hui Tau nei, no reira me mahi katoa tatou. Kia kaha kia manawanui ki tenei mahi whakahari ngakau.
Kua kii mai a Kingi Tawhio ki a tatou, "Ko Arekahana- ra toku Hoana Kaha, ko Kemurete toku oku Aoroi, ko Ngaruawahia toku turanga waewae."
No reira kia kaha ra tatou katoa. Ma te Atua koutou e tohutohu e whakakaha i nga ra e tu hum nei. Heoi ano, na to koutou teina,
Na Reheri D. Paapiti, Tumuaki Takiwa.
Ti; KAKKKK
Htmc 23, 1926
KO NCA PUKAPJKA HEI HOKONCA
25-0 11 0 7-6 9-0
*>-0
Ro enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kci te lari o to Miliaria hei bo- konga ki nga niea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapaka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Bex 72, Auckland. STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with Re;idy Reference, Leather... New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather
Book of Mormon, Clodi 2-6
" " " , Half Leather
" " , Leather u-o
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth
" " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0
MAORI BOOKS A.4D TRACTS
Maori Ready Reference, Cloth
" " " , Leatiier
Ko Te Kawenata Hon, Cloth
" " " " iVie Nga Kimene, Leather 3 in i
" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth
" " '' , Leather
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth
" " " " " " ", Leather
Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer SJNDArf' SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of the Cospel
What J ts. is Taught
Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton
S0.4C BO0X3
Songs of Zion, Cloth
" " " , Leather
Deseret Song Books, Cloth
" " " , Leather
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS / rticles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talttioge Vi'ality of Mormonism Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson Restoration of the Gospel, li idtsoe Joseph Smith's Teachings Life of Christ for the Young, Weed Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talnwge Essentials in Church History, Smith Bible Ready Reference
|
2 0 |
|
3-6 |
|
1-9 |
|
li-O |
|
5-o |
|
15-0 |
|
5-J |
|
150 |
|
1 0 |
|
4-0 |
|
5 ° |
4-0
2-\ 66 3-0
66
3-o
8-3
4-6 6-0 40 3-6 46 8-9 6-9 2-0
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Mot ris 6-0
KO J. H. TIAT^INI TE KA) TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KOROVCATA HASTINGS. II. H.
;Caa>tro
OlIIOI II IOI I IIIOI 1 1 I I I O I I I 1 1 IOI III I IOI I I I I OH IIOIIlO 5 WAHANGA 20 HURAE 21, 1926 NAMA / 5
O O
r Ko te Ruma a te Tamaiti, a Hohepa Mete z
**[JERE atu, ka korero atu ki te tamaiti
11 nei, mea atu, ka nohoia a Hiruha-
rama, ka rite ki nga pa taiepa-kore, i te
tini o te tangata, o nga kararche i roto."
Hakaraia 2 :4
Oil IOI 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 lOll IO
'C6 KAR&R&"
WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO
Wharangi.
Kl TE ETITA
He Powhiri 224
Ki a Ngapuhi Renata 235
Ko te Matenga o Piki Waerea 232
KO NCA TUHINCA MAI
He Piki i runga i te Tumatakuru? 233
He Whakaahua Pai 235 Ko nga Mahi a te Kura Hapati hei
Painga ma Tatou 236
Ko te Namaa te Atua 242 Me Pehea e Riro ai nga
Tangata ki te Kaha o te Atua hei Whakaora? 238
Mo te Aranga Mai 240
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 229
MAHI KURA HAPATI
Concert Recitation 2l2
Intermediate Department 2
Korero a Ngakau 212
Kindergarten Department 2?5
Maori Theological 212
Pakeha Theological 217
Postlude 211
Prelude 211
Sacrament Gem '-'II
■L
f^roro
WAHANCA 20 WENErtEI. HURAE 21. 1926. NAMA 7
Maori Mgricullural College Hastings. H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia mamma e te Mihana o Niu Tireni,
Hani o iliu Karaili o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei.
Tukua uiai o kqutou reta ki te Elita o To Karere, MrA.C, Hastings.
Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hercni (5/-).
KO TE TIKANGA TENEI.
Hie niatua utu mo tcir pcpa ka vChivhi ai.
J. H. Tintkini, Tumuaki Mihana Mariona K. Ewatuna, htiia. Ttaia U iidiu u, Ltita he a Awliitia.
Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha
K<» nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers).
Wiremu A. Koura
Rap-jta Tanapu
Lru T. Kupa
MAHI KURA HAPATI.
Prelude.
After Cowex.
^M^mmA
SACRAMENT GEM I OR AUGUST, 1926 • In memory of the broken flesli
We eal I he broken bread ; And witness with I \w cup a rresli, ( hir Faith in ( Jhrist, our [lead. ' Postlude.
Soft Oft itop
p ^^33^-^^m^^^^
.■■■ f \l" i i ii
212 TE KAKERE Hurae2I, I926
CONCERT RECITATION FOR FAST DAY AUGUST 1, 1926.
i Matthew 4th Chapter, 7th Verse)
"Thou shall no1 tempi the Lord thy God."
CONCERT RECITATION FOR BALANCE OF AUGUST, 1926 (Matthew 7th Chapter, 12th Verse) ''Therefore all things whatsoever ye would that men would do to yon, do ye even so to them."
-o
KCRERO A NGAKAU MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU.
1 a Matiu 4: 7. "Kaua e whakamatautau ki te Ariki, ki ton Atua."
KORERO A NGAKAU MO ERA ATU RATAPU 0
TE MARAMA.
I a .Matiu 7: 12. "Na nga tnea katoa e pej ai koutou kia meatia e nga tangata ki a koutou, meatia ano e koutou ki a ratou."
MAORI THEOLOGICAL.
KO TE TAKE 0 TE AKORANGA MO TE RA I70H0-PUKU.
Ko te take o te Akoranga mo te Ra Noho-Puku he whaka- kaha i te wairua o tenei ma o te whaki-hinengaro. Te huarahi tika ki te whakahaere i tenei take he tuku i nga mema o te kar.aihe kia whakaaiu i nga tikanga o tona ngakau. 1 nga tan kua huri k«v te patai i nga akoranga, "He aha ahau i whaka- pono ai?" Jvo te take o te akoranga mo tenei tau, "He aha te mea a te tauira o Ihu e whakahau mai ana i a au kia mahia?" E ako ana tatou i nga mahi a te Karaiti me kore e kitea e tatou nga mahi o roto. Kei te mea tatou i nga mema o te karaihe kia whakatakoto i etahi tikanga o a ratou mahi mo nga tau e heke mai nei, hei mea e whakakaha ai ratou ki te mahi i nga mahi kua whakatakotoria nei e Ihu hci tauira mo tatou.
Ratami tuatshi. Akuhata 1, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHC-PUKU. Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako-
Hurae2I, 1926 TE KARERE 21 3
toria nei e Iliu liei malii ma tatou.
Putake: Te Whakamatautauranga TuarUa.
Te Whakaatu: Kei a Matin 4: 5-7.
Ko nga whakamatautauranga e toru kua tapahia ketia e etahi tangata ko te whakamatautauranga nui. Ko te take i noho tonu a Hatana ki a la, a, muri 110a i te mea mutunga.
I mea pono a Rawiri, " Ki tonu tona mangai i te i te kanga, i te hianga, i te patipati kei raro i tona arero te whanoke me te teka." Waiata 10: 7.
I whakatupuria a Ihu penei he tamaili na tc kamura, engari i nga wa katoa ko te Wairua Tapu e malii ana i runga i a la. I a ia tekau ma rua tan ka mohio la ho malii nui Tana kei tc haere mar. I roto i tc Akoranga me te Kawcnata i mea, "Kahorc hold ia i whiwhi ki te rancatanga i te tuatahi, engari i nuku haere ake ia i te aroha 110a ki tc aroha noa, tae noa ki tc wa i whiwhi ai ia ki tc raneatanga. ' ' Me tenei ano, "Ka lii])u ia i roto i te aiatauranga. "
\a ka kit t- tatou tera Tana wairua i tupu tae noa ki te wa ka mohio In mc timata la ki Tana mihana. No reira ka haere hi me tc whakaaro kia oti i a la tc malii kua oti nei te whaka- takoto ki niua i s la. Tera i wliakateiteiria la i te mohiotanga 0 te Matua ki Tana Tama i tc wa 0 tc iriiringa, engari i haere tonu alu Ia ki te whakangoikore i Tona wairua i tc noho-puku, ki tc takahi i ngj hiahia kikokiko, ahakoa he Atua la, he Tangata ano la.
I te whakamatautauranga tuatahi i malii a Hatana i te laha kikokiko a Ihu, i meatia e ia ko te hiakai 0 Ihu hei hoa inona hci whakakake. Engari kali ore a taca.
I tc whakamatautauranga tuarua ka meatia e ia Tonu talis wliakahihi. Ka man ia ki ;i Mm ki rungs i te Temepars ,-i ka mea kia pekc la ki raro, a ma ngs anahera e haere msi, c hapsi ake Fa, ka kite ngs tangata ka whakapono ko la tc lino Atua. Ko ngs tangata koi te tit i ro ki tctahi kingi he whakahcrc-korc i a ratou, tera 0 meatia v ratou a Mm hei kin( i. ,-i mc i" ratou mahi i nga mes katoa mona mchemea i malii la i
t.i [Iutailfl i mea ;ii. lie timi \\ h;ik;iin;it ; 1 1 1 1 ;m ramva nui tciin
ahakoa ki tchea <> tatou.
Kngari mchomes i malii la i ta flatans i noa ai, c kore
2U ■ TE KARERE Hurac 21, 1926
rawa la e tu hei Kai-Whakaora — ka he la i roto i Tana tnihana nui mo te mea i a la hei rangatira, a ka riro la hei kai-mahi 0 te kino.
Te whakahoki a Ihu i rite ki ta uga poropiti onamata, "Ka oti ano hoki te tuhituhi, kaua e whakamatautau ki te Ariki, ki ton Atua."
lie aha uga manaakitanga kua riro mai i a tat 011 ma roto i a tatau takahi i nga whakamatautauranga? Tukua ki nga mema 0 te karaihe te nuinga 0 te taima ki te korero, e, he mea pehea 0 ratou manaakitanga i roto i a ratou mahi i nga tauira o Ihu.
Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou
Na Wircmu C. Kaa raua k3 Rapita Tanapu i whakarite.
Ratapu tuarua, Akuhata 8, 1926. AKOEANGA 20.
Ko te Haerenga Tuarua 0 Paora i te Mihana. Te roanga atu.
.1. Te haerenga atu i Makeronia.
(a) I Tcharonika — a Paora i roto i te whare karakia. Main 17: 2; 13: 14.
(b) Ka tukinotia raua. Mahi 17 : 10-13.
(e) Ko nga mahi pai a Paora i Peria. Mahi 17: 10-13. (d) I Atene. Te tautohetohetanga 0 Paora i roto i te whare karakia. Mahi 17: 15-17.
II. Ko nga whakaakoranga i te Hiwi 0 Areopaka.
(a) Nga Apotoro i roto i nga tohunga. Mahi 17: 18-21.
(b) Ko te "Atua Ngaro," nana nei i lianga te ao. Mahi 17: 22-24 ; Hipcru 1:2: Mohia 4:2; Xiwhai Tuatoru 9 : 15.
(c) Ko te tangata he uri no te Atua. Hipera 12: 9 ; Matiu 6:9; Kenehi 1: 26.
(d) Ko te tikanga 0 te ripenatatanga. Mahi 17: 30; 3: 19-20; Arami 2: 24; Ako. me nga Kawe. 19: 31.
(e) Te ai'anga o te hunga mate. Mahi 17: 31-32; IToani 11 : 24-2(5. Korerotia te Upoko 40 o Arami me te Wahanga 7(5 0 te Ako. me nga Kawe.
Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 2.5
Ratapu tuatoru, Akuhata 15, 1926. AKORANGA 21.
Ko te Mutunga 0 te Mihama Tuarua i Haere ai a Paora.
J. J Koriiiiti 1110 te kotahi tau me te hawhe. Nga Mahi 18: 11.
(a) Tana nohoanga i a Akuira raua ko Pirihira. Mahi
18: 1-2.
(b) Ka tika hold te utu mo te kai-mahi.
1. Ko nga akoranga a te Karaiti. Ruka 10: 1-7.
2. A Paora raua ko te kai-mahi teneti. Mahi 18 :
3 ; 20 : te.
3. Ko te akoranga a Paora mo te utu. Mahi 20: 33;
Koriiiiti Tuatahi 9: 18; Koriniti Tuarua 7: 2; 11 : 7-9.
4. Ko te whakakitenga 0 nga ra 0 muri nei mo te
ako kaua he utu. Akoranga me nga Kawenata 84: 78-92.
(c) Ko te piringa ano 0 Eliraha raua ko Timoti kia Paora.
Mahi 18:4-5.
(d) Ko te whakatahuritanga 0 Kirihipu, Kaiu, me te
whanau katoa a Tepana. Mahi L8: 8; Koriniti Tuatahi 1 : 14-16 ; 1(5: 15.
Tiroliia iho tenei: Ko tetahi vvahanga 0 nga halii 0 waho c tohc na ko te whanau 0 Tepana he tamariki kan. he mea iriiri, engari kaore he kaupapa 0 tenei whakapono.
(e) Ko te whakakitenga 0 te p<>. Mahi 18: 9-10.
(f) Ko te inainiga mai 0 Paora ki te aroaro 0 nga iwi 0 Kario. Mahi 18: L2-8. II. Ko te haerenga atu 0 Paora i Koriniti ki Epeha, ki Miliaria, ki llii-iiharaina, 111c Anatioka. Mahi IS: L8-23,
Ratapa tuawha, Akuhata 22, 1926
AKORANGA 22. Ko te Haerenga Tuatoru 0 Paora i te Mihana..
I. Te \\ haknunga i nga hahi, (a) I Karatia, i Pirikia. M.ihi L8: 23. 1 1. K<» )<• mahi a Aporo i Rpelm.
21 6 TE karere Hurae 21, J926
(a) He Iliu-ai no Arehanaria. AI alii 18: 24.
(1)) lie mea-iriiri ia na Iloani — kihai i whakaekea to
Wairua Tapu ki a ia. Mahi 18: 25. (c) He tangata kaha ki te kanwhau i nga nialii a 1c Karaiti. Mahi L8: 27-28. 1 IT. Ko te niahi a Paora i Gpeha.
(a) Ivo te iriiringa nic te whakaunga 0 nga tangata na Hoani Kai-Iriiri i whakatahuri. Mahi 19: 1-7.
Tirohia iho tenei: Kaore to tatou Hahi e whaka- iiiana i tenei niea i te ii'iiri tnarua; engari e whakaaetia ana te ii'iiri tnarua nei mo nga niea i tapahia ki waho o te Hahi, a mo nga niea ano hoki kua ngaro nei 0 ratou tuhituhinga 0 te iriiritanga i roto i nga pukapuka 0 te Hahi. (])) Ko te tautohetohenga nana o Paora i roto i te whare kura o Tairanu. Mahi 19: 8-10.
(c) Ko nga tino merekara i niahia ai. Mahi 19: 11-12.
(d) Ko te whakamatautau 0 te mana. Mahi 19: 18-18; Tauanga Ki o nga upoko.
(c) Ko te whakatetcnga 0 Rimitiriu kai-mahi hiriwa. Mahi 19: 23-41.
Ranpu tuarima, Akuhata 29, 1926. AKORANGA 23.
Ko te Roanga ake 0 te Haerenga Tuatcru 0 Paora i te Mihana. I. (a) Ko te haerenga atn 0 Paora i Epeha ki Makeronia. .Mahi 20: i-3.
1. Ka akiakina e Paora nga tangata 0 Makeronia i ruriga i te whakapono.
2. Ka nolio i rcira mo te torn tnarama.
:]. Te tukinotanga 0 nga Ilurai. Mahi 20: 3. (1)) Tana haerenga atn i Makeronia ki Toroa o Ahia.
1. Onahoa. Mahi 20: 4.
2. Te whatiwhatinga 0 te taro i Toroa. Malii 20: 7.
3. Te whakaaranga 0 te hunga mate. Mahi 20: 9-12. Whakaritea ki Nga King] 17: 1922, ki a Niwliai ano lioki 1 : 5.
(c) Tana haerenga atn i Toroa ki Miretn. Mahi 20:
Huraeil, 1926 TE KARERE 217
13-1 (J. 1. To kauwhau nui a Paora i reira. Mahi 20 : 17-38. 11. T roto i Ahia.
(a) To haerenga atu i Miretu ki Taira. -Main 21 : Mi.
(b) Ki Horomai, ki Hiharia.
(c) To poropititnaga a Akapu. Mahi 21 : 7-14.
-0-
PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL
"GRF.AT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS"
PURPOSE OF UNIFORM FAST DAY LESSON.
The purpose of the Uniform Fast Day Lesson is to promote
the spirit of testimony. This spirit will be best promoted, of course, as pupils are encouraged and stimulated to give expres- sion to their own con vie! ions. For a number of years we have featured a pupil responsive to the question, "What do I be- lieve?"— in certain principles of the Gospel. The thought be- hind this year's Fast Day Lessons is to encourage pupils to fix their attention upon the things they should do, if they are to develop fully in the teachings of the Gospel. Basing the year's work upon the actions of Jesus, we ask once a month that the pupils focus their thinking upon the query, "What does the example of Jesus hid me to do?" The aim of the work is not merely to acquaint pupils with the teachings or with the habits of Jesus, hut rather to lead them to Formulate their own pro- gramme of activity in the light of His great example.
First Sunday, August I, 1920. Uniform last Day Lesson
The Example of Jesus: what ii bids us do.
Subjecl : The Second Temptation.
It will be apparent from the fact that we call this the second temptation thai we follow the order given in Matthew 1 :.") 7. Presumably it immediately followed the first, Some prefer to call the three temptations the Greal Temptation because of tic continuity from beginning to the culmination when the
devil Ief1 -I'
David 1 1 1 • 1 \ Raid: "ruder bis tongue is mischief and vanity."
2l8 Th kakkre LIurae 21, 1920
(Psalms 10:7.)
J. el us remember lhal Jesus had had a very unique ex- perience. He had been reared as the son of a carpenter. The
workings of the Holy Spiril apon Him were in evidence when Lie said to His mother following His visit to the temple in .Jerusalem at the age of twelve: "Wis1 ye not that I must be about my Father's business?" We read that "He received not a fulness at first, but continued from grace lo grace, until He received a fulness." (Doc. end Gov. 93:13) and that "He grew in wisdom."
Let us ley to picture Him then. The expanding of the soul under Divine impress until He must have felt the actual approach of the time when Lie must enter the field of activity, which no doubt He did with an overmastering determination to accomplish His great mission.
From the exaltation that must have followed His Father's acknowledgment of both His act (in baptism) and His sonship (".This is my beloved Son") lie had, through, a long, long East been brought to a condition of physical weakness with the possibility of its usually attendant mental and spiritual depres- sion, for with add that He is God, even the Son of God, lie Was yet also a Man.
In the first temptation lie had been approached largely through the flesh — by an appeal to the natural appetite which must have been then so keen within Him.
Now Satan approached Him through an appeal to vanity, coupled with the really dangerous challenge of the "If." lie was taken into the holy city, and placed upon a. pinacle in the temple. It was the very heart of a people suffering under a bondage very grevious to them, and who were looking for a Deliverer, a Mighty One, a King who should have power to set His people free; a greater than Moses through whom God had in trie past worked such wonders.
"It* thou be tlie Son of God, cast thyself down: for it is written, lie shall iiive Irs angels charge concerning thee; and in their hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone." Compliance with this dare would have brought Him the adulations of His own people. Such a, manifestation of miraculous power and Divine co-operation, a!
Hurae 21, 1926 te karere 219
that time and piaee, witnessed as it would have been by crowds of devout Jew.s, would have stamped ILim as the Messiah for whom they were looking, and brought lo an immediate climax the mission upon which He had been sent. With our mortality and fiesh -weakness, how great would such an appeal have been 10 ns!
Vet what would have appeared to our human eyes an op- portunity to demonstrate that He was in every deed the Sou of God. the acceptance of the challenge of the "if" would have proven but the reverse, for He would have parted with His Messiahship — He would not have been a Deliverer, For He would have becom< rather the captive of evil.
How wonderfully did Jesus dignify the word of God through His prophets \\\>.vn he answered from The written word, "It is written again, Thou shall not tempt the Lord thy God."
Jesus was sufficiently well acquainted with the history of jsrad to know of such manifestations of God's power as occurred in the days of Moses with Israel crossing the Bed Sea, of bring- ing water Mom the rock, and other like incidents.
The Example of Jesus: What i1 bids as do.
"If" yon have received remission of sins through baptism, wjiy is it worth while to devote as much time, perhaps go to greal trouble, perchance pay ou1 so much money m connection with the Church .;
"If" you have received the wonderful promises given in [In Hon 1 ol the Lord, whj can'1 yon sit down and wail for their fulfilment .'
Why accept serious responsibilities such as are imposed upon official acl ivity in I lie ' lunch !
Why take unnecessary risks physical, financial, spiritual?
What blessings have been poured out upon as when we have followed Iks example and resisted temptation 1
Read Ta Imagers "Jesus the Christ," pages !:>><i 133; Farrar's " Life of < 'In 1 -1 " p; .- 7 1 72; Papini 's "1 .\(r of I !hri rt,M p G3-G7.
It i ex| • ■ ted thai teachers of each depart m nt will earc fully and prayerfully adapt this lesson to their respective «•!. especially 11 > lo illustration mid applications, and all beai Htanl ly in mind thai Ihc *ri \i but I hi
220 TE KARERE Hurac2I, I926
the lesson being the determination oi' what the example of Jesus as depicted in the story, bids us do, and to draw out testimonies of blessings following.
Second Sunday, Augusts, 1926
Eeview Questions.
1. What effect docs the example of a good man or woman have upon you?
2. What circumstances or event occuring in the life of Isaac has impressed you and why?
3. Name two outstanding accomplishments in the life ot* Jacob that make him great in your estimation.
4. Could Joseph have attained to what he did if he had not served the Lord? Give three reasons for your answer.
Third Sunday, August 15, 1926
Lesson 18. Moses as Leader and Deliverer of the Israelites.
Text: Kxodus, chapters 5-12.
Objective: To show how man's leadership under God is the highest leadership of all.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: I. Moses called to leadership. II. Moses visited Pharaoh asking the deliverance of his people. The plagues. III. Israel released. [V. Moses as leader in the wilderness.
Questions for Teachers.
1. What Priesthood did Moses hold, and were the people able to live up to its requirements f
2. (Jive examples of leadership similar to that of Moses.
Fourth Sunday, August 22, 1926.
Lesson 19. Moses as Orator and Statesman.
Text: Exodus, chapters 13-20 and others listed in body of outline.
Objective: To show how man's leadership under God is the highesl leadership of all.
Hurae 21, 1926 TE K ARE RE
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
I. As a statesman and Law-giver Moses has probably exercised a greater influence than any other character except Jesus.
1. The Ten Commandments embrace the principles of
primary law, and these principles are accepted not only by Christians, but by Mohammedan nations as well. (Exodus 20:3-17.)
2. Many of the laws of Moses are decidedly practical
and humane.
a. Charity for the poor. (Lev. 19-9-10; 25:35-46).
b. Equalization of wealth. Redemption of the land of servants. (Lev. 25:1-34 and 47-o5.)
II. Moses presented religious truths in the form of wonderful orations.
(The book of Deuteronomy comprises chiefly four orations by Moses. The fourth one is contained in Chapters 29, 30. \)v. Richard Green fcloulton says: "When I was a beginner in literary studies I recollect setting myself as an exercise to read through on three successive days, each at a single sitting, an oration of Demosthenes, one of Burke, and the Book of Deuteronomy ... I well recoiled the feeling 1 had at the time that neither of the other two rose to the oratorical level of Moses.")
Note: in closing the discussion of Moses, il would be impressive 10 have some good reader read to the class the poem, ••The Burial of Moses," by Mrs. Cecil Frances Alexander. It may be found in "Choice Readings," by Cummock, as well as in several other volumes of readings.
Il is suggested thai ii' available the teachers gel the General Conference sermons of Presidenl Grant and compare with teachings of .Moses as to profound religious truth being combined with keen practical wisdom. (See Emprovemcnt Era, January, L922.)
Questions for Teachers.
1. Summarize the life or Moses and name five great attributes of character that liis life exemplified.
2. How do >oii explain his supreme greatness!
Fifth Sunday, August 29, 1926 Lesson :.<» Joshua.
222 TK KARERE liLirae 21, 1^26
Text: Given in body of outline.
Objective: To show that a valiant follower of (Jod becomes a great leader.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: I. Joshua, a valiant follower.
1. Fights the Lord's battle. Ex. 17:9.
2. The twelve spies.
a. Majority report, Numbers 13:32 to 14:5.
b. Report of Joshua and Caleb, Numbers 14:6-9.
3. Minister of Moses. Ex. 24:13.
4. Encouraged by Moses. Deut, 1:38; 3 = 28.
II. Joshua ordained by hand of Moses. Numbers 27:18-23, Deut 34 :9.
Note method of 3,500 years ago and compare with to-day. III. The Leadership of Joshua.
1. The waters are divided. Josh. 3:9-17.
2. Jericho destroyed. Josh. 5:13 to 6:21.
3. Sun and moon stand still.
Note: Were the Israelites tempted to worship and serve the sun and moon? See Deut. 4:19.
4. Land divided among twelve tribes. Josh. 10:12-14.
5. Renewal of Covenant. Josh. 24:20-25.
Questions for Teachers.
1. Cive illustrations of latter day leaders who typify the same elements of leadership as were evidenced by Joshua.
2. How can we be "Joshuas" to our present leaders?
INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT "THE BOOK OF MORMON"
First Sunday, August 1, 1926
Uniform Fast Day Lesson
Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 217
Second Sunday, August 8, 1926. Review Questions.
1. Toll briefly the story of the conversion of Alma the 'iiangcr.
Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 223
2. How did the sons of Mosiah show they had truly re- panted i
0. rrell 1lic missionary experience that you like best that we have studied.
4. Quote a passage you have memorized in the last three monl hs.
Third Sunday, August 15, 1926
Lesson 18. Missionary Experiences of the Suns of -Mosiah.
Text: Alma, chapters 17 to 24
Objective: To teach that the Lord worketh in many ways for the salvation His children (See Alma "24:27.)
Supplementary References: "Leaves from My Journal,'' b\ President Woodruff.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
1. Alma 17:1-18 might be briefly told by the teacher.
2. Amnion's missionary experiences, for special assignment, a. With Lamoni's servants. Alma 17:19-39.
1). Conversion of King Lamoni, Alma 18th and l!Mh
chapters, c. On the way to Middoni, Alma 20:1-27.
3. Aaron \s experiences :
a. Teaching the king, Alma 22:1-12. 1). The king's hearl softened, Alma 22:15-27. c. A truly converted people, Alma 24. Passages to be marked and memorised1 Alma L£:32; 19:23; 24 :30.
Qucsl ion for Teachers.
1. Why do you think ihc miracles performed by Amnion were especially needful to convert the people among whom he was labouring \
2. Discuss the covenant entered into by the converted Lamanites and the genuine change of heart shown in it.
Fourth Sunday, August 22, 1926
! ' ion 1 9. Korihor, the Am i ( !hrist.
Text -. Alma, chapter :'><>.
Objective: To tench that those who serve the Ix>rd serve
22| TE KARERE Hurac2I, 1926
one Who is powerful to aid, while those who labor for Satan have no support in time of need. (See Alma 30:69.)
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
1. All the elass should read carefully the whole chapter.
2. Special assignments:
a. Korihor's teachings. Alma 30:6, 12-18.
b. Korihor in the lands of Jershon and Giddonah. Alma 30:19-29.
c. Have one student memorise the words of Alma and another the words of Korihor and have them give from verses o'O to 49 as a dialogue, to make a diversion.
d. Korihor's confession and end. Almo 30:50-60. Memorize Alma 30 :(>().
Draw attention to the following words of Elder Rudger Clawson, President of the Council of the Twelve:
"Prom earliest boyhood 1 was religiously inclined. One of the shaping forces of my character was of the reading of the Book of Mormon. Early in life I became interested in this remarkable work, which I read and read, drawing from its divine pages inspiration and hope. Faith sprang up in my breast. By a careful study of thai glorious book, well defined ideas of right and wrong were firmly fixed in my youthful mind, and I was thus measurably able to withstand the temptations thai assailed me, and was thus able to escape many of the sins and follies to which some of the young were addicted. With advanced years the conviction lias constantly grown upon me that the Book of Mormon is one of the grandest books of the age." Questions for Teachers.
1. Compare the teachings of Korihor (Alma 30:13-15) with the belief of many in the world to-day.
2. Quote Alma 30:44, and discuss its appropriateness as an answer for any who may ask for signs.
Fifth Sunday, August 29, 1926
Lesson 20. Zoramite Manner of Prayer. The Poor Accept the Gospel.
Text: Alma, chapters 31 and 32.
Objective: To teach that we should ''worship God in
Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 225
whatsoever place wo may be, in spirit and in truth.'' (Sec Alma 34:35.)
Supplementary References: Matt.: 6:5-8; Luke 18:!)-14.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
1. Have class read the whole text.
2. Special assignments:
a. Alma again goes forth to preach. Alma 31:1-11. 1). Vain worship. Alma 31 :12-23.
c. Alma's prayer. Alma 31:24-35.
d. The appeal of the poor. Alma 32:l-5.
3. The answer made by Alma 32r6-43; also chapters 33 and 34 should be carefully read by the teacher and given briefly to the class, assigning such passages as 32:11-13; 32:21; 32 -.4042 : 33:8; :J4 : 1 7-2S to different pupils to recite, and have all pupils mark these and oilier passages in their own books.
Questions fcr Teachers.
1. Point oul the main features in the Zoramite manner of prayer thai would make ii most objectionable to the Lord.
2. Define whal you think to be true worship.
KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT First Sunday, August I, 1926. Uniform Past Day Lesson.
Topic : The Tcmplat ion of Jesus.
"Thou shall no1 live by bread alone," etc., Matt 4:7.
Text : .Malt hew 4:5-8.
Time : A t'tcr (he bapl ism ol JCSUS.
Place: The Holy City.
Objective: Courage to resisl temptation brings strength.
I. Satan lakes Christ to the Holy City.
I. Prom t he wilderness w here | [e Pasted.
Sctteth Him (in tli.' pinnacle of the Tcmplo.
1 1, lie attempts to t< 1 1 1 1 .nth. 1 Th«- setting.
a. Thf surrounding count r.\ .
b. I haul il'nl colonnades of 1 he Temple.
( 1 ) !•:.•« lesia 1 1' (High Church iuthor?t! I
226_ TE KARERE Hurae 21, 1 926
(2) Gossip seekers from the city.
(3) Visitors from the country.
2. lie calls attention to God's promises.
"If Thou be the Son of God . . . angels will have charge concerning Thee. "
3. He wishes Christ to see:
a. That lie would receive the applause of the mul- titude. 1). That His life's work might be made easier. II. Jesus' second victory.
lie express faith in God.
a. lie quotes scripture— "Thou shall not tempt the
Lord Thy God." Matt. 4:7. 1). lie abides by it. Application: Three boys break windows, two ran away, one stayed and met the owner of the place. What do you think of his attitude?
Suppose a boy has a tooth that should be pulled. Which shows the greater courage — to have the tooth pulled at once, or suffer for a time? Going in somebody's yard against mother's wishes.
Rest Exercise : We gain strength to resist temptation to do wrong by quickly choosing the right, whether it be deeds, words or actions. June is the month of flowers. We may do a kind deed by making our flower gardens a joy to others. We may dramatize caring for our flower gardens as the children suggest. Water them. Hake the soil around them. Drive sticks into the ground for the climbing flowers to lean upon. Gather the blooms. Take them to the sick or old.
Songs: "Pansics," ( D.S.S. Songs, No. 127) ; "Let's be Kind to One Another," (D.S.S. Songs, No. 239.)
Second Sunday, August 8, 1926
Topic: Bird Sunday.
Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten;" Jeremiah 8:7; Gen. 1 :20 ; Matt. 6:26.
Objective: Aiding in the care of birds will help to make our homes bright and insure protection from insect pests.
Suggestions: Lead children to see the blessings derived by
Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE
caring for God's creatures. Why God gave them to us. How man}' ways we can show our appreciation for the blessings R e have received by caring for His birds.
Use pictures and let children talk about the birds they have seen. Where they build their nests, how they care for the young. The kind of food they eat, the songs they sing, and the good they do.
Suggestive Songs: "The Song Birds," Kindergarten and Primary Songs, page 51.
Memory Gem:
"Dear little friend in your nest in the tree, Caring for baby birds, only three: Come, I have crumbs for you to eat, Then you may sing me your songs so sweet."
Rest Exercise: The birds are our friends. The children can name many ways of earing for and protecting them. Dramatize their suggestions. Feed those who stay with us in cold weather.
Garry a pan of water slowly and carefully to a shady place in the yard, for 1 lie birds to drink from. Frighten away the cat t licit sometimes catches the birds.
Third Sunday, Augist 15, 1926.
Topic : Abram and Lot.
Time: When the Lord called Abram.
Place: Prom ITaran, Canaan to Egypt.
Text : < .'enesis 13.
Reference: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," lesson 54.
Objective: Wc ore pleasing (.'oil and keeping His command- ments if we are unselfish in dealing with others.
Suggestions: Abram and Lol willing to sacrifice their homes and friends in order to obey the Lord's call.
Their long and ledums journey did not discourage them.
They built alters and worshipped flod. When the promised land was reached, contention arose among the servants, Abram 'a
L'tc.il desire lor pence between him ami his nephew. Me offers
his nephew find choice.
lie received ureal blessings from his Hcavenlj Father.
Lead the children In '.<•<• how lhc\. loo. call be Ulisellish
228 TE KARERE Iiuiac 21, I926
with one another, with toys, candy, apples, picture books, pets, etc. Share Hood and shelter with those in need.
Rest Exercise: When our friends come to visit us wc let them choose which of the playthings they would like to play with.
This one may choose the ball, (dramatize throwing the ball.) Another may choose a jumping rope, (jump very quietly.) Another may choose the doll carriage, (push it back and forth.) Memory Gem:
Is there a cross word that tried to be said?
Don't let it, my deal', don't let it; Just speak two pleasant words, quick, instead, And that will make you forget it.
Fourth Sunday, August 22, 1826
Topic: Tithing paid in early times.
Text: Genesis 14:20; 28:19^22; Hebrews 7:4,5 Deut. 12 :G; IT; 14:22-25.
Time: Just after the great battle of the four kings.
Place between Beersheba and Ilaran.
Reference: ''Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," lesson 55.
Objective! The Lord blesses those who pay their tithing willingly.
Suggestive Sonus : "The Little Tenth," Kindergarten and Primary Songs, page 26.
Rest Exercise: Let us walk quietly to the Elder's house with the tithing in our hands; step quietly up the steps to the porch ; ring the door bell. Boys remove their hats and say, "How do you do, Elder? (state his name), I have brought you my tithing. " Say, "Thank you," as we take the receipt from him. Girls bow. Say "Good-bye" and walk quietly home.
FLth Sunday, August 29, 1926
Topic: Daniel in the Lion's Den.
Text : Daniel 1 :1-4; 6 ; Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten,
Lesson 57.
Time: Six hundred and seven years, B.C.
Hurae 21, 1926 te karere 229
Place : Jerusalem.
Objective: A courageous person wins the favour of both God and man.
Suggestions: Lead children to see how Daniel lived up to the teachings of his parents and was not afraid to be laughed at. He wanted to be what His Heavenly Father wanted him to be, and he felt that his parents had helped him to do it by their teachings.
Daniel would rather have died than to have done wrong. He showed his faith and trust in God.
How can we do right and receive protection.
J. By being obedient to our parents' teachings.
2. By obeying God's commandments.
3. By being prayerful.
4. By having faith.
5. By not being afraid to do right.
Song: "Put Your Shoulder to the Wheel," D.S.S. Song Book, page 178.
-o-
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI.
KOUW S. T1MKIXI. Tumuaki Ilni Atawhai.
Xa Toke Watene i whakaniaori,
AKORANGA MO AKUHATA.
Te Wa 0 te Taima i Rite ai.
(Meridian of Time).
Ko nga Apotoro kotahi tekau ma rua Tuatahi.
I. To ratou karangatanga.
(a ) A Pita te hao-ika. Matiu 1 : L2-20. (hi A Anaru tona teina. Ruka "> : 1-2.
1 1 1 \'_i;i akonga a lloani kai-iriiri. lloani 1 : ."."» I'i (Ci A llcini. me lloani, he tuakana he teina hoki raua.
1 I 1 Nga taina a (leperi. Ruka 5: 10 L2; Matiu 1 :
21 23 (2 ' Nga i.miii.i .1 (laroini tcina >> Mori \n haca «» to Karaiti. Matin "7 : 56; Maka Hi: 1. A [ioani i tinci aroliatia nuitia u llm. Lloani 19: 26 '.'7; 21 20, (d ) \ Piripi 0 Petanaira <> K.iriii.
230 TE KARERE Hurae 21 , 1926
(1) Te mea tuatahi i kitea a tinanatia ai e Mm. Iloani 1 : 43.
(2) A nana hold i matau ai a Xatanahira kia te Karaiti. Iloani 1 : 45-51.
(.3) A Piripi hoki i to wahi i whangaia ai te i-inia iiiaiio (5000). Hoani 6: 1-14. (<.') A Xatanahira ara a Patoroniu.
(1) I mauria mai kia te Karaiti e Piripi. Iloani 1: 45-51.
(2) Te whakakiteatanga 0 tona vvhakapono kia te Karaiti. Iloani 1 : 47 51.
(f) A Taniati lie tangata tut urn no Anatioka.
(1) Tana piripono kia te Karaiti, ahakoa e kiia ana ia ko te tangata ngakau rua.
(2) Me te nolio rite lmki kia mate tani me te Karaite. Iloani 1 1 : 7-17.
(3) 1 ruarua i te rongo kua ara a te Karaiti, a i te putanga ki a ia, ki tonu ai i te a roll a me te ngakau ngohengohe i te mohiotanga ki a ia. Tloani 20: 24-80.
(g) A Matiu te pupirikana. Matiu 10: 3.
(1) Tonn karangatanga tonutanga atu e te Karaiti. .Matiu 9 : 9;
(2) E karangatia ana ano hoki ko Iviwai. Maka 2: 14; Ruka 5:27.
(3) I kai talii a t(- Karaiti me ia ratou ko ona hoa. Maka 2: 14-18.
(4) Te kai-tuhi 0 te Rongo Pai tnatalii. (h) A llenii tama a Arapiu.
(1) lie iti noa iho te mohiotanga mo te taha ki a ia. Kei te pohe be etahi ki a ia, ko te Elemi teina o EToani raua ko Henri teina 0 te, Karaiti, engari e karangatia ana ia ko te tania Ai'apiu, me Matiu ano hoki raua ko Taniati, a tera pea he teina ia no raua. (i) A Repiu e karangatia nei ko Tariu.
(1) lie iti rawa atu te whakaatn mona i 0 era atu. Matiu 10: 3.
Hurae 21, 1920 TK K.ARERE 231
(2) J'] karangatia ana hoki ko Hura c iloani oie te ata wehe aim, iiaunga a Hura Lkariotc. Hoani 14: 22-23. (j) A iiaiinoiia te Kananiti.
(1) I whakaingoatia ko tetahi 0 te tekau ma rua. Matin 10: 4; Maka 3: 18.
(2) B karangatia ana ko llainiona Heroti i a Ruka (i : 15, aie NTga Mahi 1: 13, te tikanga 0 Heroti, "He tangata Kanaani."
(k) A Hura lkariotc
( 1 ) Te alma i ngohengohe in ki te whakahaunga a te Kaiwhakaora, oie te kaha hoki 0 te mea i a ia c pupuri ana nga oioni, engari i alma ngakau apo, kaorc hoki i pono. Hoani 12: 1-7. i2) Te tukunga i a te Karaiti, me tona whakamo- moritanga. Ruka 22: 1-7; Maka 14: L0-11; .Matin 26: 14-17; Matin 27: .'Mi.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
Ko te aroha 0 tetahi ki tona ake whenua (Patriotism).
Te tangata aroha pono ki tona ake whenua, ko tc tangata c pupuri ana i runga i te ngohengohe ki nga ture 0 tona whenua. "Kaua tetahi tangata e takahi i nga ture 0 te whenua." Ako. me nga Kawe. 58: 21.
E pai ana m at on ki ic haere i raro i te mana 0 nga Kingi, o nga Tuniuaki, mc nga Kai-whakahacre tikanga, e pai ana hoki malon ki i<- ngohengohe ki !<• whakahonore ki te tautoko hoki i te ture. 12 0 nga Tikanga 0 te Whakapono.
1. Ko te ture here i a matou hei tangata whenua ki i<> in at 011 \\ henua. a. Ko tc ngohengohe ki nga ture. 1) Ko to awliina ki te whakakalui i nga ture. 2 Ko te whakanui ki te kara 0 to taton whenua.
.1 Ko tc whakaarahanga <> t<- kara "Union Jack"
i \"m Tireni n< i i nga Ra hararei nunui, ara i !<■
Aperii ;i " \ ! tune, te ro
w lianant.mv l <> King! 1 1. mm | tc II <> \onna
i E KARERE Hurae 21, 1 026
"Armistice Day" ko te ra i mutu ai te whawhai nui i rhahuc ake nei.
I). Ko 1c whakanui i te kara. Ka nga lioia. Ka luiiia te "Union Jack'' ka maati nga hoia i mua 0 te kara me te ara 0 te ringa matau ki 0 ratou rae he whakanui, i te kara, me te whakautu pcra inai hoki 0 to raton Apiha whakahaere.
c. I nga kura. Ko nga tamariki ka maati ka tu ranei i mua 0 te kara i tc hutinga*. Ka pera ano te whakanui 0 nga ringa i niuri ka waiata, i te waiata ''God Save the King. " 0
KI TE ETITA.
Ko te Matenga o Piki Waerea
Tciici tetahi mea whakapouri kua pa mai kei a matau kei nga tangata 0 Korongata nei. Mo tc 5 0 nga ra 0 Hune ka mate tetahi 0 o matau nei pakeke, ara a Piki Waerea. He tangata ngakaii mahaki tenei, lie tangata atawhai i tc manenc. Kahore tetahi mahi pakanga raruraru i niahia e ia i waenganui i a matau. lie tangata tu marae iioki ia, he tangata tautoko i nga whakaaro nunui i waenganui i to matau marae, tautoko i nga tikanga 0 tc Rongopai 0 Ihu Karaiti. Tona karangatanga i te Tohungatanga 0 Arona, lie Kai-Whakaako. Mahue iho i a ia tona lioa wahine me a raua mokopuna nui noa atu i muri i a ia, kai ai i tenei ika nui i tc hakura me tc tangi. Ka rjro tc matua. no tc 7 o nga ra 0 Mei i mate ;ii tona taniaiti a Koro Vy.acrea, c wha tonu nga wiki i muri mai i tc matenga atu 0 tona tamaiti ka mate atu ko ia. Mai i tc ra i mate ai tona tamaiti ka iti tona whakaaro ki tona ake tinana i tc nui 0 tona aroha me tona tangi ki tona tamaiti. Ko nga korero mo tona tamaiti kua oti ano tc panui i roto i Te Karere. Ko ona tan e 63. Heoi i te kaha 0 tona tangi pouri mo tona tamaiti kua mate ia. kua rite ona whakaaro tangi ki tona tamaiti, kua tae atu ia ki tona, tamaiti.
Heoi, mihi mai, tangi mai e ona whanaunga i roto i enei hapu Ng&ti Kahungunu, Xgati Rakai]>aka, Xgata Tuwharetoa, mc era liapu 0 tenei tangata. Heoi ano,
R. M. KAMAU.
Hurae 21, 1920 te karere .3$
He Piki i runga i te Tumatakuru ?
E korero ana i roto i nga Qiangai 0 te hunga kaore e pai ana ki tenei kura ara te kura a te "Moniona," he kura mani- heko, ahakoa e mohiotia ana etahi hua pai me etahi main pai e puta niai ana i roto i tenei kura. Kaore te hunga puhaehae ana ki tenei kura e ki lie pai, engari lie kura weriweri, whaka- rihariha, ko t<- take ke 0 te whakakino mo te karakia. No reira aliau ka hoatu i tenei ripoata mo etahi mahi pai i nialiia c nga tamariki 0 tenei kura, hei titiro mai ma te hunga e korero ana i Te Karere.
I te tainia o te Pakanga i ata tonongia te ropu whaka- tangitangi 0 nga tamariki 0 te M.A.C. kia haere ki te kohl moni ma nga mea i haere ki te Pakanga i roto katoa 0 Aotearoa nei i te robe i raro i te whakahaere a Apii'ana Ngata. Nuku atu i te wha mano pauna nga moni i tiro mai i a ratau. Ko enei tamariki l:e "Momona" te nuinga, lie Mihingare etahi, i whaka- akona e Watene Mete i roto i tenei Ivareti. Kaore ano oku tannga 1 rongo e In t an 3 lie tolui pi ten* he pn 1 mti enti tamariki no te M.A.( '.
\a ko Wi renin Wiremu, i paahi ia i tenei kura. lie para- kimete tana mahi i vvhawha ai ia. Inaianei ko ia tetahi tamaiti moliio atn o iil:;i tamariki .Maori katoa, ahakoa i whea, ahakoa i whea. No Ngapuhi tenei tamaiti. [Caorc e korerotia te mohio o tena tamaiti. ko te take he koiv kaore e mahi whaimko i roto, engari kia noho hei roia ka haere te rongo, no te mea hoki he whanako taua mahi e riro ana mai nga moni nui noa atn.
Ko tetahi tamaiti ko Ero Paranihi (Frances) no [lamoa,
i ako i;i ki t«' ako i nga tohll pai katoa 0 te kau miraka me te alma 0 nga miraka e pai ai mo nga whriina v. era. me nga tohn papai o tenei taonga 0 te pikaokao me nga tohu papai 0 te kau, itipi. poaka. I paahi ia i tenei kura, tona hoki nga atu ki tona kainga ko ia te tamaiti i hoki atu i te .\! ,A.< '. kei )<• mahi i enei iii:ihi katoa i vvaenganui i ona i\\i. FCua in he vvharc mahi patn rnana, vvliare Imkapapa mana. Tekau ma wha nga ETamop i tac mai i tenei tan.
Tetahi tamaiti ko llirini Rawiri Kamau, i tvhakaakona ia i roto i tenei ki •:: i 1 .■ VI.A.i i 1 itfl ki n ia tenei mol.iol 1
2J4 TE KARERE Hurae 21, 1926
mo to vvhakatangitangi. lie inea ako ia 11a Watene Mete, whii-a. kataa, menorini, kararanate, penetio, saxophone. 1st Grade ia i enei malii katoa. Kua noho ia he kai-wliakaako i Akarana. Kua noho ia hei agent ma Kadxv's Co., wkare nui 0 Akarana. Inaianei kua haere ia i te ao katoa purei haere ai. Kua riro maii a ia te inatauranga 0 teni malii. Kaati, kaore e kiia he hua pai tcna no te M.A.C.
Anei ano etahi taniariki papai i paahi i tenei kura. Ko Nirealia Paewai, Apiata Meha, .lames Elkington, Brii T. Kupa, Tapsell Meh'a, me etahi atu. I paahi ratau i nga malii katoa tae atu ki te taha wairua. Koia nei te tino inatauranga nui ko te moliiotanga ki te taha mo te wairua e tika ai mo te oranga tohutanga, koia nei te riiutunga mai 0 nga inatauranga. lie nui nga taniariki i puta mai i roto i tenei kura me tenei moliio- tanga, kaore e korerotia lie hua pai ena.
Anei etahi taniariki ko (J. Xepia raua ko Rui Paewai i whakaakona ki tenei kura M.A.C. Kua kitea l-aua e te ao taniariki toa ki te purei wluitu paoro. I riro raua i roto i te piki o nga kaha mo te purei ki te ao, noho ana a Xepia koia te toa o te ao. E kore e kitea e kiia ana na te M.A.C. i whakaako, na i roto i te panui a te Pihopa o Waiapu no Te Ante aua taniariki.
Anei ano etahi taniariki kua pikingia ano tokorima katoa ratau hei haere i roto i te tiima Maori no te M.A.C. I puta ake to ratau toa ki tenei malii ki to whutu paoro i roto i tenei kura. E kore e kiia 0 te ao na te kura ''Momona" i ako.
No reira e hoa ma, titiro iho ki nga korero, me ata korero e koutou te ahua 0 tenei kura, he tino kura. Ara atu etahi awhina nunui a tenei kura i walio atu i enei kua oti nei te tuhituhi, i waenganui i nga Maori, Pakeha, 0 Heretaunga nei.
Ko te kaha 0 te kura nei ki te man taniariki e 70. Inaianei kua neke atu 78 ng-a taniariki, kua tino ki, kaore lie ruma era e whai hang-atia atu ano etahi ruma Ida pan te 100 taniariki. No reira, e te iwi, Ida kakama mai, a kua nei ka ki i te Ilamoa. E whakamihi atu ana ki a koe e Ngapuhi mo to kaha ki te tuku mai i a koutou taniariki ki te kura o te M.A.C. Heoi,
UM.K.
Hurae 21, 1926
TE KARKRE
235
He Whakaahua Pai
Na R.R. Tiwinihana (He roanga atu)
Ka te Ruuma a te Tamaiii a Hohcpa Mete
He whakaatutanga tenei, te mea tuarua, 0 te ahuatanga a te rum a o te Poropiti, i puta mai ai te Anahera Moron a i ki a in. Ko te moenga pu tenei i takoto ai te tamaiti poropiti i te wa o n^a whakakitenga e torn 0 te Anahera lie moenga pai ho- ki tenei, mo tera wa, ahakoa e rima putu roa, a he taura ho- ki nga "spiungs."
(Taria te roaaga)
Ki a Ngapuhi Ranala
R koro N'gapuhi lien at a, tena pa koo mo to mahi i>;ii ki to ui 11 i To Karero kia haero ki nga marao 0 te luinga e whakahe mai n:i i i<' llahi 0 lliu Karaiti <» te [lunga Tapu <> hlm Ra 0 Muri Nroi. K tunianako atu ana toku noi ngakau kia vvhai hua taua nialii n hau i roto i nga po me nga pa 0 tenei koanga, l\di;i 11.-1 ano nga mahi 1 ki ana hoki ngn koroua »> nclic pa, "Ki to koro <• hua to karaka mo kairangi nga poka kia hua ai, kia paralii ai, kia pakari ni." Mohentoa pa ho karaka ai i;ni c kairangi mai na, ki toku tino moliio ka pakari ona hua
2Jj6_ TE KARERE Hurae 21, J 926
i tenei raumati 0 heke mai nei. Tena ki te oiea ko te piki i kanga ra e te Karaiti kia kore e hua a marokc noa tan e kairangi mai na, e koro ki toku whakaaro ka mouniou tana malii pai aliau ki la te ngakau tangata whakaaro. Tena ia ki ta te Atua he utu nui ki a koe, ahakoa tawaia, ahakoa rnanaakitia. Ko te lino painga 0 tana mahi alum kia whai huarahi ai ratou hei whakamarama mai ma ratou i nga he 0 te Iialii. Kia marama ai lioki te whakamarama a nga apiha o te Hani.
Heoi, kia ora e lioa Renata mo to mahi pai. Xa to hoa pononga i roto i te Ariki.
Xa TEHAUERANG1 MATAIRA,
Chatham Islands (Wharc Kauri). 0
KO NGA MAHI A TE KURA HAPATI HEI PAINGA MA TATOU
Na Te Ngoura i tuhi, na Rapata Tanapu i whakamaori.
(He roanga atu) I te ata kore he painga ake 0 te kotiro nei, lieoi hacrc ana a Karanata ki roto i tana ruuma ki te inoi.
I a ia e inoi ana ka puta te whakaaro ki a ia me tono ia i nga kaumatua kia haerc mai ki te pei te kai-whakamate e whakamate nei i tana kotiro, kia ora mai ai ia. Heoi ko tana tononga i nga kaumatua kia haere mai ki te whakawahi i tana kotiro. Te taenga mai 0 nga kaumatua ka whakapa atu 0 ratou ringaringa mo te wThakawahinga, me te inoi ano mo te kotiro ra. 1 te mea c inoi ana te kaumatua nei. ka puta ctelii kupu tauhou rawa, kaore nei ano i rangona i mua atu e Kara- nata i roto i tenei mea i te inoi.
Ka mea ia. "Kua oti noa atu te whakarite e te Kaiwliaka- mate e te Hoariri ton matcnga, kua panuitia nuitia lioki me mate koe i tenei mate. Engari ma te niana 0 te Tohungatanga i a matou nei, e pei te niana 0 te Kaiwhakamate, a c pera ano lioki e matou ta te Hoariri whakarite mou. ka mea ai kia tupu koe hei whaea i roto 0 Iliaraira."
I te hokinga 0 nga kaumatua pai tonu iho te kotiro nei, ora ana. tupu ana hei wahine, inaianei kua whaeatia. I a Karanata e tatari ana kia pai ake tana kotiro kia lioki ai ratou ki to ratou kainga, ka lioki ana mahara ki nga kupu tauhou i rongo ra ia i roto i te inoi a te kaumatua. heoi ka whakaaro
Hurae 2i; 1925 te karere
noa iho ia ki ona ritcnga. I mua tata atu i tana hokinga ki loiia kaingd ka hacre atu ki a ia tc tangata nona ra 1a whare i noho ai ratou, ka mea atu ki a ia,
"K hialiia ana an ki te korcro atu ki a koe i tetehi korero whakangahau mo taku wahinc. Ko taku wahine lie wahine whakapono ki nga tnalii-a-wairua. Xa i tetehi rang] ka haerc ia ki te kainga 0 tetehi wahine korerorero ki nga wairua. Katahi ka mea mai te wahine ra ki a ia, i kite ia i etehi kotiro tokorua i roto i to mana whare e pangia ana i te mate, e tata ana ka mate, a kihai itaro ka kite ia i tc mea kaumatua e ora liaerc niai ana, ko tc mea iti i kino haerc tonn atn tc mate, a mate ana. I kite ano ia i te kotiro itiiti e maka ana ki roto i 1c pouaka, i 1c niakanga 0 tc pouaka ki runga i tc tereina, i te roa o te haeretanga 0 te tereina ki tetclii taone, i te niakanga atu o tc pouake ki runga i tetehi atu tereina, i 1c whakaw iii- tinga o tc tereina i tc awa nui, ka liaere i nga macro maha 0 nga maunga, 0 nga raorao, i te niakanga atu ano 0 te pouaka ki runga i tetehi atu tereina, i te haercnga atu »» te tereina a ka in i ic taone nui i tc taha 0 te roto, c karapotia uei c nga maunga, i te tangohanga mai 0 te pouaka i runga i te tereina, i te tanumanga ki te urupa i runga i tc hiwi." Pcnei ano i ata kite te waliine uei i enei mea, i te mea korc rawa i lie tana whakamarama i te ara liei liaringa i tc tinana 0 te kotiro uei atu i Wahingitana, ka tanu ki tc urupu <> tc l'a Tote, me i male ia.
Katahi a Karanata ka moliio ki tc tikanga <> nga kupu o ic iooi n te kaumatua ra, "Kua wliakaritea noatia atu hoki ion matenga <• !<• Kaiwhakamatc, kua panuitia nuitia hoki <• ia ka mate koe." Kaorc ano te kaumatua nci i rongo noa i mua .Mil i tonei wahine main ki tc wairua, ;i 1^ ;i toke akc tc whakaaro i a ia kin mea ia i ana kupu i roto i tana inoi i rongo ra ia. a na runga i te mana n te Tohungatanga i< Rcwera i pel, a ora ana ic kotiro nci.
Ik' maha hoki nj»a kai w hakaako <• roto i n tatou
llapali c kill' ana i tetehi una w liakamilia 10 1 .1 ratOU P malii .na 1110 tc Malii. I'] lik.i an;i liokl kia km, i.ni.i v faloii . in i
mea rckarekn ki a ratou ukonga, kia u rawa ai ratou U i
malii o Ic llalii, a kia mohio ;ii U i Ic mana •« ic Alna. ki Ic i nun a am. hoki n u« i;< ■ w . i .
238 TE KAKERE liuiae>i, 1926
ME PEHEA E RIRO AI NGA TANGATA KI TE KAHA A TE ATUA HEI WHAKAORA ?
Ka mea a Paora, "Kahore hoki oku whakama ki te Rongo- pai 0 te Karaiti: ko te kaha hold ia 0 te Atua hei whakaora mo nga tangata katoa e whakapono ana."
lie aba taua kaha i roto i te Rongo-pai? Ko te kaha i roto i te Rongo-pai koia to Wairua Tapu. E ki ana a Paora :
1 Koriniti 12: 8-10. "E homai ana hoki ki tetahi e te Wairua te kupu whakaaro; ki tetahi atu te kupu ihatau, lie mea na tana Wairua ano; Ki tetahi ko te whakapono, na tana Wairua ra ano; ki tetahi atu ko nga mana whakaora, na tana Wairua ano; Ki tetahi atu ko nga nialii merekara ; ki tetahi atu ko te niahi poropiti; ki tetahi atu ko te matauranga ki nga wairua; ki tetahi atu ko nga reo ke; ki tetahi atu ko te vvhaka- maoritanga i nga reo."
.Ma konei ka kite tatou, ki te whiwhi nga tangata ki tana wairua katahi ia ka whiwhi ki te kaha 0 te Atua. No reira ko te tino take mo tatou, me pewhea e whiwhi ai nga tangata ki taua wairua 1 He alia te huarahi c riro ai nga tangata ki tana kaha ?
E ki ana to tatou Poropiti a Hohepa Mete, ko te huarahi e riro ai nga tangata ki taua wairua, ara "ko te whakapono ki te Ariki ki a Ihu Karaiti; tuarua ko te ripenatatanga ; tuatoru ko te iriiringa rtimaki hei nmrunga hara ; tuawha ko te whaka- pakanga 0 nga ringaringa mo te hoatntanga 0 te Wairua Tapu."
Na, mehemea he poropiti tika a Hohepa Mete, e tautokona ana ia e nga poropiti onamata. Titiro ki te kauwhaUtanga a Pita i te Ra o to Petekoha (Mahi '2: 39) i te mea kna kite a Pita he whakapono 1a te whakaminenga, no to mea i patai ratou, ".ATe aha matou?" Ko te whakahoki a Pita, ^Ripenata, kia iriiria tena tangata, tena tangata o kouton i rnnga i te ingoa o Ihu Kai'aiti, hei murunga hara ; a ka riro mai i a konton te mea homai, ara te Wairua Tapn."
A tenei ano, titiro ki Xga Mahi S: 14-20. I te mea kna uiohio a Pita rana ko Ilemi kna whanan enei tangata i te wai, ara nga tangata na Piripi i iriiri, ka tae atu a Pita raua ko
Hurae 21, 1 rE KARERE 239
Jlciiii. me 1" whakapa iho o raua ringaringa ki runga ki o ratou mahunga kia whanau ai ratou i te wairua. Na ka kite a Haimona mi te whakapakanga o nga ringaringa ka whiwhi cnei tangata ki te Wairua Tapu. Kua mohio lioki a Paora ki te tika o enei whanautanga, no tc mea i te \\ a ka tac atu in ki Epiha (Nga Mahi 1!): 2-4) ka patai atu ia ki nga tangata, "Kua riro ranei tc Wairua Tapu i a kputou i muri i to koutou whakaponotanga "( Ano ra ko ratou ki a ia. Kiano matou i rongo noa he Wairua Tapu tenei. Ka mea ia ki a ratou, 1 iriiria oti koutou ki roto ki te aha.' Ka mea ratou, Ki roto ki 1a lioani iriiri. \a lea mea a Paora, Ta Eloani iriiri he iriiri ripenata. I mea ia ki te iwi, kia whakapono ratou ki tetahi e liaere mai ana i muri i a ia, ara ki a Karaiti Ihu."
Na, e hoa ma, me ata rapu koutou i enei rarangi karai- piture, no te mea e korc enei tangata c taca te whakapohche i a Paora. Kua mohio a Paora he tangata tika a Eloani, he tangata vvliai in ana ia mo te iriiringa, a kei te mohio nga tangata tika katoa ki te kahore te tangata e whanau i te wai i te wairua lioki c korc ia e ahei tc lomo ki te rangatiratanga a te .\tu.!. Aia ka mea a lioani ki 1c iwi (Maka i
"Ko ahau nei, he iriiri laku i a koutou ki te wai : mana i;i koutou c iriiri ki te Wairua Tapu." Ko enei tangata kei Epiha, kihai ratou i rongo ko te Wairua Tapu tetahi mea. \'a kua mohio a Paora ehara tenei i !<■ irriringa a lioani, chara hoki tenei i 1c iriiringa na i< talii tangata whai mana. Me ata titiro ki te rima me tc ono <> nga rarangi, a ka rongo ratou, ka iriiria ano ratou i runga i tc ingoa o tc Ariki a Ihu, ara ka iriiri ratou ki tc iriiringa tika na tetahi tangata kua vvhai mana. Na ka whakapakia iho nga ringaringa a Paora ki runga ki a ratou ,-i k;i tac mai ic Wairua Tapu ki a ratou. Na ka korerotia i ra1 (>u nga reo ke, ka poropil i iioki,
M.i Loin i ka kite te huarahi e w \\\\\ hi ai whanautanga » tc wai mc )«• Wairua lioki, ara h kaha Atua lici w hakaora m< u tangata katoa v \\ hakapi i
\,i i - inn i roto i Ro pai a t< Ki
\;i lv II WIN W \
240 IE KAKEKK Hurae 21, 1926
MO TE ARANCA MAI
He men tango mai i te pukapuka qio nga tikanga 0 te Rongb-
pai (Gospel Doctrine, page 564) na te tumuaki
11a llohepa P. Mete i tuhi, na Eru T. Kupa i
whakamaori.
I] whakapono ana au i te mea i ara ake a te Karaiti i tc mate, ka pera ano te hunga whakapono. Ka kite ano tatou i a tatou. E Qiohio ana au ki a l!m ko la te Karaiti, i nluri Jioki i Tuna matcnga me tona tanumanga, kua ara ake la i te mate, a kua aoho ko. la hei liua matamua mo te aranga mai. Iv i te hunga katoa e whakapono ana, tera noake ia ki te Hunga Tapu, e tatu iho ana te marietanga pai 0 ratou whakaaro, me te mohiotanga hoki nia te ngohengohe ki nga lure me nga tikanga o te Rongopai, na te Karaiti na to tatou Kai Whakaora i whakaako, me te whakahau hoki ki te iwi me Ana akonga, ka wiianau ano te tangata, ka whakaorangia i te hara, ka ara ake i te urupa, a pera me te Karaiti, ka hoki atu ki te aroaro 0 to Matua. Ehara ke te male i te mutunga. I a tatou hoki i roto i te hinapouri, i te wa e whakatakoto ai tatou i era 0 tatou kua riro i a aitua, he maramatanga tonu to tatou kei runga i te oranga, kei nga kupu me te aranga mai 0 Iliu Karaiti, ka tutaki ano tatou ki a ratou me te hariru, ka noho tahi, ka liaere tahi me ratou i te oranga pai ake, kua kore te pouri me te vvhakararu, kua kore hoki tatou e w^he ano.
Ko tenei mohiotanga hei tino arahi i a tatou kia pai te noho i tenei oranga, kia puta atu tatou i roto i tenei hanga matemate, i runga i nga mahi, i nga whakaaro, i nga hanga pai. Ko nga wairua katoa 0 nga tangata, i te mahuetanga atu ano o tenei tinana matemate, ahakoa wairua pai, kino ranei, e whakaaturia mai ana ki a tatou e te Pukapuka a Moromona o haria atu ana aua wairua ki 1c kingi ki tana Atua ano naana nei i homai te oranga ki a ratou, kei reira te wehewehenga, te whakaritenga i tetahi wahi 0 te whakawakanga. Ko nga wairua o te hunga tika ka tukua ki te wahi whakahari, e karangatia nei ko Pararaiha, lie wahi okiokinga, he wahi rangimarie, tipu whanui ai to ratou matauranga, a okioki ana ki reira i 0 ratou rarunga katoa.. i 0 ratou pouri, i te alia, i te
Hurae 21, 1926 TE karere
aha. Ko te liunga kino ia, kaliore 0 ratou wahi, taunga hoki ki te Wairua 0 te Atua. na maka atu ana enei ki t»- pouritanga 0 waho, he mea na to ratou kino ake, kua araliina li<>ki ratou i runga i ta te Itewera i pai ai. I tc wa 0 tc matenga atu e penci ana te uoho a enei karailie wairua e rua, tae 110a ki te aranga tuai, te hunga tika i roto i te whakahari, te huuga kino i roto i te pouritanga, hei te wa pa ano hoki kua rite i te Atua. c ara mai ai te hunga mate, <■ kotahi ai ano te wairua me te tinana, e mauria ai hoki kia tu i te aroaro 0 te Atua. kia whakawakia i runga i tc alma 0 a ratou niahi. Koia tenei te ivhakawakanga wliakamul unga.
1. tc mea kua ngohengohc te tangata ki nga tikauga 0 tc Rongopai, kua whakapaua tona kaha ki te uialii pai, k; hoki i nialii lie ki tetahi, i aroha tonu ki tc tika, me te tal lioki i nga malii he, me te tuku atu i tuna tinana ki te urupa i roto i te okiokinga 0 te hunga tika, e rongo ana ahau, c aiohio ana hoki tera c tapiritia mai i waho atu 0 te ranghnaric aie te okiokinga i tc Pararaiha, tera he tino kororia uui rawa te kotahitanga ano 0 te tinana tana ko te wairua, he tino marama hoki te aranga mai mona, me te oranga ki tonu i tc whakahari c takoto mai ana. AJica tcnci wa tae mai ai ko te Atua anake c mohio. ana. otira e inohio tuturu ana tatou ki tenei: ka mai nga tangata katoa i te mate,
; an nci ano. <• mohio tuturu ana an <• tika ana enei whaka- aturanga ; v mohio ana au ki te tika 0 enei mea, i runga i te w iri
0 toku tinana ki tonu i te wairua 0 tc Atua « awhina nei i mohiotanga. Ko tenei alma kei te haere tahi me te matauranga ,, te Atua me Ana tikauga tapu. Kci 0 ' • hakaatu ranga a te Karaiti, a nga poropiti ano hoki, nga kohimuhimu ano a tc Wairua Tapu, i roto i en< i
kore taku w hakapono, me te mohio tonu hoki he ai
to tc tinana, chara i te m< a ;:i nc
aranga tuturu no te tinana Kaore hoki au
1 Aina ki tonu nci i te 1 k hi > me 1 ; ' ,r tangata kia rite ki to tatou hoa, tuakana hoki, he p
whai ho . : e tika hoki i roto i A
hoki i Tona (i
matenga mo ake tonu atu mutii atu
.,■ men i m ;i ll"1 ' '
244 TK KARERE Huiae2I, 1926
turanga i roto i te Miutara, trie tana utu tonu i tana takoha i nga ruaraina katoa, a no te tatanga rawatanga 0 te pan 0 te rua tan, ka korero tahi ano raua ko tana Pihopa.
(Taria te roanga)
0
H e Fowh i r i
Ki Te Karere: E rere ra e te manu tangi pai ki nga waahi katoa e tae atu ai koe, man e whakaatu atu ki nga tangata katoa e noho ana i runga i enei motu e rua, ara i te Aotearoa me te Waipounamu. E penei atu ana me haere katoa mai ratou ki to matou Hui Pariha ka tu nei ki te Kiri- kiri takiwa o Hauraki nei a te 31 o Hurae me te I o nga ra o Akuwhata, 1926. Haere mai kia kai tahi tatou i nga kai whakatewairua rne nga kai whakatetinana ano hoki.
Haere mai! Haere mail Haere mai!
Na Anara Tarapata, Tumuaki Pirimona Watene, Tumuaki Peka
Haere mai! Haere mai!! Haere rmi!!! Tenei matou o te Peiwhairangi ka powhiri atu i te Hu- nga Tapu katoa, nga hoa aroha, Maori, Pakeha, aha atu ranei, kia hui katoa mai ki tenei oa tatou Hui Pariha; tenei ka tu ki Mangamuka i te 28 me te 29 o nga ra o Akuhata.
E kii ra a Ihu, "E kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, e- ngari i nga kupu katoa a te Atua." No reira e te Hunga Ta- pu, e nga hoa aroha, tenei matou ka powhiri atu i a koutou katoa kia haere mai ki te kai i te taro o te ora. Na to koutou hoa, na
Apiata Meha (R.R. Tiwinihana, Tumuaki Takiwa)
Ko te Hunga Tapu o Korongata takiwa o Heretaunga nei kei te takatu i to rato.i marae kia tu he Hui Pariha kei tenei takiwa i roto i te marama o Hepetema nei, engari ko te tino taima hei tunga kahore ano kia whakapumautia e te Timuaki. No reira e te Hunga Tapu, kia mataara, tera pea ka panuitia te tino powhiri i roto o Te Karere mo Akuhata.
Hurae 21, 1926
TE KARERE
Ko nga Kai-Kauwhau 0 te Mahia
Iriparete Pom are
Te Amo Tengaio
Whakahe Matenga
Ruka Rarere
Tiema Taurima
Henare Taurima
Perea Reupene
Tungane Reupene
Runga Tengaio
Rangi Tengaio
Hirini Christy
Hoani Kemara
Hohepa Te Kauru
Hirini Kemara
Paora Hapi
Friday Pirihi
Tere Waerea
Wi Mete
Ora Noa Tengaio
Raiha Tengaio
1 iemi Mete
Waaka Toroaiwhiti
Pita Reihana Pene
Areta Kerei
Potiki Kahuroa
Keita Kahuroa
Heremia Mae he
Ray P. Thompson
Hetakia Pirihi
Hori Haere
Tamihana Pere
Miria Kamau Peri'
Te Kauru Piripi
Epeniha Kaihote
Ko nge ingoa enei o nga kai-kauwhau 0 Mahia mo Hu- rae Akuhata me Hepetema. E hoa ma, titiro, kua ma te mara, kua rite mo te kotinga, no reira ko ia e hiahia ana ki te kokoti, tukua ia kia aki ih<> i tana toronaihi i runga i tona kaha, kokoti ai, i te roanga 0 te ra, kia purangatia ai mo to- na wairua he oranga mutunga kore 1 roto 1 te kingit
Alua. Na tO koUtOU trina,
l II. Anihana
|
1 Nuhaka |
1 |
|
J Mahanga |
3 |
|
1 Oraka J Waikokopu |
4 |
|
2 |
|
|
1 Nuhaka / Waikokopu |
3 |
|
1 |
|
|
\ Mahanga J Nuhaka |
2 |
|
4 |
|
|
\ Whakaki J Oraka |
1 |
|
3 |
|
|
\ Ki Roto J Wairoa |
2 |
|
4 |
|
|
) Wairoa J Ki Roto |
3 |
|
I |
|
|
) Mahanga J Tuahuru |
4 |
|
2 |
|
|
1 Tuahuru J Wairoa |
I |
|
3 |
|
|
S Oraka |
2 |
|
J Tauapata |
4 |
|
\ Ki Roto J Whakaki |
4 |
|
2 |
|
|
1 Mohaka J Waihu |
3 |
|
1 |
|
|
) Wairoa |
2 |
|
i Reinga |
1 |
|
) Mohaka j Nuhaka |
1 |
|
3 |
|
|
\ Nuhaka |
2 |
|
j Putahi |
4 |
|
J Nuhaka |
1 |
|
j Wairoa |
1 |
|
1 Te I'hi |
4 |
|
) Putahi |
2 |
TE KARERE
I [urae 21, 1926
KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA
Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS
Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather 1 1-0
Book of Mormon, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6
" " " , Half Leather 9-0
•' " " , Leather 10-0 & 15-0
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth ^-0
" " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0
MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS
Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 0
, Leather 3-6
Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9
" " " " Me Nga tiimene, Leather 3 in I Il-b
" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0
" " " " , Leather 15-0
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-J " " " ", Leather 15-0
Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 10 SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of the Gospel
What Jesus Taught
Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton
SONG BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth
" " " , Leather... "...
Deseret Song Books, Cloth
" " " , Leather
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORX3 Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage Vitality of Mormonism Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson Restoration of the Gospel, Widtsoe Joseph Smith's Teachings - Life of Christ for the Young, Weed Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage Essentials in Church History, Smith Bible Ready Refcence
4-0 5.0
36 4-6
66
3-0 6b 3-0
8^3 4-6 6-0 40 3-6 40 8-9 6-9 2-0
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Motris 6-0
KO J. H. TINIK1NI TF KAI TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KORONGATA, HASTINGS, H. B.
fetw
gC^^^g^gpCC^
^^i^rs^ssiir^^
| WAHANGA 20 AKUHATA 25, 1 926 NAM. A 8
i
1^,% , *^
Ko te Puke Kumora
'•KA iti ano tau kupu i rolo i te puehi1, 11 ka rite tou reo ki to te tangata i te atua maori. he mea puta ake i te whenua, ka kowhetewhete ake tau ku- pu i roto i te puehu." Ihaia 29 : 4.
;-o
w,
ESS
m
I
<^-
*C& KMK&R&'
WHAKAEMINCA O NOA KORERO
V\ naraugi. Kl TE ETITA
He Matenga 266
He Powhiri 20/
hie Ripoata Hui Atawhai 278
He Ripo.ta Mihana 274
Ko te Hui a te Poari M. AC 279
Ko te Hui Panhao te Kirikiri 209
Ko te Matenga o Te Paea Cunningham 274
KO NCA RONCO KORERO
Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona 268
KO NCA TJHINGA MAI
He WhakaahuaPai 267
Ko te Nama a te Atua 202.
MAKI HUI ATAWHAI 2bi
MAHI KURA HAPATI
Concert Recitation 246
Intermediate Department 255
Korero a Ngakau 246
Kindergarten Department 258
Maori Theological 246
Pakeha Theological 249
Postlude 245
Prelude 24$
Sacrament Gem 24s
aroro
WAHm.wa 20 WENEREI. AKUHATA 25. 1926. NAM* 8
filaori Hgriculmral College Hasliitfls. i . £.
E tukua atu ana ia mararmi e te Miliaria o Niu Tiieni,
Halii o iliu Karaiti o te Runga Tapu o nga Ra o xMuri JNei.
Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita c Te Karere, M.A.C, Hastings.
K<» te utu iuo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni (5/-).
KO TE TIKANGA TENEI.
iV.e matua utu mo tcu pcpa kc. voiiivhi ai.
J. H. Timkini, Tumuuki Mihana Monona K. Kwutana, Etita. l\ala Wiuhita, LUia Hoa Awhii.i
Ko te Kui-R,poata Te Tuati Meha
Kii aga Kai Tulii Mai (Special Writers).
YY iremu A. Koura
Rap ta Tan;*pu
Eru T. Kupa
TIAHI KURA HAPATI.
Prelude.
Adagio hgato.
Arr. After Schumann. by Edw. P. Kimball.
PP
StCRAMENT GEM FOR SEPTEMBER, 1926
I ii memory of i he broken flesh We eal I he broken bread ;
And witness wit h t he eup a fresh, ( hie faith in < Jhrisl , our I read. " Postlude.
PPP Bit,
246 TE KARERE Akuhata25, ^26
cU.vCLRT RECITATION FOR SEPTLMBER, 1926.
(Matthew, Fourth Chapter, Tenth Versed "Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt ihou serve."
KORERO A NGAKAU MO HEPETEM4, 1926.
Kei a Matiu 4 : 10. "Me koropiko koe ki te Ariki, ki tou Atua; me mahi ano ki a ia anake."
MAORI THEOLOGICAL.
Ratapu tuataiii, Hepetema 5, 1926. HE AKOKANGA MO TE KA NOKO-PUKU.
Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako-
toria nei e Ihu liei mahi ma tatou.
Te Whakaaui: Kei a Matiu 4: 8-11. Akoranga me nga Kawenata 19: 1()-1S.
Tera lie nui Dga tangata e korcro ana i nga karaipiture kahore e inohio ki to tino tikanga 0 te whakamatautauranga 0 Ihu, tera e pa ana ki ia taugata 0 te ao. Hcci ano te mea e kite ana ratou, ko te whawhai 1 waenganui 0 nga mea kaha c rua — te Tama a te Ata (a Hatana) me te Tama a te Atua (ko Ihu). Ko te patai kei roto i a ratou koia tenci, "Ka aha kia pena i taka a Ihu i te whakamatautauranga ? ' ' Kei te tino mohio ratou tera he atua a Jim, te take i taea e la te whakamatau- tauranga. Kei te hari ratou ko Ihu i kaha, kahore te Rewera. Engari 1 vvareware ratou tera a Hatana i homai i nga mea 0 te ao ma tatou meite korokipo tatou lei a ia — !:;; iaua whakamatautauranga ano ana ki a Ihu. i mea ratou kahore a Hatana e vvhakaamatautau pcra i a ratou, ie take ehara Latou i te Atu a pera i a Ihu. Me mohio tatou tera a Hatana kei te whakamatautau i a tatou pera ano i tana mahi ki a Thu — teuei hci whakakaha i a tatou ki te takahi i a ia.
Ac, he Atua a Ihu, a he tangata ano hold, pera kahore a Hatana e whakamatautau i a la. I Tona tutakinga kia Hatana i mahi la i Tona kaha tangata, ki taea ano e la te kaha 0 te Atua, engari kahore i mahia o Ta no te mea kahore tera i te rite ki nga whakaritenga 0 mua atu.
I whakamatautau a Hatana i a la i runga i ()n« hiahia — hiahia almarcka, hiahia koropiko, hiahia kaha. He vvahi ngolkorc tcnei ki a tatou katoa, engari ka awhina te Ariki i a talon i roto i o tatou whaka- matautauranga— pera ano i Tan;' mahi ki a Ihu.
Kei te whakamatautauria nga tangata katoa, kahore he mea e kaha
Akuuata 25, \^2u IE tLAhLLRE -.47
incite kore e av.hir.atia.
J mohio a Ihu he Tama In na te Atua, a tera nga ia kei te haere mai ku mohiotia la be kingi. Engari i mua 0 Tona hounga ki Tuna kingitanga he mahi Mana hci aiahinga, me nga mamaetanga me nga tukinolanga Mona. I mua atn i Tona kakenga ki to rangi ki Tona torona me maniac Ja, a me ripcka ano hoki. 1 mea a Hatana incite koropiko a lhu ki a ia ka whakahoa ia ki a te Karaiti. Tera a te Karaiti e tn hei kingi nni. kahore hoki he rnamae, he mahi, heoi ano me kokopiko la ki a Hatana, ka tino niaarnaa noa atu — engari ka inca a ilin Die haere Ja i raro i nga whakahaunga a Tona Matua.
"Xa ka mea a Ihu ki a ia, Haere atu, e Hatana kua oti hoki te tuhituhi, Me korouiko koe ki te Ariki, ki tou Atua me mahi ano ki a ia anake. Xa ka niahue ia i te reueia, a ka haere nga anahera, ka mahi Diea inaana.'"'
l\a whaknwai. a Hatana, ka tohutohu, ka whakahau — engari kahore i taea e ia tetahi ki te mahi i 011a mahi kino inehemea kahore e pai atu te tangata ki a ia. E kore hoki ia e noho ki tetahi mehemea kahore ia e tukua mai. Ka tukua mai e te Atua he awhina ki nga mea nui ke iici to ratou aroha ki te Atua ia Hatana.
He aim tiga lake o tenei tauira ki a tatou.'
He alia nga manaakitanga • ' riro mai meite taea »• tatou nga whaka- niatautauranga .'
Me takatu te kai-whakaako ki te hoatu i tenei akoranga kia nui ai nga painga ki te karaihe, a ka hoatu ai te nuinga 0 te taiina ki nga mema ki te korero i nga manaakitanga kua riro mai i a ralou nia roto i to ratou kalia ki te tu i nga vvhakamatautauranga.
Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti
Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou
\';i Win mil ('. Kaa raua ko Rapata ranapu i whakarite.
Katapu tuarua, Hepetema 12, 1926. AKORANGA 24.
Ko tc Mutanga 0 te Hacrcnga Tuatoru 0 Paora i te Mihana. I. A Paora i Kpelui.
Ko te pukapuka tuatahi ki tc Hunga <> Koroniti. I\.»iiniti Tuatahi L6 -
Tirohia ili»» tcnei: l\<> to pukapuka noi he mea tuhituhi atu na Paora i te tatanga pan 0 te toru tau 0 tana noho i Bpeha. I !. Ko te haerenga <» Paora i Kariki.
(a) Te pukapuka tuarua ki nga l\<uiuiti
Tirohia iho tenei: !!<• mea tuhituhi i muri tata ilu> i t« pukapuka hiatahi, i Makeronia
248 tk KARERii Akuhata 25, .y26
(b) Te pukapuka ki te Hunga o Roma.
Tirohia ilio ano: I tuhia mai i Koroiniti hei whaka- at n tahi ki nga Eiunga Tapu o nga Hurai, a o Qga tauiwi hokij ko te aroha me te whakaoranga a te At na i tau ki a ratou kaioa. III. Ko te haerenga o Paora i te akau o te moana o Ahia Maina. (a) Te whakaoranga o Utiku i Toroa. (1>; Te poroporoakitanga ki nga Hunga Tapu o Ahia. Mahi 20-: L8-36. Ata tirohia ng, frhakaakoranga i put a i reira. (e) Te poropititanga <> A.kaJ)U i Toroniai.
Ratapu tuatoru, Hepetema 19, 191:6.
AKORANGA 25.
Ko te Toronga Whakamutunga a Paora i Hiruharama.
A. Ko tana powhiritanga atu e nga tuakana ki iliruharama.
1. Ko tana ripoata o tana mahi mihana i waenganui i nga tauiwi, mo nga tau e toru. Mahi 21: 17-19.
2. Ko tana whakaaturanga i nga mahi i oti i roto i nga tauiwi. Mahi 21 : 19: Roma 15: IS.
3. Ko te pataitanga o te kauwhau a Paora. Malii 21 : 20- 22.
4. Ko t<» tohutohunga a Paora hei awhina i te ritenga o to purenga. Mahi 2i : 23-26. Tirohia tahitia Tauanga (i : 1-9 Inn whakamarama i ona ritenga.
B. Ko te whainga o nga Hurai kia patua a ia, ne tana hopu-
nga e nga tangata o Roma.
1. Ko te puhaehaetanga o nga Hurae mo Paora i roto i te Temepara. Mohi 21 : 27.
2. Ko tana whakapaenga <• whakaako ana i nga tikanga ke i 1a te llahi. me te mahi poke i roto i te Temepara. Mahi 21 : 28-29.
Tiroliia ihd tenei: Xa ko nga tauhou e tomo ana ki roto i te Temepara e ahei ana kia whakamatea. Tauanga 3: 10, 38;
1 : 51.
3. Ko tana maunga i te ropu. Ko tana haringa ki waho o to Temepara kia whakamatea. Wliakaritea TT Kingi
Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KAKERE 249
11: 15. 4. Ko te whakaoranga 0 Paora e nga tangata 0 Roma. Mahi 21 : 33-34.
Ratapu tuawha, liepetema ?6, 1926
AKORANGA 26.
Ko te Roangu atu 0 te Toronga Whakamutunga a Paora i Hiruharama.
A. Ko tana karonga i a ia i te arawhata.
1. Ko te kiiii»<a a Paora i a ia he Hume whakaako i Qga mea tika katoa. Mahi 22: 3; 21 : 39.
2. Ka whakapuaki a Paora i tana kaha i niua i roto i oga tukinotanga ki nga Apotoro. Mahi 22: 3-5; 7: 58; 8: 1-3; 9: 1-2. Whakaritea ki te ahuatanga o Arami, te mea tamariki iho. Mohia, upoko 27.
3. Ko tana vvhaki hinegaro mo nga whakatahuritanga merekara. Malii 22 : 6-l(>.
4. Te whakapuakitanga i te karanga a te Atua i a ia kia malii i roto i nga tauiwi. Mahi 22: 17-21. Tirohia ano Nga Mahi 9: 15; Roma 11: 13.
B. Te po tuatahi 0 Paora ki roto i te pa (castle) 0 Hiruharama.
1. Te takatakainga ona ki te peha kau. Malii 22: 25-28.
2. Ko tana kiinga i a ia he tangata no te pa 0 Roma, a korc ake ia i tapua. Mahi, 22: 29; 16: 37.
P4KHH4 TH FO LOGIC* L
"GREAT BIBLICAL CmKACTIKS"
I ir*t Sundav, September 5, 1926.
FAST DAT TOPIC
The Example of Jesus: What it Bids us l)<>. The Third Temptation.
Text : Mati hew 4 :8-ll.
Probably must <>i* the casual readers of the scriptures fail to see the greal significance to <;icli individual of the temptations of Jesus. Their thoughl is thai they were but 1 battle between two 'jrc.it personalities the tempter, Satan, whose constant
250 TE KARKRE Aknhaia 25, Jy^6
efforts and great aim is to overthrow the Father's work and defeat the Son's plan- and the Tempted, ihe Only Begotten Son, the Chosen One.
The question in the mind of such a reader is, "Will Jesus
successfully resist I What it' He had failed V A world, yes, more than a world, was at stake. We accept the result as demonstrating the Divinity of Jesus, and that He had power to accomplish His Father's purpose. We are too apt. to think, as we are not divinely born as was Jesus, that the promises were not to us, that Satan would not offer us the kingdoms of the world. Thus we push ourselves out of Ihe picture. While we rejoice in the victory of the Lord, we fail to recognise that wc are subject to temptations of similar types, and thus fail to get the value of His example through his victory. Recognition should give us courage and greater determination in resistance of temptation.
While we recognise thai Jesus was marvellous and wonderful, yet we cannot fail to see that in birth, in growth and in gradual development, He was a man. Probably there was with Him as He grew up from the Babe of Bethlehem, as the Son of Joseph ;>ii<! .Mary, to the temple of Jerusalem, to the waters of the Jordan and then to the great conflict with Satan, first a glimmer, followed by the dawn of the great truth that He was in very deed the Son of God, following human consciousness, operated on by God's Spirit. He had constantly the sense of manness ; humanness never left Him. He never invoked the miraculous, never exercised the power that was developed in Him for Hi, own safety or benefit. Let us keep then in mind that He met the tempter on Ihe platform of common humanity, and there light ouL the battle of virtue.
He was attacked as all of us can be attacked, as one writer pm it, "on the side of desire (the desire of pleasure, the desire of praise, and the desire of power) — an approach through the body, through ihe intellect, and through the soul, to Ihe inner man, the spirit, the real /."
Ood's promises of sustaining grace, of overruling providence, of deliverance, are to each of us under the same price of obedience.
Dr. Deems says: "Every intelligent man who devotes any time in self-inspection finds that his violations of any code,
Akuhata 25, 1926 TK KARLRE 251
i.'Mch he believes to be the moral law, come either from certain emotions 0' bis »wn inner nature — excite'! lie cannot tell how, spontaneous so far as he knows — acting upon his will, making such presr.ure upon that wiii as amounts to a tempatation ; or, thai such excitation of the emotions and such pressure upon the will is something from without. In the latter case ii is some perception of some object which he sees, or of some sound which lie hears, or some report of some 01 the senses, undesigned, coming incidentally upon him, or designed,, brought to bear upon bim by some intelligenl being. Among the undesigned seductions 1o evil, or what may at least be called evil influences, are those attractions or repulsions created in the individual man by the "spirit of the age," a general air and temperature generated b\ all the intellectual and spiritual motions about him, and coming upon his soul no! from any individual's design to be specially hurt in! to him, but just as dele'erous air destroys where no man is attempting to poison another. But we are conscious of sinister and wicked designs upon us concocted and operated by wicked men. Some men are adroit, some skilful, some surpas- singly influential Tor evil. Some of these are really so acute in their perceptions, so rapid in their motions, and so persistent in their efforts, that to speak of them as compassing sea and land seems hardly an aggregation. Artists of the pen sometimes paint these far-sighted, near-sighted, telescopic microscopic, almost ubiquitous weavers of the webs of deceit and treachery, and p: ;m them with ;i power that appals us."
Let us not sit down with the thought that we are not subject to tempalations nor thai in and of ourselves we sre able to ii --fully resisl them.
In this temptation .Ic^ns was taken "to an exceedingly high
uin." and shown all the kingdoms of the world, and the
glory of them ; Satan said, "All these things will I give Thee, if
thou wilt Fall down and worship iac." This w;is in ,1 w;iy ;in
offer of ;i partnership with s.-itan. who practically recognised Jesus ;is the Son of God. with r message and mission, to become the Messiah, and, claiming sovereignty over the world, offered Ihem J" linn " He would but how down and worship.
.Jesus was attacked on the spiritual side. He, too, n..w knew Elis Messiahship, and probabh could see the thorn} path b< I Inn. and tin- offer of whal mighl be called ;i "bloodless victon "
252 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, iy26
may have been an alluring one — yet he failed not.
Let us get a full understanding of three features that now appear strongly:
"Then saith Jesus unto him, Gel the hence, Satan: for it is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve. Then the devil leaveth him, and, behold, angels came and ministered to him."
Satan can tempt, entreat, entice, even command, but cannot compel obedience. Satan can remain with the tempted only so long as the latter permits. God sends succour and help to those who prove loyal and true.
A contemplation of what con fronted Jesus, His destiny (read Doc. and Cov. 19:16 and 18) and the aspirations of Satan will prove very interesting.
What does the example of Jesus bid us do"?
Shall we have prayers in the home, read and study the scriptures and engage in Gospel talks in the family circlet Shall "love abound" in our homes?
Shall we prove our loyalty to God by honoring our priest- hood, attending the priesthood, sacrament meetings and auxiliary gatherings; by paying our tithes and offerings; by responding to missionary calls; by showing that we have pure religion such as described by James ( 1 : - 7 ^ , ''Pure religion and undefiled before God and the Father is this, To visit the fatherless and widows in their afflictions, and keep himself unspotted from the world. "
What blessings are obtained through overcoming tempation ? The constant companionship of God's spirit; becoming instru- mental in accomplishing His purposes; securing eternal life and exaltation, etc.
Teachers should not fail to make as careful preparation of this lesson as of any other, carefully adapting the illustrations and applications to their respective classes. Do not let it "go over the heads" of your boys and girls, and see to it that the major portion of the time is given by the pupils, particularly of a testimony nature.
Read: Talmage's "Jesus the Christ," pages 131-135; Farrar's "Life of Christ/' pages 72-74; Papini's "Life of Christ. •' pages 63-68.
Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARERE 253
Second Sunday, September 12, 1926 LESSON 21. 1UTII.
Te::1 : ( liven in body of outline.
Objective: To show that the choice of one's people and one's Ood del ermines one's destiny.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: i. Naomi and Sons and Daughters in the country of Moab. a. Death of husbands. I). Orpha 's choice.
<-. Ruth's choice. (Memorize 1:16-17.) II. At Bethlehem.
a. Ruth the gleaner.
I). Receives recognition from Boaz.
1. In work, 2:15.
2. In virl ue. 3:11.
y. Requirements of Mosaic Law fulfilled. (See Matt. 22 :24. ) III. ftulh ihc ancestral grandmother of David and Christ. I Must ration :
1. ( Jonverts to the ( !hurch. 2 Song, "Who's on the Lord's Side. Whot" Questions for Teachers. \Yhai three virtues 01 womanhood did Ruth exemplify? 2. Why can one be besl judged by the company one chooses.
Third Sunday, September 19, 1926 LESSON 22. QUEEN ESTHER.
'i ext : Book of Esther.
Objective: To show thai the safety and reputation of an ei tin neople maj depend upon the virtues of a humble member. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: ! Time of \hasuems, King of Persia (probablj Xerxes . nboul !•"><» B I '.. during i he Jewish capt \\ \\\ ;i. Power, wealth, magnificence of Persians l :i l»» I*. Ifnmiliuting conditions of Jews in captivity, I '• 1 1 Es1 her 1 he Jewess
u Niece and adopted daughter of Mordeeai, " 1) Fair and beautiful, !
254 J >- KAKBKl Ak ihata 2J>, 1926
c ( >hcdient, loyal, humble, 2 :20. d. ! :ho,sen Queen, 2 :15-17.
III. Privileges of a Persian Queen.
a. Limital ions, 4:11.
i). Queen Vishti's banishment, 1:10-21.
IV. Esther as Queen.
a. Loyalty and faith,
1. Mordccai's appeal to save her people, 4:1-14.
2. Her appeal tor the faith ;m<l prayers of her people, 4 :35-16.
b. Courage and discretion.
1. Presents herself to king on pain of death, 5:1-3.
2. Obtains reversal of decree against her people.
3. Elevation of Mordecai and death of Haman.
4. Safety for the Jews, chapter 8.
Illustration: Benjamin Franklin in Europe. John Taylor's letter to Argus. '"One Hundred Years of Mor- monism," page 286.
Questions for Teachers.
1. Name three virtues possessed by Esther that make for leadership and greatness.
2. I low can you bes; serve your people and the Church \
Fourth Sunday, September 26, 1926.
LKSXOX 23. SAMUEL, A CHILD OF PROMISE AND A
TRUE SERVANT OF GOD.
Text: I Sam. 1-16.
Objective: To show thai as one gives himself to the service of the Lord and His people he grows in goodness and power. Supplementary References: Geike's Hours with the Bible, Vol, 3. Beacon Lights of History," Vol 2.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Samuel, the sou of ;i wonderful mother.
Her prayer of thanksgiving (I Sam. 2:1-10.) tl. His early training in the temple under Eli. 1. His call by the Lord. 2. His response. ill. His service to Israel.
1. Xo national existence — no settled government — no
Akuliata 25, 1920 TL ICARKRE 255
established religion. 2. As judge ho established a nation and a religion for the
people. .'>. II is groat speech. (I Sam. 12.) 4. Lord says: " His character was reproachless. He was. indeed, one of the best men that ever lived, universally revered while1 living, and equally mourned when he died. '*
Questions for Teachers, i. To whai do yon ascribe Samuel's great wisdom and power.
2. Whal great lesson comes to you from the study of the life of Samuel?
INTKRMEtmTH DKPaKTMHM "lill: BOOK OF MORMON"
First Sunday, Septemeber 5, I92(> Uniform Fast Day Lesson.
Sh roe as Fakeha Theological Chss. See page 249
General Subjed : The example of .Jesus: what it bids us do.
Special Topic: The Third Temptation.
Adaption for Intermediate Department.
Refer to the notes for .May and June. Use the copious suggestions in the outline in the Theological Department.
This temptation centres around power. Every boy likes to be ;i loader, ;i captain of ;i team, or ;i patrol leader. lie can
grasp the significance of this appeal to the opportunity to rule.
'To lead is laudable, provided our does not need to lose one's self-respect and liberty, in order to lead.
Some public office holders secure their positions only by
selling their liberty to some political ring with ulterior motives Such a man loses in character development.
That person who sells himself to any power, is forever under Its influence and control. We can readily see that we
should resist temptation lO do base things, and make ourselves
lable tO those powers \\h<» can elevate Us !o\\;ird the better
things, those thing* which leave peace an. I contentment in the soul.
256 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926
List the temptation thai come to boys and girls through ■ he appeal lo "be somebody" by sacrificing their ideals.
Second Sunday, September 12, 1926. LESSON 21. ALMA TEACHES Ills SONS.
Text : Alma, chapters 36-42.
Objective: To teach thai a wise lather is able by his experience to give instruction to his children which if followed will give them happiness and peace in this life and put them in (he way of eternal life.
Supplementary References: Dictionary of the Book of M or man and Story of the Book of Mormon.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
The Teacher will no doubt have to lead out in the discussion
of this lesson, hut the pupils should he asked to read the
text, mark passages they like, and discuss them in tin1
class.
Special assignment mighl he made of Alma 36:6-23;
:>,7:24-:)7; chapter 38'; chapter 39; 40:11-14. I1 might be interesting to have pupils give brief sketches of llelaman. Shiblon and Corianton from the Dictionary of the Book of Mormon. Make the lesson alive. Try to picture Alma and his sons at this time.
(^ues on for Teachers,
1. Discuss the warning given in Alma 37:28, -I'M. as it might &ppty to present times.
2. How may the words of Alma to his son CorianthOn, Alma 29:11-13, he fitting to young Latter-day Saints?
Third Sundav, September 19. 1926
LESSON 22. FOES PROM WITHOUT AND TRAITORS
WITHIN THE NATION.
Text : Alma, chapters 4:>>-4C>.
Objective: To leach that in all our si niggles, if we have faith in the Lord He will he our powerful friend. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. II would he well for 1 he teacher to give Alma 43:1-25
Akuhata 2->, 1926 TE karere 257
as an introduction to the lesson, to make clear the mo- lives of the Nephites and Lamanites at this period of history, and to introduce the leaders, etc. 2. Special assignments:
(a) Alma 43:26-54.
(b) Appoint two students to give the dialogue between Moroni and Zerahemnah, Alma 44:1-11.
(e) Zerahemnah humbled. Alma 44:12-24. (d) The Title of Liberty, Alma 4(i. Passages for pupils to memorise: Alma 43:48-50; 44 -.'3, 4; 46:12-18.
Note: The events related in the above assignments are of a stirring nature. Impress each pupil who is given a part with the necessity of reciting them in a way to arouse deep interest. Questions for Teachers.
1. Mention the advantages which the Nephites had over the Lamanites both spiritually and temporally.
2. Point out the characteristics of true leadership in Moroni.
Fourth Sunday, September 26, 1926 LESSON 23. WAR AND WARRIORS.
Text : Alma 47-51.
Obective: To teach thai in war time or in peace righteous living increases our joy.
Su^i'i ions on Preparation and Presentation: For special assignment : (1) Amalickiah's wickedness. Alma 47. (2) Moroni's preparations. Alma 48 :7-'J.">. (3) Laminates disappointed. Alma 4!). ( 4) The happy Nephites. Alma 50:1-24. (.")) Quarrels between brethren. Alma 49.
(6) Kingmcn and Freemen. Alma 51:1-21.
(7) Victory for the Lamanites. Alma 51:22-27.
(No1 more than lour or five minutes should he allowed far
eaeh of these parts, in which time the main points can be given
in a way in amuse interest in 1 he class to read the si. tries from tic- Book of Mori. mci |
Note: A blackboard should he used with these wartime
IE KAktRK Akuhata 25, 1926
lessons. From the descriptions given of the fortifications a pupil might be able to make drawings on the board, also to Locate the
position of the different cities that were fortified. Questions for Teachers. 1. Contrast the motives of Moroni and Amaiickiah as leaders.
2 Review the time of happiness, as related in Alma *>0:l-24, and point 011I the inward causes for it.
KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT
First Sunday, September 5, 1926.
PAST DAY LESSON.
Topic: 'i'lie Tempatation of Jesus. "Thou sJudl worship the Lord thy God and Him only shall thou serve."
Text : Matt. 4:8-10.
Time: After Christ's forty day Last. Place: On s high mountain in wilderness. Objective: l>; resisting temptation we grain the approval o!' God the Father.
!. Satan pleads Cor Jesus to worship Jlim.
1. He shows Him all the kingdoms of the wo-Id and the glory of them, a. Man\- countries. 1). Great possessions.
Palaces, churches, homes, fields, flowers, people, and their homage, riches, pearls, diamonds, crowns, etc. 2. Offers all these things if Jesus will fall down and worship him. 1 1. Jesus Rejects Satan 's < >ffer.
1. dvt thee hence.
2. "Thou shah worship the Lord thy God/'' etc. •'!. Satan leavcth Him.
1 1 1 The Approval of Ood the Father.
1. He sends inward joy and peace.
2. Angels come down and minister unto Him. Application • When and how shall these little children
resist temptation? Specific instances. Mother said, "Johnny, please remain inside the yard to-day with baby sister." Soon
Akuliata 25, 1926 TE KARLRE 259
Tom came along and said, "(.'ome on over, Johnny, I have some- thing to show you," etc. What should Johnny say or do? Memory Gem:
Is there a wrong deed that wants to be done? Don't let it, my dear, don't let it; Just do two kind deeds insteads of one And that will help you forget it. Rest Exercise: Have the children suggest kind deeds to do lor others. Dramatize the suggestions. Clean the yard for an old lady or a widow; paint a fence; clear the weeds from the ('itches, etc.
Song: "Do what is right," Desert t S.S. Song Book.
Second Sunday, September 12, 1926
Topic: The Story of the Pioneers.
Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Lesson 5$. History of Utah, or History of Church.
Objective: Courage to do righl wins the favour of God and man.
Suggest ions:
1. Show pictures of Pioneers. a. The way they travelled.
1). The count ry they crossed.
r. The valley as il looked to 1 hem.
2. Their sacrifice was .1 greater gain.
a. Their love for Iheir religion was greater than for worldly goods.
I). Their greal faith and trusl in a higher power
c. Their strength of character, •'! I lov. 1 heir example ran h< lp u .
a. Whal is our < Ihurch to Our duty to it.
I). We should iioi complain in making a sacrifice. Song: ••The Seagulls," FVancia K. Thomassen. R E Had we been the little pioneer children,
what COUld We have done to help alone; the w.iy. I >i;iin;i! i/e t lie
children '* Drive the oxen ; push the handcart ; chop
down 'hushes; <;im water from nearby stream
860 YE ICAKER1* Akuhala _'5, 1926
Third Sunday, September 19, 1926. LESSON 59.
Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten.*' Topic: How Bessie Kept the Word of Wisdom. Objective: By keeping; the Word of Wisdom we gain physical and spiritual growth. Memory Gem:
The Word of Wisdom teaches us The things we all should eat. God gives us fruits of many kinds He gives us corn and wheat. Rest Exercise: Talk with the children of ripening grain. Let them dramatise the cutting and tieing of the grain as it was done in olden days.
Show the children what is to be gained by keeping the Word of Wisdom rather than what may befall them if they do not do so.
A strong, well kept body is able to do great deeds. Discuss with the children the kinds of food they should eat.
I ourih Sunday, September 26, 1926 LESSON 60.
Text: Daniel 1, "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten."
Topic: Daniel and His Companions in the King's Palace.
Objective: By keeping the Word of Wisdom we gain physical and spiritual strength.
Memory (Jem: Same as last Sunday. ltcs« Exercise. Let the children tell the kinds of vegetables and fruits thai grow in the garden. Then dramatise the sug- gestions of how they are gathered. Potatoes are dug; carrots are pulled; cherries are picked into a pail, etc.
Song: "The Heart Garden," Francis K. Thomason's Prim- ary and Kindergarten Songs.
Impress the children with the power and beauty of Daniel, because he had pleased our Heavenly Father and kept the Word of Wisdom ; thai bv so doing we may become as Daniel wras.
Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARERE 2ui
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI.
KORA s. TIN1KINI, Tuimiaki Hui Atawhai.
Na Toke Watene i whakamaori.
AKORANGA MO HEPETEMA.
Te Wa 0 te Taima i Rite ai.
(Meridian of Time).
Nga Mahi Whai Tikanga i Whakaritea e nga Apotoro.
1. Ko te whiriwhiringa i te apotoro hou. Mahi 1 : L2-26.
2. K0 te tukunga iho 0 te Wairua Tapu. Mahi 2: 1-5.
.'>. Ko te whakatahuritanga 0 Qga mano e torn. Mahi *_} : 6-47.
4. K<> te whakaoranga 0 to tangata kopa e Pita raua ko Eioani. Mahi 3: L-9.
5. Ko te whiwhinga a Pita ki te tuaia Die te kaha nui i miiri n te tukunga iho 0 te Wairua Tapu. Mahi 2: 14: 3: L2-6; -! : 8-12.
(j. Ko te hoatutanga ki a Pita i te mana e niatau ai e
kaha ai ki te titiro atu ki roto i nga niea katoa. Mahi
5: 1-11. 7. lie tokomaha nga turoro i whakaorangia. Mahi 5:
L2-17.
Ko te u'hakaputanga ki waho 0 te whan- lierehere e
tda hi anahera. Mahi 5: 17-21 . 9. Te mahi me te whakamatenga <» Tepene. Mahi 6 s:
7: 55-60.
10. Ko te wliiriw hiringa 0 te tokowhitu. Mahi 1.
11. Wa mahi a Piripi. Mahi B: I -5 : 8: 26-40.
12. Ko te \\ hakatahuritanga <» Haora. Mahi (»: lit.
Te Taki N'ui : Ko te Wairua Tapu hei tautoko, hei kai-
nra'ii hoki I'm tatou, ka ; 1 > ^ I ; i 1 1 ; 1 Imki i ;i tatou ki te w haka fil <■
i ii"'.-! mahi whakamiharo ki !<■ mahi pai, a tika hoki tatou.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
Ko te Pupuri i t" Whanau (V 1 Kotahi.
1. Km to tikanga vvhakakotahi i te whanau he mea tino w hai 1 ikanga i roto »pu huihuii
262 ih kAKEKK Al 1920
kotahitanga 0 te whanau ngawari a pai atu lioki ki te riro ma nga tikanga takaro e pupuri mai. Ko te ki a nga tangata <> nga ropu huihuinga tangata k<> te tu he wehewehenga i roto i tetahi whanau ki te inea ka haere te tane lie huarahi puta ke i tu te wahine ki a raua uei takaro. Kaore rawa lie whanau e tino kotahi ki te kore e kitea e nga tamariki lie ngahau i roto i nga whakahaere ngahau a nga niatua a whaea hoki.
Ko te wa pai hei timatanga i te mea ano e ri.-iki ana nga tamariki, e taea te whakarite tetahi ahiahi whakangahau, ;i haereere a waho ranei, e whai ngakau ai ratou ki roto i taua nica. Kotahi po, hei po ngahau i te kainga i te niarama, a mi nga tamariki e awhina i roto i te whakarite i nga takoro, me nga waiata, me te taha ki nga kai (refreshments).
I'] taea te whakarite enei whakaritenga hei whakangahau i te w lianau katoa.
1. Ko te waiata a takitahi, a ma te whanau katoa ranei.
'2. Ko nga takaro.
.'I. Ko nga waiata whakatangitangi ma nga mea e mohio ana ki te whakatangitangi.
4. Ko te korcro pukapuka, a vvhakaatu ranei i etahi korero purakau papai.
5. Ko te tuku i nga kotiro kia whai wahi i roto i te whakarite, me te tuwha haere i nga kai.
Ko te whakarite haereerenga mo te whanau i nga hararei, e tika ana hoki kia whakaritea kia kaua ai tena, tena, e haere i runga ake i tona ake wliakaaro. Me te wliakarite wawe i roto i nga whakaaro 0 nga tamariki, te tikanga whakarite tahi me te whanau i nga hararei e man mai ai te whakaaro <> te whanau me nga tamariki hoki i raro i 1a nga matua, me ta nga whaea tiaki.
Ko te hoki whakamuri 0 nga mahara ki nga wa whakahari 0 nga tuakana teina me nga tuahine, me nga matua whaea hoki. ka riro hei pupuri i te whakaaro ki te kainga, ki roto i nga ngahau 0 te tangata.
KO TE NAMA A TE ATUA
(He roanga atu) Inn Hoori e neraro atu ka whanau a Pirihira i tana tamaiti,
Akuhata 25, 1920 TE K ARE RE 263
heoi ka koa noa iho raua ki ta raua taniaiti.
I hokona e Hoori tana whare piha ka tangohia mai e ia tetehi whare hukapapa hei rongoatanga niiti. Ko te nianaaki a te Atua i a ia e nui rawa atu ana. I tetehi rangi ka haere a Pirihira ki te hui a te hahi, te kitenga o te Pihopa i a ia, ka inca atu, kei whea a Hoori, katahi ia ka ki atu kua riro ki t( tango kau, hipi mana kei apopo ia ka hoki mai. Kihai i pai a ji ihira ki te haerenga 0 tana lioa tane ki te tera mahi i te rtatapu. Katahi te Pihopa ka mea atu kei te pai noa atu, he tangata pai a Hoori alma nei koina ke te ra e hiahiatia ana e tana tangata hei kiietanga ia ia. He wahine tino u hoki a Pirihi/aki nga tikanga 0 te Hahi, na kaore e pai kia Qiahi tana tane i etahi mahi ahua he. I te nui haere 0 te tupi. 0 te mahi hukapapa a Hoori ka pan ke te nuinga o tana taima !:i ana mahi ake te tukunga iho ka wareware haere ia ki nga tnahi o te Miutara. Ka whakaaro te Pihopa lie pai rawa me korero ano ia ki a Hoori. I tetehi rangi ka haere te Pihopa Ida kite ia Hori i tana whare hukapapa.
Tana taenga atu ka whakaaturia ia e Soon ki nga mahi katoa rot,) ? tana whare. Ka mutu tena ka ki atu te Pihopa. "E Hoori, kei te tino koa toku ngakau ki 1c nianaaki penei a te Atua i a 1- >e, na kia mohio mai koe e hiahia ana au kia utu Ia i Tana nama ki a koe. M
Alma whak una ana a Hoori i enei korero, katahi ia ka mea
atu, "K ore enci mea i puta noa mai hi a an. engari na taku
kaha tonn ki te mahi, na kei etehi po <■ ara ana an tae atu ki
ia rua o nga haora i te po. Ko taku kotahi anake
ki 1 : i!,i i ;l:n mahi tino uaua ra, engari i naianei kua ngawari
ku mahi. "
ikamarama haere tonu a Hoori ki te ahua <> te whaka
ha< <• 0 tana mahi k i te ara hoki e puta nui mai ai te tarn nei
te moni, a ki mm ritenga ano hoki i tupu haere ai.
Kaoic te Pihopa i pai ki !<• w hakapuakiaki i te mahi Miu- tara. In- well] mma kei Piri B Hoori, katahi ia ka whakaan- In- pai ra\\;i me \\ai!'<> < ia kia pan te rua wiki, ka mea atll
aihei tirohanga mana mehemea ka pai ake ka pewhea •
te alma 0 Hoori. 1 nga huihuitanga katoatanga ka korero nga
kaunihera a Hoori ki to ratou mate i te kore tumuaki, ki to
PatOll hiahia hoki ki to lumn.iki hmi. Iimi iim te nui
264 KARERE Akuhata
whakaaro o te Pihopa ki a Hoori raua ko Pirihira i whakakiki ;ii ia ratou kia tatari.
Nawai, Nawai a ka heke haoiT to hi.Jua o Hoori ki te haere ki ii<r;i liuihuinga o te Elahi ehara, i tetelii rangi ka tukua atu c te tan gat a nei tana pukapuka ki te Pihopa kua korc ia c puta atu hei tumuaki mo te Miutara i te uui o ana mahi be pai rawa te whakatu atu i tetehi tangata ki tana turanga. Tino tohe te Pihopa kia hoki mai a Hoori ki tana turanga he alia te alia, korc rawa a Hoori i whakaae. Heoi whakaturia ana e ratou he tumuaki hou mo te Miutara. Tino tnaru te Qgak; a
Pihopa tno tc korcnga << Hoori i hoki mai.
Ka tupu haere nei hoki tc mahi a Hoori, a tc pau katoa
ano hoki o tana taima ki ana mahi. Xawai a ka korohek< haere tc tangata nei tc nui o tana v/liakaaro ki tana mahi Na tc puta mai o tc wa i iti ;ii tc utu o nga poaka, o nga kau, ka hinga a lioo.i i koiiei no tc mea lie nui hoki nga poaka i tangohia mai e ia i 1.' vva e nui ana tc utu. I heke rawa mi hoki tc utu o tc poaka, korc kau ake i hokona i ga poaka m i, ruihi pu ana Hoori, me ana moni katoa i roto i te peeke. I te hokinga o nga utu ki raro rawa katahi a lioori ka whakaaro e, ko te wa pai tenei hei tangohanga kararehe ano maim, mei korc e hoki mai ana moni i ngaro ra. ! whakapr.n katoatia e ia n^a moni katoa i riro mai i a ia, hei tango mai i.mu.i i nga poaka e L200, ko te ntu i te pauna he hikipen<5. Heoi ko tana patunga i nga poak^ nei, ko te utu nui rawa i riro mai i a ia he hikipene ano i tc pauna mo tc miti, heoi ka 7'uilii ! tangata nei nga moni £5000. Whakamutua ana c ia tc mai \ a ana tangata malii, a kore rawa hoki i ca i a ia n.-i nan ■ g i;iii;i;!4.: c \ li;;i r<m kia "' ■■ : a ratou moni.
I vvaenganui pu o enei raruraru o lioori. ka pangia tans kotiro a Atareta e te taipo piwa. Ka mea te takuta kei te pai noa atu te mate o tana kotiro. ko te mate o te kotiro nei e kino rawa iho ana. No konei ka porangirangi noa iho a lioori i t nui o tana aroha ki tana kotiro, ko ia hoki tana i whakaar< nui ai i ctchi mea ke atu o tenei ao.
Heoi, ka feonoa te E*ihopa kia haere mai ki te kotiro nei tc taenga atu ko Pirihira e noho ana i te taha o tc moenga n tana kotiro. mai ano o tona pang a e te male mea noa ratou i tc kotiro ra kia. moe, kore rawa e moe. c atn noho ranei. Ka
Akahata 25. 1926 TE KARERE 265
iiica atu a Pirihira ki te Pihopa, mehemea e whakaaro ana ia ka tangohia atu e te Atua i a raua ta raua kotiro. Ka oho atu ie Pihopa, ko Atareta lie mea honiai na te Atua ma korua e koi-e la e tango atu ano i a ia, ma Tana kite iho ra ano e tika ano ki ta raua i pai ai. I te tomonga atu 0 Hoori ki te whare waii iacc a.ia te ahua ka titiro atu ki tana kotiro 0. takoto mai ana i runga i tana moenga, haere toiiu atu ka kiln i tana wahine, te mutunga ka huri atu ki te ruru ki te Pihopa. Kiiiai i rite te ahua, me nga mahi a Hoori ki te ahua 0 tetehi tangd i vvhakaatu ai ki te Pihopa i ana whakaaro e whai ana ia ki a ia hei mirianeera. Kihai i taro ka uru niai te neehi, poua eonutia atu he tipune wai maori ki roto i te waha Atareta. Kore rawa i lioromia e Atareta te wai ra i kopi ranei tona walia. Rurerure noa te neehi ra kia mataora a Atareta kore lioki i ara, heoi ko tana rerenga ki te whono i te takuta kia haere mai. Katahi 0 Pirihira ka vvhakahinga atu i a ia ki runga i te moenga 0 tana kotiro, ka kihi i nga paparmga 0 tana kotiro me te tangi kia oho ake i te moe kia korero ake ki a ia. Kore rawa a Atareta i koriri ake. katahi a Piriliira ka tono i te Pihopa kia inoi ki te Atua kia ora ai tana kotiro. 1 tana w a tonu ka urn mai nga takuta. ka rongo atu raua. i tetehi 0 nga takuta e ki ana. "Kaore he painga," haere ana put a ana ki vvalio. I muri ka mea atu a Pirihira ki te Pihopa, ",\ii:i mohio in a ake an e kore e ora i nga takuta, ma te Atua anake ia <■ ora ai," Ka mea atu a Hoori ki te Pihopa kia inoi, K,i mea a Hoori, 'I hua an >• nama ana te Atua ki a an mo takn : . 1 : 1 '• : i i roto i te Flahi. Otira l<a manaaki tonu te Atua i ahau, ma 1 iku wareware r*a ano ki te vvhakahonore ki ki a la. Nana tenei tamaiti i honiai, engari kei au te raruraru mo 1 • kore <• vvhakawhetai ki a la. \a i te mea kua tangohia katoatia atu nri 1 la aku rawa kei te manawapa toku ngakau ki takn kotiro, kei tangohia atu e ia engari ko takn hiahia kia kore c tangohia atu. K'> a maua mea katoatia li«' mea homai
na te Atua, ma mana a e kore 1 1 « i lioki niana <• alui ki tC UtU
i a Ia mo enei mea na, e nama ana maua ki te Atua "
Te putaputanga 0 nga tangata ki waho 0 te puma ka tuturi to Pihopa Isi te taha «» )<• moenga 0 Atareta ka inoi ka mea ki
te Atua kia u<a uaa k il i;i a lluori. ki \r man ia ki n
0 tenei ako a kin kaua ano hoki v tangohia atu c la te wairua
266 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926
0 Atareta. Mehemea e ahei e te Atua tukua tenei tamaiti kia tupu ake liei waliine. I whakapaua katuatia lioki e ia kalia ki te inoi mo Atareta, a i nma <> te mutunga 0 tana inoi, ka rongo ake ia Atareta e korikori ana ka tangi ake ka karanga, ' E mama." Heoi ka moe iho ano nga karu 0 te Pihopa ka irhnkawhctai Id tona Matua. KataH ka karan •■ ki nga matna 0 te tamaiti nei ka haere mai ka koa ! i te 0 Tinga a ta ran,-, tamaiti. 1 muri Lho ka taka tu te Pihopa ki te b e katahi a Hoori ka haere atu kia ia ka pupuri i tana ri Ka titiro atu te Pihopa ki nga mata <> Hoori kua rehnrenu I te roimata, ka mea atu ifa, "Kua tika tan 0 Hoori, kaore tcnei tnea iv nama mai 0 te Atua/'
Na TE NGOURA.
-o-
He Powhiri
Haere mai e te manuhiri-tu-a-ran^i, haria mai ko te Aroha. Kua tae mai "nga karere o Mahuru."
Tenei matou o te Tai Rawhiti nei te powhiri atu ki te hunga katoa e tae ai te manu, ara Te Karere, kia haere mai ki te Hui Pariha ka tu nei ki a Uawa wahi o te Tai Rawhiti i te II me te 12 o nga ra o Hepetema. "Kua pai nga hua- rahi."
Na nga tuahine kei Uawa. ( Tamihana, Tumuaki)
He Panui Whakaatu ka Tu te Hui Pariha ki Korongata Hepetema 4, 5, 1926.
Kei tenei hui ka korerotia e te Timuaki o te motu etahi take hou kaore ano te ao i rongo. No konei ka panuitia kia mohio ai te katoa, kia riro ai ma ou taringa ake e whakaro- ngo atu ki te Timuaki e korero ana. Kia riro ano mau e pa- tai atu au whakaaro me ou hiahia katoa. Kei konei hoki etahi tikanga hou hei painga mo te tinana, engari e kore koe e whiwhi ka noho mai koe i roto i to whare i to kainga ranei. E wehi ana ahau kei rereke te korerotanga atu ki a koe i nga korero a te Timuaki a ka poraru o whakaaro i roto i nga ti- kanga pono. No reira haere mai, haere mai!
Na Rawiri Kaman, (Erata Heke, Timuaki Pariha)
Ak »hata 25, 1926
TE KARERE
-0 -
He Whakaahua Pai
Na R.R. Tiwinihana
(He roanga atu)
27;
«%&• ~-—^*
Ko te Puki Kit mora
Ko te Hiwi Kumora tenei, te inc.! ttratoru. Te wahi 0 te whawhai whakamutunga 0 nga Niwhai. Te wahi hoki i hu- naia ai e Moronai, (i a ia e tangata ana), e rite ana ki nga whakahannga a te Atua, nga papa k< toa i tukutukua mai ki a ia e ona tupuna. I konei i kitea ai e Hohepa Mete nga pa- pa tapu i roto i enei nga ra whakamutunga. Ahakoa te hia- hia 0 nga Hunga lapu kia hokona mai tenei hiwi, kei nga tauiwi tonu ia. Ka whakaae ratoti ki te hoko mai tenei wahi
tapu ki a tatOU mo nga iixnii $100,000, ara £20,000. I [eoi « no na to koutou teina, tungane,
Na R.R. 1 iwinihana
lie M itentfa
Ki Te Karere: rena koe, man <• p. nun atu te matenga 0 t<» matou tamaiti, mokopuna, 0 te Kahukore Kara k a Pairama. No te JO 0 nga ra <> Hurae ka wehe atu tona wairua 1 a mat mi. He nui te whakapouri 1 pa mai ki .1 matou Kua tutuki te
1 E KAKhRE
Akuhata 25, iy^G
kupu a te karaipiture, ka hari nga tupapaku e mate ana i roto i te Ariki i nga w a 0 muri nei, e ai ta te wairua, kia okioki ai ratou i a ratoj mahi.
Eieoi ma te Matua i te Rangi tatou e tiaki, na to koutou teina i roto i te Rongopai 0 Ilm Karaiti,
Karena W. Takaroa
KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA.
Elder Geo. R Henderson
Elder LeRoy \\ estov
Elder LE ROY WES TOVERo Lewiston, Utah. I tae mai a Erata Wehitoa i te 28 o n#a ra o Pepuere, 1924, a wha- karitea ana ki te takiwa o te Mahia. I te 30 o nga ra o Tihe- ma, 1924, ka nukuhia atu ia ki te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te 16 o n^a ra o Oketopa, 1925. ka nukuhia ano ki te takiwa o Hauraki ki te mahi i waenganui o n^a Pakeha 0 te Thames. A ka tukua honoretia atu ia i te 20 o nga ra o Hurae, 1 926.
Elder GEORGE R. HENDERSON o Joseph, Utah. I tae mai a Erata Henihana i te 23 o nga ra o Hune, 1924, a ka whakaritea ki te Kareti M.A.C. hei whakahaere i te mahi wa- iata, whakatangitangi, o reira. A i te 13 o nga ra 0 Oketopa 1925 ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa Pakeha o Akarana. Ka hoki atu ano ki te Kareti i te 21 o nga ra o Hanuere, 1926, a i te 20 o Hurae ka tukua honoretia kia hoki atu ki tona hoa wahine me a ra ia tamariki i Hiona.
Akuhata 25, 1926 TE karere 269
KI TE ETITA. Ko te Hui Pariha o te Kirikiri
I lu re Hui Pariha 0 llauraki nei ki te Kirikiri i te Rahoroi, te 31 0 liurai. me te I o nga ra 0 Akuhata. Ko tiga kaumatua l tae mar, ko I'umuaki Tinikini, ko Erata Pirihana, hekeretari o te Mihana; ko Erata Kimepara me Karanata 0 Hamilton, ko Erata Paapiti me Karaitiana 0 Waikato, hui tahi ki nga kau- iiiatua 0 tenei takiwa : Erata Tarapata, Aratama, Koiti. Naiti, Lietaraka Anaru raua Rupata Wi Hongi 0 Ngapuhi, Erata Teii*a 0 te Thames. 1 konei lioki etahi 0 nga Hunga Tapu 0 Tau- ranga, a Waikato. I konei lioki a Te Puea me tana ropu poi ki te purei liaere he mahi moni hei whakapai i te marae 0 te Hui Tau ka lu nei ki Ngaruawahia. I manaakitia tenei Ilui Pariha ki nga rang] papai, a i mutu pai hoki.
i puare tenei hui i te 10: 30 i te ata 0 te Rahoroi. Na Erata Tarapata, Tumuaki Takiwa, i whakahaere. Nga himene na Erata Paapiti. I limene tuatahi 1. "Kei Runga te Maunga." inoi vvhakapuare na Tumuaki Tinikini. Himene tuarua 2. "H Iharaira " Kai-kauwliau tuatahi ko Pirimona Watene, Tumuaki 0 te Peka <> te Kirikiri nei. He powhiri ki nga manu- hiri. I ko em mo te mihana 0 te Karaiti, [riiringa, Whiriwhiri- nga i n^:\ Apotoro, me te hanganga i te Ilahi he mea kia tiuo rite ai te Hunga Tapu mo te main minita.
Bro. Rupata Wi Hongi. .M<> te takanga atu me te v liokinga mai 0 te Rongopai v tetahi anahera, e kauwhautia nei <■ nga kaumatua me te korero svhakarite mo te kamera i kuhu i tona ilui ki roto i te teneti 0 tona rangatira kia mahana, muri iho ko tona kaki, i muri ko tona tinana katoa, v peia ana tona rangatira ki vvaho. Ara i te rewera ki roto i ;i tatou kia riro i ,-; i;i te whakahaerc 0 <> tatou tinana.
ko Erata TciTa. I korero mo Hona i tona turinga U i te haere ki te kauwliau i t<- pa 0 Ninewe; tona makanga ki te wtd horomanga <• te Tohora, b ruakina ki ata kia haere ;ii la ki le ivhakarite i tana mihana Whakawahangutanga <• Korihoro i te kauwhautanga a Arami Korero i runga 1 te patai 1 te matua ki tana tamaiti i te kai peita 0 etahi whakaahua mea te tamaiti, "Na mea, ino e mau nei tona ingot *' Ka mea te matua "Tii iro ki w aho, na kn 1 H ataahua -
270 ih KARERE Akuhata 25, 1920
rakau uic nga mea katoa, tia ko vvai te kai-peita 0 enei niea katoa i 'x.i mea te tamaiti, ■ tvaore au e tuohio, eugari na tetahi kai-peita kei runga noa atu tona mana i 0 era atu katoa.' hliniene whakamutunga i>Y.- *'ll<' Inoi. N'a Tiki Reihana te
liiOl.
Karakia 0 te 2 0 nga haora 0 te ahiahi. Na Bro. Betaraka Anaru i whakahaere nga himene. tiiuiene tuatahi hi."). "Lo the Mighty Uod ^^i>|>viiiiii<^». inoi na Tukino link' pa. Uitnene tuarua, L65. "Sunshine in the Soul." Kai-kauwhau tuatahi In i Krata Koiti. i korero i roto i i< reo Maori, mo runga 1 te Inoi. lie tono ivi te Atua mo uga mea e tiito hialiiatia ana, i runga ano i te wain. a pai. E monia ai tatou ki te tikanga 0 te Lnoi, me inoi tonu.
Ko Kiripata Ouiipi. I korero mo te uhakahaunga 0 Rihai kia puta atu ki waho 0 liiruharama. i\a v\ hakangaromia taua pa c 600 tau i mua atu i a te karaiti. Lie uri nei tatou nga Maori (■ Rihai. Me te tautoko he tika te 1 ukapuka a Moromona. I korero 1 runga 1 tana uinga ki tetahi vvaliine lie "Spiritualist" tvhakapono ki nga mea vvairua mo taua p ukapuka. I runga i tana niahinga ka ki ia ko taua pukapuka ua nga mi 0 Epa- rainia. Whakahau ga i nga Niwhai kia tuhituhi me nga hapu kotalii tekau. Kao.e te .una i wailio noa ili<» i nga tangata i roto i te kauretanga.
I muri he Quartette, 'School Thy feelings," na uga kau- matua. Ko Sister Raira f'arless: lie tautoko mo te Inoi. Me tono i runga i te whakapono kia vvhiwhi ai ki nga maua- akitanga. Ko Sister Payne: Me vvhakarongo tatou ki nga kau- niatua, ka riro ma te Rongopai tatou e ako ki nga main ma tatou. Ko te inoi he mea tin > i:i;i. kei t«' maiiara an i etahi wa, lie aha ranei a tatou vvhakalioki am ki te Atua mo nga mea e tono ana tatou i a la. Kia. kaiia, In- ugawari noa iho te ope oneone ake, engari te piki, me main" rr.a ka eke.
Ko Mori Watene: Ko te whakatunga 0 te Hani ki runga i te kamaka 0 te whakakitenga. Whakahokinga mai 0 te Rongopai kia Hohepa Mete kia kauwhautia ki te ao katoa. Ko te iwi Maori no [haraira. I *<• manaakitanga 0 Hohepa he peka hua i te taha 0 te puna. Te whakamararatanga ki nga motu 0 te moana i runga i to rat on tutu. Ko te tohu i roto i nga mahunga 0 te Maori, rite tonu ki 0 nga Hawai me nga Iniana
Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARERE 27 1
0 Amerika, he porotaka a waenganui. He tautoko tenei mo te r>ukapuka a Moromona, a no te whare lioki tatou 0 [haraira. Himene whakamutunga 170. "God Be With You." Inoi 11a H.\). Billman.
Ka/akia 0 te aliiahi, to V 0 nga haora, he karakia whaki hineiigaro, na Pirimoa Watene i whakahaere, na R. \Vi Jloiiyi nga himene. Tuatahi ko tc 152. "Let l"s All Press On." Inoi nj Erata Teira. Himene tuarua L02. "We Thank Thee, I Grbd, for a Prophet." K<> nga mea i tu ko Panikena, Tuku- niana, Hovi Taniaki, Te Aue Kahukore, R. Wi Hougi, Tukino Iiakopa, Rosie Watene, Ripoi. Ko Tnmuaki Tinikini:
Ko nga hahi he mea hanga na te tangata ka karangatia In 0 rat 011 ingoa. Ko te hahi he upoko katoa he mea mate { korero mai tetahi tangata ki a an 10 ratou te hahi pai rawa, c 300 nga apotoro, e oOO hoki nga neehi, e 300 hoki nga akonga, ko a ratou man : rite tonu. Xa he upoko katoa. ko te ahua- tanga he mea mate. Ko tenei hahi ia he Poropiti, he Ilai Piriti, he Piriti, lie K<ii Whakaako kci roto. Kei roto i te Kura Hapati nckc atu 100. 000 nga mema. Me te Miutara pera aim. 1 muri ka tu a Turoa Royal, Totaca, Toke Watene, Erata Karanata, me Tarapata. Himene whakamutunga 218. "Count Your Many Blessings." Inoi in T. Royal.
Ratapu, i te 1 »> Akuhata i te 10: 30 <> nga haora <> te ata.
1 tu te karakia Kura Hapati. \'a Erata Tarapata i whakahaere. Nga himene na Bro. Anarn i whakahaere. Himene tuatahi B2. "Welcome, Welcome." Inoi na Erata Kimepara. Himene tuarua L27. "Though Deepening Trials." \a Toke Watene raua ko Turoa Royal i uhakatapu te Hakaremeta. Korero a Ngakau, Matiu 4: 7. "Kami e whakamatautau i te Ariki i urn Atua." \a Erata Karanata i vvhakamarama, Ka inutu i konei nga inani <» te Kura Hapati. Kai-kauwhau tuatahi ko 1 Watene, Whakamarama i te Kingitanga 0 te Atua ki to te ao nei, me nga putake «• tu ai tetahi kingitanga, me nga ahuati
i poto. I muri he solo na Bro, R Wi Hongi "Mj Father
KlIOWS
Ko Erata Karaitiana 0 Waikato Whakahau Apotoro kia liaere ki te kauwhau So nga Tifc Whakapono, ko te Paipera me te Pukapuka a Moromona he kupti na te Atua,
2J2 TE KAKERE Akuliata 25, 1926
Brata Kimepara <> Hamilton. Mo te Atualanga. K<i ruto i te tangata te mohiotanga he Atua ano, ara tera ano tetahi maiia nui e whakahaere ana i nga niea katoa. 11*- qui nga alma tautoko, ko tetahi ko Arama i kite tonu i te Atua Die te tuku i tenei mohiotanga ki 011a mi, a Enoka hoki me 0 muri iho.
Brata Aratama. Mo te Lriiringa, ko te patene whakamu- tunga tenei, I whakaatu lioki i toaa hinengaro, he poropiti tika a fclohepa Mete, me te Rongopai hoki. Himene whakamutunga K»4. "The Spiril of God Like a Kire is Burning." Inoi ia Brata Boiti.
1 te 12: 30 i tu nga liuihuinga o te Tohuugatanga me te Bui Atawiiai. Ko te liimene whakapuare ko te 1!). "Israel. Israel, God is Calling." Inoi na Bro. Ariaru. 1 muri ka wehe te Hui Atawhai. Na Tumuaki Tinikini i whakahaere nga take mo te Tohungatanga. Tana patai tuatahi, He aha te putake i whakatapu ai tatou i nga urupa} Hei tuku atu i te wahi ki a tatou ki to Atua., Nana nei te whenua uie ona mea katoa. Kia takoto tapu pai hoki. Me pehea te alma 0 te keri 0 nga urupa .' Me takoto han^ai i te rawhiti ki te hauauru. Kia hangai te ara 0 nga tupapaku ki tc tangihanga mai 0 te tetere. Kia pehea te holionu o tc iiia? Kei tc alma 0 tc vvhenua tc hohonu. Ko te pai kia liohonu, kaore lie imr whakarite. lie una tika, a lie ranei tc tanu kakahu me te tupapaku? Kaore he ture riri, i tc mea he ture tenei no te Maori. Ko te ahna 0 tc kawhena, kei runga i nga whakaritenga te ma 0 te tupapaku ki ruuga kei tc ritenga 0 tc ture. Pehea te alma mo te whakatapu 0 nga tupapaku e rua i roto i te urupa kotahi? Me whakatapu wehc ke tc tain i tetahi. Ko te inana hei whakatapu ko I" Tohu- ngatanga o Merekihereke. Meheinea kaore he kauniatna hei whakatapu i te wa e tanumia ai c taea te whakatapu a muri atu. I muri i whakamutu ki te inoi.
Karakia i te 2 0 nga haora. Himenc tuatahi 111. "Arise 0 Glorious Zion." Inoi a Erata Karanata. Tuarua he anthem. "Song of the Redeemed." Kai-kauwhan tuatahi ko Erata Paapiti, Tumuaki 0 Waikato. Mo te Whakapono me nga Mahi, me nga hua 0 te Rongopai. Te wa hei tunga mo te Kingitanga o tc Atua. i roto i te moemoea a NTepukaneha. Me koropiko ki tc Atua. kaiia ki nga whakapakoko.
Ko Bro. 11. Anaru. Mo te whakamararatanga 0 [haraira,
Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KAREK.E 27 j
me te kohikohinga mai. Ko*-ero i nga karaipiture me te tono aao ki te Atua kLa liomai he mohiotanga ki nga karaipiture. tvia u, kia mahi toiiu, pera me te kohua tiamu e kororia ana kei rapa, kia pai ai te inaoa. Kaua a tatou kupu e whiua kia mua noa atu a ki muri noa atu uei whai atu ai 0 tatou tinana, eagari kia hacre tahi tonu me 0 tatou tianaua. Tukua uga taniariki ki te kura kia whakaakona, kia mohio, kia pai me te koLatu e tukua ana ki te mini kia tuia, kia pai, kia moani. Whakahonoretia 0 tatou Tohungatanga.
ft rata Xaiti, mo te matenga, mo te aranga mai. Whak.i- ritea te lure 0 te Tikitiki-o-rangi kia whiwhi ai ki taua ranga- tiratanga.
1 muri lie sextette na nga kaumatua na Xaiti, Aratama, Tarapata, R. \vi Hongi, Paapiti, me li. Anaru. Ko Erata Pii-i- ha na. Mo te Karaiti, he whakaaturanga, lie mea whakamaori no poto 1 ii.ua ana 0 Lliipa e whakatu ana mo te Karaiti. Te roroa 0 ona makawe tae ana ki tona hope, pai te hanga 0 tona ihu, ona paiiau pera anp me ona makawe, tona reo he pai te tang] he ngawari lie mea ano ka kata ia. engari ano te tangi. Wliaka- atu i te alma 0 te whakaniatenga 0 nga apotoro. Ko Pita i ripekatia ki Roma i te tau 66 A I). Ko Henri i poutoa te matenga i te tau 44 A.I). Ko Iloani i pana atu i te tau 96 A.I). Ko Ana 111 lie mea fipeka atu tonu ki te ripeka. Ko Piripi he mea lipeka i te tau 52 A.I). Ko Patoromu he mea tihore ora te tapeha. Ko Tamati he mea vvera ki te matia. Ko Matin he mea whakamate ki te toki i te tau <>n A.D. Ko Henri Poto- n .ii 11 he mea vvhiu a mate noa. Ko Tariu he mea whakamate ki te kopere i te tau 72 A.I). Ko Haimona he mea ripeka i te tau 72 A.D. Ko Maka he mea tooto i nga tiriti 0 Arehanaria b mate noa. Ko Paora i poutoa te matenga i Roma < Nero i te t;ui in; A.D. Ko Panapa he mea aki ki te kohatu < nga Hurai i tc tau 7:5 A.D. I pera ano hoki .1 Hohepa Mete, i kohurutia,
Himene whakamutunga 97. "Lord Dismiss [Ta " fnio na Tumuaki Tinikini.
I te 7 0 nga haora, i te ahialii i tu te Miutara ll< uui te pai n nga waiata, 0 nga korero, me te whakatangitangi a te ropu 0 te Puea, Ko nga tangata i hui mai 1 roto i taua huihuinga neke atu i te 200. He nui nga hoa aroha l tu te Tumuaki Mihana, i korero mo nga taitama me nga tamahine I ki kei nga
-'74 TE KARERE Akuhata 25. iy20
taitama te nui 0 te raruraru e pa ana ki uga tamaldne, mehe-
nica e tiakj ana te lainaili i a ia ka mama te lalia ki Dga kotiro.
ko te ingoa kino me te ingoa tahae e taea te whakarite kia takoto pai. Ko te tapu 0 te ma 0 te kotiro, me te kohuru, e korc »- taea 1<- whakakahore kia pai.
Ka mutu ai i konei nga mahj 0 te llui Pariha. Tokorua nga nica i Liiiria i rolo i tend liui.
\a TOKE WATBNE
He Ripoata Mihana
Ki te Etita 0 Te Karerej tena korua k<> to boa awhina, tens korua uga kai panui i nga rongo korero 0 !<• motu noi. Teaei auo tenei pikaunga ma korua. Kaati, i a Maehe ka whiwhi ahau ki tetahi kara- ngatanga kia haere ki te kauwhau i te Ron go I'ai i te takiwa 0 Waikato, a no te 15 0 Aperira ka haere ahau ki te vvhakaritc i tenei maki aui.
I tae ali an ki aga \\ ahi katca <» te takiv.a 0 Waikato, a i tino \\ hiu hi hoki ki te hari nui mo tenei inahi pai. He inalia n^a iwi i tulaki aliau, nic te nianaaki hoki ia matOll uga kaiii.ia.ua. He inalia nga kainga 0 nga Iioa aroha i tae mntou, a 1 iviuiknlu hoki !.i a ia .11 i i:ga Ukaugu 0 te Rongo Pai. Tino pai ratou ki te vvhakarougo i uga kauwhau tvhnka- inaraina i te RongO I'ai pono.
Ko etahi 0 nga Hunga Tapu ka nui te kaha me te u ki te pupuri i nga tikanga 0 te Kongo Pai. Ko etahi kua tino waiku'ra 0 ratou whakapono. I tae ah u ki te kainga <» Henry Marshall, he tangata kaha tenei me tono whare katca ki te pupuri i nga tikangj 0 le Rongo I'ai. he tangata tino pai. 1 tae ano hoki ahau ki te kainga 0 John Ormsby, q Ta,i,ti 1 lone a na. 0 Tatann Arena, he tangata kaha katou enei ki to pupuri i 0 ratou karangatangn.
He niaha nga tangata i iriirin c nintor, i whakawahia ano h ki, nie nga pepi hoki i manaakitia.
Kua oti taku mihana 1 runga i to pai, a kua whhvhi hoki ahau ki toku tukunga honoretanga. Kaati nei ano te ripoata, kia ora nga Hunga Tapu katoa 0 Waikato, ara puta noa to mot 11 nei. tae atn hoki ki nga hoa aroha.. Kin ora koe e Toheriri me to flungn Tapu katoa, a Winiata Kapinga, a Here Tangihacre, no' koutou katoa.
Uoiano. na to koutou tcina. tungane,
PAEPAE W. SVITEHIRA. Ko te Matenga 0 Te Paea Cunningham
I mate ia i te warn 0 nga ra 0 Hurac i t«' tan l'.tL'n. Ko <>na tau p 14. Ko ana taniariki tekau ma tahi, e torn kua mate e warn kei te ora. Tona kainga i mate ai ko Whakatu. Hastings. Haki Pei. He Hunga Tapu tenei wahine ho mema ia no roto i te Hahi 0 Tim Karaiti 0 te Hunga Tapu 0 nga Ra 0 Mini Nei, peka 0 Korongata.
Te ahuatanga 0 te mate n tenei wahine he mate kaiakiko. Ko
Akuhata 2'D> 1926 n: KARERE 275
t''1"'1 k.'iihiuo lie waiiine tenei i whawhai nui ia ki te japu 1 tetahi aio toim mate, tvua taea hoki e ■ ; g* ■fct»utanga kai ■
"'• l'i,,i kacre kau ana in painga ake u tona mate. Kafta k" '• ' "' ■■■ ;1- Ltamna iin wuakaoru i tona mate. L goto ia i te whaka- oacic u u .una mo tetahi w a roa tonu, kore kau ana he p tona 1. a.e, e iieke haere ke atu ana ki Le mate. I rno»u - in.. ;. ,;: i.,i. he tona I . ua < aa inahara ki te ).; .
1 nga kaumaiua kia ivhakawahia m ki te hmu tapu a kia Mate hoki ki 1 "" ' il' ":'"1 « i'>" Karaiii. i haere a Erata Heke raua ko Paati ttiUKH»aui 1 a ia me ie kaumatua iviaori Kaui ,. 5 nga wiki
i i,i,.,i iho kaiaii/ uiic ka mate, ao reira i man- ia i roto i te Kahi.
u te u.unga tapu, e u hakainarnina ana Le kai ripoa te kn\\ Liautangd u te Kongo I'ai i ma roto i te i uuxtu ;i.u i te ma ran nga langata i tae iaai ki te Leiiei wahine, I rongo hoki i nga pouonga a te A; . i Le iiiihnga mo ■-• liunga mine. No kon \ ahau ka lulu i ; Ahakoa kauie tenei tualrine i kau , liau ., ana
main i kauwhau Le Kongo I'ai. Nuku atu i te tU aga I'akeha i i.\ kia kiuu i te tapuke^unga o lenej vvahme, aie to aiatau kite touu atu c ntitu niai ana ,<• loiiu o Le aroha, ara e tai _ i uga uxinanki. Ano te ahua o tenei vvahii reira hei piuai iho ma te tangata ki a ia auo aia te wain aha te iiiKe i tangi ai ana uahine ■ akeha aie aga tane hnki . agohe, he ugakau raugimaire, he uguwari, he aiahi pai itatua i aga \.a e aoho ana i iva< g Kaia ..• i; ke i arohatia nuitia ai ienei wahine i Te Whiiu.ara ma nga Main E Tokoono aga kai aino mo te tupapaku, ka tu i !«• taha u te kawheua. Ka in te lane me te whanau katoa ara te whare man-. ICu inanaakilia c !«• kaumatua taaa whanau te Lupapaku aie tuna boa Laue H ukitanga katoa i roto i Le inoi, knore etulii atu <• urn ki rot«i i tuua u" iniiiii ka aniiihia ki roto i te whare karakia, kn reira te timua-
ga ii i«' pekn e aoho mai ana me i*- Eluuga Tapu katoa, okenn kei Le tangi, v tatari ana ki i<- urunga atu o te kawhena. Kua rere mai te wain he tukotoranga am t.- tupapaku. Te lukungi atu I kui-ainu !.i ton ii takotorangn kn aoho te timuaki ki raro, uohu katoa te katoa, limata te karakia Ku te aoho a te kirimate me noho i le taha main l\'. te okeua laha katau. i\" aga kai aniu ts turn ki letahi taha e torn ki tetahi taha Ko te kiuiene Mo S3 0 M^ Father.
ii-, whnkntuhera aa Hamioru Kttmau. II 'n<
Matonga. Ko rteupoua Parahi te kai whakahaei
kui-whnkatangi fi te okena ko Tiata WUehirn me R< Kai
lamu hau I natahi I- n Memi I'urtri
I kauwhau ia > te nhua >> tenei wahiue i a ii noa
ki tona matenga. Kai kauwhau tuarui ko
I I ii aw h(i n i te ha M n tor
276 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926
1 tenei take. 1 kore.ro hoki ia mo te taha ki te iriiringa, mo »e mai c 1 mi Kara in i a La 1 ara ake ai 1 te uuue 1 ha ere La ki te kauwhau ki ugu aairuu 1 .«■ whare Ucrehere a 1 kauwhau huki 1 te iriiriugu uiu ,.■ hunga male i a i Ixoroiuiti 15: 29, penei ka aim ic hunga u iriiria aim in', ivhakakapi mo te huagu mate ki te kore ruwa <» hunga mute o ara, In- aha hoki ratou ka iriiria ai hei whakakapi mo te hunga matel ->ana ka unga alu 6 ahau a haia Poropiti ki a koutuu i nma i te taenga
mai n te ra nui o Lhowa, te whakamataku, a ka tahuri i a La nga ngakau o ng; i mania ki nga tamariki, me oga Qgakau t> uga tamariki ki oga lnatua, kei haere atu ahau ka pain i te wheuua ki te kaauga.
lie wuiata na Bratu I iriugihaata raua k.> raati. Kauwhau mi
Liaia Henihana. I kurero La mo te alma ■ te ora i tenei a<> te
ahuatanga o te urauga >■ tera no. ! run yd i te hari me tc ki>a o to tangata i roto i tenei orauga kihai i na kua mutu iaua aari, taua koa kua tangohia atu i a tatau. 1 whakariten e i., tatau ki te kaipuke. 1 te takiwa i rere atu ai te kaipuke e mohio atu una tatau ki aga tangata ki te alma o nga ruea katoa i rungn i taua kaipuke, cngari i te taima ka lawhiti haere am ka timata tc ngaro haere atu i a tatau — aawai a. kua kite atu tatau ko le niaa anake o nga hera «' knen am ana, nawai aaa, kua ngaro, kua mutn to Laton mohio atu ka pewhea ra :i ko atu. Penei me io tatau tuahiue, i mohio tatau ki tona alma i Le taima o ora ana e noho ana i waenganui i a tatau. Engari i te wa kua male ia kua kore tatau e kite atu i a ia. kua ngaro atu ia i a tatau, kua kore tatau t) mohio pewhea ra a k-j niu. Ko tc vvahi pouri nnake tenei, engari ko te tikangn ia ka hoki mai ano taua kaipuke, ka kite ano ■ tuna wa. E mohiotia ana hoki tona ra h »ki mai e nga tangata whakahaere. Engari to tatau tuahine kei te mohiotia ano ka hoki mai ano. engari awhea te ra, te marama, tc tau ranei, kaore e mohiotia -kore rawa he tangnln
hio ahakoa tc Tama n te A.tua, kore rawa tetahi tangata kin kotahi,
koia anake ko te Matua. ka. te nga anahcra. He tangata aroha tonu le A i na. ara a llm Karaiti. E taoa e is t<' whakaora te tangata ahakoa mate, ka ora ia. Engari he tauira Tuna i whakaatu ai ma tc whaka pono, ahakoa taua whakapono pera noa te rahi me te p-ia nanj te rahi, c men afu ana k ut< u ki tenei maunga kia nckc n u. ka ncke. Kei a lataii taua whakaakoranga. I pera tonu hoki Tona whakaoranga i t<- lamahini" a Taitllha i whakaaiahia «• l;i i te mate. I korero ia mo etahi purapura witi i takoto i roto i nga whan- o te taima mai ra ano i [hipa nun purapura witi, no muri nei ka kitea i roto tonu i nga whare witi i hanga e Hohepa, kei te pai tonu. kei tc ora tonu te kakano tipu o roto i te witi. Pera tonu tatau. ahakoa pewhea to tatau rea ki roto i te kopu o tc w henna. Ko tc purapura kei tc Atua 6 pupuri mai ana tc wairua ora. Mr nga tangata whakaaro whanui kua mate, e wai- hotia e ratou etahi tohu o aua korero e pera tonu ana me ta to karai- pitnre e korero nei.
Tie liimene na RcrC Waerea. .Icsus Lover of My Soul. Kauwhau : a Rawiri .Kamae. 1 mihi ki te hunga katoa i tae mai, te tohu o te
Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARhkE _;;
aroha, me te mihi hoki ki te nui 0 te Pakeha, mo ratau i tae mai ki te whakanui i te tapuketanga o tenei wahine. E mohio aua ahau he pai nga uiahi a tenei wahine i waenganui i a koutou mei te nui 0 to koutou aroha. Ka pai ki a au te tauira a tenei wahine. kia mohio ai hum wahine inaianei kia penei 0 ratou ahua ki a koutou me teuei wahine. Ko teuei wahine no tenei Ilahi, ara no te Elahi o Lhu Karaiti o te LIunga Tapu 0 nga Ka 0 -Mini Nei, e mohiotia nei e te ao he Momona. No reira ahaj ka mihi atu ki a koutou. Kua kite koutou he wahine pai tenei. Ka nnitu i konei tenei karakia. Himene 195 Shall We Meet Beyond the Kiver. inoi whakamutunga na Ltatima Eakopa.
Ka mauria te tupapaku, tokoono nga tangata man. Ko te whare mate i inuri mai i te kawhena, ko nga kauimuim. ko aga Pakeha, k> nga manuhiri, Xgati Hineuru, Ngapuhi, Ngati Kahungunu, aga tauiu riki o te Kare.i 7.1. tangata w henna. Kn tae ki te rua. He paka a roto. ko nga taha he karoko katoa te rua atrahua ana te rua. Tuku i te tupapaku ki roto. Himene l(5(j i te himei.e Pakeha. Xa Erata PaaJ i whakatapu te rua. i aiua o te ;,. ratanga i te k< pani u te paaka Imra mai katoa nga wahine Pakeha km kite i te kawhena e lakoto ma ana i roto i te kawhena paaka. kua tukua iho aga karek i <> aga taha kua takaia ki te kawhena ake. Katahi .-nui ka aeratia te kopani u te paaka, tapukena hoki te rua.
He nui nga mihi a te I'akehn tenei alum tapuke tupapaku a
tenei Ilaln. Kaoro rawa ratau nei e kite aim he aha t«- llnln. kaorc he tapuke tupapaku penei te whakahaere. Te pai ki te titiro atu a te kanolii. Atnahua ana nga mahi katoa. lie nui tonu hoki nga Maori katahi ano ka kite, mo te mihi ki tenei tanu tupapaku. Te Tina ara Ilakari.
I te mutungfl i) te hakari kn inea mm tetahi wahine ninku e whnka puaki tona mihi. Ara wahine Pakeha, Mrs. McKenzie. • ■ W i >■ whnka mnori atu nku korero. Tino ki tooku ngaknu i te aroha ki tenei u me tona whnnnu katoa. Ka nui taku whakumoemiti I na i
whakamohiu i au ki te aroha ki tenei wahine Maori. I mohio ai ahau ki te ahua <> tenei iwi Maori. I. korero pono mm ahau ki ••< koe, koro rawn ahau i ki o i tetahi tanu tupapaku penei te wairua, Te p i «» nga whakahaere nra o tenei Hahi. Ko to matau whakanro katoa etici e
i atu nei ahau I i a koe. i Whenei i p;ii tenei rangi, nui atu a matau i n< ho atu r tae mai ki tenei w liMiun in, engnri ko ta matau mihi katon hau ki
! koutou, ko matau ko nun Pa matau
inn koutou e ivhnkaal 0 mai "
Koin nei te mutunga, Ko tenei tauira tanu tupa|mku an Tiiuunki
I 1 in I. mi 1 I nl 11 nn 1 te taui 1 :i llll' penei |e :iliu:i 0
Heoi, tena, koin nei ra, 0 te Huii| w aha
•1 nn ke to kauwhauti I •
\<p rei mi tr nui n te kn n« haul 11 -
R v
268 KARBRE .Uuhahi 25. 1926
He Ripoata Hui Atawhai K 1 Te ECarere: Kia ora, tenei an k:i tuku atu i tetahi ripoata iti mo to liuihuiiiga atawhai i in aei ki te Hui Purina 0 roto i te Putahi, peka
0 to Wairoa <» te paiiha 0 to \lahia nci. Te inn o aga mema i tae inai
1 tae 111:11 ki UiUU tiuihllianga i imkw ;ilu i te 411. \;i te mema 0 te
Ponri na Kailia Tengaio i whakahaere tenei huihuinga. Eiimene tuatahi, 11 t. aga aimene Maori, Aroha ki te Kainga. Xa Erihapeta Wn&itiri i whakatangi Le okena. Laoi whakatuwhera i a Kararaina Elapi. Eiimene tuarua, \- o aga himene Maori, Kia Pai aga Kupu. I tu a Etaiha Tengaio
ki te karanga ia merua o ia Hui Atawhai ki te ripoata. Ilea tuatahi i
karangatia <■ ia ko Male ana Taituha, Evaunihera Tuarua <> te peka o
L'uranga. L ki ana a ia ka aui Le kaha o toi.a inn Atawhai ki te whaka- rue i aga main o to ratou Hui Atawhai. To ratou aui 8 warn ano aga inenia, a ko ia ano he kai-whakuako. Ka nui hoki to ratou kaha ki te t< rotoro aaeie i aga kainga, aie te whakakakahu hoki i aga tupapaku, a lie aiihi hoki nana mo tona taenga raai ki tenei Hui Pariha.
Tuarua, i karangatia a Tiri Karauria, Tumuaki o te Hui Atawhai (» Muiiwai. tetahi wahanga o Turanga. Te nui o tona Hui Atawhai e torn ano ugu mema. Ivo etalii o o ratou kai-awhina he rawaho. ECaati, e LOrotoro ana rana ko tona h. a i tetahi tangata no waho o te Hahi tae atu hoki ki aga aica o roto i te ilalii. ECaati, mo te taha ki aga moni c i\\ a pauna ano to ratou moni.
Tuatoru i karangatia a Erihapeti Whaitiri ki te homai i tana ripoata. Ko ia hoki te Tumuaki o to Elui Atawhai o Nuhaka. Tino pai hoki tana ripoata. K ki ana a ia kua rite katoa i tona Hui Atawhai te whakati.e i aga uialii i whakariiea hei inahinga, tae atu hoki mo te taha tiaki i aga kamnatua. K tino hari ana tona agakau ki te ki. ka nui te kaha (» tona hokereiari ki te manaaki i aga kaumatua me te whakarite hoki i aga hui aiahi-a-ringaringa. E tino kaha ana aga mema ki te aacrc tnai. K riro ana ma aga mema ke air te Timuaki e akiaki
i etalii wa, tae atu nio te awhina i ll ga mea e turorotia ana e be ana ranei. Kua rite katoa tena i to Hui Atawhai o Xuhaka. A ko te tino kupu whakahau a Erihapeti ko te Kupu o te Mataurauga kia puritia e
te katoa o aga mema o te Hui Atawhai, no te mea o kore e ahei kia whiwhi tcalii to karangatanga i roto i te Elui Atawhai me matua utu i nga whakatekau, aie kaua hei kai tii. kawhi ranei.
I karangatia a EJrumannku Karere ki te homai i tetahi ripoata iti o tona mohiotanga ki te Hui Atawhai o Oraka (Mahia) i to mea kaore te Tumuaki i reira mo ona kaunihera hoki. Ko te ripoata o te mema o taua Hui Atawhai ka nui te pai, te kaha hoki o tana peka. I tautokona .• te mema o te Poari tenei ripoata, ara i tae hoki ia ki reira ki to tiro- tiro i a ratou. ki te whakatuturu hoki i aga karangatanga he kai-whaka- ako, hf kai-tiaki-taonga ano hoki. Ka nui hoki to ratou hihiko ki to whakarite i aga mahi me to pupuri hoki i te Kupu o te Matauranga, me te kohi hoki he moni ma ratau.
Akuhata 25, [926 TE KARERE
1 muri i tenei ka karangatia a Kautckura Webber ki te homai i tana ripoata 0 te Wairoa, ko ia hoki te Tumuaki 0 taua peka. Ka nui
hoki Le pai 0 tana ripoata. Ahakoa ia ugaro ka haere tonu nga buihui i ona kaunihera. Ka nui te kaha 0 Apikaru Pomare ki te manaaki i nga kaumatua. Mo te taha ki te whakuakoranga 1 roto i nga magazine, kaore ra^au i le mahi, cngari taihoa pea.
1 \vhnkatu\vheratia ki nga mema e hiahia ana ki te uhai kupu te taiiria, a ka tu a Apikara Pomare ki te mihi ki nga mahi katoa tae noa ki te kaha 0 nga vvahine ki te haere mai ki tenei hui. I tu ano a afarara Mai'n ki te whakaatu i tona hinengaro mo te tika 0 te Ilaln me t<- tautoko hoki i nga ripoata mo Nuhaka. No te mea ko ia kua tupono ia ki tetahi uiahi uaahi i te Tumuaki u te pariha ara a Erata Anihann i le maia paitini 0 tona vvaewae, lac atu hoki ki te naahi whakawhanau taniariki, kua tuiuki ami i a ia. He mihi hoki nana mo te kaha o ;<• meina o te Poari i tarai ki te haramai, a Una tae mai kei wacnganui i a latau. I tu a Ha rata Kaipuke ki t«" mihi me to tautoko i nga kupu katoa i puta i roto i Le hui. I tu a Liararaiuu Hapi ki te tautoko ano hoki mc te \vh ikaatu ano hoki i t<ma hinengaro. 1 mutu tenei huihuinga i runga i le ranglmarie me Le pai. Hiniene vvhakamutunga 37 o nga himene, Ma te Marie. Inoi vvhakamutunga i a Grace llaiatua. [Ienoi ano
RAUTEKUltA WEBBER,
Kai tuhituhi.
Ko te hui a te Poari o te M.i.C.
I-; whakaatu ana tenei ripoata i te ahuatanga o nga main «• whaka hacrea ana me te alma o te tu a te Kareti, te ora ranei te mate ranei, te piki whakanma o nga mahi. te hoki whakamuri ranei. Ko tenei ra i mohiotia ai nga ahuatanga katoa o le Kareti.
Te men Luatahi ko nga mahi u te paainu. Tino pai te Lipu o nga o i i tcuei taima n te tau me nga vvahi i rungia ki te karaihe. Ki te ,i in it le Poari lino ora te kareti ina wnimarie te penei u te pa • ,a ' i •<• wa n who I Hinoni ai.
Tr a tuiirua, ka nui te ora o nga kau miraka, o nga hoiho i i«*
kahi u nga kai-whakaako ki te whaknemi kai ara aei hay) mi kararohc i .«■ taima o te raumati ki roto i nga whare lungt haj I I'i. ■:■ rawa ake te mnroke kua whaiti ke he kai, kaore i pau kua tupu i he karaihe, i naianei kei te pai ngi
Te i tuatoru ko nga ponka mc nga pikaokao Tii
I, i tr k-,i. tino pikaok to te tvhanau heki Kua
n n rie ko nga mea pa i auake.
Te mea tunwha, kua kite te Poai i I U al t< * I " (1 ' "*a
lamariki ki te kai, <• rite ana ki iig
mati igu ahuii o nga kai nu
ana ngn " bill ni fn " inni I le M
ik KARERK Akuhata 25, ^0
aga kai 0 te Mane, 0 Le Turei, 0 te Weneroi, 0 te Taite, 0 te Paraire, 0 te Hatarei, «> lc ttatapu. 1 tino ohorcrc 10 Poari i tenei ahua, tt* kaha (» te paij pai atu hoki i a matau nei kai.
Te uiea tuarima, ka nui te ora 0 nga ahua u nga tamariki hauuga la aga mea e pangia ana •■ te mate. Engari uuj atu le ora 0 aga tinaua. He urn aga mea 1 tae puhutihuti aiai ki tenei kura, i to roanga e nohu ana ka tiinata te ora, lc nui. Kaore lie tii. lie >\ai luatno uoa ih<>.
Te mea tuaono, kua wrhakaritea he takuta tirotiro mo ratou ko Dr. Johnson no Hehitingi. Ki te kiia aie tuku ki te holiipera ka tukua, engari ko aga raruraru katoa mo tana tamaiti ka hoki atu ano ma tona matua auo uga raruraru e utu mai. 1 pcneitia e vvhakakeke ana etahi o uga tamariki ki te haere ki te Hchipcra e titiro whakamuri ana kci 0 ratou niatna ta aim te tikanga ma ratou ra aim e uhakanc aiai, mi reira ka r. a e takoto ana Lc tuniiti i to kura, tac rawa mai to whakautu kua wiki ke e takoto ana. [naianoi kaore e tatari ki nun m -.uia.
Take tuawh'uu, i uiuri mai i te Hui Y; u i Xuhaka i puta te panui a h'.M.K. to inali' a te Kareti kw uga moni utu o Uga tamariki e haere mai ana ki te kura uei, e OUO ran euhitu tokau ma warn pauna kci te nama. Inaianci c rim a ran c whitu tokau ma warn pauna kua puta mai, kotahi rau pauna kci te toe. Te mohio iho o te Poari tae rawa ake ki te w a c inutu ai te Kara ka ea katoa mai i to koutou kaha, c aga matua, ki te utu mai i nga moni 0 a koutou tamariki. Ka kite iho koutou ka ora nga tamariki i te kai, ka kore c uepuku nga korokoro, pai ana tc lickc (i nga kai. Tt kai a Lo langata cliara ho kai mahaialiara. kaore, ki tana kai ake, lino kai. tino makona. Heoi ana nga nama e toe ana kci ruuga i nga tamariki o nga iau kua hori ake. kua ]>uta nei ho painga ki
a rataii E hoa ma, c tig atua o nga tamariki kore nei ano i utu d < ra
atu tau. utua mai ana moni inaianei.
I tino mihi te Poari ki to kai-whakaako o te Kareti a Efata Heera tae atu ki uga kai-whakaako i raro i a ia. Ki tona kaha ki te whaka- haere i nga mahi o te Kareti i tenei tau. Ki te titiro a te Poari mama ana te tu a te Kareti i tenei tau. He nui to mini o XirenhaPacu ai ki te pai o te ripoata o to Kareti i tenei tau. Ko tona hui whakamutunga tenei, kua rihaina ia i roto i tona turanga hekeretari mo to poari o te kareti. Ko te kai-riwhi mo tona turanga kua ata waihotia kia tu ano tc hui a te Poari, ka whirikhiri ai, kia noho hoki te Timuaki. Kua haere a Nireaha Paewai ki Amerika ki to kura ki te hopu mai i nga matauranga o te Pakeha e tu tika ai tatau te iwi Maori i roto i eoei mohiotanga kura nialiita. No reira i tukua honoretia atu ia i roto i tenei huihuinga. Ma te Atua ia e manaaki i nga wa katoa tae aoa ki tc ra e hoki mai ai ia me tona hoa wahine me ona tamariki.
Tokowha nga mema o to Poari i tac mai ki tenei huihuinga: Erata Hoera, Tiamana; Nireaha Paewai. Hekeretari; Rawiri M. Kamau; Raki whata Peeti. Heoi na
R.M.K.
Akuhata 25, 1926
TE KARERE
Ko nga Kai Kauwhau 0 Whangarei
Ko nga in^oa enei o nga kai-kauwhau 0 Whangarei mo nga marama e rua e tu mai nei, ara mo Hepetema me Oketo-
pa.
1 Pukehuia
j Portland
I Ngararatunua
j 1 e Kauao I Kukuranui 1 Wairua I Whakapara I Mokau l Takahiwai I Ngararatunua i Motatau 1 Poroti 1 Orakau I Opahi l litoki I Te Kauao
Hemi Nai Tairua
Rani era Rewi
Hari Peeni
One Elder
Wiremu J airua
Keremete Ratahi
Heta Reweti
Aperira Wiremu
W irepa Taniora
Mohi Peepe
Mita Wepiha
Noa Pakaraka
Pera Wi Hongi
Wehi Kauwhata
Eddie Reihana
Tumu Pei Hopa
Hone Peepe
Raniera Paora
Hutana Eparaima
One Elder
Tirarau Renata
Hori Peeni
Marc Pari
Wiremu I leemi
Waimate Anaru
Reno Poama Heke
Hetaraka Anaru
Peneha Maru
Wini Anaru
( )ur Elder
Rehe I tori Peeni
Oik- Elder
I [ono Pere
( >ne Bldi r
Koroniria Tari
( me Elder 1
Tena koutou, e oku hoa mahi, ka nui oku whaimihi atu ki .1 koutou mo to koutou tautokotanga ki ahau, mo to koutou kaha hoki ki te wharite i 0 koutou karangatanga 1 .1 ;ui i tu nei lie tumuaki mo koutou. Na, hei konei ra e oku hoa aroha. Ma te Atua Kaha Rawa koutou e manaaki e whakauu ki tenei mahi i a koutou e haerc ana 1 raro 1 to kou- tou tumuaki hou. I loi an< 1 1 a, na to koutou teina, na
Rinehi K. famati, fumuaki fakiwa I awhito
t Kairara I Maunu 1 Nga Pipito I Ruatangata 1 Kairara 1 Otiria 1 Nga Pipito I Ruj tangata
I
1 !
E rua w iki 2 4 2
3 3 4 4
One Week 2 4
3 2
( >ne month
3 week si
( )nr month
1 eeks
11 KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926
KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA
Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei tc tari 0 te Miliaria ht-i ho- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea C hiahia ana ki etahi O enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS
Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather no
Book of Mormcn, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6
" " , Half Leather 90
.Leather 10-0 & 150
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0
" , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS
Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 0
" " " .Leather 3-6
Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9
" " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in I n-b
" Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0
, Leather 15-0
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nni, Cloth 5-0
" " " ", Leather I5-0
Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer I 0 SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0
What Jesus JCaught 5 0
Kindergarten Plan Book, KesHer & Morris 50
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, .Morton 4-6
SONG BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3
" " " . Leather 6 6
Deseret Song Books, Cloth 30
44 " " .Leather 6 b
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS
Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3
Vitality of Mormonism 4-6
Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson o-o
Restoration of the Gospel, II idtsoe 40
Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6
Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6
Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9
Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9
Bible Ready Reference 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Mom's 6-0
KO J. H. TINIKINI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. R.
j^trpr?
i
a
Wahanga 20 Hepetema 22, 1926 Nama 9
Ta Kamariere:
>»UI te mea hoki na te tangata tenei
whakaaro, tenei mahi, tera e ka-
hore noa iho : Tena na te Atua, e kore
rawa e taea te whakakahore e koutou."
Nga Mahi 5:38-39.
\0!
I
1
!
%
M
"CS KMR&R&"
WHAKAEMINGA O NCA KORERO
|
Wharangi. |
|
|
Kl TE ETITA |
|
|
He Matenga |
303 |
|
1 [e Matenga |
304 |
|
He Ripoata no te Mahia |
|
|
He Poroporoaki |
30S |
|
Ko te Matenga o Piripi |
306 |
|
Ko te Marae o te Hui Tau |
305 |
|
KO NCA RONCO KORERO |
|
|
Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona |
307 |
|
KO NCA TUHINCA MAI |
|
|
He Whakaaturanga mo te Whare |
0 Iharain 308 |
|
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI |
300 |
|
MAHI KURA HAPATI |
|
|
Concert Recitation |
282 |
|
Intermediate Department |
294 |
|
Korero a Ngakau |
282 |
|
Kindergarten Department |
297 |
|
Maori Theological |
282 |
|
Pakeha Theological |
288 |
|
Postlude |
281 |
|
Prelude |
281 |
|
Sacrament Gem |
281 |
j^an>n>
WaHANCA 20 WENEREI. HEPETEMA 22, 1926. NAMA 9
Maori Hgriculiural college Hastings, H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni,
hiahi u iliu ivara:u u te iiunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei.
Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, AI.A.C, Hastings.
Kii te utu mo TE K ARK RE i te tan e rima hereni (5/-).
KO IE TIKANGA TENEI.
iTle malua utu mo tou pepa fcu wuiv hi ai.
J. H. Timkini, Tumuaki Mihana Marioiui K. Ewutana, htita. Tiala Wttehtra, Etiia Hoa Awhina.
Ko te Km-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha
Ivo ogu Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers).
Wiremu A. Koura Rap ita Tana pu Eru T. Kupa
~ MAHI KURA HAP ATI.
Prelude.
Adagio hgato.
Arr. After Schumann. by Edw. P. Kimball.
SaCRaMHM GEM FOR OCTOBER, 1926
"His precious Mood He freely spilt,
His life I le Ereely gave ; A sinlrss sacrifice for guilt, A dying world to save. " Postlude.
'\I:.::J.: J: ,,!-!;•!' Hi.!. I I
PPP
mm P .i.-.n _>;;
rh k AkkkK Elepetema zi, 1926
CONCERT RECITATION FOR OCTOBER, 1926. FAST DAY CONCLiRT RECITATION.
(Matthew Chapter 4. Verse L9. 1 And 1 1 < ' saith unto them, Follow me, and 1 will make you fishers of men. "
CONCERT RECITATION FOR THE REST OF THE
MONTH.
(Matthew. Chapter 28, Verse 19.) "Go ye therefore, and teach all nations, baptizing them in the oamc of the Father, and of the Son. and of the Holy Ghost. M
KORHRO A NliAh\U MO OhkTOPA, 1926. KORERO A NGAKAU MO TE RA NOHO-irUKU.
Kei a Matin 4: 19.
"Xa ka nica ia ki a raua, Arumia niai ahan. a maku korua e nn'ii hei kaihao tangata. "
KORERO A NGAKAU MO ERA ATU RATAPU 0 TE MARAMA.
Kei a Matiu ?8 : 19. "Na haere, oieinga h ; akonga nga iwi katoa. iriiria i runga i te tngoa p te Matua, 0 te Tama, 0 te Waima Tapu.M
MAORI THEOLOGICAL.
Ratnpu tuatahi. Oketopa 3, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHC-PUKU.
Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori.
Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a to tanira i whakatako- toria aei e Ihu hei mahi ma tatou.
Ko nga Apotcro i Whiriwhiri.
Te Whakaatu: Kei a Matin 4: L2-25.
"I te timatanga te Kupu, i te Atua !<• Kupu, ko te Atna
ano te Kupu I a ia te ora ; ko te ora 1c
marama mo nga tangata. I roto i te pouri u- Marafiia e wliiti
Hcpetema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 283
ana; heoi kihai i man. i te pouri I te ao ia.
i hanga ano e ia te ao, a kihai te ao i mohio ki a ia. i haere niai ia ki ona, a kihai ona i nianako ki a ia. Tena ko te liunga i nianako ki a ia i tukua e ia ki a ratou nga tikanga e meinga ai ratou hei tauiariki ma te Atua, ki te hunga lioki e whaka-
pono ana ki tona ingoa I whakakikoki-
kotia te Kupu, a uoho ana i a maton (i kite ano maton i tona kororia, he kororia e rite ana ki to te Tama kotalii 0 te Matua), ki tonu i te aroha noa, i te pono," Iloani 1: 1-14.
lie aha te aiahi imi kua whakatakotoria ma te Karaiti a he alia te tikanga 0 Tona meanga, "Arumia niai ahau, a niaku korua c mea hei kaihao tangata?"
Meite titiro talon ki enei patai ka kite tatou i tetahi patai imi. Mehemea ka ako tatou i nga mahi 0 lhn ka kite tatou i Yana miliana he nui raw a atu. E kore e taea e tetalii 0 tatou te malii Ana mahi.
Mai «) Tona vvhanautanga ka tiiuata te ako i Tana wairua me Tana tinana. Ka tnpn i roto i te matauranga, ka neke haere la i te aroha noa ki te aroha noa. a riro noa i a ia te katoa. Ka whakatakotoria e la he tauira i Tona iriiringa e Iloani. a ka haere ia ki te koraha ka noho-puku mo nga ra e wha tekau, i reira ka raru ia la a llalana. I konei ka tiniata Tona mahi nni. Kua niaka a Iloani ki te herehere i a lhn i te koraha. kua kore tona reo e rangohia i te koraha e karanga ana i nga tangata kia ripeneta, no reira ka riro i a lhn tana mahi. kua oti te miliana a Iloani. Ka ako a lhn i nga tangata i o ratou marae, a i te tahataha inoana, i runga i nga taha maunga, i nga pa, a i etahi wa i nga whare karakia, i nga wa katoa 1 ako ana ia i etahi tangata.
"A i a 1 1 1 1 1 e haere ana i te taha 0 te inoana 0 Kariri, ka kite ia i etahi tangata tokorua, he tuakana, he teina, i a Elai inuiia, tona ingoa nei ko Pita, raua ko tona teina, ko Anaru, <• maka ana 1 te kupenga ki te inoana; he kai hao hoki raua. \;i ka ineu ia ki a raua, Arumia rnai ahau, a niaku korua <• mea hei kaihao tangata." Matiu I Is L9.
Mi- titiro tatou 1 a La e haoreere aua i waenganui i nga tangata I lianau [a i roto i nga haerenga 0 (>mi matua, 1 i ,1 ia ano In pepi 1 te nine u Tona vvhaoa ka nuu^ria la 1 runga 0 nga rori tino wera ki Ihipa, a i reira ka hoki mai
284 TE KAKhKi. liepctema 22, 1920
la ki Tona kainga i Kariri. 1 Kariri i liaereere fconu la ki Hiruharama ki te Kapenga. Na te reo 0 Eloaiii la i karanga ki tioranOj na te reo 0 te svairua ia i arahi ki te koraha, rue
te tiuiata ia ki te ako ka kit*' taton i a Ana main i Kariri n n- Kaperenauma ano hoki, i Korahina, i Kana, i Makatara kainga <> Mere Afakarini), i Taipiria. Ka kite ano tatou i a la c noho ana i te taha 0 te puna 0 Haika i Samaria, i Peta- haiia. i Karara (te whenua ki tawahi atu 0 Kariri)', i Miliaria.
nu' te wlienua 0 Qga Kerekehino. i a la . tata ana ki I I'm
harama ka haere la ki Petani me fclerikp, i haere ano lioki la ki tawhiti atu tae atu ki nga takiwa 0 Taira me Ilai ona Die te whenua o Miria.
He haere tonu Tana maiii. kaore he okioki, he tangata haere kahore he kainga, i runga 0 Tona aroha ki Taha tnahi. i malum i a la Tona kainga kia tiro ai ko la liei kai-haereere i roto o Tona whenua ake, kahore lie kohatu hei takotoranga iao Tona matenga, Tona kainga tupu ko nga rori, Tona tnoenga ko nga awaawa 0 te tnaara, kei 1*0 waka, kei te taumarutanga ranei 0 tetahi rakau. Pera ano hoki nga apotoro ka malnie a ratou mahi, kainga, matua, teina, tuukana, tnahine, wahine, me nga taniariki kia aru ai ratou i a lliu. llei aha? I uiea atu ranei la ki a ratou me utu ratou ki te koura, whenua. mea utu nui ranei? Kahore, i korero ke la i te aroha anake; mc te poharatanga, me te main tika. E hia 0 tatou e pai ki te am i a Ia nieite karanga la i a tatou inaianei .' .Mehemea e tae mai he poropiti ki te kai-hoko taonga, ka mea atu, waiho 0 taonga, a ki te aiahita kura, panga au pukapuka am mai i a An. ki te roia; waiho au pepa me 0 main tinihanga, l<i te kai- kuti hipi, tukua te lii])i arn mai i a au, ki te kai-mahi paamu, waiho te parau i kona, ki te tangata rangatira, hoatu an mea katoa ma te rawakorc— mehemea ka mea la ki a tatou kia aru i a la i tenei ra, c hia 0 tatou e haere?
Tana karanga, "Arumia mai ahau. a maku korua e mea. hei kaihao tangata," ehara i te mea ki nga taniariki anake a Heperi. ki a Pita ranei raua ko tona teina ko Anaru. engari Id a au. ki a koe, me nga tangata katoa 0 te Ilahi 0 Ihu Karaiti 0 te Eiunga Tapu 0 nga Ha 0 Muri Xei. Kua kara- rigatia tatou ki te kauwhau i te R01 gopai ki te ao. Ko etahi ki te kauwhau ki nga tangata kia. ripencta, ko etahi iho ki
Hepetema 22, 1920 te karere 285
te awhina i nga kaumatua me te kauwhau i te Rongopai ma roto i a tatou niahi. Penei ano i nga pakanga nunui, ko etahi ki mua whav*hai ai, ko etahi ki muri noa atu pupuhi tnai ai i a fatou pu tmnui Kei awliina i nga niea kei mua.
E inahi ana ranei tatou i nga tikanga o o tatou karanga- tanga? Kei te whakarongo tatou ki 0 tatou apiha? Kei te tiaki ranei tatou i nga rawakore, tirotiro lioki i nga pouaru me nga pani :' Mehemoa kahorc. Iiorekau tatou e aru ana i a 1c Karaiti.
Kaua nga kai-ako c tango i te nuinga o te taima, engari nijG tuku nga niema kia korero i nga niea e karangatia ana ratou c lliu ki te mahi incite ai'U i a la.
Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ilia Karaiti
Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou
Na Wiremu C Kaa raua ko Rapata 1 anapu i whakarite.
kaiapu tuarua, Oketopa 10, 1926. AKORANGA 27.
Te Mutunga 0 te Toronga Whakamutunga a Paora i Hiruharama.
A. A Paora i te aroaro 0 te ninanga 0 nga Hurai.
1. Ko te poropititanga 0 te whakatetenga ki a Anania. Mahi 23: 3. Tirohia ilio Iciici: Ko Anania te tumuaki o ic whare ninanga 0 nga Hurai, i mate ki te whawhai o nga Hurai ki nga Roma 70 A.l).
2. Ko te whakaarotanga me te tukunga 0 Paora i a ia ki raro i i<- mana 0 te Tohunga \ui. Mahi 23: 4-5. Whakaritea ki a Mai in 7 : '24-*J7.
3 ko te tautolietohenga <> Qga Parihi 0 nga Haruki ki poto i nga kai-vvhakapae 0 Paora. Mahi 23: 6
B. Ko te whakaoranga <• Paora e nga hoia <» Etoma. Mahi 23:
in ::i
1. Ko te tiakanga <» Paora 1 n>i<> i te pa i ona hoa rirl Mahi 23: LO 1 1
2. Ko te putanga n Paora i nga ivhakaaro nanakia 0 nga Hurai e wrha tekau. Mahi.2 I
S Te pukapuka a te kapene 0 Roma ki te kawana pari
pawa ki 1 Pirika Mahi 23 26 30 Tirohia ihn tenei: Na e tino manaakitia ana hoki e tc Vtua
28o T£ KAREKh I kpciema 22, iy20
Ana pononga 1 nga tnea kino katoa i te Diea he main Tana ma ratOU. J Oti lioki i a te Kaiaiti Ana mahi i mua 0 Tona matenga. K<> te meatanga a Apinari ki Kingi Noa. Mohia 13 : 3. I ki a Hohepa Mete e kore ia e mate i ona hoa riri i mua o te tutukitanga o tana mahi,
Ratapu t.atoru, Oketopa 17, 1926. AKORANGA UH.
l a Paora i mnaria.
A. Ko te vvhakawatanga o Paora i te aroaro o Petuha.
1. Nga mea i vviiakapaea ai a faora e nga ilurai. Mahi 24 : 1-9.
(a) Na Paora i tutu ai nga Hurai.
(I)) Mo tana akonga ke i te Ture a Mohi.
(c) Mo tana whakanoanga i te Temepara.
2. Ko te whakahoki me te whakahe a Paora ki nga whakapae a nga Hurai. Mahi 24: 10-21.
3. Ko te hikitanga o te wa hei whakawatanga mo Paora. Mahi 24: 22.
B. E rua tau a Paora e tiakina ana. .Mahi 24: 22-27.
1. Ko te korerotanga o Paora ki a Pirika raua ko Ruru- liira.
(a • Ka memeha te kino i te aroaro o te pai. Mahi 24: 25. Whakaritea tahitia ki nga tikanga o te llitoi-i o te Hani, wharangi 243-245.
2. Ko te alma o Pirika. Mahi 24 : 26-27.
Rrittpu tuawha, Ok'topa ?t, 1926
AKORANGA 29.
I Muri o te Rua Tau.
A. Ko te whakawatanga o Paora i te aroaro o Petuha.
1. Ko te pitihanatanga e nga Ilurai kia whakawatia a Paora ki Hiruharania. Mahi 25: 1-6.
2. Ko te karangatanga o Paora ki a Hilia. Mahi 25: 11. r}. Ko te uiuinga p Paora i te aroaro o Petuha. Mahi 25:
1-V2.
B. A Paora i te aroaro o King] Akaripa.
Hepete.Tia 22. 1920 TE KARERE 28'
1. Ko te toronga a Akaripa raua ko Pereniki i a Petuha. Mahi 25: 13-37.
2. Ko to kiin.ua a Petuha. Mahi 25: 24-27.
3. Ko te karonga a Paora i a ia. Mahi 26: 1-29.
4. Ko te mohiotanga o nga kai-whakawa ki te pono 0 nga korero a Paora. Mahi 2b: 30-32.
Tirohia iho tenei: i runga i te mea kua tangata whenuatia a Paora ki Roma e ahei ana ia ki te karanga ko Akuhata llilia hei whakawa i a ia, 110 te mea e mohio ana ia ki te liaere ia ki i li.-uiia ama ka whakamatea ia e nga liurai, heoi ko te tango- iianga atu 0 taua take i a Akaripa raua ko Pirika.
5. Ko te whakahaunga a Paora kia haere ki Roma.
katapu tuarima, Gkeiopa31, 1926. AKOKA^GA 30.
Ko te Rerenga 0 Paoia ki Roma.
A. Atu i tana ekcnga taea uoatia te pakarutanga 0 te kaipuke.
1. Ko te haere-noatanga 0 Paora i Hairona (Sidon) 0 Poeniha (Phoenicia). Tirohia te mapi.
2. Te ekenga i Maiia ki runga i te kaipuke wit i e rere ana ki Roma. Mahi 27 : 5-6.
3. Ko te whakatupatoranga 0 Paora i Nga Kokoru Ata- ahua. mo te mate 0 te rerenga atu. Mahi 27: 8-11,
Tirohia tenei: Whakarit* a to te tangata matauranga ki t,-i te Atua whakakitenga.
4. Ka mea atu a Paora ki ana hoa i to ratou ora te paka- rutanga 0 te kaipuke. Mahi 27: 11-26.
B. Te pakarutanga 0 te kaipuke.
1. Ko te meatanga 0 nga heramana ki te whakarere i te
Kaipuke. Mahi 27: 30. M.ihnalia iho te ahuat anira
0 to ratou whakaoranga i te urupa inoana ko te ngo- Kengohe. Tirohia rarangi 3 1
2. Ko te meatanga a Paora kia kai ratou i te pal tanga 0 te tekau ma wha ra.
Na ko taua kaipuke he lino uui IUO an a ra.
3 K<» te rukenga i te uttnga, 1m1 to ivhakaunga i te kai
puke ki in .. M.il.i 27 38 U l Ko !«• w hakaorn lauhcrchi 1 1 Mahi
ik k akkke Hepetema 22, 1926 27: 42-43. Korerotia iho tenei: E ahei ana Ida whaka- matea nga hoia 0 Roma mehemea ki te riro nga mau- herehere. 5. Ko te tutukitanga 0 ta Paora i poropiti ai. Mahi 27: 44 ; whakaritea 27 : 22.
PAKRH\ THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTER?,9'
First Sunday, October ;*, 1926, FAST DAY TOPIC
The Example of Jesus: \VIi;i1 it Bids 11s Do. THE CHOSEN DISCIPLES.
Tex1 : Matthew 4:12-25.
"In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with Mod. and the Word was God . . . In him was life; and the life was the lighl of men.
■'And the light shineth in darkness; and the darkness com- prehended it not . . .
"Me was in the world, and the world was made by him. and the world knew him not.
"Me came unto his own and his own received him not.
"Hul as many as received him, to them lie gave power to become he sons of (iod, even to them that believe in his name . . .
"And the Word was made flesh, and dwell among us. (and
we beheld his glory, the glory as of the only begotten of the Father:) full of grace and truth." (John 1:1-14).
Whal was the great missi..,i of the Christ when He came on earth, and what did Me mean when Me said. "Follow me ami 1 will make you fishers of men?"
When we slop and seriously consider this question we must stand al! amazed at the magnitude of it ! And when we investi- gate Mis life and follow Mim through history and in spirit, how appalling it must be to most of us to think of actually following Mim.
Equipped through Mis experience from birth — bavin" ' grown in wisdom," having advanced "from • race to grace until
Hepetema 22, 1926 TE KARLRE 289
in received a fulness'" — set the example of obedience to gospel ordinance, communed with the Father during the forty days' fast and gained a signal victory over the powers of darkness. He entered vigorously upon His mission. John had been cast into prison probably during this tasting period, and no longer was Iris voice heard calling upon the people to repent, but we find Jesus look up the cry and in Galilee He taught the people "on the thresholds of (heir shabby little white houses, on the small shady open places of their cities or the shore of the lake, leaning against a beach boat, His feet on the stones, towards evening when the ::un sank red in the west, summoning me to rest."* 1 Papini.)
■'And Jesus, walking by the sea of Galilee, saw two brethren. Simon (-'lied Peter, and Andrew his brother, casting a net into ■ I- : \n'\ were fishers. '"And He saith unto them. Follow me. and I will make you fishers of men."" Matthew 4:18-18.)
Let us for a moment follow Him as lie went from thence i .. 1 1 ; Ihe people with the ureal est message ever given to man.
Papini 's description of Mis wanderings is so striking that we •hall quote some of ii : "He was born on a journey. Still a baby at the breast, He was carried along the sun-parched road
to Egypt : from Kgypl He <•-•■ le back to the waters and greenness of CiH'e. Prom Nazareth He often went to Jerusalem for the Passover. The voice of John called Him to the Jordan : an inner voice drove Him ou1 into the desert . . . Mos1 often we find Him in Ualilee, in Capernaum, Chora/in. in Cana, in Magdala, in Tiberias, but often lie crosses Samaria to s;i down near the well of Schar. We find Him From time to time in the Tetrarchy of Philip al Bethsaida, at Oadara, at Cacsarca, also at Gerasa in itie Parea of Herod Antipas In Judah He often stops at Bethany, a few miles away from Jerusalem, or al Jericho, but lie rlid not shrink from journeying outside the limits of the old kingdom and from going down among the Oentiles. We find Him in Phocnica, in ilw region of Tyre and Sidon, and in Syria if the transfiguration took place on the summit of Mount Hermon "lie is the traveller without rest, the wanderer with no home, Ihe wayl rer for love's sake, the voluntary exile in lli^ own eountn . ll< says Himself that lie hns not a stone on which
ih KAKKRE I lepetema 22, 1926
to lay His head, and it is true thai He has do bed where he may lie- down at night, hor room thai He can call His own. His reaJ heme is the road which takes Him along with His friends
in search of new friends. His bed is the furrow of the field.
the bench of a boat, I he shadow of an olive tree. n (Pages 75-76.) Speaking of the response of the "first four" Simon or Peter. Andrew his brother, and .James and John, sons of Xebedee, fishermen all, Papinj says:
•"For Him they left their faithful boats which they had put into the water so many times, and so many times lied to the whatf; they left the old fish nets which had drawn from the water thousands of fish; they left their father, their family, their home. They left all thai to follow ihis man who did not promise money or lands and spoke onlj of love, of poverty and perfec- tion. "
.Mid then Papini asks a question pertinent to us and our day:
'"Who among us to-day. among ail those now living, would be capable of imitating those four poor men of Capernaum? If a Prophet should came and say lo die merchant, 'Leave your bank and your counter!' and to the professor, 'Come down from your chair and throw away your books;' and to the statesman. Give us you:- port-folio and your lies which are only nets for patching men; and to the workingman, 'Put away your tools for 1 will give you other work!' and to the farmer, 'Stop in the middle of the furrow and leave your plough among the clods. L'cr . promise you a more wonderful harvesl ;' and to the factory hand. 'Stop your machine and come with me, for spirit is more pie^- ions than metal ; ' and 10 the rich. 'Give away all your good i for you will acquire with me an inestimable treasure;' . . . If a prophet should speak thus to us, men of the present day, how many would follow him with the simple-hearted spontaneity of those fishermen of old ! "
"Follow me and I will make you fishers of men" was not alone to those fishermen of old. but has come to this people individually and as a whole. I'pon our shoulders rests the great task of carrying the gospel to every nation, kindred, tongue and people. And while it may not be the privilege of every one t< go to the 1 atl ie front, to enter the trenches and go over ihe top
Hepetema 22, 1926 TE karere 291
at the zero hour, as there must be behind the men at the front an organisation of support and supply, so there must be with us intelligent and loving service to support and carry on th< tremendous work, the battle royal in which we are called t( engage.
The example of Jesus, what then does it bid us do?
How are we supporting the home institutions? What 0 our loyalty to those whom (Jod has called to positions of re sponsibility 1 Are our homes in order? Are the poor takei c; re of.' Arc the widows and the fatherless made to feel tha' they have indeed brothers and friends among us? Are w« "seeking first the Kingdom" or is our service perfunctory, an( last rather than first ■ Would we respond to such a call as cam< 1o the fishermen, who "straightway left their nets and followe( Him?"
(iive voice to the joy that has come into your hearts througl having if even in a small way "followed Him," who "went abou doing good." Declare the testimonies given to you of His great liess, of His abundant love, of His great power, of His savin; grace.
Where can there be found a more profitable partnership thai is possible io each of us— partnership with Godl
Teachers are again cautioned to spend but little time ii
introducing the subject, to avoid lecturing thereon, or let l
recital of the facts preclude reaching the heart of the subjec
What it bids us do.
Read Tannage's " Jesus the Christ." pages 139-152; Farrar'i
"Life of Christ,*' pages 75-95 and Papon's "Life of Christ,' prices !»!' 85.
Second Sundav, October 10, 1926. UESSON 24. DAVID, AS YOI'TII AND fOUNG MAN
Texl : I Sara.16-31 ; II Sam. I 20,
Objective: To show one attains to leadership througl righteous living and fidelity to God's annointed
Supplementary References: "Beacon Lights of History" Juvenile Fnstructor, June, 1922; Jossphui
Three points tO Illlike 111 ihls lesson
I. David, seventh and youngest son of Jesse fraud
292 ft KAKhKh ik-piUMI
90H of Ruth. II. Hi- great faith manifest. lie slays (Juliath. 111. liis great fidelity to those in authority manifest 80 long as Saul was the Lord's annointed he honoured him in spite of Saul himself.
Questions for Teachers. 1. How can you apply the Goliath incidenl to inspire faith in the boys and girls of your classl
'2. Make application of David's respect Tor Saul in teaching respect and reverence for our leaders to-day.
Third Sunday, October 17, 1926 Lesson 25. I);i\id as Warrior, Poet and King.
Tex! : 1 1 Sam. 2-15; Psalms.
Objective-: To show that David, though weak at times. through repentance and righl living was truly God's servant.
Supplementary References: "Beacon Lights of Efistory;" "Juvenile Instructor, " June, 1922; Josephus..
Sugucsnons on Preparation and Presentation: David. Leader of Israel's armies; Jerusalem taken and seat of government moved there from Hebron: point out and emphasize the source i)t' David's great power as 2 military leader; at the height of his military glory lie sins against I'riah the Hittitc; make clear the punishment he suffered and his sincere repentance; he becomes king at the age of thirty ; concerning building of Temple ( I Sam.. Chap. 1) ; his trouble with Absalom- his lamentation; His songs Book of Psalms.
Questions for Teachers.
1. (iive three reasons why you think David a greal man.
2. What place does the Psalms hold in the poetry of the world to-day? Analyse the 23 Psalm.
Fourth Sunday, October 24, 1926 Lesson 26. Solomon, a Man of God.
Text: II Sam. 12-2&; I Kings 1-6; Proverbs. Objective: To show how Solomon prospered while living in arccordance with h;s knowledge.
Hepetema 22, 1920 Tii karere 293
Supplementary References: "'Beacon Lights of History;" •■.Juvenile Instructor," July, 1922.
. ingestions on Preparation and Presentation: The setting of Solomon "s early life — Son of Bathsheba — Loved by the Lord — Promised the kingdom by his father — Appointed king between the age of 15 and 'JO- David's charge to him (I Kings 2:2-9.)
Solomon as king: His first mistake — his marriage to a daugh. er of Pharaoh for political purposes. Consider in this connection the reasons why we should marry within the Church. Solomon's love of God as shown by his prayer (I Kings :J :G9. ) Mis great advancement because "God gave Solomon wisdom i.)\d understanding"- His temple — His proverbs. Questions for Teachers.
1. Mow may one most surely acquire wisdom? Explain.
2. Prom wlial source does one obtain greatest blessings and c of mind .' Why .'
Fifth Sunday, October 31, 1926 Review Questions.
1. What grcal man immediately preceeded Joshua)
2. Wha1 was the outstanding purpose in the life of Joshua !
3. Name two seemingly miraculous incidents in Joshua's experience.
' Which o\' the following men of these latter days typify elements of Leadership found in Joshua. Joseph Smith, Brigham Young, Wilford Woodruff, Lorenzo Snow, Joseph P. smii h or ot hers,
5. Mow can we all be ".Joshuas"' to OU1* present leaders'
li. < )i whal nationality was Kuih I
7. a. What Loyal action did Ruth perform that portrays her \ «'i > excellent character, b. Who make the Following statement, and to whom
ii made "Entreat me aol to Leave thee and to return Prom Following thee; For wither Ihou goest, I will l:o. and where thou Lodgest I will Lodge; U13 people shall be mj people and th} God mj God ; where thou dies! will I die, and there will I be buried The I. "id do so to me, and
more lllso, if aught bill death par! I bee and •
What "i<ai Lesson are we taught bj this woman t
294 i '!•- KAREKE riepetema 22, 1920
9. W J Kit was Esther's nationality .'
10. A Tier she had found favour in King Ahasuerus' sighl and was made Queen, what great thing did she do to save her people 1
11. What mvat lesson should the life and acts of this remark
able woman teach us.'
12. When did Samuel commence to serve the Lordl
13. How Long did lie continue in the ways which lie began in his youth .;
14. Why can we call Samuel one of the finesl characters of
the Old Testainenl !
15. Which of the following lessons do we learn from the life of Samuel.
a. To learn obedience in our early life, 1). To put off learning obedience until later.
c. To rule justly,
d. To rule unjustly.
e. To remainn in the strict path* of truth and righteous- ness.
f. To depart therefrom from time to time?
l(i. Who was the shepherd boy that became kin^ of Israel ! And by whom was he anuointed ?
17. Whenever David was reminded of his sins by the Lord what was always his attitude?
18. What lesson of importance can we apply in our own lives from the life of David \
If). In what way did David express his love of (4od? 20. What greal lesson does the life of David teach us?
INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT "THE BOOK OF MORMON"
First Sunday, October 3, 1926
UNIFORM FAST DAY LESSON.
Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 288
General Subjeel : The example of .lesus: what it bids us do. Special Topic: The Chosen Disciples. Adaptation for Intermediate Department.
Hcpetema 22, 1926 TE KARt.RE 295
Boys arul skirls of this age know that they follow the teacher or the officer who can say, '"Watch me and live as I live." The boy whose father says, "Come, we'll go to Church," goes more readily than the boy whose father says, "You go to Church." Christ always set the example in ilis teachings. He said, "Come, follow me." Tie invites us to be His partners in His Father':; Kingdom.
When we follow His example, we in turn set a good example to those with whom we associate. Yvry often, one boy or girl who says. "Come, let's go to Sunday School," can persuade a whole group to go. So live that you are not ashamed to have your deeds known, *hen let your actions show to others that you are consistent and tlcy will he influenced for good by association with you.
One man lesiiiif-d thai he joined the "Mormon" Church because the eons'steivt lives of his "Mormon" neighbours induced him t( study " Mormonism. "
Aftei a heavy bnowstorm, the first man to break the path regularly may have hundreds of others follow in his " footsteps. ' ]
List and discuss forceful illustrations of the power <■! example.
Second Sunday, October 10, 1926 LESSON 24. STORIES OF WAR-TIME.
Text : Alma 52-62. Objective : To teach that,
"If we do what'fl righl we have no need 1o fear.
For the Lord our helper will ever h«' oear,
ill the days of trial Ilis sain's He will cheer.
And prosper the cause of Truth, " Supplementary References: <>\i\ Testament, Joshua, chap ter (i.
gestions on Preparation and Presentation:
( 1 ) The taking <>\ Mulek. Alma 52:15 10
(2) Faith fulness of the people of Ammon. Alma 53
( 3) Faith of Helaman 'a 2000 ^-ns. \in,
( \ ) The capture of the < !itj of < tameni Aim.
Manti taken without loss of life Alma 6 Nephihah retaken bj the Nephilea Alma 62 [I
295 TE karlkk Eiepelema 22, 1926
Passages for pupils to memorise: Alma 53:18-21 ; 56.45-48; 57-26; 58:10, 11; 60-36; 62:49151.
Questions for Teachers.
1. Mention the outstanding lessons to be learned from the story of llelaman "s sons.
2. Why do you think it was impossible for failure to attend the armies of Moroni?
Third Sunday, October 17, 1926.
Lesson "Jo. Secret Orders- War and Wickedness.
Text : llelaman, chapters 1-4.
Objective: To teach thai "the Lord is merciful unto all who will in the sincerity of their hearts call upon His holy name. *' I [daman 3 :27.)
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: Ask all the class to read the text
Special Assignments.
1. Secrel combinations, llelaman 1:1-13.
2. Zarahemla in danger, llelaman 1 :14 :}:5.
3. Death of Kishhumcn. llelaman 2.
4. Activities in the land northward, llelaman 3:1-12.
5. The Church prospers, llelaman o :24-37.
n\ The Xephites driven northward, llelaman, chapter 4. Passages to memorise: llelaman :• :2T '-'JO ; 4:21-25. Questions for Teachers.
1. Discuss the ultimate end of secrel combinations, and by whose power they are Led.
2. What external evidences of the Book of Mormon confirm the statements made in llelaman 3:1-121
Fourth Sunday. October 24, 1926-
Lesson 26. Two Faithful Missionaries.
Text : llelaman, chapters 5-10.
Objective^ To teach thai power from heaven is given to those who are engaged in the service of the Lord.
Supplementary References: "Leaves from my .Journal/' by President Woodruff, chapters 3-6, 23-24; "Autobiography of Parley P. Pratt," chapter 27.
Hepetema 22, 1920 TE karere 297
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: (1) The advice given by Alma to his sons Lehi and Xephi (Helaman 5;5-l9), might be briefly reviewed by the teacher, calling upon pupils to recite verses 8 and 12.
Special assignment: (1) God's power shown on behalf of Lehi and Nephi (Helaman 5:20-49); (2) Gadianton Robbers (Helaman 6-18-24); (3j Nephi's prayer (Helaman 7:1-9); 4 Nephi calls the wicked to repentance (Helaman 7:10-29); (5) Have one of the pupils read Helaman 8, and bring a brief outline of n to the class; (6j '1 he fulfilment of Nephi 's words (Helaman 9:1-20); (7) Nephi given added power (Helaman 10.)
Passages to be memorised by all the class: Helaman 5:8, 9; CO-32, 45, 46.
1. Compare conditions described in Helaman 7:4. 5 with conditions of the presenl day.
2. Men: ion the several ways in which the power of the Lord v, s made manifest through Xephi and Lehi.
Fiftii Sunday, Oc.obe:- 31, 1926 Review Questions.
1. How did the Lord show His power when Alma and Amulek were in prison 1
2. Which story do yon like best in the missionary experience of Amnion and his brethren? Why1
:;. Write in brief the story of Korihor.
I. Write one passage yon have memorised.
KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT Mrs* Sunday, October 3, I926«
General Subjed : The example of Jesus: what it bids as do
Special Topic: The Chosen Disciples.
"Follow me and I wdl make you fishers of men." (Matt 4:19; Luke 5:1 I L I
Objective: In choosing helpers the Lord looks for faithful workers u h h w tiling hearts I. lie feels the need of assistance in M^ ministry.
I. To accomplish His li ome must be trained
298 I'K KAKKRt [iepctema z2y 1926
for future work
a. They must Learn the principles of Life and sal- vation, h. They must be willing to serve their fellowmen.
11. He calls lour faithful fishermen.
1. He finds them on the shores of the Sea of Galilee. His ministry.
2. They are busy, healthy, and prosperous. Faithful in their daily tasks.
3. The nature of the call.
a. Affirmative (Come follow me.) 1). A suggestion thai they may become skilful in higher duties. \. They respond willingly.
Forsake all to follow Christ. Application : V\ hen called by mother to perform a little task (wash our hands and tend baby), how will 1 respond?
How often shall I do this little duty? — daily, or every other day or how \
Second Sunday, October 10, 1926 LESSON 61.
Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten."
Topic: One Resuh of Keeping the Word of Wisdom.
Objective: By keeping the Word of Wisdom we gain physical iw.d spiritual strength.
Memory Gem: Same as for the second Sunday.
Rest Exercise: Same as for last Sunday.
We are all preparing for ihe earrving on of Ood's work. We all must be missionaries, all of us at home, some of us in the mission fields. If we are to he preachers of the Gospel we musl have strong, healthy bodies and keen minds. We must gain physical and spiritual growth. By keeping ihe Word of Wisdom we ere pleasing our Heavenly Father and He will bless us.
Third Sunday, October 17, 1926
Review the lessons by use of pictures and experiences from life, thai the children can comprehend, and that will impress
Hepetema 22, 1920 TE kareke 299
them with the necessity of keeping the Word of Wisdom, that they may have the desire to do so always.
Fourth Sunday, October 24, 1926
Topic: Joseph Smith's First Vision.
Text: "History of ( hurch, Vol. 1, pages 2-6.
References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten." Lesson G2.
Time: When Joseph was 14 years old.
Place : in the woods.
Objective: All earnest efforts to prepare one's self for the work of the Lord is rewarded.
Song,: '•.Joseph Smith's First Vision," page 41, 1). S. Songs.
Gem: The same as for tin' previous Sunday.
Suggestions: Joseph's religious education and training in the home helped to strengthen his desire for knowledge of righteousness and eternal life.
Because of his training, when the churches began to dis- . Joseph turned to his heavenly Father for the help lie had promised to give to all who would seek. Joseph sought the Lord in solitude. He received more than he had expected. He was overcome by the evil trying to keep him in darkness. But his desire and faith were so strong die evil was overpowered and Joseph received an answer to his prayer.
Lead die children to see how they too can seek for help if they live lor it and ask in faith. Think what the answer of Joseph's prayer means to us to-day. The answer of a Little
er has given us the knowledge of how to obtain eternal
life.
Hes1 Lxernse:
Let the children represent die trees in a grove Lei them choose i he kind of trees t !n-\ wish to be, some pines, some maples. etc, 'Twas a beautiful calm morning when Joseph went into the grove; the trees were softly swaying There were bees softlj buzzing and butterflies were in th«' air, Some of the children m,i\ represent the bees birds and butterflies.
1 Ifth Sunday, October i. 1 1 ffi Toph : The Book of Mormon Revealed
■ Mi itorj of the Church, n Vol I page* 6 I •
300 IE KAKLkE liepetema 22, ly-^o
References: "Sunday Adorning in the Kindergarten," Lesson 63.
I line : Joseph was still a hoy.
Place: in Ins bedroom and at Hill Cumorah.
Objective: The greatest blessing will conic to us if we prepare to do the work of i be Lord.
Song: "Ye Thank Thee, <> God, tor a Prophet," D. s. s. Songs.
Suggesl inns :
The deep impression the vision had made on Joseph, lie was thinking about il constantly. His preparation Tor His work was s*> important that an angel came to help prepare him. The angel bringing an imporlanl message. Joseph's heavenly
message. Joseph's heavenly Father was pleased with the work he was doing or He would not have chosen hnn for so great a work. We, too, should prepare and be ready for His call, for any work He sees lit to give us. We can be ohedient to parents and those in authority as Joseph was. Help the children to see that they can remember the teachings of Jesus and try to follow in His footsteps. By so doing we are preparing for mission not only in ;his life, bu1 the life to come. Rest Exercise.
We are preparing ourselves for the work of the Lord when we are ohedient to His laws and commandments. Joseph was obedient. Let the children suggesl what they do in their daily lives that test obedience. Dramatise their suggestions — obedience to mother when she calls obdience to lather when he asks for help from us — obedience to teacher when she asks us to fold our ha, ids. etc.
. ' '. ■ ; . i :
"Remember your prayers, little children. Both morning and evening each day.
The Loi • i> e er ready to hear you ; II- love* ail His children to pray."
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI [ZGRA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai.
\'a Toke Watene i vvhakamaori.
iiepetema 22, 1920 IE KARERE 30 1
AKORANGA MO OKETOPA.
Te Wa 0 te Taima i Rite ai.
(Meridian of Time). Ko Ta Paora Main Mihana.
1. Tana mahi i roto i te Ilalii.
a. Kotahi tau i Anatioka. Mahi 11: 25-27.
I). Tononga ki !<■ Iiari mea hei awhina i nga Hunga Tapu
i Uuria. Mahi 11 : 27-30. e. Te liokinga mai ki Anatioka me Maka. Mahi 11:
24-25. (!. Te karangatanga ki to oiahi mihana e te kaha 0 te
Wairua Tapu. Mahi L3 : 1-5.
2. Te mihana tuatahi.
a. Te wa me te t-oa kaore i te kotahi te yvhakaatu a nga kai-whakamarama, ki te korero a tetahi e 2 aga tau, c wha inai-ania. ki tetahi kotahi :ino raumati, engari kei te kotahi u L*atou whakaaro no waenganui i te 44 me i<- 50 o tiga tau i muri mai i te whanautanga
0 H' kaiaiti.
1). Nga putake aunui. K<> te haereerenga 0 te tuotu ■> Kaiperu i te rawhiti ki te hauauru. Te tutakitanga ki a Paraihu ki te poropiti tcka. Mahi u : 6-13. e. Te hokinga <> Maka ki Eiiruharama, Mahi L3: L3 (1. Te tahuritanga atu 0 Paora raua ko Panapa i nga
Eiurai ki nga tauiw i. Mahi L3 : 16 e. Te peinga atu i Ikoniuma. Main II: 1-7. I Te whakaoranga <> t» tangata kopa. .Mahi 14: 8 l:1 n Te akinga 0 Paora hi te kohatu i Raihitara. Mahi
1 I : ID.
h. Te u hakatahuritanga ■ » Tiiuoti, Mahi hi : 1. i. Te hokinga ki Anatioka. Mahi l 1 2 .'). Ta Paora mihana tuarua.
a, Te whiriwhiringa o 1 lira hei hoa inona, mo te 1 uranga
0 Panapa Mahi l "• 36 » I l». Te w hiriw hiringa hoki 0 Ti 1 1 Mahi Ifi 1-2
re Pakeha l European 1 1 uatahi i iriiria Mahi 16
11 1.. d. Te peinga ki wi n VI 16: 16-16
M'2 VE KAkfcRE tiepetema 22, 19^0
c Te hopukanga, te whiunga, tue te tukunga 0 Paora
raua ko Bira. t. Te whakatunga 0 te liahi i Koriniti. Mahi 1m : L-18. g. Te hokinga ano ki Anatioka. Mahi L8: L8-22, 4. Ta Paora mihana tuatoru a whakamutunga hoki ki Epeha.
Mahi 19: 1-11. a. Nga mahinga Qierekara. .Mahi 1!»: Ll-21, 1). 'IV hokinga ano ki Hiruharama. Mahi 20: 22-38;
2J : U-4U. c I niua i te liaringa ki niua i te nohoanga whawa Qui
onga llurai (Sanhedrin). Mahi 23: Ll-27 j 23 : 1-.").
Ka whakaaii 1c Aiiki me whakaatu ano a Paora ki
Roma. Mahi 23: i L-20; 27, 23-24. (1. I muri i 011a whakawakanga tuaha Qie tona h6re-
herenga mo nga tan e 2 ka haria hereheretia alu ia
ki Roma. c. Ka kaumhau ia ki Roma mo nga lau e 2. Mahi 28:
14-31, i muri ka tukua.
f, Tana whakaaturanga nui i te mea ka mohio ia kua tata tona mutunga. II Timoti 4: 6-8.
g. 1 muri i nga tau e wha pea ka I. aria hereheretia ano ia ki Roma, ki tc wahi i poutoa ai tona mahunga e Nero i te tan 65 A.I), i muri mai 0 te whanantanua o te Karaiti.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
Ko te Whakakotahitanga (C:-operation) i waenganui i te
Kainga me te Kura. I. He aha i tika ai kia whai whakakotahitanga.
1. Ta te kiira he whakanui, he whakatupu hoki i tc akoranga, i whakawhiuhia ai te tamaiti tc kotiro ranei i roto i tc kainga.
2. Me putake rite tonn la 1c kura me tc kainga, ki tc whakaako i tc tamaiti a kotiro ranei,
3. Ko tc niohiotanga ki tc mahi a tetahi ki ta tetahi lici whakatupu i tc rangimarie c matenui ai. ki tc ako i tc tamaiti a kotiro ranei i roto i tc huarahi e neke raw a atn ai tc matauranga.
Hepetema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 303
Ji. Me pehea te whakakotahi me te kura.
1. Me haere nga Diatua ki te torotoro i nga kura kia taunga ai ratou ki nga whakahaere me nga karaihe, e tutaki ai lioki ki nga kai-whakaako.
2. Me tono atu nga kai-whakaako ki to kainga, ara meheniea tera tetalii tikanga raruraru i waenganui o te tamaiti kura kotiro ranei me kai-whakaako. (Ka whakaaro nui ke te kai-whakaako ki te tamaiti kura kotiro ranei i niuri i tona taenga ki te kainga, a taenga ranei o nga niatua ki te kura.
3. Kaua nga niatua e korero wliakakinokino. whakahe, 1110 te kura, mo nga kai-whakaako rami i mua 0 nga tamariki kura, kei riro ma tenei take «• whakauaua te whakakotahi.
4. Me wbakarite e aga biatua he tikanga awhina ki nga kai-whakaako me te kura, ma ratou lioki e whaka-u ki roto i te tamaiti, i te kotiro tenei whakaaro.
5. Ki te kore tetalii tamaiti e hari e koakoa i te kura. me liaere te matua ki te kai-whakaako i roto i te wairua whakahoa, me te taliuri ki te awhina i a ia kia mohio ki te tamaiti, ki nga ahuatanga lioki c taea ai te whakakore tenei raruraru.
(5. Me mohio nga matua ki nga ture 0 te kura me nga putake lioki i mahia ai ana una. .Ma konei ka maraiiia ai ta ratou wiiakamarama i nga ture ki te tamaiti a kotiro ranei.
7. Ma runga i te huihui 'alii me te hacre ki i»' huihuinga o te " I\o|)u 0 nga Matua me nga Kai whakaako" e vvhakatupu ake te wairua <> te whakakotahitanga, e in tatatata ai hoki te kainga mc te kura.
KI TE ETITA. HE MATENGA.
Ki Te Karerc, tena koutou i tena walii, ma tf Aiua koutou katoa e tiaki, < whakakaha i nga wa katoa Kaati i< tnihi He tnhi atu tenei uaku ki ;i koe kia panuitia atu »• koe te mat. <» ia mat 011 pepi kotiro i te 30 «• nga ra 0 Akuhata K<> te Ingoa
304 TE KARERE Hepetema 23, 1920
0 taua pepi ko Tepara Christina Heti, e 0110 wiki te kaumatua. Hi' mil hoki te maniaetanga i pa mai ki te whaea rue te matua 0 taua pepi, ara ki nga whanaunga katoa <> taua 1 >i - 1 > i . Xn te Atua i homai, Nana i tango atu, whakahonoretia Tona ingoa. Heoi ra, ma to tatou Atua i tc Kami tatou katoa e tiaki, e whakakalia i nga vva katoa, na to koutou tnokai,
POUAKA PAKI.
HE MATENGA.
i\i Te Karere, tena koe, panuitia atu c koe te matcnga 0 ta tnatou tamaiti, "mokopuna, 0 Ngakaahupohere P. Keena. I mate ia i tc 30 o nga ra 0 Hurae nei tan L926. k<> te kaumatua
6 taua tamaiti e Pima tan me tc hawhe tona kaumatua. Ko tona inatiia ko Karaka P. Keena koia te tumuaki 0 te peka 0 Weraroa, koia hoki te kai-riwhi 0 tona matua 0 Pairama Keena. Tokorua raua kua mate anake, ko te whaea me nga tuakana, tuahine, 0 taua tamaiti kei te ora, me matou hoki me nga tupuna. He nui to matou pouri me te aroha mo tona wehenga atu i a matou. Engari e kore c taea te pevvhea i te mea koia tera te ahuatanga 0 te ao katoa. A/a ko te taonga nui tera kei te ao katoa. ehara taua taonga i te mea no te tang: ta kotahi, no nga tangata katoa. \';i reira, e tatou e nga whana- unga 0 tenei tamaiti. me a.iga atu 0 tatou ngakau ki nga kupu 0 roto i nga karaipiture. E ki ana te Kai Kauwhau i te 3 0 nga upoko te 1 0 nga rarangi, "Kua takoto te taima mo nga mea katoa. me te vva ano mo nga mcatanga katoa i raro i te i-aiiiii." Kei te 4 0 nga rarangi. "lie \va e tangi ai, he x-\a e kata ai, he \va e aue ai, he vva e kanikani ai." No reira no tatou euei taonga, no te hunga kei te ora ano. ara te tangi, te aue. te kata, te kanikani. Engari te lino kupu mana 0 tatou ngakau e peehi ko te kupu 0 te Kai Whakaora i ki atu pa ki nga akonga, "Tukua mai nga taiftariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau. kaua latou e araia atu. No nga penei hoki te pangati- patanga 0 te pangi." Na reira. e hoa ma, kei te ora ta tatou tamaiti. mokopuna, kei te waahi kua rite mai i te Matua. engari te hanga atu i a tatou kia tae atu ai tatou ki reira. Kaati, hei konei mutu r.i. na to koutou teina i roto i te Rongopai,
\A TE POTT!' PENEKUPA.
l.epetema 22, 1920 iE KARKRL 305
Ko te Marae 0 le Hui la.i K te H u 1 1 <i : 1 Tapu we nga hoa aroha, tenei ahau te tuku atu uei 1 te ripoata 1 to maua taeuga atu ko E>rata Paapiti, Tumuaki 0 Waikato. is t) uga ra 0 Hurae uei, l<i te pa 0 Princess Puea i Ngaruawahia takiwa 0 Waikato, ki te wahi ka tu uei to tatou Hui Tau a tenei tau e haere niai uei \\)-7. J tae maua ki te titiro i uga mea katoa o taua pa, ki uga mea e 11 a1 ana uio to tatou inn Tau. E ma uga haora o wnakaatu haere ana a friucess rnea 1 a maua ki uga mea katoa 0 tana pa. Ko te mea tuaiani ku tu luarac ara ko Le paaka. He tino ataahua te marae, <• tupu ana uga putiputi, pouga, nikan, harakeke, Die era atu Qiea whaka- paipai katoa. J mini iho ka haria maua ki roto i te hooro. Ka kite maua i te ataahua o roto o tena hooro. He ''electric light" katoa kei roto. Kei vvaeugauui o te "floor'' he "fountain" e rere ana nga wai i roto. Ko te rnaha o nga tangata e uru ana i te kainga kotahi i roto i tenei hooro e 500. 1 muri iho ka haria maua ki te ''cooking place (by steam)." K rile katoa ana nga mea mo te rnahi tunu kai. lo meneti e tuiiu ana kua maoa nga kai. I muri ka haria maua kia kite a a tetahi vvhare uui ano he moenga mo nga tangata. K 300 aga Langata e uru ki roto. I muri i tena ka haria maua ki nga wai kai m o le hui. Ko tenei wai e haere mai ana i roto i te pipe no te maung:i e .'. n.aero te haerenga mai o tenei wai. I muri ka haria maua kia kite
i te wahi ka hanga e ia he baker Bhop. LOO rohi e maoa i te tununga kotahi. Ko nga Footpath all concrete. I ki mai a Princess Pnea ki
a maua kia £300 pauna ka Oti katoa nga mea mo tana pa. 1 te mutang:i i w hakaahuat ia te pa e maua, tailioa ka kite koutou i roto i Te Kareie.
\o reirj e te Hunga Tapu, "everything up to the minute.'' No reira
me lae a tinana mai koutOU kia kite i enei mea katoa a to tatOU Hui
Tan c heke iho uei IDl'7. I tino aroha mai a Princeai Pnea ki :i maua. me tana mihi mai hoki mo to maua taeuga atu ki tona kainga. Heoi, kia ora katoa t< Hunga Tapu, na to koutou teina, tungane i roto i te Kongo Pai,
KIO 1 A KA Will II o
He Ripoata no te Mania
HE POROPOROAKI
Ki To K.ii'ir. c liofl tona !<<»<• otira kotttou katoa «• noho m;ii na i tena waahi, Ueoi te mihi, mahau e panui atu i^i Hunga Tapu katoa <• noho marara ana i runga " nga m out ere in i ara <> Aotearoa me te Waipounamu, i i« Akuhata mi, i te 6.25 p.m ka tu t<> mat an Miutara, n I Taurima i whakahaere lie Miutara poroporoaW ki .1 R II
306 It kakkkk Hepctema 22, 1926
Anderson, Timuaki no te Pariha 0 te Mahiai
Poroporoaki tnatahi na Hanitahuri Teira, me tana aroha, he tautau wati, hei aroha ki a ia ma nga tangata o te Mahanga. Ruka Rarere: lie nui te aroha ki tenei tangata mo ana oiahi pai. Whakahe Mateiiga: he nui ana korero aroha 1110 tenei tangata, me te tnkn kawhe (cuffs) hei aroha mana, ine nga peepi kua manaakitia. Ko etahi enei 0 nga mea i tu ki te poroporoaki, ara ko Watene Kara, Henare Taurima, Rina Pakimana, Ka Mateiiga, Tihema Taurima. Waiata whakaniutu i a Elder Richard Marsh, "God Be With You Till We Med Again. ' '
Heoi, e te Hunga Tapu, lie nui te aroha mo tenei kaumatua kua wehe atu i a matou. Kotahi te tangata me tana tamaiti i iriiritia e tenei kaumatua i mua atu i tona wehenga atu i a matau, otira he liuhua nga tangata i puta ki vvaho o te Hahi, na tona kaha ka hoki mai ano aua tangata. Heoi kia ora koutou katoa. E te Hunga Tapu, kia kaha tatau ki te ripoata i o tatau aitua, kia mohio ai 011a uri ia wahi ia wahi. Xo reira kei te kaha nga Hunga Tapu 0 te Mahia nei ki te whakarite i o ratou karangatanga i raro i te mana o Perea Reiipeae Timuaki 0 te Peka o te Mahia nei.
TE MATENGA 0 PIRIPI.
Panuitia atu ki nga uri o tenei tamaiti, ara kei roto o Turanga, kei roto hoki 0 Wairarapa, i te 24 0 nga ra 0 Akuhata nei, i te 3.30 p. in. ka mate a Piripi Matenga. 1 mate ia i I'unga i tona mate taumaha ara e kingea ana lie taipo piwa. Tino kaha te mate 0 tenei tamaiti, ko 011a tau 15, e 0110 Qga wild e takoto ana ia i tona mate, ka hemo. He nui te aroha mona. Kua riro ia kei te po, kua ngaro ia i ona haereerenga. Koia te tuawha 0 tona whamere kua riro kei te po, me tona papa, ara a Repa Matenga. He Hunga Tapu katoa tenei whamere. E toru o tona whamere kei te ora, me tona kui, ara a Matire Kara. Otira he liuhua nga aitua 0 te Mahia nei, ara a Maata Kiira, Hape Tangiora, Henare Tikitini, kotahi o Turanga ko Nepia Bartlett, he papa tenei tangata ki a Piripi (ara uncle). E hoa ma, kei te kaha te whiu kei te haere inaianei, ka nui te aitua kei runga i te mata o te whenua.
Heoi ra kia kaha e te Hunga Tapu, kia kaha ki te whaka-
Hepetema 22, 1926
TE KARERE
307
rite i o koutou karangatanga, kia rite ai tera korero e ki ra, "Ki te aroha koutou ki a au, kia mau ki aku ture." Koia lit'i ana ture, 111 e whakarite 0 koutou karangatanga. Kia kaha hold ki te inoi, tena, tena 0 tatau, ki te tono i nga manaaki- tanga kua rite mai 1110 tatau. Kua puta hoki te korero a te Tiniuaki a te Mihana ara a President Jenkins kua tae tatau ki te ahiahitanga o te Hatarei. No reira kia kaha tatau. Tenei hold matau kei te inoi mo tatau katoa kia manaakitia. Heoi ra kia ova koutou katoa, ria to koutou teina, te tuakana o Piripi.
NA WHAKAIIE MATENGA.
KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA.
Elder Wayne T. Wiser
Elder Alviti A. Davis
ELEER WAYNE T WISER o Levkton, Utah: I tae mai a Erata Waiha i te 280 nga ra 0 Pepuere, 1924, a whakr- riter ana ki te takiwa o Ha.ki Pei. 1 te 20 o nga ra 0 Aperira, 192;, ka whakaritea koia hei timuaki mo tana takiwa. 1 te 2X 0 nga ra o tiune, 1925, ka nukuhia a W aiha ki te takiwa 0 Akarana, a i te 140 nga ra o Oketopa, [925, ka whakaritea hei timuaki mo rcira. Lukua honoretia atu i te 17 o nga ra 0 Akuhata, 192 \
ELDER ALV1N A. DAVIS 0 Weston, Idaho: I tae mai a Erata Rev\etj i te 240 nga ra 0 Hanuere, 1924, a ka whaka-
308 TE KARERE Hepetema 22, 1926
ritea ki te takiwa o Waikato. Ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa o Poneke i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1925, a i te I o nga ra o Oketopa, 1925, ka nukuhia ano ki te Kareti mo nga mahi rau- mati, whakahokia ano ki Poneke i te 15 o Pepuere, 1926, a i te 17 o nga ra o Akuhata, 192b, ka tukua honoretia atu.
He Whakaaturanga mo te Whare o lharaira
Ki Te ivarere: Tena ra koe e ic inanu iangi pai. Mau e panui atu enei korero tawhito rawa o o tatou tupuna, ara re whakaaturanga mo te Morehu o te Whare o lharaira,, te iwi Maori. Kaati.
Tuatahi. — Kei a KewKikuha te 19 0 nga upoko me te 28 o nga raraugi e whakamarama ana mo te Tangihaehae.
Tuaraa. Kei a Tiuterbnoixix, te 18 o nga upoko, te 10 me te 11 o nga rarangi, e vvhakamarama ana mo le main Tohunga me te mahi Makuoi.
Tualoru. Kei a Eewitikuha, te 19 o nga upoko, te 28 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana" mo te mahi Moko.
Tuawha. Kei a Kenehi ie 28 o nga upoko, te 11 o nga rarangi; me te 33 o nga upoko", te 4 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana mo te Tangi-a-ihu.
Tuarima. Kei nga Waiata te 14 o nga upoko, te 40 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana mo te Kai Taiigata.
Tuaono. Kei a Tiineronomi te 14 o nga upoko, te 1 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana mo te Tauaa ara Tapani i nga Makawe.
Tuawhitu. Kei nga Tauanga te 20 o nga upoko, te 29 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana 1.10 te Tangi Tupapaku.
Kati. Na enei whakaaturanga ka tino mohio tatou ko te iwi Maori he tino morehu no te Whare o lharaira. Rite tonu nga ahuatanga o naianei ki o mua.
No reira tena koutou katoa e te Morehu o te Whare o lharaira ara te iwi Maori e noho nei i tenei wahi o te niaara waina nui o to tatou Matua i te rangi. Kati, e h<,a ma, kia kaha tatou ki te pupuri i nga tare me te whakatuiuki pai i o tatou karangatanga tapu.
E kii ana tetahi whakatauki Maori, "E moe ana nga mata hi tuna, e ara ana nga mata hi taua/ ' ara e moe ana te hunga whakaarokore, e ara ana te hunga whai whakaaro. Ileoi, kia tau iho nga manaakitanga ki a tatou katoa, na to koutou tuakana, teina,
NA REHERI D. PAAPITI.
-0-
"Kei mamingatia koutou e te tangata e mea ana ki te whakaiti i a ia, ki te karakia ki nga anahera, e pokanoa ana ki nga mea kahore nei ia i kite, e whakapehapeha noa ana, he mea na tona ngakau kikokiko." Korohe 2:l8.
^KSaR&»S!^KS^!!^£^S^§^S^S^SM§l
I
UTDA
he "Karcre" ma too hoa o waho.
"UIA tiaho to koutou marama ki te
aroaro o nga tangata, kia kite ai
ratou i a koutou hanga pai, kia whaka-
kororia ai i to koutou Matua i te rangi."
"HE AO TE RANCI KA UHIA,
HE HURUHURU TE MANU KA RERE
^m^^^w^^^^^w^w^w^s^^^s^M
6
I
I
TE kARERE i lepeiema 22, 1926
KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HO.CONCA
Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho-
konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS
Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather Il-O
Book of Mormon, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6
" " " , Half Leather 9-0
•' " " , Leather 10-0 & 15-0
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth ^-0
" , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS
Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 0
" " , Leather 3-6
ICo Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9
" " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in 1 11-0
" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0
, Leather 15-0
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-0
" " " " ", Leather 15-0
Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 1-0 SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0
What Jesus Taught 5-0
Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 36
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6
SONC BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3
" " " .Leather 6 6
Deseret Song Books, Cloth 30
" " " , Leather 6-0
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-°
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS
Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3
Vitality of Mormonism 4-6
Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 0-0
Restoration of the Gospel, Widtsoe 4 °
Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6
Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 46
Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9
Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9
Bible Ready Reference 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 6-0
KO J. H. TINIKINI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C KORONGATA. HASTINGS, H. B.
IfKam*
Wahanga XX Oketopa 27, 1926
1
Nam a X
Ko te Hooro Nui kei Ngaruawahia
"Taku hahi kei tt haere mai, ehara i te hahi e utu ki te moni, engari he taonga tarewa."
Tawhio
1
"CS KflRSRS"
n
KI TE ETITA
WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO
+ + t + + +
Wharangi.
|
He Matenga |
330 |
|
He Matenga |
32/ |
|
He Mihi Aroha ki a Te Puea Herangi |
326 |
|
He Ripoata Hui Atawhai |
330 |
|
He Ripoata na Rawiri Kamau |
|
|
Hui Pariha i Korongata |
328 |
|
He Matenga |
329 |
|
Te Poari o te Kura |
329 |
|
Ko te Matenga o Ta Timi Kara |
306 |
KO NCA RONCO KORERO
Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona $$z
KO NOA TUHINGA MAI
Te Urimi me te Tumime 333
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 333
MAHI KURA HAPATI
Concert Recitation 310
Intermediate Department 315
Korero a Ngakau 310
Kindergarten Department 318
Maori Theological _ 310
Pakeha Theological 313
Postlude 309
Prelude 309
Sacrament Gem 309
aron>
WAHANCA 20 WENERES, OKETOPA 27, 1926. NAMAIO
fllaori agricultural College Hastings. H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni,
Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei.
Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings.
Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni (5/-).
KO TE TIKANGA TENEI.
file matua utu mo tou pepa fca vPhhvhi ai.
/. H. Tinikini, Tumuaki Mihana Mariona K. Ewatana, Etita. Tiata Witehrra, Etita Boa Awhina.
Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha
Ko nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers).
Wiremu A. Koura
Rap ita Tanapu
MAHI KURA HAPATI.
Prelude.
Adagio Itgido.
Eru T. Kupa
Arr. After Schumann. by Edw. P. Kimball.
pp
SACRAMENT GBM FOR NOVEMBER, 1926
"ilis precious blood tie freely spilt,
His life lie freely gave ; A sinless sacrifice for guilt,
A dying world to save. " Postlude.
PPP lut.
310 TE KARERE Oketopa 27, iy26
CONCERT RECITATION FOR NOVEMBER, 1926.
(James, 5th Chapter, 14th and 15th Verses). Is any sick among you? Let him call for the elders of the church ; and let them pray over him, annointing him with oil in the name of the Lord ; and the prayer of faith shall save the sick, and the Lord shall raise him up."
KORERO A NuAKAl iYlO NOhi\U, 1926.
Hemi 5: 14-15. "Ki te turorotia tetahi i roto i a koutou, me karanga e ia nga kaumatua 0 te hahi ; a ma ratou e inoi ki runga ki a ia, me te whakawahi ano i a ia ki te hinu i runga i te ingoa o te Ariki : A e ora te turoro i te inoi whakapono, ma te Ariki a no ia e whakaara ake."
MAORI THEOLOGICAL.
Ratapu tuataiii, Noerna 7, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU.
Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori, Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- turia nei e lhu hei mahi ma tatou.
Whakaoranga i nga Turoro. "A kawea ana e ratou ki a ia nga tangata mate katoa e ngaua ana e te tini o nga mate, 0 nga mamae, me te hunga e nohoia ana e te rewera, me te hunga haurangi, me nga para- rut iki ; a whakaorangia ake ratou e ia."
E rua nga ahua mahi i mahia e lhu i runga i te whenua, a ko Ia anake te tangata i te tino rite mo aua mahi o era atu tangata katoa. Tuatahi ko la te Kai Whakaako nui 0 r.ga kai ako katoa. Tuarua ko Ia te Kai Whakaora 0 nga turoro. I mohiotia la puta noa atu i Huria mo enei mea e rua. No roto i enei mea e rua ka tupu ake te kino i nga kai-whakahaere tikanga 0 nga Hurai i Hiruharama, me nga Karaipi me nga Parihi. Na roto i to ratou kino ki a Ia, me to ratou puhaehae- tanga, ka whakamatea Ia.
Qkeiopa 27, 1920 r.E IvARlke 311
Ko tenei akoranga e pa ana ki nga whakaoranga i nga turoro, a me Ana tauira ki a tatou i roto i enei tu mahi.
Kua akongia tatou e Ana tauira kia whai whakapono hei uiea e vvhakaoratia ai e la nga ahua mate katoa me nga mauitiinga 0 te ngakau me te tinana. Kua homaitia e la Tona kaha ki nga tangata 0 enei ra ma roto i te Tohungatanga. Kei a ratou te tikanga mo te whakaora i nga turoro ma runga i te inoi 0 te whakapono. Te tikanga hoki kua whakatakotoria 1110 te whakawalii ki te hinu e nga kaumatua o te Hahi. Ma tatou hoki te tikanga ki te karanga i nga kaumatua kia haere mai ki te vvhakawahi i a tatou ahakoa he aha te mate, a me te whakapono ki taua tikanga. E pa ana tenei ki nga taitamariki me nga kaumatua. Me ako hoki nga tamariki nonohi ki te whakaiuahi i to ratou whakapono me te tono ano i nga kau- niatua ki te haere mai ki te whakawahi i a ratou. Ma tenei whakapono anake ka taea eta hi ahua mate ahakoa kahore e v> hakav. ahia, a meite kahore tenei whakapono, hore he painga 0 te whakawahi ahakoa he aha te ahua 0 te mate. I te mea he whakapono to tatou i roto i te Tohungatanga kahore he take o tatou e whakakahore ai i te matauranga kua oti nei te homai e te Atua ki te tangata hei v\ hakakahore me te whakaora hoki i nga mate. E tika ana tatou me kaua e mahi i nga mahi pohehe e ngoikore ai o tatou tinana, a kaua ano hoki tatou e whaka- kahore i ta te takuta i ko.rero ai ki a tatou i nga mate unit a penei i te ' ' Taipo-Piwa. ' '
Tet alii mea ano i meatia tatou kia mahi ki nga mea e pupuri ana i te Tohungatanga, he l-apu i nga homaitanga- whakaora-turoro, ma roto 0 0 ratou tiaki i 0 tatou ngakau me nga ringaringa kia aiaa, a me te oha alu i a tatou inoi me era at ti mahi. A me takatu hoki tatou kia pena ka karangatia ki te haere kia whakawahi nga turoro, ahakoa ko tehea taima 0 te ra o te po ranei.
Ratapu tuarua, Noema 14, 1920. AKORANGA 31.
Ko te Rerenga 0 Paora ki Roma. Ka miitu mi
A. I Merita -Malta) e ono tekau tnaero ki te taha whaka-te-
312 TE karere Qketopa 27, 1926
tonga o Hihiri.
1. Te atawhai o nga tangata 0 taua wahi. Mahi 28 : 1-2.
2. Ko te merekara o Paora i te talia 0 te ahi. Mahi 28 : 3-6. Tirohia tahitia i a Ruka 13 : 1-5. Ko te whakapono 0 te Hurai, ki te pa tetahi mate ki tetahi tangata ko tera te utu 0 ona hara. Uiuia tenei.
3. Ko te powhiritanga a Pupiriu, he rangatira 0 te motu. Mahi 28 : 7-10.
4. Ko te nieatanga 0 etahi atu merekara. Mahi 28: 8-9. Na ko eriei iwi kaore i te Hahi o te Karaiti.
B. Ko te tutukitanga o te haerenga o Paora.
1. Ka rere ano a Paora. Mahi 28 : 11-14.
2. Ko te powhiritanga 0 Paora i Apiuwhorania (e wha tekau maero te matara atu i Roma). Mahi 28 : 15.
3. Te unga ki Roma. 61 A.I).
4. Ko te mahi a Paora i roto i nga Hurai 0 Roma. Ko te maha 0 nga Hurai i taua \va (61 A.D.) e 60,000. Mahi 28 : 17-29.
5. Ko te mahi a Paora i waenganui nga tauiwi 0 Roma. Mahi 27 : 8-31.
Ratapu tuatoru, Noema 21, 1926.
me te Ratapu tuawha, Noema 28, 1926
(T runga i te mea i tae tureiti mai nga akoranga mo enei wiki, na matou enei kaupapa i whakarite hei korerotanga ma koutou i roto i enei Ratapu e rua). Nga Etita. Ratapu tuatoru, Noema 21, 1926
Kei te Akoranga me nga Kawenata, wahanga 89.
Kei a Raniera, te I o nga upoko.
Ratapu tuawha, Noema 28, 1926 Kei te Akoranga me nga Kawenata, wahanga 119. Kei te Whakaatu Tere ano hoki, wharangi 139, ara nga karaipiture mo te whakatekau: Rewitikuha 27:30-34; Taua- nga l8:2L 26; Kenehi T4:t8-20; Hiperu 7:1, 2. 5; Tiuteronomi 14:22-25, 22:28-29; Kenehi 28:22; Nehemia 13:10-12; Whaka- papa Tuarua 31:5, 6, 9, 10; Maraki 3:8, 10, II; Whakatauki 3:ro; Matiu 23:23.
OketOpa 27, I926 TE KARERE 313
0
PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS"
First Sunday, November 7, 1926. FAST DAY TOPIC.
The Example of Jesus : What it Bids us Do. HEALING THE SICK.
"And they brought unto Him ail sick people that were taken with divers diseases and torments, and those which were possessed with devils, and those which were lunatick, and those that had palsy; and he healed them." Matt. 4:24.
There are two outstanding characteristics oi' the earthly ministry: He was the greatest of all teachers; He was also the greatest of healers. In both of these activities He established great reputation throughout all Palestine. These activities combined to arouse the hatred of the Jewish rulers at Jerusalem and of the scribes and Pharisees. It was this hatred and fear of His success that lead ultimately to His arrest, trial and crucifixion.
This lesson, however, concerns only Jesus as a healer, and v. hat His example in this respect bids us do.
It bids the child to cultivate implicit faith in the power of God to heal both physical and mental ailments. This power, having been conferred upon men in this age, is manifest through Ihe higher Priesthood, which has authority to heal the sick through the prayer of faith. To this end the ordinance of an- nointing with oi! by the elders of the Church has been established. All members of the Church are admonished to invoke this ordinance, together with their own faith, as a menus of recovery from ;ill forms of illness. This much applies to both children and adults of all Sunday School ages. Young children should be taught to exercise ihis faith and to ask their parents to call in tli<- elders of the Church in case of need. This faith is in itself, in some measure, preventive of some sorts of mental affliction, and always a help towards recovery from any sort of illness. The admonition io have faith in God's power to lnal
•hoiild not. however, be regarded as release from the religious
TE K-ARERE Oketopa >7, 1926
duty to exercise wisdom and knowledge both in the prevention and the treatment of sickness and injuries through accident. Intelligence is also a God-given power, thankfulness for which should be manifest in its exercise toward the accomplishment of worthy ends. This also applies alike to children and to adults. In addition, those who hold the higher Priesthood have the obligation to seek the gift of healing and to so live as to be worthy of it ; also to be willing always, as Jesus was, to respond 10 calls to relieve the suffering from their afflictions.
Second Sunday, November 14, 1926
Lesson 27. The Division of the Kingdom.
Text : I Kings, chapter 13.
Objective: To show thai rulers can only rule successfully through the practice of religious truths and principles.
Supplementary References: [I Beacon Lights of History {Lord) 239.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: Solomon had been a great and wonderful ruler. His son Rehoboam succeeded him. The people visited him asking relief from taxation. He consul! ed his older counsellors who advised him to grant relief. His younger counsellors advised against it. He followed the latter advice: The Division of the Kingdom followed. Develop through a study of the history of nations how such results always follow Also take up the loss of the ten tribes which had its beginning in this separation.
Questions for Teachers.
L (Jive at least three examples of divisions in a nation that have been brought about by the same factors that caused the revolt in the kingdom of Rehoboam.
2. Give an example of what can be accomplished in a nation through the application of gospel principles.
Third Sunday, November 21. I92t>
Lesson 28. Elijah.
Text: 1 Kings, chapters 7-22; 11 Kings, chapters 1-9. Objective: To show that true service never fails of reward. Supplementary References: 11 Beacon Lights of History
Oketopa 2/, 1926 TK K.ARERE 315
(Lord) 239. "... ... . .
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: After the Division of the Kingdom we find Israel in need of divine guid- ance. The appearance of Elijah one of the most unique characters in Jewish history. Large of stature with features fierce and stern : His great work : Miracles ; Teaching under difficulties. Point out how Ahab's dynasty was overthrown through failure to heed the warnings of Elijah. Questions for Teachers.
1. In your opinion what response would be given a man of Elijah's type to-day who came bearing a message of repentance with the force he did in his day ?
2. Is there need for such a man in the world to-day? Give your reason for your answer whether "Yes" or "No."
Fourth Sunday, November 28, 1926 Lesson 29. Elisha.
Te::t: 1 Kings 19; II Kings 2-13.
Objective: To show that (Jod always gives strength to a man engaged in His service.
Suggestions on Preparataion and Presentation: Elisha a second prophet to Israel. A gentle and humble man. Compare with Elijah. The mantle of Elijah fell upon Elisha.. Explain fully and bring out the power of the Priesthood. After receiving the authority to act through Elijah point out the force of his work through his: Miracles; Teachings. In conclusion portray the growth from the lime of his call as he tilled his fields. Questions for Teachers.
1. (Jive three reasons why two such different men as Elijah and Elisha should follow in teaching a people righteousness.
2. Give an example of the same thing at it has occurred since the establishment of the Church in our day.
INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT "THE BOOK OF MORMON"
First Sunday, November 7, 1926
310 TE KARERE Gketopa 27, 1926
UNIFORM FAST DAY LESSON. Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 313
General Subject ; The example of Jesus : what it bids us do. Adaptation for the Intermediate Department.
The example selected for this month is that of healing the sick..
The Uniform Fast Day Lesson is not to be discussed as are the other lessons of the month but is to be used to induce the class members to bear their testimonies.
This lesson is especially well adapted to such treatment. The teacher might recall some of the healings accomplished by Jesus ; then lead members of the class to tell of incidents of which they have personal knowledge where healing and health restora- tions haATe been accomplished through faith and the ordinance of armointing with oil and administraJ ion by the Priesthood.
A few days before this was written, a boy, ten years of age, living in the Highland Park Ward, ran a nail in his foot. The foot was bathed and properly dressed. The next day it was badly swollen and very painful. The father and mother had been Called out. The boy got the consecrated oil, called in brothers and sisters around him and after putting some oil on his foot, he asked them to join him in a prayer. The next morning his foot was much better. His prayer was answered.
Second Sunday, November 14, 1926
Lesson 27. Two Mighty Prophets.
Text: Ilelaman. chapters 10 to i(J.
Objective: To teach that "Blessed are they who will repent and hearken unto the voice of the Lord their God; for they are they that shall be saved." (Helaman 12:23.)
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Special Assignment:
a. Nephi comforted of the Lord (Hel. 10.)
b. The great famine (Hel. 11:1-10..)
c. Nephi 's prayer and its answer (Hel. 11:11-18..)
d. Return to wickedness. (Hel. 11:19-38.)
e. Signs of Christ's birth and death foretold. (Hel. 15.)
f. Effect of prophecies upon The people. (Hel. 16.)
Okciop.. 27, 192o IE K.ARERE 317
2. Passages to be memorised by all the pupils: Hel. 12:7-23.
o. The teacher should briefly present the main points in Hel. 13
Questions for Teachers.
1. Name some of the ways in which Nephi had proven himself wonhy of the confidence which the Lord placed in him.
2. Briefly review the condition of the Nephites as set forth in Hel. 13.
3. in what particulars did Samuel's prophecies regarding Christ differ from any others?
1. Contrast the conditions of the believers and unbelievers, set forth in llel. 15th and 16 chapters.
Third Sunday, November 21, 1926
Lesson 28. The Night Without Darkness — Victory Over the ( Jadianton Band.
Text: 111 Nephi, chapters 1 to 5.
Objective: To teach that by faith and prayer and righteous- ness we may obtain victory over our enemies.
Supplementary References: History of the Church, Vol. 2, pp. 102-105.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: L Special Assignment to pupils:
a. Threatenings of the wicked. HI Nephi 1:1-9.
b. Nephi 's prayer. Ill Nephi 10:14.
e. The sign given and its effect. Ill Nephi 1 :15-26.
d. Gadianton Band. Ill Nephi 1:27-30; chapter 2.
e. Giddianhi's letter. Ill Nephi 3:1-10.
t'. Lachoneus' faith and works. Ill Nephi 3:11-26, g. Victory over the robbers. Ill Nephi 4. h. Nephites repent. Ill Nephi 5:1-7. 2 Passages to be memorised by all the pupils: 111 Nephi ) :12-14; 1 :19-21 ; 4:31.
1. Discuss the words of the Saviour spoken to Nephi as a source of belie1" in pro-existence.
2. Name the outstanding things in Lachoneus thai place him among the great Book of Mormon characters.
3. What value did the answer to prayer which Nephi received add to the sn/n which follows.'
3i8 TH KARERE Gketopa 27, 1926
Fourth Sunday, November 28, 1926- Lesson 21). Signs of the Saviour's Death.
Text: III Nephi 6-10.
Objective: To teach that the words of the Lord spoken through His prophets are always fulfilled. (See III Nephi 10:14, 15.)
Supplementary References: Matthew 27:50-53; Luke 23; 44, 45.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
1. The teacher should briefly relate the story told in III Nephi, chapter 6, and 7:1-14, to bring vividly before the class the power that Satan has to lead us astray.
2. Special assignment:
a. Nephi 's great faith and wo;ks. ill Nephi 7:15-26.
b. A great storm. Ill Nephi 8:1-18.
. c Darkness upon the land. Ill Nephi 8:19-25.
d. The voice from heaven. Ill Nephi, chapters 9 and 10.
3. Passages to be memorised by the pupils: III Nephi, 9:13-22.
1. Make a contrast between the powers of light and darkness as given in III Nephi, chapter 7.
2. Describe briefly tint great storm and darkness.
3. Discuss the principal cause assigned by the Saviour for the great destruction.
KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT First Sunday, November 7, 1926.
PAST DAY LESSON.
General Subject ; The example of Jesus: Avhat it bids us do.
Special Topic : Healing the Sick.
Text : M-tt. 4 2!
Time: Just after the choosing of the four disciples.
Place : In Galilee.
Objective : If we recognise and make use of the divine healing power that has been given us, we can be healed according to our faith.
Story : How Thor was Healed. ( Adapted by Ina J. Johnson)
Okelopa 2], 1920 TE KARERE 319
I. Thor's life.
1. He lived in Jerusalem.
a. He was a homeless orphan.
b. He and his companions lived behind two high walls of some buildings.
c. He earned his living by running after chariots. As they passed by he would hold out his hands and beg for alms (money).
d. Nearly every chariot driver would throw money to the boys.
2. Thor hears about a great King who is coming.
a. Thor watches and waits every day for this Great King.
b. He is told that he is only a poor beggar boy; that the King will not come near him.
c. Thor's faith is strong. He keeps saying he knows thai he shall see Him.
11. A Cruel Day.
1. Thor runs after a chariot calling for alms.
2. The cruel driver raises his whip and cut Thor across the eyes with the stinging lash.
3. Thor fell to the earth never to see again.
a. He lay there until his companions came and helped him home, between the walls.
b. From now on he must stay at home. He could not earn his living any more.
c. He thought more and more of the coming of the King. He would say, "When the King comes I shall see. ' '
d. He was laughed at but he kept on saying it. They would tell him he was blind and could not see. He would say. "But He will help me to see." His faith was strong.
ill. The King Arrives.
1. Thor hears great shouting and singing.
a. liis heart leaps for joy. lie knows the King has conic. Now he shall sec.
b. He feels his way out Prom the v. alls to the road.
c. Mis companion comes for him, and takes him to where the King is healing people.
32P te kAKKRK Oketopa 27, 1926
d. Thor sings praises and Hosanna to the King and keeps saying, "I shall sec the King" over and over again. IV. In the King's Presence.
1. Thor hears voices ; couid feel the great crowds, but could not see.
2. Gentle hands are laid on his head, a gentle voice spoke, ''Through your faith you shall see."
3. Thor opened his eyes and beheld Jesus, he King. Tin r bows in thanksgiving and gratitude. V. Jesus administers to Sick and Afflicted.
1. Thor follows Him, sees Him heal the lane raise the dead, cure people wiJh palsy, and open the eyes of the blind.
2. Thor's little heart overflows with joy and gratitude, lie. wants to be like Jesus.
Faith is the subtle chain that binds us to the Infinite. Faith is the true prophet of the soul and ever beholds a spiritual life, spiritual revelations, labours and joys. While prayer is the key t o open the door.
"Whatsoever ye ask, ask in faith nothing wavering, and ye shall receive."
A pplication : How we can be helped:
1. By recognising the Divine Healing Power we have on earth to-day.
2. By having faith and knowing it will be granted if it is best for us.
3. Stimulate children to relate incidents of healing through faith and the Power of the Priesthood. Thus strengthening both their testimonies and faith.
-i. i head children to see how blessed we are by having this
Power in our midst. Suggestive Songs: "Jesus Once Was a Little Child," D.S. Songs; "Jesus Our Loving Friend," page 59, Kindergarten and Primary Songs. Gem :
We love the name of Jesus He hears us when we pray, He gives us many blessings And helps us day by day.
— Annie Mai in.
Oketopa 27, 1926 TE KARERE 321
We may cheer the sick by taking a basket of flowers or fruit to a neighbour who is ill. Dramatise the gathering of the fruit and flowers and the carrying of them to the sick. We may also sing a cheerful song for the sick friend.
Second Sunday, November 14, 1926.
Topic : The Precious Record.
Text : "History of the Church," Vol. 1, pages 15, 16, 18, 71.
References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Lesson 64.
Time: Just after the Angel's visit to Joseph.
Place : At the Hill Cumorah.
Song and Gem: Same as last Sunday.
Objective: An earnest effort to prepare one's self for the work of the Lord will be rewarded.
Suggestions : Everything will come in its own due time if we wil lonly be patient. Joseph being led to the very spot where the records were hid, proves to us that if we would only be more willing to be led by the Spirit of God we would be greatly blessed.
By Joseph's faithfulness and obedience in not taking the records until the proper time leads us to see that we must be faithful although we do not get the desired results at once, we must wait until our Father sees fit to give them..
Think what the results of Joseph's patience, labour, and faithfulness brought to us, in fact, a message was given to the whole world.
Show the books to the children, tell them what they are.
Third Sunday, November 21, 1926.
Topic: Jesus' ('nil to the fisherman. Time: When .)<-sus began His ministry. Place : By the sea of < ialilee.
Text: Matt, 4:18-22; 10:1-10.
General Reference: Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Lesson 65. See 1!>'24 Juvenile lesson for October.
Objective: Those who are obedienl to the Master's call become more helpful to their fellowmen.
322 TH KAKKRE Oketopa 2/, i^6
Suggestions : Peter and James were humble, steady in their work. They were faithful workers or Jesus never would have chosen them. They were obedient to their parents as boys. Helpful and useful, the kind of men they were when Jesus chose them proves the kiind of children they were when little.
If we want to serve our Father when we are old, we must begin when small. Obedience to parents, learning to be helpful and usful when small wTill prepare us for any work the Lord might see fit to give us when we are older. The Lord always selects the faithful member.
Rest Exercise : Same as for last Sunday. Song. ' ' Obedience, ' ' Kindergarten and Primary Songs, Thomassen, page 16. Gem :
" Even 1 a little child May help someone to-day. I can make my parents glad If quickly I obey. '*
Pourth Sunday, November 28, 1926
T(;p:e: Authority of Christ again restored to the earth.
T«me: In the bitter day.
Place : In Nauvoo..
Te-:t : History of the Church, vol 1, pages 40-42.
General Reference : Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, lesson 66; 1924 Juvenile lesson for October..
Objective: In order to official c in the ordinances of the Gospel a man must be called by those in authority.
Suggestions: People couid not see the need of baptism as Joseph Smith taught it. But it was given to Joseph as the correct form. Then, too, it was the same manner in which Christ was baptised. As Christ set the example, we therefore, know -hat it is the correct mode of baptism.
Again we have the Sacrament. Jesus gave it to His disciples just before His departure and told them to meet often and do il in remembrance of Him. It was also given Joseph Smith. He was told how to administer the sacrament — what to say, and what they would use (bread and water) ; also how and when they should partake of it.
Oketopa. 27, 1926 TE .KARERE .323
The power- o'i healing- the sick and afflicted was given to Joseph . also, ..."
.. ;..S«> ..tOrday we have (he same power 011 earth to help us as Jesus used when He was on the earth. How grateful we should hag rand to, show, our ..gratitude we should do the will of our Heavenly Father and . keep His commandments.
Help the children to see that if they do these things when they are little, they will when they are larger.
Rest Exercise: Lead the children to suggest what Mother Nature is doing to prepare for winter — the flowers are going to sleep— the leaves are falling — birds flying to the South, etc. Dramatise the. suggestions offered.
Song: "We Thank Thee, 0 God, for a Prophet," page 102, D.S.S. Song Booh.
MAHI HUi ATAWHAI.
UORA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai.
AKORANGA MO NCEMA.
Na Toke Wateiie i whakama'ori.
Te Wa t) te Taima i Rite ai.
(Meridian of Time).
Ko nga Taha e Rua e te Karaiti.
1. I roto i te wa o Toria malii iiiimta i te ao nei i korero te Kai Whakaora 111011a ano ko te "Tama 0 te Tangata" ma roto i Tona whaea, ko Tona matua nei no te Whare 0 Rawiri, a ko te matua 0 ilm ko te Atua.
2. E rua nga taha 0 te mihaha 0 lhu. e rua nga putake: Tuatalii he Atua ki te whawhai kia taea te mate me te hoko i nga tangata, Tuartia kia taunga ai In ki nga mate tangata. Ko 1c almatanga ki nga taha e rua <> te Karaiti kei te marama i te whakaatu a te Poropiti a A |>i na ii i roto i te Pukapuka a Moromoiia. Aloliia L5 : 1*6.
3. A Meri me Hohepa tokorua raua no te kawei tahi 0 nga momo kingi. Ko ta Alatiu whakaatu e whaka-u ana i te momo kingitaiiga 0 Hohepa. Ki ta Ruka koki e pera ana ano mo Alni te hek< nga iho i nga momo kingi. E kiia ana ano i haere a Hohepa raua ko Meri ki Peterehama kia tuhia 0 raua ingoa ki rcii-a, no te mea tokorua raua lain no te whare me te kawei •jo Rawiri. K ki ana ano tetahi tangata ingoa nui a Canon
324 TE KAKKKK Okctopa 27, 1926
Girdlestone, "I te mea e whakaatu ana te anahera ki a Meri i te whanautanga o te Tamaiti Tapu i ki la, 'A ka hoatu ki a la e te Ariki, e te Atua, te toroiia o Rawiri, 0 tona papa.' Mehemea ehara a Meri i te moino toto kingi, penei kua whaka- hoki ia, 'Kaore ano au kia marena noa ki a Hohepa.' Ko tana whakahoki ia, 'Ehara au i te wahine marena.' A penei ana tona tikanga, 'Mehemea he wahine marena au, i te mea i heke iho nei au i a Rawiri, e taea e au te mea kia whai tama toku toto kingi, engari me pehea e whai tama moino kingi ai i te mea kei te puhi (Virgin) tonu au. ' "
4. Na te taha tinana maori 0 lhu i taea ai e Ia te whaka- matautau e nga mea whai tinana. Na Tona taha Atua i taea ai e Ia te mea kia kopi te waha 0 Hatana. Matiu 4 : 1-11.
5. Na Tona taha tinana maori boki i kitea ai Tona ruha- tanga i a la i te puna, e tono humarie ana, me Tona whiwhinga a ngawaritanga hoki ki tetahi wai-inu Mona i roto i nga ringa- ringa o te wahine 0 Hamaria. Na Tona taha Atua i whaka- puare ki a Ia nga mea ngaro o tona wairua, i taea ai e Ia te whakaatu ki a ia te kapa 0 te oranga tonutanga. Hoani 4: 7-10.
6. I runga i te karangatanga o Tona tinana maori i moe la i runga i te Moana o Kariri i waenganui i tetahi tupuhi. Na Tona taha Atua i homai ki a Ia he mana ki runga ake i te hau me nga ngaru. Matiu 8 : 23-27.
7. Te whakaaturanga ano hoki mo Ona taha e rua i te wa i a la i roto i te Kari o Kehemane, a i a Ia hoki i runga i te ripeka. Ko Tona tinana maori hoki na ana te karanga, !'E Toku Atua, he ana Koe i wareware ai ki a Au!" A na Tona taha Atua te kupu i te mutunga 0 Tona whakaherenga, "Kua oti. ' ' Hoani 19 : 30 ; Ruka 22 : 41-44 ; Matiu 27 : 46.
NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE HEI WHAKAUTUNGA.
1. Kihai a lhu i haere mai ki te whakangaro i te taha tinana maori, engari kia meinga la kia ngawari ki te taha whaka-te-atua.
2. Ko te whakaherenga (sacrinee) i whakaotia ki runga 0 te ripeka. 0 te hokonga (redemption) ia kaore, engari no te aranga mai ra ano.
3. Homai etahi tauira e whakaatu ana i nga taha e rua
Oketopa 2J, 1926 TE KARERE 325
o te Karaiti, i tua atu i nga mea i roto i te akoranga nei.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO.
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
KO ETAHI TIKANGA HERE I NGA MATUA.
" Kia pehea atu te pai 0 ta riiatou manaaki i a koutou,
E nga tamariki, me i mohio koutou Ki te niamae 0 tona ngakau i te arohatanga,
Ki te hohonutanga, a ki te pono, Ki te mala me te u tonu,
Ki te manawanui me te kaha, Ki te takare tonu mo te pai, me te wehi nui i te kino,
Ko te aroha 0 tou whaea. "
1. He tikanga here i nga matua tenei, te aroha tika e rite ana mo a ratou tamariki, kia taea ai te whakatakoto nga tauira hei haerenga mo ratou i roto i te honore, i te tika, i te pono, i te ohaoha, i te manaaki. Alio te waimarie 0 te tamaiti, kotiro ranei, e ahei ana te titiro tonu ake ki ona matua hei tauira mona.
2. Ko tetahi whakaaro ko te ako i nga ahuatanga katoa 0 te tamaiti, kotiro ranei, me te wliai kia mohio ki tenei ki tenei 0 ratou. Kia mohio ki nga takarehanga a te tinana uiaori 0 te tamaiti, kotiro ranei, ko te whakarite ranei i te aroha, ko te hiahia ranei ki te whakapaipai i te tinana, ki te v.'hakahoahoa atu ki nga tamariki tane, kotiro ranei, me era atu, a ko te whakarite tika i nga mea e tika ana 1110 ratou. He tikanga vvhakaora tena i nga tamariki maha i roto i nga pohehetanga taimaha.
3. Ko te nama a nga matua ki a ratou tamariki, ko te whakatakoto i nga tauira papai, kana nga mea kikino. Kia tika tonu a ratou whakaakoranga kei taea te whakahe. "Ko te whakatakoto i nga mea papai rawa ki mua i Qga tamariki ka tipu ake hei tirohaiiga ake ma ratou ki nga mea papai rawa c taea ana te wliatoro atu. Ko te kai-\\ hakakaha i te hiahia 0 te whakaaro tika, ko te whakatakoto auau tonu ki mua i nga tamariki i ir':i mahi o nga tangata me nga wahine nunui o una wa katoa.
4. Tetahi tikanga here ano 0 nga matua kia whakaako i te Rongo-pai o llm Karaiti ki a ratou tamariki. i roto i tetahi
314
TE RARERE
Oketupa 27, 1926
ahuatanga e taea ai to whaka-u kia niau roa i roto i te whaka- aro, ara kia taea atu ai ano te whakaaro e ratou, i te ware ware
rawa.
KI TE ETITA.
HE MIHI AROHA KI A TE PUEA HERANGI.
E hine, tena koe, ara koutou ko ou iwi e noho mai ki Ngaruawahia. Tenei matou nga Hunga Tapu 0 te takiwa o Waikato te whakamihi atu nei ki a koe me tou iwi mo to koutou kaha ki te wliakarite i tenei taonga nui to tatou Hui Tau kei Ngaruawahi, takiwa 0 Waikato.
He nui to matou whakamihi atu ki a koe mo tou kaha ki te hapai i tenei taonga nui a to tupuna a Kingi Tawhio, i waiho ki tenei ao tona kupu e kii ana ia, ' ' Taku hahi kei te haere mai, ehara i te hahi e utu ki te rnoni, engari he taonga tariwa." Kua whakatutukitia e koe aua kupu 0 tou tupuna. Ko nga tongi kua rite i a koe, ko te Kamureti kua rite i a koe, ko Ngaruawahia ko tona turanga waewae, kua rite i a koe. Ko tenei Hui Tau kua rite i a koe.
Koia to matou whakamihi ki a koe me ou iwi ano hoki, mo to koutou kaha ki te whakarite i enei take nui katoa. Tena koutou ko au iwi. Ma te Atua nui i te Rangi koutou e awhina. Na nga HUNGA TAPU 0 WAIKATO.
Kaati — ko te whakaahua nei koia te wahi 0 tana Hui Tan c tu ai, ara te horo nui, ataahua hoki kei Ngr.ir.awalna takiwa
Oketopa 27, 1926 te rare re 327
0 Waikato.
Tena koe e Te Karere, mau e panui atu enei kupu ki nga takiwa katoa e tae ai koe. Heoi ano, na to koutou teina, tuakana, na
REHERI D. PAAPITI. 0-
HE MATENGA.
Panuitia atu ki nga inarae 0 aitua te mateiiga o ta matou tamaiti o Richard Watene ki te Hohipera o Xepia i te 13 0 nga ra 0 Hepetema 1926. He tamaiti ia na te Wirihana raua ko Kahukore Watene 0 te Peka o te Kirikiri, Hauraki. I pangia ia e te mate ki te Kareti (M.A.C.). E toru ona wiki e takoto mate ana, ka mauria ia, ki te Hohipera o Nepia. I te mea ka tino taimaha rawa tona mate i reira ka waeatia mai ona matua kia haere atu. Neke atu hoki i te toru wiki o raua ki reira ka mate nei ta raua tamaiti. He nui te pouri i te taenga mai 0 te rongo kua mate. He nui atu te tangi o ona whanaunga, me ona hapu i hui mai ki te whanga atu i te taenga mai. I te kitenga atu o ta ratou tamaiti, mokopuna, e hoki mai ana ki te wa kainga i roto i te rakau, me ona matua, i kore ai e taea te pupuri mai te rere 0 te roimata. Kihai nei etalii 0 ona whanaunga i kite, me nga mea i kite, i te wa i haere atu ai raua ko tona tuakana ko Mita Watene, ki te Kareti, he rapu i te matauranga, i inohio tera ka penei te ahua o tona hokinga mai ki te kainga. 1 tika ia te kupu, "He aha koia to koutou oranga? He kohu ra, he iti nei te wa e puta mai ai. na kua memeha atu." Hemi 4: 14.
I te wiki te 19 ka nehua tona tinana. 1 tu hoki he karakia whakamaharatanga mona. E3 torn nga kai-korero. Ko Rupata Wi Ilongi: "He iti noa iho te wa i tnohio ai an ki tenei tamiti i te wa i tae ai an ki te Kareti. Ki toku luohiotanga a rongo hoki. ko raua ko lona tuakana ko Mita Watene etalii tamariki papai atu 0 te Kareti. Kua haere atu ia ki tua 0 te arai, he mahi mana kei reira. I te mea kua kite koutou i tona whaka- ahua i roto i Te Karere, koia letalii 0 tlga tneraa 0 te Koroma 0 nga Rikona."
Toke Watene: "K pOUl'i ana au i te mea ko an te Tumnaki
328 T£ KAKERE Oketopa 27, 1926
0 to Miutara 0 tenei peka, ki te pai 0 tenei tamaiti kaha i roto i nga mahi o te Mautara, ngawari, ngohengohe, mona kua tangohia atu."
Erata Tarapata : "E koa ana au moku ka whai kupu ano ki a koutou i mua o toku hokinga atu. E nga Hunga Tapu, e pouri ana hoki tokn ngakau mo ta tatou tamaiti." He nui ano hoki nga whai-korero a nga hapu 0 tenei tamaiti ki runga ki a ia. A he monio rangatira tonu ano hoki no Ngati Maru, he mokopuna ki a Taipari me Hoani Nahe. Ahakoa i hinga atu ia ki te ao 0 te tonga, e pai ana, e haere ana i runga i ana iwi i a Kahungunu, Porourangi, Kongo whakaatu, Mahaki, Kau- kawa, Te Arawa, Tuwharetoa, i ona waka hoki i a Te Arawa, Matatua, Kurahaupo, Tokomaru, Takitimu, i runga i ona tupuna i a Ngatoroirangi, Poupoto, Toroa, Kongomaipapa, Kahukuranui. E kore nei e taea te tuhi iho ona whakapapa kei whakakapi i ta tatou pepa.
Ahakoa kihai i pau i a ia te tau ki te Kareti, a i haere iti atu, a ngaro hoki ia ki te ao o te tonga, he ahakoa, i hoki rangatira mai, a niohiotia hoki ia ki te iwi, ki te kainga, i tenei ra. I tika ai te mihi ake, ''E pai ana e tama, i haere rangatira koe, i haere i runga i o iwi, i o waka. Ahakoa na te rapu i te matauranga koe i kawe ki runga ki tena huarahi. Haere atu i runga i te kupu, "Ko te Matauranga te Kororia o te Atua. " Ako. me nga Kawe. 93: 36. E ki ana ano hoki, "He mea uaua rawa mo te tangata kia whakaorangia i roto i te kuare- tanga." 131: 6. "Ma te Matua 0 nga whakamarama, kaliore nei ona putanga ketanga, kahore hoki he atarangi 0 te tahuri." (Hemi 1: 17) e tino whakamarama nga ngakau o ou matua, whanaunga. Na to koutou teina iti i roto i te Rongo-pai, TOKE WATENE (Hekeretari Peka).
He Ripoata na Rawlri KamEu
HUI PARIHA I KORONGATA, KEPETEMA 4, 5.
Nga take 0 roto i tenei Hui Pariha : Tuatahi, i whakaaria e te Timuaki Mihana, ae kua whakaaetia kia tu he Temepara mo N-iu Tireni nei tae atu ki Ahitereria ki te kaha te Hunga Tapu ki te whakarite i nga take katoa e rite ana 1110 tenei . i,.:..;. pjv, v h^VnT^.T, Ha kahn te Himfra Taran ki te whakarite
OkeLupa 27, 1926 TE KARERE 329
i nga whakatekau, i nga noho-puku, ki te whakarite i nga whakapapa mo te hunga mate. Ma enei kia tika ka tika ai kia tu lie Temepara, ki te kore e kaha, he aha te painga? Ko te kaupapa whanui tenei kia takatu te Hunga Tapu, kaua hei moe.
Tuarua : Kua tae inaia ki te taima e tika ana kia moliio nga kaumatua Maori katoa i runga i tenei motu i roto i te Hahi ki nga tikanga me nga mahi me te whakahua i nga inoi e tika ana mo te hoatutanga Tohungatanga ki tetahi i roto i te Tohu- agatanga 0 Merekihereke me to Arona. Te whawha 0 nga ringaringa me te tu, te ahua 0 nga korero wehewehe i te ahua- tanga 0 te mana, i runga i tewhea 0 enei tohungatanga, kia kaua ai e takirua whakahuatanga o te mana o Arona 0 Mere- kihereke ranei.
Te nui o nga tangata i tae mai ki tenei hui 310. He nui te pai o te wairua i roto i tenei hui. I nga ra i mua atu o te wha
0 nga ra lie nui te ua, te hau, te kino 0 nga rangi. I roto tonu te tangata whemia i te marangai e mahi ana. No te karakia nui i tc 4 0 nga ra ka whiti te ra. Mutu noa tenei hui i te tekau o nga haora i te Mane, ka mutu hoki te hui ka puta ano te ua. Titiro ki tenei ahua, ma koutou e whakamaori tenei ahuatanga.
E ono nga karakia i roto i tenei Hui Pariha. Tekau ma 0110 nga kaumatua i tenei hui. Kore rawa he whakamarama- tanga o te Rongo-pai i mahue, i ngaro ranei. Ko nga whaka- liiarama i ma line na Timuaki Tinikini i whakamarama. TE POARI 0 TE KURA.
I haere te roopu 0 te Poari ki te tirotiro i te whaama, kitea ana e te Poari tino ataahua ana nga taonga me nga malii o te Kareti. Te tipu 0 nga oti, te ora hoki 0 a raton mea katoa.
1 tn hoki te hui a te Poari ko llemi Erekeretana te riwhi 0 Nireaha Paewai, koia te hekeretari 0 te Poari 0 te kura M.A.C, liiaiaiui 1 paalntia 1 roto 1 tenei lun Poari hei te 1 a ■ 1 1 Ink) he raiti mo te Kareti.
HE MATENGA.
Kia rnohio mai ai nga whanaungatanga 0 enei tamariki a
tatou, Otene Tuehu Poniare, kua mate ia 110 roto i enei hapu,
t^gati Kahungunu, Rakaipaka, Ngati Poporo, Ngati Whatua,
Ngati Rangitnnc, me era atn «» ona hapu. Rfahue iho i a ia
330 TE KARERE Oketopa 2/, 1926
tana wahine me tona tamiti i te ao nei. Tetahi whiunara nui hoki nona. Tona mate he kaiakiko.
Ko Riti Watene no Hauraki, i mate ia ki te Hohipera o Nepia. I tae mai hoki tona papa me tona whaea, i mauria hoki tona tinana ki Hauraki ra ano. Ko tenei tamaiti i te Kura
0 te M.A.C., tona mate kaiakiko ano. He nui te pouri me te aroha. Haere e tama, haere, haere ki 0 niatua, tipuna hoki.
1 mate koe i roto i te Rongo-pai 0 Ihu Karaiti, lie tnea liari ki a koe.
R.M.K.
-0- HE MATENGA.
Ki Te Karere: Tena koe, panuitia atu e koe te matenga o a matou pepe. I mate tetahi i te ono o nga ra o Akuwhata, 1926, kotahi marama e waru nga ra te kau natua. Na Hemi Pohutuhutu tenei pepe.
No te 24 o nga ra o Akuwhata ka mate te pepe a Tatana Arona, 10 nga marama te kaumatua. He nui hoki te pouri i pa mai kia matou i te whehenga atu i a matou o enei tamariki. Na tenei wahi i whakamarama o matou ngakau ki te kupu a te Karaiti ki Ana akonga i a Maka i te 10:13. Kua tae atu raua kei te Kai Hanga. Heoi, ma te Atua koutou e tiaki e manaaki i nga wa katoa. Heoi ano.
Na Tamati Honetana, Tumuaki Peka, Hoeotainui.
0
He Ripoata Hui Atawhai
Ki Te Karere, e hoa tena koe. E haere na ki nga marae, ki nga pukepuke, ki nga awaawa, ki te rua o nga kamaka, ki te tirotiro i nga morehu, tena koe.
Tenei matou etahi morehu kua kitea e te Hui Atawhai. No te 4 o Hune ka whakaturia to matou Hui Atawhai e Erata Paapiti ki Frankton takiwa o Wa'kato. E 6 nga mema Mai o reira ki tenei wa, kei te nui te hihiko o te wairua ki nga mahi, kei te nui te pai o a matou mahi a ringarmga He nui hoki a matou mea kua hokona atu. Kei te cumanako te nga- kau kia tiaho te maramatanga o nga mahi a te Hui Atawhai. Heoi, kia ora nga Hunga Tapu me nga Hui Atawhai katoa. Heoi ano,
Na Mihi Ormsby, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai.
Okctopa 2/, 1926 TK KARERE 315
Ko te Matenga o Sir James Carrol
K.ua maie a Ta Timi Kara, K.C.M.G., M.L.C. Pa mai te aroha me te tangi ki nga kainga o te iwi Maori me nga hoa Pakeha. E mohiotia ana tenei tangata e nga marae i runga i te Ika a Maui. I whanau ia i te 20 o nga ra o Akuhata i te tau 1857. He tama ia na Hohepa Kara (he pakeha) o te Wairoa. Ko tona whaea no Ngati-Kahungungu. 1 kurangia i te kura Maori o te Wairoa i muri iho ki te kura a Mr. Thompson i Ne- pia. I te tau 1870 i te whawhai ki a Te Kooti ka riro mai i a ia te honore nui ara te New Zealand Medal i roto i te ropu ho- ia a Hamlin. Koia te karere maumau re. a ki nga kaiwhaka- haere o ia ropu o ia ropu. I muri iho ka whakaritea ia hei Komihana mo te takiwa o Haki Pei. Ka mohiotia ia e Sir Donald McLean te tangata naana i hoko nga whenuaote iwi Maori ki te karauna i taua wa. Tukua ana ia ki te tari mo te tana Maori, 12 marama ia ki leira. I muri iho ka noho ia hei kai-whakamaori i nga Kooii Whenua Maori. I te tau 1879 ka whakaritea ia hei kai-whakamaori mo roto i te whare o raro i te paremata tae noa ki te tau 1883. 1 te tau 1884 ka whakama- tautau ia ki te noho hei mema, riro ia Wi Pere te pooti i ta- ua tau. I te tau 1887 ka hinga a Wi Pere ka riro koia hei me- ma. I te 1892 ka whakaritea ia hei mema mo te ropu o te uiha Maori. Ka noho Minita ia i te tau 1893 ki te tau 1912 mo te Karauna i te wa ko te Hetana, ko Hooro, ko Hoone me te VVaari te kawanatanga. 1 whakaritea ia hei Pirimia Kai- a^hina mo Niu Tireni i te wa i haeie ai a teWaari ki Ingara- ngi ngaro atu ai mo tetahi wa. i noho ano ho* i ia hei Kai-ti- aki mo nga \\ . e ma Maori o te Tairawhi.i. 1 a ia e noho ana hei minita 1.0 te ta.a Maori, naana i whakamarie etahi 0 nga rarurarr. nunui 1 pa ki te VYhakatohea i Ruaioki. 1 te tau 191 1 ka meinga ia hei knight ara hei K. C. M. G. I te tau 1919 ka hinga ia i tona tunga n.ema mo '1 manga. 1 whakaritea ki te Whare Ariki i te tai 19?!. I tona tamai ikitanga he toa ia ki te oiiia, k; .v peke ta^epa me e.a .i a ma 0 nga mahi takoro.
I m:>e ia i te moenia oa i : ■ 8 0 nga haora i te po 0 te Mane, 18 o nga ra o oketop . ki Akarana. Ko tona tinana i haria mai na runga tima, a n > 1 ;. 1 i te I ait •, ka u mai ki Turanga. Kua tae a Ngati Kahungunu ki runga i tona aitua
Poroporoaki, ha re ra e koro e! Haerj ra i roto i te kakahn 0 nga tipnna kua wciic atu ki te po. II iere, \\ aiho
332
TE KARERE
Oketopa 27, j 9^6
ko te aroha me te mamae o te ngakau, me au mahi papai, hei'hoa i muri nei. Kua ngaro koe i nga marae maha o tou Iwi Maori. Heoi ano na
To Ao Wirihana
Ko te tiima tuarua tenet 0 te M.A.C. whiitn-paoro, ara te Third Grade.
KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA.
Ko Erata EZRA H. ANDERSON (Anihana) o Bingham, Utah. 1 tae mai a ia i te 2 o nga ra o Hune 1923 a ka whaka- ritea ki te takiwa o Waikato. 1 te [30 nga ra o Mei 1924, ka whakaritea ko:a hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa. I te 15 o nga ra o Hurae ka nukuhia atu a Anihana ki te takiwa o Mania, hei tumuaki mo reira. Tukua honoretia atu i te 28 o nga ra o Hepetema 1920.
Ko Erata ARNEL J. TALBOT (Tarapata^ o Lewiston, Utah. I tae mai a Tarapata i te 23 o nga ra o Pepuere 1924 a i whakaritea ki te takiwa o Hauraki. I te 23 o nga ra o Aku- hata 1925 ka whakaritea hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa. I mahi ia hei tumuaki mo reira tae noa mai ki ce wa o tona hokinga atu ki tona kainga. Tukua honoretia atu i te 28 o nga ra o Hepetema '926.
Ka panuitia o raua whakaahua ki Te Karere o Noema.
Okelopa 27, 1926 TE KARERE __ 333
Te Urlmi me te Tumlne.
Loia nei nga mea whakamiharo i taea ai e Hohepa Mete te whaka- maon te Pukapuka a Moromona. I te whakaatu raai a te Anahera a Moron ai ki a Hohepa Mete i peiiei tana ki:
1 ' Kei reira ano hoki etahi kohatu e rua, i te mowhiti hiriwa — a ko enei kohatu i whakamana ki roto i tetahi arai uma, i karangatia nei ko te Urimi me te Tumine." Tuhituhinga a Hohepa Mete 2: 35.
I te wa i vvhakamaori ai ia i te Pukapuka a Moromona, titiro ai ia ina roto i nga mowhiti nei ki nga whakairo i runga i nga papa koura, ka kite hoki ia i te kupu e rite ana mo ia ahua whakairo, koia ki te korero atu i tana kupu ki tona kai-tuhi ki a Oriwa Kautere. Ko te mea whakamiharo o tenei mahi whakamaori o raua, ka mau tonu te kite 0 Hohepa Mete i taua kupu, kia oti ra ano te tuhi, kia tika hoki, katahi ano taua kupu ka ngaro, ka puta mai hoki ko nga kupu o muri iho.
Ko tenei Urimi rne te Tumime he mea hoatu ki te teina 0 Iarere i runga i te maunga, i a ia i korero ai ki te Ariki he kanohi he kanohi. ( Akoranga me nga Kawenata 17: 1.) He Urimi ano he Tumine i a Aperahama. Ina hoki tana korero: "Na, i a au i Aperahema te Urimi me te Tumine i homai ai ki a au e te Ariki, e te Atua, i te whenua 0 Uru o nga Kariri. " Aperahama 3: 1.
- He pera ano i a Arona i tona turanga tohunga. "Me whakanoho ano hoki e koe nga Irimi rne nga Tumine ki te kouma whakarite whakawa a hei te ngakau 0 Arona aua mea, ina haere ki te aroaro o Iaowa." Ekoruhe 28: 30.
I te wa i whakaritea ai a Hohua hei kai whakahaere mo te whanau a Iharaiia i muri mai i a Mohi: "A ka tu ia ki te aroaro 0 Ereatara tohunga, ko tent ano he kai tono whakaaro mana, i ta te Urimi e whaka- rite ui i te aroaro o Ihowa. ' ' Tauanga 27: 21.
L te matenga o liamuera Poropiti kua kore katoa i a Haora uga v\ aka Atua me nga rapa maori o te whenua, "i huihui mai hoki nga Pirihitini noho ana ki Tunema i huihuia ano e Haora a Iharaira katoa ki Kiripoa. A, te kitenga o Haora i te taua a nga Pirihitini, ka wehi, pawera rawa tona ngakau. A, te uinga a Haora ki a Ihowa, hore rawa he kupu a .Ihowa i whakahokia ki a ia e nga moe, e nga Urimi, e nga poropiti." I Hamuera 2H: 3-6.
I ui a Rawiri ki te Ariki ma roto i te Urimi me te Tumine. (I Hamuera 30: 7-8.)
I nga ra o Hairuha kingi 0 Pahia i tahuri ia ki te whakahoki i nga Hurai ki Hiruharama, i riro nei i nga whakaraunga ki Pupurona, otira i te kohinga i a ratott, ka kitea i roto <> nga tama a nga tohunga, kua
334 TE KARERE Okelopa 2/, 1926
ngaro te pukapuka whakapapa tupuna, 110 reira poke ana ratou, mutu ake to ratou tohungatanga.-.v^'Katahi to kaw.ana ka mea ki a ratou, kia kaua ratou e kai i nga mea tapu rawa, kia ara ake ra ano tetahi tohunga kei a ia nga Urimi me nga Turnine.-" Etera 2; 62-63.
E ki ana te Pukapuka a Moromona: '- Na, te tangata kei a ia nei enei mea, e karangatia ana ia he matakite.'' Mohi. 28: 16-. .'-.-'-
Ka kite tatou koia nei tetahi 0 nga ahua whakakite mad a te Atua i Una whakaaro puku ki Ana pononga ki nga p^ropiti, ki. nga matakite, ma roto mai i te Urimi me te Tumime: penei me larere, me Aperahama, me Arona, me Ereatara, me Kawiri, me Hohepe Mete. Ko enei Urimi, Tumime, he tauira iti no nga mea nunui o te Atua. Te Hakarameta he tauira whakamaharatanga mo te matenga o te Karaiti mo nga hara o te ao." Ko nga ra 0 te wiki mai i te Mane ki te Ratapu, he tauira mai no nga mano tau i hanga ai e te Atua te ao. Ko ta tatou taima he mea whika mai i te huringa porotaka o te whenua, te raunatanga i te ra; ko ta te Atua he mea whika ke i nga mea nunui i roto i te Kikuraiigi ara i Korapa. Ko Korapa e rite ana ki te tauira a te Ariki, ki Ona taima ki Ona wa, i to reira takahurihuri ; ara kotahi takahuritanga kotahi. ra ki te Ariki. i runga i Tana ritenga • tat.au, a kotahi mano tau e rite ana ki te taima i whakaritea mo te whenua e tu nei tatou i runga. Ko te ra kotahi ki a Korapa he mano tau ki a tatou.
' ' Mehemea t'era etahi mea e rua, a kei runga atu ano tetahi i era, a tera ano he mea 7iui kei runga atu i era no reira ko Korapa te mea nui rawa o era atu -Kokaupima kua kit-ea na- e koe, no te mea koia ra te mea tata mai ki a au.-" Aperahama 3: 13-16.
"' Na'.eriei wnakVaiuranga tatou ka mohio, ko nga mea nunui 0 te whenua he tauira iti no nga mea kei te aroaro 0 te Atua.
'" ' "Ko te wahi hoki e achia ana e te Atua he Urimi he Tumime tino nui rawa. Ko tenei ao. ina tae ki tona ahua e v.iiakatnpua, e mate kore ai, ka meinga and he kafaihe tona rite, ka meinga hei Urimi hei Tumime ki te hunga e noho ana i runga, 111c reira hoki c Avhakaatu ki te hunga e noho ana i reira nga mea katoa o te kingitanga i rare iho i a .ia, ara o nga kingitanga katoa kei aro iho i a ratou; a hei reira -tenei ao riro ai i a te Karaiti." Akoranga me nga Kawenata 130: 8-9.
NA ERU T. KUPA.
"Haere ki te popokorua, e te tangata mangere, mataki- takina iho ona ara, kia nui ai ou whakaaro." Horomona,
"Tama tu, tama ora; tama noho, tama mate kai."
Whakatauki Maori
- "Waihoki ' ko te whakapOno, ki te kahore ana mahi, he •mea mate, koia anake hoki." Hemi.
Okjtopa j;\ 192J
TE KARKKE
335
3
S ^
h
$
Oketopa 27, 1920
TE K ARK RE
Ki Te Karere, tena koe e te manu hari atu i nga whaka- aro o nga marae o te Ika o Maui. Ko nga ingoa enei e whai ake nei o nga kai-kauwhau o Waikato me nga wahi i kara- ngatia ai ratou mo nga marama e rua, mo Noema me Tine- ma.
|
Hoani Ormsby |
\ Matakowhai |
|
|
Tetahi Kaumatua |
j |
|
|
Tamati Honetana |
1 Tahuna |
Wiki tuarua |
|
Raite Te Hira |
||
|
Hamiora Pohutuhutu |
1 Tauhei |
Wiki tuatoru |
|
Totana Arona |
||
|
Te Awe Ponga |
! Taupiri |
Wiki tuatoru |
|
Ngaha Rotana |
||
|
Hongi Rawhiti |
I Kawhia |
Kotahi wiki |
|
Tetahi Kaumatua |
||
|
Henare Maiho |
1 Pukekohe J Puketapu |
Wiki tuarua |
|
Hemi Paki |
||
|
Hokio Tarawhiti |
1 Ngarua- j wahia |
Wiki tuarua |
|
Karena Takoro |
||
|
Tu George Stockman |
\ Okahukura Wiki tuarua |
|
|
Richard Lovett |
J |
|
|
Winiata Kapinga |
1 Aria |
Wiki tuatoru |
|
Te Whetu Warahi |
||
|
Mipi Tangihaere |
1 Piopio |
Wiki tuawha |
|
Wanahi Tangihaere |
||
|
Here Tangihaere |
\ Matiere |
Wiki tuatahi |
|
Tupu Waaka |
||
|
Te Whare Hetaraka |
}• Weraroa |
Wiki tuatahi |
|
Te Whatu Apiti |
1 Waitatuna |
L |
|
Tom Reti |
Wiki tuarua |
Tena ra koutou e oku tuakana aroha, e nga kai-kauwhau i nga tikanga o tenei Rongopai o tatou. I nga marama kua pahure ake nei, i a au e haere ana, kua kite ahau, kua kore etahi o nga kai-kauwhau e kaha ki te whakarite i o ratou ka- rangatanga. E hoa ma, ehara tenei i te ahuatanga pai mo kou- tou ara mo Waikato. Kua oti ra te korero, "Me pehea hoki e rongo ai ki te kahore he kai-kauwhau?" No reira e kite ana tatou he mahi nui whakaharahara ta tatou ara te kauwhau- tanga 6 te Rongopai ki nga iwi e noho ana i roto i te pouri- tanga. Kati, "E moe ana nga niata hii tuna, e ara ana nga mata hii taua." No reira, kia kaha, kia toa, kia manawanui i nga wa e takoto inai nei. Ma te Atua koutou e awhina,
Na to koutou teina na Reheri 1>. Paapiti
TE KARERE Oketopa 2/, tv,26
KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA
Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Aiickt.i '<l. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS
Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather iiu
Book of Mormon, Cloth 26 & 7-6
" V " .Half Leather 9-0
.Leather 10-0 & 15 o
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth ^-o
" " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leaner 9-0 MAO^I BOOKS AND TRACTS
Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 0
" " " , Leather 3-0
Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9
" " ". " Me Nga rlimene, Leather 3 in 1 ll-o
" Pukapuka a Moromona. Cloth 5-0
, Le ith'er 15-0
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Niii, Cloth 5-0
" " " " '*, Leather 13 o
Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer l o SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0
What Jesus Taught .SO
Kindergarten Plan Book. Kesler & Mo. ris 3-6
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 4-0
SONG BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3
" " .Leather 0 0
Deseict Song Books, Cloth 3-0
" , Leather o 0
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WOrtKS
.Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Tahimge 0-3
Vitality of Mormonism 4-O
Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 6-0
Restoration of the Gospel, W/ idtsoe 40
Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-0
Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6
Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9
Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9
Bible Ready Reference 2-0
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, M01 ris 0-0
KO J. H. FINIKIN? TE KAJ TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. II. R.
few
Ko tctahi o nga Ropu Whakatangitangi o te Kareti (M.A.C.), ara te Saxophone Band.
jg "^^^S^^^^MW^^rm^t^g^^ & \ui S02 ffl ;& Xffi T£ Sffi Tu: :• •
44C& KflR&RS"
WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO
Kl TE ETITA
Wharangi.
He Ripoata Whakawhitinga Moana 364
Hui Pariha o Manaia 343
KO NGA RONCO KORERO
Ko nga Hokinga Atu VI Hiona 367
Ko nga Kai-Wh?.kaako o te M.A.C. 368 Ko nga Mahi Whakatangitangi o te Kareti 36I
KO NCA TUHINCA MAI
He Tika Ranei nga Hahi Katoa? 356
Ko te Kari o Erene 363
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 354
MAHI KURA HAPATI
Christmas Program 338
Concert Recitation 344
Intermediate Department 349
Karakia Kirihimete 342
Korero a Ngakau 344
Kindergarten Department 318
Maori Theological 344
Pakeha Theological 347
Postlude 337
Prelude 337
Sacrament Gem 337
!QK3W
WAHANCA 20 WENEREI. NOEMA 24,
filaori Mgriculiural Cc liege
1926. NAMAII
Hastings. H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia marama e te JViihana o Niu Tireni,
Hahi o ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o riga Ra o Muri Nei.
Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita c Te Knrere, M.A.C., Hastings.
Ko te uiu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni (5/-).
KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. file matua utu mo tcu pepa ka vchivhi ai.
j. H. Tinikini, Tumuaki Mihana Mariana K. Ewutana, htita. Tiata Witctuia, Etita Boa Awhina.
Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha
Ko n ga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers).
Wiremu A. Koura
Rapita Tanapu
Eru T. Kupa
MAHI KURA HAP ATI. Prelude.
Adagio legato.
Arr. After Schumann. by Edw. P. Kimball.
^fgpPl^p^^iip^^i
Efg^EJgE*EJ£
SACRAMENT GEM FOR DECEMBER, I92(j "Purify our hearts, our Saviour, Let us go not far astray; That we may be counted worthy Of Thy Spirit, day by day." Postlude.
PPP Hit.
33^ TH KARKRE Notma 24, 1926
Christmas Program, December 26, 1926
A suggestive program lias been prepared and is herewith submitted, to be followed us closely us possible by the Sunday Schools of the Church in New Zealand; the judgment of the Superintendents will guide them in utilizing those itcu . s vtiih c mi best be presented by their respective schools.
We all desire to honor and reverence with the people of the world the wonderful, self-sacrificing life of Jesus the Christ, and our best efforts will be required if we are to show that we appreciate to the full the Love which the Eternal Father manifested in sending His Only Begotten Son to ihe earth, to be the Savior, Redeemer and Prince of men.
Then we do honor to the Prophet of Latter Lays — he to whom so much was entrusted — whose devotion to duty and love for his fellow- men gained for him his faithful brother, martyrs ' graves.
The regular class work will be dispensed with, and it is expected that each Officer und Teacher will exert every energy to make the program a most inspiring and successful one. As soon as notice of the program is received, all Officers and Teachers should arrange and assign the items to the pupils and have them learn thoroughly their assign- ments before the Third Sunday in Lecember.
Remember: "Preparation means progress; practice makes perfect."
The Program submitted by the Mission Superintendent is as follows: —
Organ prelude at 10.25 a.m. sharp. All in seats. 10.30 a.m.: Abstract of Minutes.
1. Congregational Song: No. 221, Les. S.S. — "When Christ was Born in Bethlehem' '; or No. 101, S. of Z. — "Christmas Carol. "
2. Invocation by member of Maori Theological Class.
3. Sacramental Song: No. 12'.), S. of Z. — "Behold the Great Redeemer Die."
4. Administeration of the Sacrament: Prelude, Sacrament, Gem, Post- hide, Administering Emblems, Passing Sacrament. Organ accom- paniment.
5. Concert Recitaion conducted by Intermediate pupil. Book of Mormon, I. Nephi, 11: 13-18-20, 21.
"And I beheld the city of Nazareth: and in the city of Nazareth I beheld a virgin, and she was exceeding fair and white. And (the angel) said unto me, Behold, the virgin whom thou seest is the mother of the Son of God after the manner of the flesh. And I looked and beheld the virgin again, bearing a child in her arms. And the angel said unto me, Behold the Lamb of God, yea. even the Son of the Eternal Father."
Nbema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 339
6. Singing Practice: No. 4, S. of Z. — "A Poor Wayfaring Man of Grief."
7. Recitation by Primary or Kindergarten Pupils (one verse each):
' ' CHRISTMAS. ' ' While shepherds watched their flocks by night,
All seated on the ground, The angel of the Lord came down,
And glory shone around.
"Fear not,"" said he, for mighty dread
Had seized their troubled mind; "Grlad tidings of great joy I bring
To you and all mankind."
" to you in David's town this clay
Is born of David's line, A Savior, who is Christ the Lord,
And this shall be the sign.
"The heavenly babe you there shall find
To human view, displayed. All meanly wrapt in swathing bands,
And in a manger laid. ' '
Thus spake the seraph, and forthwith
Appeared a shining throng Of Angels, and praising God, and thus Addressed their joyful s.>:ig.
"All glory be to God on high,
And to the earth be peace; Good will, henceforth, from heaven to men,
Begin and never cease."
8. Duet or Quartette (selected): No. 28, D.S.S. — "A Stranger Star O'er Bethlehem"; or No. 81, S. of X. — "Far, Far Away, on Judea 's Plains. "
i>. Speech by member of Maori Theological (Mass (10 minutes): "The Mission of Jesua Christ in the World."
Outline: 1. The Effects of the Fall (Transgression) of Adam and Eve. i1. The Atonemenl of Christ.
(a) Overcomes physical death.
(b) Overcomes spiritual death.
10. Song by the Kindergarten Pupils: "Luther's Cradle Hymn."
(No- 248, s. of 'A., and No. 21 I, D.8.S.)
11. An Acrostic, ".lesus Christ," by Intermediate Pupils. (Each Pupil bears a large letter; it the class is small, each pupil could take two
|
\o |
TH KA |
RERL |
Noema 24, i^»2( |
||
|
letters.) |
|||||
|
1. |
J |
is for JUSTICE |
Pupil |
recites Jeremiah 23: 5-6. |
|
|
2. |
E |
» |
EQUALITY |
„ |
Mark 1G: 15-16. |
|
3. |
S |
„ |
SALVATION |
„ |
Acts 4: 10-12. |
|
4. |
u |
» |
UNITY |
„ |
Galatians 3: 26-28. |
|
5. |
s |
» |
SERVICE |
„ |
Matthew 22: 37-40. |
|
6. |
c |
„ |
CHARITY |
„ |
Matthew 5: 43-44. |
|
7. |
H |
„ |
HUMILITY |
„ |
Matthew 23: 11-12. |
|
S. |
R |
>y ) |
, RIGHTEOUSNESS |
„ |
Matthew 5: 19-20. |
|
9. |
I |
„ |
, IMMORTALITY |
„ |
P. of G.P. Moses 1:39 |
|
10. |
S |
» > |
SINCERITY |
>y |
Matthew 15: 7-9. |
|
11. |
T |
„ > |
TRUTH |
„ |
John 8: 31-32. |
All Students then recite in unison the 1st and 2nd Articles of Faith.
12. Song by Choir or Congregation: No. 8 S. of Z. — "An Angel from on High. ' '
13. Speech (10 minutes) by member of Pakeha Theological Class: — "The Teachings of Joseph Smith and Their Effect on Mankind."
Outline: 1. Spiritually; references, D. and C. 6: 13; 18: 22; sec. 20; sec. 7(5.
2. Morally; D. and C. 42: 22-20; 03: 10-18; 88: 07-09-
121.
3. Intellectually; 55: 4; 88: 118: 90: 15; 93: 30; 131: 0.
4. Physically; 88: 124; sec. 89.
5. Serially; 20: 2; 42: 12; 51: 4-5; 60: 13; sec. 132
(marriage): iiei'erciioes given to help speaker in preparing speech.)
14. Recitation by members of Intermediate Class- —
1 « PRAISE TO THE BOY. ' ' (By Bertha A. Kleinman.)
Praise to the Boy who communed with Jehovah,
Millions shall honor his memory to be; To me he is nearer and dearer in childhood,
When he was a boy, young and trusting, like me.
I love to remember him happy and playful,
Joining the games that were honest and square,
Leading and loyal to every companion, Everyone's playmate because he was fair.
I love to remember him kind and obedient, Honoring parents as every boy should,
Thoughtful of others, especially his mother, Blessing his household with service and good.
Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE 341
To me, best of all, is his mother }s own story, Of love and devotion no heart could withstand,
A hero in pain and a scout in affliction,
When a victim he lay to the scourge of the land.
His sister restored, it was Joseph who languished, His boyish form tortured again and again,
Aud watching and helping, 'twas Hyrum who tended (Companions in childhood, twin martyrs as men).
No potion to ease through the grim operation,
No ether to deaden in slumber Js relief; They proffered him wine, but he kindly refused them,
Submitting to all in his matchless belief.
Ho conquered: he lived to commune with Jehovah; To honor his parents in joy and distress;
All praise to the hero — his childhood has taught me Tiiat I. too, have parents to honour and bless. lo. Reading by member of Pakeha Theological Glass: —
"A Tribute, by Josiah Ouincy, Mayor of the City of Boston, U.S.A., 1845-1849."
May 15th, 1844:— "It is by no means improbable that some future text-book for the use of generations yet unborn, will contain a question something like this: What historical Ameri- can of the nineteenth century has exerted the most powerful influence upon the destinies of his countrymen? And it is by no means impossible that the answer to that interrogatory may be thus written : Joseph Smith, the Mormon Prophet. And the reply, absurd as it doubtless seems to most men now living, may be an obvious commonplace to their descendants. History deals in surprises and paradoxes quite as startling as this. The man who established a religion in this age of free debate, who was, and is to-day, accepted by hundreds of thousands as a direct emissary from the Most High — such a rare human being is not to be disposed of by pelting his memory with unsavory epithets. . . . Joseph Smith, claiming to be an inspired teacher, faced adversity such as few men have been called upon to meet, enjoyed a brief season of prosperity such as few men have ever attained, and finally, forty-three days after I saw him, went cheerfully to a martyr's death. When he surrendered his person t<> Governor Ford, in order to prevent the shedding of
"blood, the Prophet had a present iment of what was before him.
"I am going like a lamb to the slaughter," he is reported to have said, "but I am as ealm as a summer's morning. I have u conscience void of offence, and shall die innocent.'' 16. Concluding remarks by Superintendent.
342 TE KARERE Noeina 24, 19^6
17. Congregational Song: Xo. 102, "We Thank Thee, O God, for a
Prophet."
18. Benediction by member of Intermediate Class.
Karakia Kirihimete, 26 o Tihema, 1926
Na te Tumuaki o nga Kura Hapati o te Mihana o Niu Tireni na Wiremu C. Kaa tenei karakia Kirihimete i whaka- rite hei mahinga ma tatou. Ma te) tumuaki o ia kura e tirotiro ko ewhea ranei o enei nama (items) e taea ana e tona Kura Hapati te mahi. I te mea hoki ko etahi o nga kura nunui e ahei ana te mahi i te katoa, ko etahi kia ono kia waru ranei nga nama ka pau, no te itiiti hoki o nga tangata.
E rua nga tino take nunui e whakaritea ana i roto i tenei karakia. Tuatahi he whakanui i te Ra Whanau o te Karaiti, tuarua he whakahonore i te ra whanau a to tatou Poropiti a Hohepa Mete. Kia kaha tatou katoa ki te whakarite i to tena to tena wahi. Kaore he mahi karaihe i whakaritea mo tenei ra, no reira ma ia tangata, wahine, tamariki, e whaka- pau tona kaha kia tino pai ai to tatou karakia Kirihimete. Te taenga atu o nga Karere ma nga kaiwhakaako (apiha) e tuku atu ma tena ma tena o nga mema e whakarite tona wahi i roto i te karakia. A ma nga mema e mahi o ratou wahi kia tino rite i mua atu o te Ratapu Tuatoru. KARAKIA
10:25 a.m. ma te kai-whakatangi-okena e ata whaka- tangitangi te okena kia mutu ai te turituri.
10:30 a.m. ka timata te karakia, ma te hekeretari e panui nga meneti ara te "abstract."
1. Himene No. 101 Pakeha.
2. Whakatuwheratanga ki te inoi, ma tetahi o te Maori Theological.
3. Himene Xo. 129 Pakeha.
4. Ko te Hakarameta.
5. Korero a Ngakau, ma tetahi o nga tamariki rarahi e whakahaere.
1 a I Niwhai 11:13, 18, 20, 21. "A ka kite ahau i te pa o Nahareta; ka kitea hoki e ahau i roto i te pa o Nahareta he puhi, ataahua rawa, Ma tonu ia. Na ka ki mai (te anahera) ki a au, Nana, ko te puhi e kite na koe, ko te whaea ia o te Tama a te Atua, ki to te kikokiko ritenga. A ka titiro atu ahau, ka kite ano i te puhi, e okooko ana i tetahi tamaiti. A ka mea mai te anahera ki a au, Na, te
Noema 24, [926 TK KARERE 343
Reme a te Atua, ae ra, te Tama a te Atua Ora Tonu!"
6. Paraketihi Himene, No. 4 Pakeha.
7. Korero Ngutu-kau, ma nga tamariki pakupaku, "Kiri- himete."
8. Waiata, ma nga tangata tokorua, iokowha ranei.
9. Kauwhau ma tetahi o te Maori Theological (kia 10 meneti te roa).
Putake: Ko te Mihana o te Karaiti i tenei Ao."
1. Ko nga whiunga mo te hara o Arama raua ko Iwi.
2. Ko te whakamarietanga a te Karaiti, ona ahua- tanga
(a) Taea ana e la te mate tinana.
(b) Taea ana ano hoki te mate wairua.
10. Waiata ma nga tamariki pakupaku.
11. Tu-a-rarangi ma nga tamariki rarahi, me nga reta, "J-E-S-U-S C-H-K-l-S-T," me te korero a tena a tena i tana rarangi.
12. Himene ma te koaea ma te katoa ranei, No. 8 Pakeha.
13. Kauwhau (kia 10 meneti te roa) ma tetahi o te Pakeha Theological.
Putake: "Nga Whakaakoranga a Hohepa Mete me nga Hua i Puta mai."
14. Korero Ngutu-kau ma nga tamariki rarahi.
"Whakamoemititia te Tamaiti."
15. He korero pukapuka ma tetahi o te Pakeha Theolo- gical. "He Whakahonoretanga."
16. He kupu whakamutunga ma te Tumuaki kin a Hapati.
17. Himene, 102 Pakeha, 17 Maori.
18. Inoi whakamutunga.
Hui Pariha o Manaia (Waiokura)
He powhiri atu tenei ki te iwi Maori me nga Hunga Ta- pu o nga motu nei. me nga hoa aroha ano hoki, kia haere mai ki te Hui Pariha o Taranaki ka tu nei ki Manaia (Waio- kura) a te 8 me te 9 o nga ra o Hanuere 1927. Ki nga iwi, ki nga hapu, ki nga reo, ki nga huihuinga tangata e noho mai na koutou i nga kainga 00 koutou tipuna, kuia, tena koutou, kia ora, ka huri, kia tae tinana mai koutou ki ta matou Hui Pariha. Mauri a mai nga kupu nunui, kia kai ta hi a tatou taringa i nga nica wairua. Haere mai.
Ran M. Kina, I imnia k i Takiwa Turaki Manuirirangi, fumuaki Peka
544 TIi KARERE Noema 24, iy26
CONCERT RECITATION FOR DECEMBER, 1926.
(Mark 10th Chapter, 14lh and 15th Verses.)
"... Jesus . . . said unto them, Suffer little children
to come unto me, and forbid them not ; for of such is the kingdom
01 God. Verily I say unto you, Whosoever shall not receive the
kingdom of God as a little child, he shall not enter therein."
KORHRO A NGAKAU MO TIHEMA, 1926.
- Kei a Maka 1 o: 1 4.- 1 5. "A, te kitenga o Ihu, ka riri, ka mea ki a ratou, Tukua nga tamariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau, kaua hoki ratou e araia atu: no nga penei hoki te rangatiratanga o te Atua."
MAORI THEOLOGICAL.
Ratapu tuatahi, Tihema 5, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU.
Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- toi-ia nei e Ihu hei mahi ma tatou.
Ko Ihu me nga Tamariki Nonohi
"Na ka kawea ki a ia etahi tamariki nonohi, kia pa ai ia ki a ratou, otira ka riria e nga akonga te hunga nana i kawe. A, te kitenga o Ihu, ka riri, ka mea ki a ratou, Tukua nga tamariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau, kaua hoki ratou e araia atu: no nga penei hoki te rangatiratanga o te Atua. He pono taku e mea nei ki a koutou, Ki te kahore e rite te tango a tetahi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua ki ta te tamaiti nohi- nohi, e kore ia e tomo ki roto. Na okookona ana ratou e ia, whakapakia iho ona ringa ki a ratou, manaakitia ana ratou." Maka 10:13-16.
I whakaaria e Ihu te matauranga nui i roto i tana mahi, me te aroha nui mo te katoa tae atu ki nga tamariki nonohi> kahore nei e mohio ki te hara me te riper.eta. Na tona aroha ki nga tamariki nonohi ka whakaaria e la te kaha o Tona aroha me te matauranga. 1 kite Ia i te tika o nga tamariki nonohi, a me te nui atu o nga mea e taea e la te ako ki nga tamariki i nga kaumatua. He aha te tikanga nui o tenei tau- ira a Ihu e mea ana i a tatou kia mahi? E tika ana me aroha
1920 Tl£ KARF.RK 345
tatou ki a Ihu, te take e aroha ana ano hoki la ki a tatou. Me ako tatou i a tatou tamanki tera a Ihu e aroha ana ki a ratou, a me te hiahia kia tika ratou. Me tarai tatou ki te pei i nga tohetohenga me nga puhaehaetanga me nga whakamana- mana o o tatou ngakau kia rite ai tatou ki nga tamariki no- nohi. We mahi tatou i nga mahi pai he mea e tiaki tika ai tatou a hei mea hoki e aru tika ai a tatou tamariki i a tatou tauira pera ano me ta Ihu hiahiatanga kia aru tatou i a la.
Ko nga Pukapuka a Paora
Na Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rapata Tanapu i whakarite.
He kupu whakamarama ki nga kai-w hakaako me nga mema o tenei karaihe: Kei nga tuhituhinga a Paora o tatou akoranga hou. Timata mai i Teharonika ka haere o tatou rehana a kia pau ra ano nga tuhituhinga a Paora. Ko etahi o nga pukapuka ka pau i roto i te Ratapu kotahi, ko etahi kia wha kia rima pea nga Ratapu ka pau. Ka whakamutua tenei wahanga o o tatou akoranga ki a Timoti. Ka penei te haere o o tatou rehana:
1. I Teharonika 8. Korohe
2. 2 Teharonika 9. Epeha
3. 1 Koriniti lu. Pirimona
4. 2 Koriniti II. Taituha
5. Karatia 12. Hiperu
6. Roma 13- • Timoti
7. Piripai 14. 2 Timoti
Ratapu tuarua, Tihema 12, 1926.
Akoranga 32
Ko te Hani i Teharonika
Te whakaatu: Kei Nga Mahi 17:1-3, kei a I Teharonika hoki.
A. Ko te ahua o te Hahi, ara o te Hunga Tapu.
1. Ko te aroha, te whakapono, te manawanui hoki i roto i nga whakamatautauranga. 1 Teharonika 1:3-6; 3-5-7-
2. Ko te whakatakoto i nga tauira pai ki te hunga 0 wa- ho ma runga i 0 ratou mahi. 1 I eharonika i:/-c); 4-1()> Matiu 5:16.
3. Ko te vvhakamanawanui i a ratou ano ki nga tiikino- tanga, he whakaaro hoki ki a te Karaiti. I Teharonika 2:14-15; Nga Mahi E7:5-9-
B. Te rrahi a Paora n e ona hoa i Teharonika.
34° i E KARERK na 24, 1920
1. O niton kauwhautanga me nga tukinotanga i puta mai. 1 Teharonika 2:2-16; Mahi f 6:22-23.
2. Ko nga tauira i waihotia e ratou.
(a) Ko te ngakau mahaki. 1 Teharonika 2:3-8.
(b) Ko te ngakau whakawhetai. 1 Teharonika 2:13, 19, 20; 3:9-10.
(c) Ko to ratou kaha ki te mahi, kaore ratou i pai kia taimaha tetahi atu tangata i to ratod mahi. I Teha- ronika 2:9; 2 Teharonika 3:8-9.
C. Kia aroha tetahi ki tetahi.
I. Ta Paora whakatupatoranga. 1 Teharonika 3:12-13- Whakaritea ki te Akoranga me nga Kawenata 88:123- 125.
Katapu tuatoru, Tihema 19, 1926.
Akoranga 33
I Waenganiii i ng:i Teharonika
A. I tohutohungia te Hunga Tapu kia rite o ratou meatanga
katoa ki o te Karaitiana tika.
1. Ko te tinana kia ma. I Teharonika 4:3-5; Hakopa 2:28 (Pukapuka a Moromona); Akoranga me nga Ka- wenata 42:22-26.
2. Kaua e tinihanga. i Teharonika 4:6, 12.
3. Kia aroha. 1 Teharonika 4:9; 5:14; 1 Koriniti 13:1-7.
4. Ko te haere tika (order), te kolahiianga o nga whaka- aro, me te kaha tonn ki te mahi. I Teharonika 4:11; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 42:42; 88:124.
5. Kia nui te whakaaro ki nga tangata kei a ratou nei te mana o te Atua. 1 Teharonika 5:12-13.
(6. Whakaritea nga whakahauhau kei a I Teharonika 5:15-25 ki te tekau ma lorn o nga Tikanga o te Wha- kapono.
B. Ko te aranga mai 0 te hunga mate me te haerenga tuarua-
tanga mai o te Karaiti.
1. Ko to tatou Atua kola ano te Atua o te hunga ora, me to te hunga mate hoki. Mahi 10: j. 2 ; Ruka 2<:37-38.
2. Ko te hunga e moe ana i roto i te Karaiti e ara tuatahi mai. I 'Teharonika 4:14; I Koriniti 15:23; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 88: 97-98.
3. Ka toe ko te hunga ora. 1 Teharonika 4:15; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 8^:96; 76:102.
Noema 24, L920 TE KARERE 347
4. Ka heke mai a lhu i te rangi. I Teharonika 4:16; Ma. tiu 16:27; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 88:98.
5. "Ano he tahae i te po." I Teharonika 5:2-10; 2 Pita 3:10; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 45:44.
Ratapu tuawha, Tihema 26, 1926 Karakia Kirihimete, tirohia wharangi 338
-0-
PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS'*
First Sunday, December 5, 1926.
I XI FORM FAST DAY LESSON.
The Example of Jesus: What it Bids us Do. Jesus and the Little Children.
And they brought young children to him, that he should touch them; and his disciples rebuked them that brought them.
"But when Jesus saw it, he wns much displeased, and said them not, for of such is the kingdom of God.
'• Verily, I say onto you, Whosoever shall not receive the kingdom of God as a little child, he shall not enter therein.
"And he took them up in his arms, put his hands upon unto them. Suffer tin1 little children to come unto me and forbid them, ami blessed them." Mark 10:13-16.
Jesus throughout His ministry showed keen Intelligence, greal wisdom and discernment; tie also showed great power of reeling, compassion bolh for the innocent but impotent, and for the repentant sinner; His love and appreciation of little children showed His great power of mental acumen and of righteous emotion. He bolh fell and appreciated the characteristics and
the future possibilities of childhood. What do these character- istics of Jesus bid us do.' In the child, especially, it should call
Cor a responsive love and appreciation. Tins all adults should already have; in the child ii remains to be developed. In the
lower classes emphasis should be placed upon the divine, loving
and lovable personality of Jesus so .-is to call forth In the child
faith in am! love for Him. Tins should lead to desire to ku.iw
oihI io Follow i!is teachings It should lead children also to a .sense of the sae redness of then- own personalities, and faith in
il KARERE Noema 24, 1926
their future possibilities for good. This attitude to
should, v( i-y naturally, be extended to their childhood friends and
ciates.
All of these appreciations of childhood should be manifested by adults, in addition, adults should exercise their superior knowledge and wisdom in the proper protection and guidance 0!' children; at the same lime, in child-like faith and innocence of evil intentions (hey arc to he as little children.
Tips regard for children and emulation of some of their characteristics should not he in words only. Mere lip service here is no better than to honour God with one's lips only. it is real, helpful service of head, heart and hand in the interests of child development in agreement with the Christ ideal that the example of Jesus bids us all to freely give.
Second Sunday, Ikcunibci' 12, 1026
Le son 30. Isaiah a Prophet of liepentance.
Tex1 : l><>ok of ls;iiah.
Objective: To show that God's purpose is to save His people and lie always gives them repeated warnings of His punishments before execut ing them.
Supplementary References: II Beacon Lights of History I Lord) 287. This is a wonderful chapter and should be read by all teachers.
Suggestions on Preparation and, Presentation: Discuss the following points : Isaiah a prophel of Judah as Elijah and Elisha had been 1<> Israel. Judah had turned from worshiping God lo ungodliness, tsiah born 760 B.C. teaches repentance. Had wife and two sons; lived to the age of 84 and according to tradition suffered martyrdom. A man of good breeding, greal dignity, experience and wisdom. His message was to his nation at a time when drunkness was a national vice and immorality rampant. He was a hopeful man and his condemnations of theii
tlways concluded with promises of forgiveness if the people would repent.
1. Compare the people of Israel just before their fall with ihf people of Judah at the time of Isaiah.
2. Name three attributes of character that made Isaiah a : prophet of repentance.
Noema 24, 1926 TE karere 349
Third Sunday, December 19, 1926
Lesson 27. Solomon, as a Man Leaving off Serving God.
Text: 1 Kings 7: 11. — Book of Ecclesiastes.
Objective: To show that as .Solomon left off serving God ho lost his power and his self-respect.
He completed Ins temple and dedicated it; His prayer, 1 Kings, 8; His biess.ng on his people; both acts approved by the Lord; his downfall, 1 Kings 11. Following this, he wrote Ecclesiastes. Contrast his attitude and spirit as therein expressed with his attitude as expressed in his Proverbs.
Note: Through an error, the lesson, "Solomon, as a Man Leaving Oil' .Serving God, ,; was omitted from the schedule published. To be in order it should be numbered '11, the other lessons following in regular sequence: — Lesson 28, '•'The Division of the Kingdom"; Lesson 29, "Elijah"; Lesson oO, ' ' Elisha ' ' ; Lesson 31, "Isaiah, a Prophet of Kepentanee. ' '
Questions for Teachers.
1. Point out two lessons to be had from Solomon's life.
2. Can you analyze the kind of life a man leads by his outward action/ If so, explain how.
Fourth Sunday, December 26, 1926. Christmas Program, see page 338.
INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT
THE HOOK OF MORMON"
I irst Sunday, December 5, 1920
FAST DAY LESSON.
Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 317
Second Sunday, December 12, 1926.
Lesson 30. Uhrisl Minister** unto the Nephites,
Texl .11! Ncphi 1 Ith to L4tb chapters.
Objective: T<> teach the reality of the resurrection of Jesus Christ. I Note particular!} Ill Nephi 1 1 .'' I I
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: l. Genera] assignraenl of all the texl to lie read by <
member of the class.
355 l l KARERE i 192)
2. Special assignment ■
a. The Saviour appears. HI Nephi 11:1-17.
1>. Power given to baptise. MI Nephi 11:18-41..
c. The Holy Ghost promised. Ill Nephi L2:l, _..
(1. The Beatitudes. Ill Nephi 12:3-12.
The salt, the light, and the Law. HI Nephi L3-20.
I Thy brother and thee. Ill Nephi 12:21-26; 38-48.
g. Purity commanded. Ill Nephi 12:27-37,
h Prayer, alms, fasting, and treasures. Ill Nephi 13:1-24.
i. Instructions to Twelve. Ill Nephi 13:25-34
j. Instruction on many things. Ill Nephi, chapter 14.
Note: The nine pans given above for special assignment should be eareiully assigned to those who would be able to memorise most of them. Thus each part could easily be given ir. four minutes or less.
Questions for Teachers.
1 Briefly state why yen think the Xephite knew "of u orety" thai Jesus was the Christ.
'.!. Whai added evidence is given in this lesson that baptism is ;> necessary ordinance J
.'). Mention some teaching made clearer to our under- standing by reading [Tl Nephi 12th !o 14th chapters.
Third Sunday, December 19. 19'Ju.
Lesson 31. Jesus Continues His Minis Lrations. Trxt: III. Nephi, 15th to 18th chapters.
Objective: To teach that the Savior imparts many blessings to those w lio have fail h in Him.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation; 1. special assignments t<> pupils:
(a) The Law of Moses. 111. Nephi 15: i-10. Other sheep. 15: 1 1-24; 16: 1-5. Blessings on the Gentiles. 16: 6-20.
(.1) The sick healed. 17: L-10.
H') Blessing the children. 17: 1 1-25. (t) The Sacrament, 18: 1-13.
a I 'raver. 1S: U-23.
b - Parting instructions. 18: l'. Passages to Mark and Memorize: III. Nephi. 15: I): 18: 15-19. Encourage the pupils t-> whom special assignments are made to orize their parts.
Noeina 24, lyiG TE KARKRE 351
Questions for Teachers.
.1. Review briefly the teachings of the Savior in this lesson in regard to the lost sheep of the house of Israel, the Gentiles and the Sac rain cut.
'1. Compare the story told in Matthew 19: 13-15 with that in III. Xephi 7: 11-25.
Fourth Sunday, December 29, 1926 Christmas Program, see page 338.
KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT
I irst Sunday, December 5, 1926. Uniform Fast Day Lesson.
Topic: The Blessing of Little Children. Time: Just after Christ foretold His death. Hace : On the coasts of Judea.
General Reference: Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Lesson 4o ; Jesus the Christ, pages 475-476.
Objective: All who are honest and pure in heart shall i( urn to the presence of their Father. i. Jesus was preaching on the coast of Judea. ! Mothers bring their children to be blessed. a. The disciples want to scud them away. }). Jesus rebukes the disciples and asks them to bring the children to Him. ( 1 ) He told them the kingdom of God was composed
of children. (2) Those who could no1 receive the kingdom of God as a Little child should not outer in. 2. The children are brouphl to Jesus.
;i. JeHUS lakes t liom and places His hands on iheir heads h. They go away rejnieiiw
! I. Blessings received to day
1 Blessed and named when babies.
2. Blessed when ill.
3. Blessed when sent on missions,
4. Every one should live to enjoy the blessings given him
5. Blessinirs come Prom God.
te KARERh Noema 24, 1926
Rest Exercise: Teach and dramatise the song, "Clouds of Grey, " Patty Hill's Song Book.. 1 Have every child participate in the dramatisation.)
Suggestive Song: "Nature's Good-night" Patty Hill.
Gem :
'"When I run aboul all day When I kneel at night to pray,
God sees.
Need I ever know a fear ! Might and day my Father's near —
God sees."
— May Mapes Dodge. Second Sunday, December 12, 1926
Topic: A missionary call and experience.
Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten"; also "My
First Mission,"' George (±. Cannon.
Time: When Elder Cannon was on a mission.
Place: in the mission field of Hawaii.
Objective: Sacrifice through love for the Gospel brings spiritual blessings.
jestions : Tell the children of the experiences Elder Cannon had, and how he sought the Lord for help on every occasion. How and why he was blessed. We never need to be afraid if we obey the teachings of our Heavenly Father and do what we know is right.
"Seek ye first the kingdom of Heaven and all else will be added." Oh. if ye could only realise the importance and full meaning of that statement There would be less dishonesty and more righteousness in the world to-day. There is nothing on 1 his earth that can give us the joy and happiness like the Spirit ot our Heavenly Father. Why. not, then, seek for that which gives us the greatest joy and happiness on this earth and fits us for the life to come?
Any missionary experience where faith, faithfulness, and I rayerfulness has saved, or helped, may be used to illustrate the thought desired to he put over.
Rest Kxereise: Sing and dramatise "Clouds of Grey."
Review previous songs learned during the month or teach
Noema 24, 1920 TK karere 353
and sing iast verse of "Jesus Wants Me for a Sunbeam,' ' page 211, D.S.S. Songs. Gem :
"Kemember your prayers, little children, Both morning and evening each day, The Lord is e'er ready to hear you He loves all His children to pray.
Third Sunday, December 19, 1926
Topic: Why I should use all my time profitably.
Text : Titus 3; James 1 and 2 chapters; Hebrew: 5.
Objective: To teach that if we desire eternal life we must work tor it.
Suggestions: Tell the story of ''How Bessie Became a Wonderful Woman," and apply to the life of the Kindergarten children.. 1. Bessie as a child in the home.
1. tier parents were very poor.
a. Bessie helped in the home when only four and five years old.
1 1 ) Washed, wiped and put away dishes.
(2) Dusted.
(3) Cared for the baby.
b. Bessie at play.
1 1 ) Took good care of her doll.
(2) Kepi her playhouse clean ami tidy.
(3) Took care of her toys and put them away when through playing.
e. Obedient to parents.
When mother or lather called she put her doll down and went cheerfully to help. [I. When Bessie grew up.
1. Bessie had Learned to work and to do her work well by doiiiLi things the right way when a child.
2. Everybody wanted Bessie t<» help them.
:; Besssie was so cheerful and happy, always willing tu
help. 1. Bessie Learned, "Whatever you do. do with your might.
for 'Inn'-, dune by halves, are never done right " she
354 rn KARKKE Noema 24
also learned thai when you have learned to do things and do them right everybody wants you to help them. Exercise: Le1 the children show you how they would put their toys away, their clothes at night, the dishes, etc., let- ting the teacher suggest only when they need some help in putting things jusl the way they ought to be.
Fourth Sunday, December 26, I92<>
Christmas Program, see page 338.
o
MAUI HUI ATAWHAI.
KORA s. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai.
He Whakaaturanga ki nga Hui Atawhai
Na Toke Watene i whakamaori.
I te mea ka tae tureiti mai te Pukapuka Hui Atawhai ara magazine mo etahi marama ka whakaaro au me whakarere kotahi marama ano ki muri 0 te magazine. He tureiti raw a te taenga mai i tenei marama kia whakamaoritia mo Te Ka- rere. No reira e hiahia ana an ki nga teina me nga tuakana e whakahaere arra i te Pukapuka Hui Atawhai, kia tango i tenei akoranga i roto nei i Te Karere, mo runga i te lnoi) kia whakahaere i tenei, a kia ata waihotia te mea i rot) i te pukapuka (magazine) mo Hanuere.
Ko te take o tenei kia kotahi katoa ai tatou e whakahaere tahi ana i roto i te akoranga kotahi ia marama.
AKORANGA MO TIHEMA KO TE INOI
A. He aha te inoi?
Ko te inoi te tino hiahia 0 te ngakau I whakapuakina, i whakapuakina koretia ranei
He tohn ra no te ahi huna K wiri.ra i roto i te uma.
Ko te inoi te ahuatanga ngawari atu o nga whai kupu E taea ana e te n'gutu tamariki te whakamatau.
Te inoi te rongo nui e tae Ki te Kingi i runga ra.
He mea hoki te inoi e ahei ai te tangata ki te korerorero
Noema 24, [926 TE KARERE 355
tahi me te Atua.
B. Te wa hei inoitanga.
1. I te po i te ata o nga ra katoa.
(a) He tono atu mo nga manaakitanga e hiahiatia ana.
(b) He tuku whakawhetai atu mo nga manaaki- tanga kua liro mai.
2. I te wa o te raruraru, o te rawakoretanga ranei.
(a) "Ki te hapa tetahi o koutou i te matauranga me inoi ia ki te Atua e homai nui nei ki te katoa, kahore hoki ana tawai mai, a ka hoatu ki a ia. Otira me inoi wha- kapono ia, kaua e ruarua. le tangata ruarua hoki, tona rite kei te ngaru o te moana e puhia ana e te hau, e akina ana." Hemi 1:5-6.
(b) "Ki te turorotia letahi i roto i a koutou, me karanga e ia nga kaumatua o te hahi. a ma ratou e inoi ki runga ki a ia, me te whakawahi ano i a ia ki te hinu i runga i te ingoa o te Ariki. A e ora te turoro i te inoi whakapono, ma te Ariki ano ia e whakaaia ake, a ki te mea kua mahi hara ia, ka miuua tona hara." Hemi 5:14-15.
(c) He tokomaha nga Hunga Tapu kua whiwhi ki nga whaaturanga whakamiharo i te Ariki, he whakautu ki nga inoi, me nga whakawahinga ki nga turoro.
3. 1 mua 0 te paanga ki te kai.
(a) Ko te whakawhetai ki te Atua mo taua mea, me te tono atu ki a la kia whakapaingia hei painga ki 0 tatou tinana.
4. I te timatanga me te whakamutunga 0 nga kara- kiatanga.
(a) Mo Tona Wairua, v arahi ai i nga mea katoa e k ore rot i a ana e mahia ana. me te whakarite i nga hine- ngaro mo te hopu i te pono.
(hi Hei mea hoki e tiakina ai tatou ina hoki atu
tatou ki o tatou kainga i te mutunga 0 nga karakia. ('. Mr pehea te alma o te inoi?
1. "Me inoi whakapono ia." Hemi 1:6.
2. Kua homai te Inoi a te Ariki hei tauira 1 roto i te ngawaritanga me te pono.
Kaua e malia nga kupu ki mua i te Atua 111,1 inoi, he mea kia rangona r nga tangata. Matin 6:5-14,
3. Kia iitc te inoi ki ta te Karaiti i a i roto 1 te kail Q
Kehemane. "Kaua e waiho i taku i pai a1, engari i tau."
Matin 26:39.
356 i e karere Noema 24. [9^6
Korerotia nga take e whai ake nei.
Te inoi a tiohepa Mete me tana kitenga tuatahi.
Me heme a kei te tika ta Matin i te 6:8. He aha te take 0
te inoi?
Nga painga e puta ake ana ma roto i te whakarite i nga inoi a te whanan (family).
Te rereketanga i waenganui i te inoi whakatuwhera, a whakamutunga hoki.
Homai etahi ahuatanga i puta he whakautu ki te inoi.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO.
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA.
Nga Mahi ma nga Matua Hunga Tafu
1. Ko te ako i a ratou tamariki i roto i te huarahi e haere ai ratou. Ako. me nga Kawe. 68:25.
2. Ko te whakaako-a-tanira, a kaua ma roto i te huhua korero.
(a) "Kia mahara ki te Ra Hapati kia whakatapua. " Ako. me nga Kawe. 68:29.
(b) Ko te haere ki nga karakiatanga.
(c) Ko te utu whakatekau me te whakaako i nga tamariki ki taua tikanga.
(d) Ko te pupuri i te Kupu 0 te Matanranga.
(e) Ko te ako i a ratou ki te inoi i ma roto i te inoi a te whanan (family) me te tono atu i a ratou kia whai mahi tahi i roto.
He Tika Ranei nga Hahi Katoa ?
E tika ana ranei nga hahi katoa. ara no te Atua katoa ranei ratou? Laku whakautu puta noa ki nga pito e wha o te ao. kahore i te tika te katoa, ara kotahi ano te mea tika i roto i nga haahi katoa i runga i te mata o te whenua, ko te Hahi o Jhu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu 0 nga Ra o Mini Nei. Koia te hahi e kiia nei e te ao he Moromona. E koa ana ahau mokn i whakamohiotia e te Wairua o te Atna i te tan 1900 koia nei te hahi tika
Kei roto i tenei hahi he apotoro, he poropiti, he kai- whakaako, he merekara, he whakaora turoro, he hoa mahi, he kai-whakahaere tikanga. Tirohia I Koiiniti 12:28, "Kua whakanohoia ano e te Atua etahi i roto i te hahi; nga apoto-
Noema 24. lojj TE KARERE
lj k[ nn.a; ti.arua ko nga poicpiti; tuatoru ko nga kaiwhaka- akj, muij iho ko nga meiekara; me i reira ko nga mana wha- kaoAa ko r.ga hoa mahi, ko nga kai-whakahaeie tikanga, ko nga *eo ke." Kei ioto i te Hahi o te iwi Moromona enei apiha o te hahi peia i te wa i r.^a ai otcio i rung a i te w henua, i te taa jj A.D. ki te tan too A.D.
Ke: ioto i ienei hahi te mana o Meiekihereke me te mana
0 te 1 cliunjiatanga o Aror.a. Ko er.ei mana nunui e kore e riro nca i te tangata, engan ka riio i te tangata e wkakaritea e te Ati a kia riro i a ia. lirohia hiperu 5:4, '*E koie ano hoki tetahi e tan^c i tei ei honor e ki a ia ano, engari te ta- ngata e kaian^atia e te Atia, e peratia ai a me Aiona." He mea ka/ar.ga a Aiuna ma roto i a Mohi.
1 te is'2o ka inbi ake a Hohepa Mete ki te Atua ko tehea te Laahi tika lei urunga atu mona. Te whakautu ki a ia kaua ei.ru atu ki tetahi o ratou no te mea ko a ratou whaka- akoranga he w hakahaunga ia te tangata. Ko te ahua o te kaiak'a kei a iatou ko tor.a kaha ia whakakahoretia iho. I tenei wa o te k >re kaha o nga karakia, me te taenga ki nga wa o nga kingitanga kotahi tekau i tae ai ki o ratou ra e tu ai. ka Luiihia atu ki a Hohei a Mete te whakahaere i te Ro- ngopai o Ihu Karaiti me te hanga ake i te Kingitanga o te Karaiti. I irohia Raniera 2:44, "N'a i nga ia o enei kingi, ka whakaturla e te Atua o te rangi he kingitanga e kore e
1 ; a,u Na e kcie le ki r gitanga e waiho mo tetahi atu iwi; engari ko tera hei wahi, hei whakamoti i enei kingitanga katoa, ko ia ano ka tu tonu a ake ake."
I hoatu e te Atua he v\ hi kakaunj. a kia w 1 akatuiia te Hahi 0 lhu Kaiaiti, kia hanga ake te Kingitanga i korerotia nei e Raniera, ki a Hohepa Mete i te 1830. 1 te wa 14 ona tau i tutuki ta Hakaraia poropiti i mea ai (2:4). "Xa ka ki mai teva ki a ia. Ke.e ..tu, ka korero atu ki te tainaiti nei, mea atu. Ka nohoia a Hiruharama ka rite ki nga pa taiepa- kore, i te tini o te tangata, o nura kararehe 1 ioto."
Ka homai ki a Hohepa Mete te mana mo te kauvshau i te Rongopai pono. Kei nga Whakakitenga 14:6, "A i kite ano ahau i tetahi . 01 anahera e rere ana i *aenganui <> te rangi, kei a ia te rongopai mau tonu hei kauwhau mana ki te hunga
e noho ana i te whenu;i. ki nga iwi katoa. ki nga hapu. ki
nga reo, ki nga huihuinga tangata."
Kei liea te hahi i rite ki tenei te rite ki te hahi 1 nga ra >» nga apol >ro? Kei l ea te hahi kua ara ake he poropiti i muri mai i ii".. 1 apol no hei whakatutuki i te kupu .1 Paora i a
fE KARERE Noema 24. 1^20
ma 12:6, "Na ka rere ke nei nga mea i homai ki a tatou, he
mea e rile ana ki te aroha noa i homai ki a tatou, ki te mea he mahi poropiti, kia rite ki nga tikanga 0 te whakapono," penei me te Hahi Moromona e haere ana i te akoranga 0 te Paipera? Kei hea atu o te ao he iwi i tukinotia. i peia i o ratou pa nui, a i patupatua mo to ratou whakapono ki to ratou Atua, penei i nga Moromona? Kei hea te iwi i peneitia e te Atua i roto i nga ra o muri nei, i arahina ki te waahi hei okiokinga mo ratou, me te hanga i to ratou pa tino ataahua i te ao katoa, penei i te arahinga mai 0 te Hunga Tapu e te Atua i Winita Koata i te 1847, i homai nei e la (e te Atua) ki a Pirikamu Iaanga, te kai-rrataki i tenei haerenga, mo nga maero 1000? Kei hea te iwi e hanga temepara ki runga ki te tihi o nga maunga penei i te Hunga Tapu kua hanga i tetahi ki taua pa hou a te Pa Tote kei Amerika penei i te whaka- aturanga a Mika 4:1-2. "Na tenei ake kei nga ra whaki.mutu- nga ka whakapumautia te maunga i to Ihowa whare ki te till i o nga maunga, ka whakanekehia ake ano ki runga i nga pukepuke, a ka rere nga iwi ki rei±a. Ka haere hoki nga iwi maha, ka mea, haere mai, tatou ka haeie ki runga ki te mau- nga o Ihowa. ki te whare 0 te Atua o Hakopa, a mana tatou e whakaako ki ana ara, ka haere hoki tatou i ana huarahi; no te mea ka puta mai te ture i Hiona. me te kupu a Ihowa i Hiruharama." Koia tonu tenei ko te ako a te Moromona ko te ako i nga whakahaunga kua korerotia e te poropiti.
Kei hea atu te iwi kua hanga i te temepara pera i te mea kua ki ake ra i tae nga tau i hanga ai ki te 40 tau ka oti, hei jriiri i nga tupuna kua matemate i nuia atu o te taenga mai o te Rongopai hei whakarite i ta Paora (1 Koriniti 15.291. "Pe- nei ka aha te hunga e iriiria ana hei whakakapi mo te hunga mate, ki te kore rawa te hunga mate e ara? he aha hoki ratou ka iriiria ai hei whakakapi mo te hunga mate?"
Kei hea te iwi penei i nga hunga Moromona kua hanga tapenakara, pera i nga ra i a Mohi e arahi ana i a Iharaira? Kua oti nei i a ratou te hanga tetahi, koia tetahi 0 nga tape- nakara nui kei te ao katoa, kua hanga e te iwi o te Atua hei koropikotanga atu ki a la. Ko te roa o te whare e 250 putu, ko te whanui 15c putu, e 80 putu te teitei, e 44 nga pou ko- liatu hei pupuri ake i te aata o te tuanui, e 5 nga tau i hanga ai ka oti. Ko te okena kei roto, koia tetahi o nga okena nui i te ao katoa. ko te whanui e 60 putu, ko te hohonu e 33 putu, e 48 putu te teitei. e 8000 nga paipa, e 270 nga stops. Ko te uira (electricity) hei whakatangi. Ko te hau hei pupuhi i nga
Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE 359
paipa he mea huri e nga mihini (engines) e wha, e 32 hoiho te kaha o te puhipuhi hau. 1 1 tau te whakahoutanga o te okena e kore e he mo nga tau maha kei te haere mai. Ko te maha o nga kai-waiata kei te taha o te okena o ratou noho- anga e 400 e waiata ana no te kore utu. Ko te hunga e uru ana ki loto i te tapenakara 10,000 (tekaii mano).
Kua oti enei mea i te iwi e mahi pono ana ki to ratou Atua. Kua rite te kupu a te Poropiti Ehekiere (37:26-27), "Ka whakaritea ano e ahau he kawenata mo te rongo mau ki a ratou; hei kawenata mau tonu tena ki a ratou, ka whaka- nohoia ano ratou e ahau, ka whakanuia, ka whakaturia ano e ahau toku wahi tapu ki waenganui i a ratou a ake ake. Na ki a ratou toku tapenakara: a ko ahau he Atua mo ratou, ko ratou ano hei iwi maku."
Kei hea atu te iwi penei i nga kai-kauwhau o te Hunga Tapu? Kua whakarerea atu o ratou whare papai me nga maara, me nga whaea, tuahine, wahine, tamariki, me a ratou mahi e puta ai nga moni tinitini ki a ratou. Ko te take ko ratou he pononga pono na te Karaiti. Matiu 19:29, "A ki te mea kua mahue i tetahi he whare, he teina, he tuahine ranei, he papa, he whaea, he wahine, he tamariki, he maara, he whakaaro hoki nona ki toku ingoa, ka tataki rau nga mea e riro i a ia, a e whiwhi ano ia ki te ora tonu." Ko enei kai- kauwhau, 8 mano maero te tawhiti mai i o ratou kainga kua mahuetia atu ki muri. Ko ratou nga kaumatua Moromona no Uta, ara no Amerika. E rua mano ratou kei te ao katoa e kauwhau ana i te Rongopai i runga i te utu kore. Pera i a Paora Apotoro (I Koriniti 9:18).
"Na, he aha koia te utu rnoku? ara ka meinga e ahau kia kore e utua te rongopai o te Karaiti, ina kauwhautia e ahau; kei he i ahau nga tikanga o te rongopai kua tukua ki ahau."
! le pera ano t;i te Ariki kupu * 1 akaari mo nga kai-kau- whau (Matiu 10:7-8), "Me kauwhau haere hoki, me ki. Kua tata te rangatiratanga o te rangi. Whakaorangia nga turo- ro, whakamakia nga repera, wl akaarahia nga tupapaku, peia nga rewera; ka riro noa nei i .1 koutou, me hoatu noa e koutou." E hoa ma, ko te mahi kauwhau i te Rongopai te mea e kii;i atu nei me kauwhau noa atu, kaua e utu, a 1 riro noa atu hoki i a ratou te mana nui mo te ra mai i runga 1 te utu kore. Eng. ri kua rite i te Atua he utu tino nui ki nga kai-kauwhau, ko te whiwhi ki te kororia me te haringa nui i roto i Tona Kingitanga mo nga tau kotahi mano.
rE karere Noema 24, iqjs
K<> te tino putake nui i taea ai enei mahi kei roto i nga Hunga Tapu te Aroha, te i umanako, te VVhakapono. Ko
enei ahua e toru hore kau i te hunga hore ano i whanau hou. Ma te whakapono anake ki te Rongopai 0 Ihu Karaiti, me te whakarite i nga tikanga, katahi ano ka taea.
E te Hunga Tapu, e nga tuakana, e nga tuahioe, tena koutou. Tenei ahau to koutou pononga i roto i tenei Rongo- pai o to tatou Ariki, i te tuhi nei ki Te Karere hei mea e tino neke ake ai a tatou mahi pono i roto i 0 tatou karangatanga i runga i te mea kua kite nui tatou i te tino tika 0 tenei take ara 0 to tatou whakapono. Koia te mea tino kaha, tino nui, i roto i te ao katoa, lie mahi na to tatou Matua i te rangi.
Me whakamarama atu e ahau mo tenei wahi o to tatou whakapono ara o nga tikanga 1 te rarangi 10, "E whakapono ana matou ki te huihuinga katoatanga 0 Iharaira, ki te wha- kahokinga mai ano hoki o nga hapu kotahi tekau, ki te hanganga o Hiona ki tunga ki tenei tuawhenua (ki Amerika) ki te kingitanga tangatatanga o te Karaiti ki te whenua, ki te rironga hoki i a ia 0 tona kororia pararaiha." E te Hunga Tapu, e rua nga wahi whakamiharo kei roto i tenei wahi o to tatou whakapono. He mea tino nui rawa tera e kite nga iwi katoa 0 te ao. Ko enei mea e rua kei roto tonu i enei wa, no reira, e te Hunga Tapu, kia noho reri i nga wa katoa. Tua- tahi, ko to tatou kohinga. Ki te tae mai te kupu a te Tumu- aki Tuatahi o te Hahi kia kohikohia atu kia haere tena iwi, tena iwi o te Hunga Tapu i nga wahi o te ao, me 0 ratou hepara ara me nga kaumatua, kaua e ki me pehea e tae ai te haere. E hoa ma, he tino pakeke ke atu te tae atu i konei i a an nei ki Kaikohe i to tatou tae ki Hiona a te wa e poto ai te kohikohi aua hapu kua kiia ake ra, ko reira hanga ai te pa nui e korerotia ra e Etere (1 j:«), "No reira ka hanga te toenga o te whare o Hakopa ki runga ki tenei whenua; a ka waiho ia hei whenua tupu mo ratou; ka hanga hoki e ratou he pa tapu ki te Ariki ka pera n.e te Hiiuharama onamata; a ka- hore ratou e whakapoauautia ano, kia tae mai ra ano te nm- tunga. e pah em o ai te whenua." A te wa e hanga ai taua pa ka heke iho i te rangi te pa i kitea ra e Hoani Whakakitenga (21:2), ara te pa o Enoka i tangohia atu ra e te Atua ki te rangi i nga ra i a Enoka. Ka whakahokia mai taua pa, ka hanga tahitia kia kotahi raua ko te pa kua tuhia ake ra. A- koranga me nga Kawenata 84:100,
"Kua whakaputa mai te Ariki i Hiona i runga.
Kua whakaputa mai te Ariki i Hiona i raro."
Noema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 361
64:41, "No te mea, nana ka mea atu nei ahau ki a koutou, ka tupu kaha te whenua o Hiona, a ka tau te kororia o te Ariki ki runga ki a ia."
64:43, "A ka puta mai te ra e tuwiri ana nga iwi katoa o te ao, mona te take, a ka wehi mo aua mea nanakia kua whakapuakina e te Ariki."
I mohio a Aperahama ki tenei pa, koia te putake o tona noho manene. Hiperu 1 1 : 10, "I tatari hoki ia ki te pa whai turanga, ko te Atua nei te kaihanga, te kaimahi."
Koia nei to tatou tumanako e ki mai ra 2 Pita 3:13, "Heoi kei te tumanako tatou ki nga rangi hou, ki te whenua hou, ki tana i whakaari mai ai, kei reira te tika e noho ana."
Ka hanga i mua tata o te taenga mai o te Ariki. Kia oti ka whakatapua te whenua ka whakahoutia. Whakakitenga 21:1, "L kite ano ahau i te rangi hou, i te whenua hou: kua pahemo hoki te rangi tuatahi, me te whenua tuatahi; a ka- hore atu he moana."
E te Hunga Tapu koia nei te whakamarama ki te ao katoa o te pono kotahi ano hahi o te Atua: ko te Hahi Mo- romona. Kei a ratou te matauranga ki nga mahi a te Atua, me to ratou i rongo hei mahi i Ana mahi nunui. Kei nga hahi katoa oti tenei matauranga Kore rawa atu, ko to ratou matauranga no te tangata.
E te Hunga Tapu tcna koutou, na to koutou teina, tu- ngane i roto i te mahi pai a te Atua, Mangonui NGAPUH1 RENATA
Ko nga Mahi Whakatangitangi o te Kareti
Kei te tupu tonu te mahi whakatangitangi i te Kareti (M.A.C.). Kua hokona mai etahi pu whakatangitangi hou i Amerika, ara he saxophone, he koronete, he baritone, me etahi atu. Ka nui hoki te hihiko O nga tamariki kura ki te ako i roto i nga ropu whakatangitangi, ropu waiata, 1 whaka-
turia nei hei ako i a ratou ki te waiata me te purei. Na to
ratou kai-whakaako na Erata Tipene 1 whakatu he concert me te kanikani ki te hooro i Hehitingi i te 22 0 nga ra 0 He- petema i hori ake nei. Ka nui te whakamihi 0 nga tangata i tae. Ka nui hoki nga moni i riro mai i a ratou hei whaka- hou i 0 ratou pu (instruments).
Te wliak.il.au a te rumuaki Mihana, kia kaha ia tamaiti ia tamaiti tae atu hoki ki 0 ratou matua ki te whakawhaiti hereni, hei utu mo 0 ratou kura 1 tenei tau e tu mai nei. No te
362
TE KARERE ma 24. ll,20
mea kahore e pai kia whakctaumaha ano nga tamaiiki i te Kareti, i to ratou ko:e mor.i.
Ko te M.A C. Band, nga kai-whakahaere ko Hori Henihana ran a ko Huriana Tipene
Ko te Saxophone Band, kai-whakahaere ko Tipene
Noema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 363
Ko te Kari o Erene
Ki Te Karere, tena koe. Tenei ano etahi kupu hei pa- nuitanga mau ki nga wahi e tae ai koe.
Kaati, i runga i te whakaaturanga a te Pakeha mo te Kari o Erene i Ahia (ara Asia), no reira ka hiahia ahau ki te whakaatu i te whakaaro o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. E ki ana ratou kna oti te whakaatu ki to ratou Poropiti ki a Hohepa Mete te whenua i tu ai taua kari. Otira me waiho marire tena no te mea ka taea e te ao te mea he teka te whakaaturanga ki a Hohepa Mete, engari me whakatepe mc.i e ahau i te timatanga.
Ka hanga e te Atua te whenua me nga mea katoa, nga kaiarehe me era atu. Katahi hoki ka hanga te tangata hei rangatira mo aua mea. Ka hanga te Kari 0 Erene. Ka oti enei mea katoa ka meinga nga mea kia hua kia tini, kia kapi te ao. Ka timata te tupu o nga kararehe o nga tangata i runga i te wahi kei reira ra te kari. Tae noa mai ki a Noa kahore ano he whakaaturanga kua haere nga tangata i tua atu i te wahi kei reira te kari. Engari no tenei wa tonu ka whakahaua e te Atua kia hanga he kaipuke e Noa no te mea ka whakangaromia te ao me nga mea katoa ki te waipuke. Ka oti te kaipuke ka utair.a takirua o ia ahua o nga mea o te whenua me nga tangata tokowaru ki runga. Ka mutu ka tukua iho te ua tino kaha a maanu ana te kaipuke a puhia ana hoki e te hau.
Na kua mohio tatou kua maanu i runga i te whenua i te kari nei, ara ka mahue iho te whenua 0 te Kari 0 Erene, a u ana ki tetahi atu whenua. Ko te whenua i u ai te kaipuke e kiia ana ko Ioropi (Europe) ina hoki koia anake tera ko te whenua i ki i te tangata, a i reira ka marara haere ki nga tini motu o te ao nei. Na kua mohio tatou ehara i Ahia te whenua i reira te Kari 0 Erene no te mea ko Ahia kei roto 0 te rohe 0 luropi. A mehemea hoki i reira te kaipuke e maanu ana e kore e ahei kia tau iho ano ki taua wahi no te hum c ki ana i maanu a i puhia hoki e te hau.
No reira ka whakaponohia e tc Hunga Tapu te whaka- aturanga a to ratou poropiti e: i An erika te Kari o Erene. Kati nei ano te whakamarama, kia ora te Etita, ma te
Atua koe e tautoko. Heoi aim na to teiiia.
Paepae VV, Whehira
364
TE KARKRK
Noema 24, 1920
-;;-
He Ripoata Whakawhitinga Moana
Ki Te Karere, tena koe. Mahau e panui nga korero o ta maua haere me a maua tamariki e toru, ko Ra- hera, ko Arihi, ko Manahi Nitama.
Ki te Iwi Maori: E nga morehu tena koutou e noho mai nei i rung a i nga moutere o te moana, ara i ru- nga i Aotearoa me te Waipounamu. Tenei ahau kei te whenua o te kupu whakaari e tuhi atu ana i taku rete. Na te aroha me nga whakaaro me Nireaha Paewai nga mahara, i tuhi atu ai enei ko- rero hei korero ma koutou.
Tetahi, kua kite ahau i te man 0 te aroha 0 nga kauma- tua kua hokihoki mai i Niu Tireni. Kei a ratou 0 koutou whakaahua me a koutou taputapu aroha.
No te rua tekau ma iwa o Hurae i wehe mai ai maua me a maua tamariki i Tahoraiti i te peka 0 Tamaki. 1 te torn o nga ra o Akuhata ka wehe mai matou i Niu Tireni i runga i te Aorangi. E torn nga ra ka tae matou ki YYhiti (Fiji). E ono nga haora e haereere ana i te taone 0 Suva ka hoki ma- tou ki runga tima. 1 te ono i te ahiahi ka mahue i a matou a Whiti. I te pai te moana tae noa matou ki Hawaiki, e whitu nga ra e haere ana ka tae matou. Ka u matou ki te whenua, ka tae mai te tama a Wiremu Karaka 0 Ngatiporoua me tona kotiro Hawaiki me nga matua o te kotiro. Ka mutu te ruru ka mauria matou ki to ratou kainga. Te hahi o te iwi nei ko te pekanga o te hahi Moromona, te ingoa ko te "Re- organized Church" or "Josephite." Te taenga ki te kainga he "luao" e takoto mai ana, ara ki te Maori he hakari. Ka mutu te kai ka tae mai nga kaa e toru. Ka riro matou ki te matakitaki whenua a pau noa tena ra. I te po ka rere ano to matou tima a "Aorangi." E whitu nga ra e rere ana ma- tou i runga tima ka u matou ki te whenua o Amerika ki te taone o Vancouver. I te ata ka tukutuku matou ka tutaki ahau ki nga kaumatua 0 te Hahi. Ka mahue tooku hoa me nga tamariki ki tetahi 0 nga kaumatua, ka haere maua ko te tumuaki ko Elder Whiting te ingoa, ki nga kai-tirotiro o Amerika i mua i te urunga a te tangata ki Amerika. Katahi
Noema 24, 1926 Ti£ KARI.RE 365
ka ki mai te kai-tirotiro kahore tooku hoa me a maua tama- riki e whakaaetia kia haere tahi me al.au ki Amerika. Ka- tahi ka piira ahau ki te kawanatanga o Amerika, katahi ka whakahokia mai, me tuku tooku hoa me a maua tamariki kia whai i ahau ki te whenua o Amerika. E ma wiki e noho ana i a Vancouver katahi ano matou ka puta.
No te 5 o nga ra o Hepetema ka tae ki te Pa Tote, e toru nga ra e rua nga po e haere ana i runga tereina. Ka tuku- tuku maua me nga tamariki i te teihana, i reira a Matiu Kau- ri, a Nitama, Hokarana, Pene Katata, a Leo B. Sharp, a Birkenshaw, a Patrick, a Jorgenson, me etahi atu, me a ratou wahine, e vvhanga ana ki a matou. Ka miuu te rum me te mini ka mauria matou ki te kainga o Leo B. Sharp. Ka noho matou i reira, e rua nga wiki ki te Pa Tote, te mahi he haeieere ki te matakitaki, ko nga kaumatua o Niu Tireni ki te mau haere i runga i o ratou moto kaa. Te moto kaa tua- tahi no Leo B. Sharp; tuaiua no te Tumuaki o te Hahi, he Packard, ko Alex Anderson te kai-arahi, nana matou i mau ki Saltair. Tuatoru, ko te kaa o Matiu Kauri, he Ford. I mauria matou e ia, me tarna wahine me ta raua pepi, ki E- migration Canyon. Kpia nei te waahi i eke mai ai a Pirika- mu laanga me tana ropu tuatahi ki te Pa Tote, i karanga i i ia, "This is the place." Tuawha ko te kaa o Erata Mor- rison, nana matou ko tooku whanau i nan ki Provo. 1 mauria matou ma American Fork Canyon and Provo Canyon. 1 kite ahau i a VViremu Pakimana, me Manaro Horopuruku, me Mac Roundy, me Lester Taylor, me Pecker, me te wahine a Jesse Knight me taana tama i Lenei waahi. 1 te Taite ka tae matou, i te po a te Hataiei ka w hakahokitia matou ki te Pa Tote e te papa o Roundy i runga i te Chrysler,
1 te ata o te Ratapu ka mauria matou e Erata Hebei C, Jex ki Rokana (Logan). 1 reira ka kite matou i a Erata Teo More re me Erata Moser. 1 te po ka haere matou ki Lewiston ki te kainga <» Wiser me Westover. I kite matou i a Waiha, no innri ia i hoki mai ai i Niu 1 ireni i a matou, engari no muri a ia i tae ai. I moe matou ki te kainga << Erata Moser.
I te ata ka l.< ki ki te 1'a I oh', i te laiarahi ka peke matou ki te kainga a limuaki Kaiti, a ki tana toa hoki. Naana te toa inn 1 kite ai ahan. Nga nr.i katoa i hiai.ia ai te tan-ala km
roto, men's mercer, ladles' department, furniture department, ladies and men1 boot department, butcher and fish depart ment, cafe, fanc> goods department, candies department and many othei thing kua wareware ahau. I \..\rw matou
366 te karkrk Noema 24. 19 jo
ki Ogden Canyon i reira tona wahine e takoto ana i te mate. Kua wliati tetahi 0 nga iwi 0 tona peke. I taka iho i rung a pikitanga (stairs), engari kei te 1 >a i haere tona peke, taihoa ka pai. Ka ahiahi ka hoki matou me Erata Heber C. Jex me taana wahine ki te Pa Tote E rua o matou po ki te whare o Jex ka hoki niaua me a maua tamariki ki te whare 0 Sharp. E rua nga po o tenei wiki i mauria ai maua me nga tamariki ki te purei. Te po tuatahi na Jex, he drama, te po tuarua he vaudeville, na Erata Bird i man matou. 1 kai hoki matou ki toona whare i te po 0 te Paraire. 1 te Hatarei ka maua a maua pouaka e te rore 0 Sharp & Co. ki te teihana, ma te t ere in a e mau ki Rokana. i hoko maua i nga mea e rite ana mo te kitini i te toa a Sharp \- Co. 1 homai e taua toa mo te wholesale price a maua taputapu mo to maua whare, S43 te iwa nga pauna) te utu. I tina maua ko Erata Alex Ander- son ki te Hotel Utah, he hiahia noona kin kite ahau i tera waahi i te cafeteria. I reira maua, ka kite ahau i a Ruw K. Haari me tana wahine. 1 hongi rawa maua. Ka kite hoki ahau i a 1 imuaki Romeni me taana wahine. 1 te po ka tu he hakari ki Liberty Park, he titi he waata kirihi he taewa nga kai. No Niu 'I ireni rtga titi, na maua i mau mai ma nga kaumatua. Te take i mauria nun ai, na Matiu Kauri i tuhi ki a Takana, ka ki, "Kahoie pea a Amerika i te whenua 0 te kupu whakaari, erigari a Niu Tireni, he titi hoki kei kora."
I te ata ka mauria matou e Leo B. Sharp ki Rokana i runga i tona kaa, e eo maero te tawl.iti atu i te Pa Pote ki reira. Ko te waahi hoki tenei hei kuratanga mooku. Ko te taone tenei o Erata Moser, Erata Morere, me Erata Ewatana.
E te Hun^a Tapu, kei ko noa atu i enei korero nga ma- naakitanga a nga kaumatua ki a maua me a maua tama iki. A kei puhaehae koutou, ka ki he whakahi nooku i panui ai ahau enei manaakitanga ki a koutou. Kahoie. Engaii he tohu tenei i te aroha nui o tenei iwi ki a koutou mo a koutou i manaaki i a ratou me a ratou tamariki i a ratou i Niu Tire- ni. Kahore aku nei painga ki a ratou, no enei ra tonu nei ahau i uru ai ki te Hahi, no reira he aha te take kia manaaki ratou i a matou? Maaku e kii ki a koutou, he aroha ki te iwi Maori. No reira kia mau ki a koutou tohu pai.
E te Morehu o Lharaira, He kupu whakamarama hei whakamutu i taaku reta ki a koutou. ! te hui i tu ki Tiki- tiki ki te takiwa ki Ngati Porou, ka rongo ahau ki a Paraire Tomoana, koi a tetahi ropu, te ingoa ko te "Maori Purpose Control Fund Board," he ropu tautoko i nga tamariki hiahia
Noema 24, 1920
TE KARERE
W
ki te kura. Katahi au ka whakaaro, pai atu ko ratou hei matua mooku i ahau i te kura. Kua kore ahau e titiro ki a koutou ki te Moromona, te take kei te ki etahi o koutou he tangata wawata, he tangata moemoea ahau. Heoi ia, ko taaku inoi kia kauaka ahau e moemoea e wawata, engari kia kohatutia tenei haere, kia puta he painga ki a koe ki te Maori. Ko taaku inoi tenei ki a koutou i ter.ei ra haere ake nei, tukua a koutou tamariki matau ki nga kura nunui, ki te kimi i te matauranga. "Ko te matauianga hoki te kororia o te Atua." Heoi na ta koutou taina, tamaiti,
Nireaha Paiwai
KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA.
Elder Ann I J. Talbot
Elder Ezra II. Anderson
Tirohia te 332 o nga wharangi 0 Te Karere moOketopa,
0
"Te tangata e haere atu ana, <• pokanoa ana ki te wha- whai ehara nei nana, tona rite kei te tangata e hopu ana i nga tarings 0 te kuri."
"Ki te kahore he wahie, ka mate te ahi, ki te kahore ano he kaikawe korero, ka mutu te ngangare "
"Te tangata i krria ;ii te ma, ka t;ika ano ki rotOJ ka hoki inai ano te kohatu ki tona kaitnn .
"He- pono ki te akina te wai u, ka puta he pataj ki te akina te ihu ka puta he toto; ki te akina ano te riri, ka puta
he wha w hoi." I Ioioinona
Ik KAKERE
na 24, 1926
KO NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO O TE M.A.C.
Kei runga: ko Erata Tua i, mahi whika (Mathmatics). Erata Taaka, Reo [ngarihi; Erata Paraone, mahi kamura; Erata Hokena, Chemistry; Erata Piringihata, Hekeretari me te ma'ni whutu paoro; Erata Tipene, mahi whakatangitangi.
Kei raro: ko Erata Ewatana, Te Karere; Sister Tinikini me Hoani; Erata Tinikini, Tumuaki Mihana; Sister Heera me Meri; Erata Heera, Tumuaki o te Kareti.
Noema 24, 1926
TE KARERE
Ko nga Kai-Kauwhau 0 Pei Whairangi
Ki Te Karere: Tena koe, mau enei ingoa e panui atu kia mohio ai nga tangata katoa koia enei nga kai-kauwhau o te Pei Whairangi mo nga marama e toru mo Tihema mo Hanuere mo Pepuere.
|
Kawe Apiata |
) Waimate |
A |
|
Hori Hami |
||
|
Wiremu Mokaraka |
1 Punakitere |
2 |
|
Hori Ruwhiu |
||
|
Hoori Mapi |
1 Niu Tireni |
3 |
|
Witana Henare |
||
|
Mokaraka Mohitaka |
1 Okorihi |
1 |
|
Paepae Witehira |
||
|
Hetaraka Anaru |
| Te Kaahu |
1 |
|
April Wiremu |
i |
|
|
Kaimana |
||
|
Manihera Kauwhata |
\ Matauri |
2 |
|
Kawhena Waa |
I |
|
|
Ruru Hohaia |
\ Ngawha |
4 |
|
Nuku Apiata |
||
|
Tame Wiremu |
\ Omapere |
3 |
|
Peita Kauwhata |
||
|
Mahuika Otene |
\ Waihou |
3 |
|
Peneha Rii |
||
|
Pera Wi Hongi |
I Te Kaahu |
3 |
|
Jona Wi Hongi |
||
|
Takawira Henare |
I Ngawha |
2 |
|
Hamiora Wi Hongi |
||
|
John Ngakuru |
\ Mangamuka |
2 |
|
Mairangi Ngakuru |
||
|
Paikairaihe Otene |
1 Utakura |
3 |
|
Nopera Otene |
||
|
Hare Herewini |
\ Whirinaki |
4 |
|
Wiremu Ruka Rawiri |
||
|
Paul Witehira |
I Kaikohe |
3 |
|
Hirini Wik;iira |
1 |
|
|
Tane Wikaira |
\ Mataraua |
2 |
|
Ma a nu Wikaira |
• |
|
|
Wirihana Pepe |
) Otaua |
|
|
Wiremu I e l Lau |
||
|
1 [emi Whautere |
1 Tautoro |
|
|
1 [eremaia Kaw ere Noa |
1 |
in karerk Noema 24, 1926
Rameka Wikaira 1 Waima 2
Wirenui Ngakuru I
\ fohepa He peri j Kaikohe 1
Pita Heperi I
Ngapuhi Renata 'N^a wahi tata
Pita Heperi 1 Noata
Tetahi Kaumatua I
Wirihane Pepe 1 E rua wiki
Tetahi Kaumatua I
Tane Wikaira j E rua wiki
Tetahi Kaumatua )
Rameka Wikaira I E rua wiki
Tetahi Kaumatua '
E koutou, oku hoa mahi, tena ra koutou. Kua karanga. tia koutou hei kai-kauwhau i te Rongopai o Ihu Karaiti. E- hara hoki enei i nga karangatanga kore take, engari koia tenei hei mahi ma koutou kia taea e koutou te awhina i te whakawhanuitanga atu i te mahi a te Atua. Hoi ano nga kai-kauwhau o tera toru marama, ko nga mea i whakaritea a ratou karangatanga i tera atu toru marama. Otira, i te mea, mo te tau hou enei karangatanga, kua karangatia katoatia ano koutou. Kia mahara tatou, "Ka rite hoki ki ta koutou e rui ai, ta koutou e kokoti ai." Kia whiwhi he mahi mo tera kuata, me whakarite e koutou te mahi kua oti te homai mo enei marama. E haere mai ana te ra ka hari tatou, ka pouri ranei, kei te ahua o ta tatou mahi te tikanga. "Ka kai ku_ kupa, ka noho kaka me te ngetengete." Ko nga pononga a te Atua e hapai na i enei karangatanga, ka tapiritia nga karangatanga nunui atu, whaihoki nga manaakitanga e rite ana.
Ma te Atua koutou e manaaki, e tautoko, kia whai kaha ai koutou ki te rui i nga purapura papai, kia hari ai te nga- kau i nga ra e haere mai nei.
Na to koutou teina,
Ralph R. Stevenson
Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE
Ko nga Kai-Kauwhau 0 te Mahia
Ko nga ingoa enei o nga kai-kauwhau o te Mahia mo nga marama e toru e heke mai nei, ara, mo Tihema, mo Hanuere, mo Pepuere.
iriparete Pomare Henare Taurima Whakahe Matenga Tihema Taurima Te Amo Tengaio Ruka Rarere Perea Reupena Tungane Reupena Runga Tengaio Rangi Tengaio Ora Noa Tengaio Raiha Tengaio Hirini Christy W i Mete
Hohepa Te Kauru Hoani Kemara Paora Hapi Waaka Toroaiwhiti Tere Waerea Hirini Kemara Tieme Mete Paraere Pirihi Tamihana Pere Miria Kamau Pere Potiki Kahuroa Keita Kahuroa Pita Reihana Pene Hori Haere \ leremia Maehe Epeniha Kaihote Hetekia Pirihi Areta Kerei Piripi I e Kauru Ray P. I hompson Tena ra koutou e 1
I Taupata 3
/ Whakakii, Wairoa I Nuhaka 4
/ Taupata, Whakakii I Tuahuru 4
) Nuhaka, Waikokopu 1 Waikokopu 3
J Tuahuru, Nuhaka I Iwitea 2
I Waikokopu, Oraka I Whakakii 4
I Oraka, Wairoa I Waikokopu 3
I Iwitea, Tuahuru I Wairoa 2
i Waikokopu, Whakakii I Whakakii 3
j Wairoa, Waikokopu \ Oraka 3
f Whakakii, Iwitea I Jwitea 4
/ Tuahuru, Oraka 1 Wairoa 4
f Waihu, [witea I Waikaremoana 2
( Nuhaka, Waihua I Nuhaka }
I Mohaka, Whakakii 1 Whakakii 3
1 Mohaka, Waihua 1 Mohaka 4
• Waihua, IV Reinga 1 Waihua
1 Nuhaka, Waikaremoana ku hoa mahi aroha i roto i tenei taki-
wa 0 te maara waina 0 te Ariki. Kei te whakamihi atu nei ahau ki a koutou mo koutou ku.i whiwhi nei i tenei karanga- tanga tapu hei mahi ma koutou. "Ka rite hoki ki ta koutou e rui ai, ta koutou e kokoti ai.M Na reira kia takare tonu koutou ki te whakarite 1 .1 kou- tou mahi tapu, kia noho tonu ai te \\ airua,
Kia ora ra koutou. Hoi ano ra, na ta koutou teina,
Na Rinehi K. famati, fumuaki fakiwa
11. KARERE na 24 1926
KO NCA PUKAPJXA HEI HOXONGA
ko enei etahi o nga pukapuk.i c t.ikoto ana kei le lari o te Mihana hei 1 o-
konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te lioko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki elalii o
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secret dry. Box ,"-• Auckland.
STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS
Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leatl er. 25-0
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather ... >v it u
Book of Mormon, Cloth 2b i \j-t> f|
' , Half Leather -90 I
, Leather 10-0 & 15 o
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth.. 2-0
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth *-o
" " , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAO.?l BOOKS AND TRACTS
Maori Read) Reference, Cloth 20
, Leather 3-0
Ko Te Kawenata Hon, Cloth 1-9
" Me Nga riimene, Leather 3 i» I n-o
'• Pukipuka a Moromona . Cloth 5-0
, Leather 13-11
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-j
", Leather 15 u
Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 1 o SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BDOK3
The Restoration of the Gospel 40
What Jesus Taught .1 o
Kindergarten Plan Book. KesUr & Morris 3 b
Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, X'orto.i ... 4-0
SONG BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-.; i
, Leather .00
Deseret Song Books, Cloth ... 30 i
" , Leather b 0
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book ^-o
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE W02KS
Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Tabling* ' S j
Vitality ot Worm on ism 4-0
Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson o-o
Restoration of the Gospel, II iJtsoe 4 0
Joseph Smith's Teachings >o
Life of Christ for the Young. Weed 4 o
Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9
ntials in Church History. Smith 6-9
Bible Ready Reference 2-0
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 0-0
KO J. H. riNIKINl TE KAI TA ME TE KA1 PAM 1 HOKI M. \.r KORONGATA HASTINGS. M. R.
:j^n>n>
Wt
"Wdhanaa 20
Cihema 22. 1926
llama 12
I
tfaua c matafcu: ta te mea be ikai^ fcauwbau tenet abau kt a koutou mo te bari nm, meahe puta mat hi te iwi katoa.
Ttonatanet boki i wbanau at be 1kai*wbakaora mo houtou t te pa o "Kawiri, ara a te Ikarattt, te Hnki.
Ruba 2:10-11
<*&>
«
"CS KflRSRS"
|
+ + WHAKAEMINCA O |
NGA |
KORERO |
|
+ + + + + + Kl TE ETITA |
Wharangi. |
|
|
He Ripoata na Nireaha Paewai |
396 |
|
|
KO NGA RONCO KORERO |
||
|
Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona Ko nga Manita o te M.AC. |
394 392 |
|
|
KO NCA TUHINGA MAI |
||
|
I roto i nga "Momona" |
387 |
|
|
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI |
393 |
|
|
MAHI KURA HAPATI |
||
|
Concert Recitation |
3/0 |
|
|
Intermediate Department Korero a Ngakau Kindergarten Department Maori Theological Pakeha Theological Postlude Prelude Sacrament Gem |
376 370 379 370 374 369 369 369 |
|
|
NATE ETITA |
||
|
He Mihi Kirihimete |
395 |
Ko Ilohcpa Mete, Poropiti
ari>rj>
WAHANGA XX
"Ki te Iwi Maori, te Morehu o te Whare o Iharaira.'
MlHANA O NlU TlRENI
HAHI O 1HU KARAIT1 O TE HUNGA TAPU
O NGA RA O ML'RI NEI
H1PA J. KARANATA, TUMUAKI o IF HAHI HOANI H. T1NIK1M, TUMUAKJ MlHANA
M. K. EWATANA, E HI A
J. R. TlPENE, I ETITA HOA AWH1NA
T.W. WlTEHIRA f
MAORI AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE Hastings. New Zealand 1926
(ftw
WAHANCA 20 WENEREI, TIHEMA 22, 1926. NAMAI2
Maori Agricultural College Hastings. H. B.
E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni,
Hani o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri i\ei.
Tukua jnai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings.
Ivu le ulu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereui (5/-).
KO TE TIKANUA TENEI. Ilie matua uiu mo icu pcpa ka vPhiwhi ai.
J. H. Tmikim, TumuuKt Mihana Mariana K. Ewatana, hum. 'l.um h Hi In/ a, httta Hon A whin a.
Ko te Kui-Ripoata Te Tuati Melia
Ku nga Kai Tuhi Alai (Special Writers). Wiremu A. kuura fctapta ianHpu tru T. kupa
i\lAHI KURA HAPATI.
Prelude.
Adapted from Handel, by Edw. P. Kimball.
:Mr /r ^ilp^pliii
mf
we^^m*=#4=$=*=gg^^
SACRAMKNT (iHM FOR JANUARY, 1927 '/Purify our hearts, our Saviour,
Let us «4(> not far asl ray, Thai we may be counted worth}
Of Thy Spirit. «la\ by (lav." Postlude.
i£gipi3iiipiiiip§r: i p
=j^a
\'-'" ■ \- -■*■ \ n
370 ikkarerk rihcma 22, iy26
CONCERT RECITATION FOR JANUARY, 1927.
(Doctrine and Covenants, Section 59, Seventh Verse) " Thou shalt thank the Lord thy God in all things."
0
KORERO A NGaKaU MO HANUERE, 1927.
Akoranga me nga Kawenata 59:7.
"I roto i nga mea katoa me whakawhetai atu koe ki
te Ariki, ki tou Atua."
-o
MAORI THEOLOGICAL.
Katapu tuata.ii, iianuere 2, 1927. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU.
Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori.
Putake: Ko nga wliakahauhau a tc tauira i whakatako- toria aei c Iliu hei oiahi ma tatou.
hote Ngakau Whakawhetai
I roto i te ioo o nga Waiata ka kite tatou i tetahi whaka- puakanga pai o te whakawhetai.
"Kia hari te hamama ki a Ihowa, e nga whenua katoa: mahia ta Ihowa i runga i te koa, waiata ha ere ki tona aroaro.
"Kia matau ki a Ihowa, koia te Atua: nana tatou i ha- nga, ehara hoki i a tatou; ko tana iwi tatou, ko ana hipi e hepara ai.
"Tomokia ona tatau i runga i te whakawhetai, ona marae i runga i te whakamoemiti: whakawhetai ki a i;\ whakapai- ngia tona ingoa. He pai hoki a Ihowa, pumau tonu tana mahi tohu: a kei nga whakatupuranga katoa tona pono."
Ka kite tatou he maha nga wahi i roto i nga karaipiture e korero ana i a Ihu e tuku whakawhetai ana. I te wa o to ratou kainga i te Kapenga, i te whangainga o nga mano, me era atu wa i tuku whakawhetai ai a Ihu mo nga mea i riro mai i a la. I whakawhetai la ki Tona Matua mo te pono kua oti raka te whakaari, a mo nga akonga papai hoki kua kitea raka e la hei awhina i a la.
E korero ana nga kai-tuhi katoa o te Kawenata Hou tera e tika ana tatou me whai whakawhetai o tatou ngakau mo nga mea a te Atua e homai ana ki a tatou.
Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 37 1
E rite ana tenei tikanga ma nga tangata katoa e hiahia ana ki te whakahari i te Atua, tae atu hoki ki nga mea hore kau he hahi. Koia tenei ko tetahi o nga tikanga tuatahi o te koropiko pono, a he tohu hoki i waenganui o nga tangata o te tino rangatira.
Ahakoa ko wai koe, a keihea ranei koe e noho ana, e tika ana koe me whakawhetai koe ki nga mea na ratou nei koe i awhina, ki o matua, ki o hoa, ki o tupuna kua mate raka i nga tau maha kua huri, a ki te Atua ano hoki.
Tukua ma nga mema o te karaihe e whaki o ratou hine- ngaro, te whakawhetai o o ratou nei ngakau mo nga mea kua riro mai i a ratou.
Ko nga Pukapuka a Paora
Nu Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rupata Tanapu i whakarite.
Raiapu tuarua, Hanuere 9, 1927.
Akoranga o4
1 Waenganui i nga Teharonika. He roanga atu.
Te VVhakaatu: Kei a 2 Teharonika, I, 2, 3 o nga upoko.
A. Ta te Atua whakawakanga.
1. Ko te whakangaromanga o te hunga kino. 2 Teharo- nika 17-9; Maraki 3:1; 4:1.
2. Ko te whiunga mutunga kore. 2 Teharonika 1:9; Ako- ranga me nga Kawenata 19:3-12.
B. Ko te Takanga Atu me te kingitanga o te Anatikaraiti.
1. Hei te Ra Nui o te Aiiki.
2. Ka puta mai tuatahi ko te Takanga Atu. 2 Teharoni- ka 2:3; 1 Timoti 4:1.
3. Ko te tangata o te hara. 2 Teharonika 2:3-4.
4. Hei te mahi te Anatikaraiti a taua wa. 2 Teharonika 27; 1 Eioani 2:18; 4:3.
5. Ka taea a Hatana «.• te ha <> te Atua. 2 Teharonika 2:8; Whakakitenga 20:2, 10; 2 Niwhai 9:16.
C. Ta Paora whakatupatoranga ki te Hunga Tapu.
1. Kia mawehe ke 1 nga tangata mahi he, 2 Teharonika 3:0-7; Whakakitenga 18:4-5; Ak<>. me nga Kawe. 133:5.
2. Ka riria te mangere. 2 Teharonika 3:1 C- 1 2; Ako. me
nga Kawe. 88:124) (10:13; 4J:42.
17} Tt KARBRE Tihema 22, 1926
Ratapu tuatoru, Hanuere 16, 1927.
Akoranga 35
Te llahi Koriniti, Whenua 0 Makeronia
Hei Tirohanga: Nga Mahi iS:i-i8; 1 Koriniti; 2 Koriniti.
A. Te whakariteritenga 0 te Hahi o te Hunga o Koriniti.
1. Nga whakahuringa o nga Hurai. Mahi 18:2, 8, 17.
2. Ko te kauwhautanga o Paora i nga mahi a te Karaiti ki nga Hurai. Nga Mahi 18:4-6.
3. Te whakatetenga o nga Hurai. Mahi 18:12-17.
4. Nga whakahuringa o nga Tauiwi, te iriiriringa. Mahi 18:8; I Koriniti 1:14-16.
5. To ratou tiakanga e Kario, he kawana no Roma. Nga Mahi 18:12-16.
Tirohia i Nga Mahi 18:3 e whakaatu ana i reira i te kaha 0 Paora ki nga mahi mi ha n a. Tirohia ano 2 Koriniti 1 1:7-9
B. Ko te pukapuka a Paora ki nga Hunga Tapu.
1. He whakatupato kia kaua e noho wehewehe i roto i te Hahi. I Koriniti 1:10-13.
2. Te kauwhauranga o te ripeka. I Koriniti 1:17-24.
3. Ko te matauranga o te hunga mohio e ngaro. I Ko- riniti 1:25-3 !• Whakaritea ki te Pukapuka a Moromo- na, Arami 10:13-18; Ako. me nga Kawe. 100:5-8.
Kia mau tenei: Ko te pukapuka tuatahi a Paora ki te
Hunga o Koriniti, i tuhituhia atu e ia i Epeha i
te paunga o te toru tau i noho ai ia i reira,
i te tau 57, 58 ranei o to tatou Ariki A.I).
Ratapu tuawha, Hanuere ?3, 1927.
Akoranga 3ti Ka Tohutohu te Apotoro i te Hahi
Hei Tirohanga: I Koriniti 2, 3, 4 o nga upoko.
A. A Ihu Karaiti me Tona ripekatanga.
1. I puakina i roto i te ngoikoretanga. I Koriniti 2:1-4.
2. Te matauranga o te Atua. I Koriniti 2:5-16.
3. He kohungahunga i roto i a te Karaiti. I Koriniti 3:1-2; Nga Hiperu 5:12-14.
4. Na te Atua i tupu ai. 1 Koriniti 3:3-8.
B. Te hanganga a te Atua.
I. Te kaupapa, ko Ihu Karaiti. Epeha 2:20; Mahi 4:12;
Tihema 22, 1920 TE karere 373
Ako. 11. e nga Kawe. 20:29-51.
2. Me hanga nga tangata ki rung a i tenei kaupapa pono. 1 Koriniii 3:9- 5-
3. Kia ma nga tinana. I Koriniti 3:16-17; Ako. me nga Kawe. 88:1.24.
C. Nga mate o nga Apotoro.
1. Purutia te whakatauranga he. I Koriniti 4:3-5; Matiu 7:1-5.
2. Ko o ratou mamaetanga mo te Rongopai. I Koriniti 4:9- 1 [.
j. Ka tukua a Timoti hei whakahaere. l Koriniti 4:17.
Ratipu tuarima, llanuere 30, 1927.
Akoranga M
Ko te Akoranga a Paora mo te Ma 0 te Ngakau
Hei Tirohanga: 1 Koriniti, 5 me te 6 o nga upoko. A. Ko nga ahuatanga i roto i nga hunga o Koriniti. j. Koriniti he pa nui hokohako taonga no Roma.
2. Ko te koropikotanga o nga tangata ki tenei atua wa- hine ki a Aporite (Aphrodite); e whakaaetia ana e t° ratou whakapono nga mahi kikinoi nga karakiatanga.
3. lie poke te ahua o te hunga o Koriniti.
4. Ko te kauwhautanga a Paora ki nga mahi kikino, ara ki te puremu, ki te moe tahae.
P>. Ko nga whakahauhaunga a nga Apotoro.
1. Ko te Puremu me tona ahua. I Koriniti 5:1.
2. Ko te whakaritenga i te whakawhiu mo te hunga takahi i nga hire. 1 Koriniti 5:2-5.
3. I raro i te ture a Mohi, he mate tona whakawhiunga. Tirohia Rewitikuha 18:29; 20:11.
4. Kia kaua te Hunga I'apu e piri ki te hunga mahi ki- no. I Koriniti 5:9-13; Ako. me nga Kawe. 42:20-28,
C. Ka tukua te whakawakanga ki te Hunga TapU
i. Ko nga ahua tutu, ngangau, ma te Hunga Tapu e titiro. 1 Koriniti 6: 1 8; .Ako. me nga Kawe. [34:10,
2. Ko nga Kooti O te i ika i roto i te llahi. Matin [8:1$-
17; Mahi 15:2-22; Ako. me nga Kawe. 107 .-68 -83; 42 85.
3. Ko nga mea kahore he whenua. 1 Koriniti 6:9 10- Whakakitenga 2l;8.
4. Ko te tika 0 te ma mo te tinana. 1 Koriniti 6:13-20, me
\74 il KARERH lihema 24, 1920
lie Panui: Tuhaina i nga tirohanga hei ako ma tenei ma tenei 0 nga mema, he korero- tanga hoki me waiho te wa o te karaihe hei uiuinga.
PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL 1.!a!<aII Li<:/'
First Sunday, January 2. I9i7. 1 XJLFORM FAST DAY LESSON.
The Example of Jesus: Whal ii Bids us Do.
Ii temporal and spiritual, Ls weil expressed in ciic lOOdi I'saim, "Make a joyful uoii>e unto the
ith glad 1 - ; 1 me b< fi it his pr< si a< <• \\ iih sing- ing, know ye ihal the Lord he is God j i! is he thai hath made as
heep of His pasl ure. I . e> w'.di thanksgiving, and into His courts with praise; be i His name. the Li rd is good; His
I His 1 11. h ei dui cth i u all general ii
Le Lord's Supp« i . in feeding t he
- .'r us gave thanks and blessed what
11 v men had provided. He also gave thanks on various
occasioi i for ttie truth Uod hud revealed and I r the disciples that had
given Him. His habit of gratitude or thankfulness to God and
fur al wed by Him is reflected in all the Ne* TestamenJ
cd in the Doctrine and Co> enants. The oblig .
ii .11 - both religious and in ral, both divine and human.
lamental element in worship and also in good manners oi
1 us of nil _ - .•" d «-.■!.•' i 1 i ns may \\ ell culth ate
toward all bencfaeti rs towar I immedii it- asso-
mote human benefactors, i ward humanity and
hearing i a\ well relate to any phi ■ of this important, glei ted, quality of chai icter- gratitude.
Second Sunday, January i), 1927.
Lesson 32. Jeremiah.
Text : Book of Jeremiah.
• God 's inten ention, men and n:it ions esti ucl ion.
Supplcm •• i Referent s: Q. "Beacon Lights of History" (Lord),
Tihema 22, 1926 te karere $75
327.
Jeremiah called to be a prophet about 627 B.C., when a young man. His ministry extended over a period of 50 years*. A very sorrowful and gloomy man, a prophet of judgments to come. He saw the people, th&ir leaders and the priests and prophets fall away from the worship of God. lie saw Jerusalem fail, but remained. He was later carried into Egypt, and tradition says was slain there by fellow exiles.
Questions for Teachers.
1. Compare Isaiah and Jeremiah and the work they did for Judah.
2. What in the life of Jeremiah will help you to something better and a desire to render greater service?
I bird Sunday, January 16, 1927.
Lesson ll;. Daniel.
Texl : Book of Daniel.
Objective: To show that a great faith in God will prepare one to L.eet every difficulty in life.
Daniel a prophet and leader to his people in captivity. Discuss the most remarkable blessings that came to him as a result of his faith. Discuss his fearlessness in reading God's condemnation at the Croat Feast in Babylon, if time permits and you can thoroughly prepare' the sub- ject, discuss the dream of the great image. (See Restoration of the ( uspei, Chapter 4.)
Questions for Teachers.
1. How may one build a faith for himself such as Daniel exempli- fied .'
2. What three attributes besides his faith will most affect the lives of the young people in the church!
lourth Sunday, Jam ary 23, 1927 LESSON 54. DANIEL (Continued)
Text! Book of Daniel; "Old Testament studies" (Tanner.) Objective: To show thai a great faith in God will prepare one to n i <-t every difficulty in life.
Note: There are so man} Interesting period! La the life of Danial it is suggested that the subject be continued. Teachers may select any or all of the following itemi for discussion: Daniel In Captivity; Nebuchad iiezzar'a Dream, The Fiery Furnace, Dream of the Tree, Writing on the \v:iii, in tin- Lion's Den, Effect of Daniel'* Writings.
Que ;1
1. In what wa\ • 1 1 < I Daniel Observe what is now failed the ''Wor.l
of Wisdom I* '
Tt KAKKKh i ihenia t2
2. What La your understanding of the meaning of the dream of the
Gnat Image?
Fifth Sunday, January 30, 1927 Review Questions.
1. Wliu was Solomon 1
U. Ildu old was Solomon when h*j became K;
Why did Solomon grow in wisdom and power during the hue part of his life/
I. What caused the division of the kingdom of K boboam, son ol Bolomonf
o. Give an example of a more modern people's action under similar conditions f
6. What type of man was Elijah?
7. What type of man was Elishaf
8. To what people did Elijah and Eli aha cornel (.i. To what people was Isaiah a prophet 1
10. What was the condition of those people f
II. V\ hat did h< preach 1
12. '1 o what people was Jeremiah a prophet 1
L3. What i. iaii,ii i hi' man was he I
11. Was he able to save the people by his teaching 1 15. W'nat happened to them!
hi. What happened to Jerusalem, their city? 17. Where did Daniel first appear? L8. What called attention to him most?
lit. Did the Lord save Daniel in cause of his faith and obi dull.- .' Name two times?
INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT THE BOOK OF MORMON"
First Sunday, January 2, 1927
FAST DAY LESSON.
Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 374
The buys and girls of the Intermediate Department are old enough to have experienced that feeling of joy which comes to one when apprecia- tion and gratitude are shown liy those for whom some kindness or service has been d me.
In the assignment urge the members of your class to reflect upon the blessings they enj y; the privilege of having been born in this progres-
Tihema 22, 1920 TE KARERE 377
give age; the opportunities afforded by the restored Gospel, science, etc.
The}- can then, on Fast Day, arise and express their thankfulness to their Heavenly Father for these things. The lesson can carry over in that they can express to teachers and parents their gratitude for their love, devotion and service.
One likes to do for those who accept his services with gratitude.
SvCond Sunday, January 9, 1927.
Lessen .02. The Savior's Parking Blessings and Instructions. Text: III. Nephi 19th to 30th chapters.
Objective: To teach that according to our faith so shall we receive. (See fit. Nephi 19: 35, 36.)
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation:
1. Special assignment to pupils:
(a) Preparation for Jesus' second visit. III. Nephi 19: 1-14.
(b) Jesus prays. 19: 15-36.
(c) The Sacrament again administered. 10: 21-10.
(d) A commandment to search the Scriptures. 23: 1-11.
(e) The Savior expounds all things. 26: 1-11.
(f) Mormon's summary. 26: 12-21.
(g) The name of the Church. 27: 1-12.
(h) The Twelve granted their hearts' desires. III. Xephi 28.
2. Chapters 21, 22, 24, 25, 2i», 30 should all be read at home by the pupils. If the teacher sees lit, he might mention some of the important points in the prophecies quoted by the Savior.
.;. Passages to be memorized: ill. Xephi 24: 16, 17; 25: 2; 27: 8, 19.
Questions for Teachers. l. What more marvellous blessing did the Nephites receive because of their greater faith than did the people iii Palestine 1
Third Sunday, January 16, 1927.
Lesson 33. The Power of God and the Power of Satan. Text: IV. Xephi, Mormon, Chapters 1-6.
Objective: To teach that living the (iospel of Christ brings true
happiness (see ~ . Nephi l: 10), while unrighteousness leads to misery
(see Mormon 2: 13 15).
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Special assignments to pupils:
(a) Two centuries of righteousness. IV. Nephi L: l 22.
(b) Satan again gains power. IV. Nephi 1: 2.: 19, Mormon, i righteous youth. Mormon, Chaptei i.
(d) Mormon as i leader. Mormon, Chapter 2.
$7$ 1 h KAKKRJi 1 ihema 22,
N* ophites boaal in their own strength, Mornion 3: l lt">. Continual warfares Mormon -1; 5: 1-7. Pinal struggle between Nephitea and Lamauites. Mor moji G. 2. Passages fur all the pupils to memorize: I V. Nephi 1: 2; 1: 15-17;
Mormon -i: 5. Make q special point of memorizing in these lessons. Questions for Teachers.
1. Mention as many as you can of the blessings that the Nephitea enjoyed during the 200 years following Christ's visit.
2. What qualities are outstanding in Mormon to make him equal with other great Bo k of Mormon characters 1
Fourth Sunday, January 23, 1927. I.l.ssn.N 34. MORON] FINISHES THE NEPHITE ttECOBD.
Text: Mormon, chapters 8 and !>, Mm ni 1-10.
Objective: To teach that we should cullivate the power of God "for he worketli by power according to the t'ailli of the children of men, the same to-day, to-morrow, ami forever." Moroni 10:7.
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation :
1. Sp< cial assignment to pupils:
a. Moroni left alone. Mormon 8:1-11,
!). The record to come forth. Mormon 8:12-32.
c. Moroni foresees tin- apostasy. Mormon 8:33-41.
d. Moroni toadies faith in God. Mormon 9:1-20.
2. The contents of the ]'»ook of Moroni might lie briefly stated by the teacher, but the whole book should be read by the pupils, and they might be called upon to give the parts they understand and which they think to be the most inteiest ing.
.".. Passages to memorise: Mormon 9:27, 28; Moroni 10:4, --i. .
Questions for Teachers. 1. Point out some of the precious things that might not have been i:: the Book <>f Mormon had Mormon finished the record himself.
_. Iteviow Moroni's teachings in regard to faith, hop.-, charity, infant
.
Fifth Sunday, Jaiiuay ki), !lJ27. Review Questions.
1. What was the sign given to the Nephitea of the Saviour's death! Ik What Lamanite prophet testified of these things shortly before
they happened! '.'-. What did the Saviour say to Nephi when he was praying mightily
for the sign to be given so that his people might not be destroyed
Tihema 22, 1920 T£ KARKRE _ 379
because of their faith?
4. What was the sign given on this land of the Saviour's death?
5. What caused the great darkness?
6. What cry was heard among the people who were spared?
7. Whose voice was heard speaking?
6. When the darkness cleared away, where did the people gather?
9. Wl-ose voice did they hear at this time?
10. From whence did Jesus come?
il. What did the multitude do when they saw Him?
12. Hew did they know it was actually the Saviour who had been
crucified? l;;. To whom did Jesus give power to baptise?
14. How many times was the Sacrament administered during His visit /
15. What wonderful blessings did the children receive?
lti. How long did the people remain righteous after the visit of the Saviour?
17. What were the causes of their growing wicked again? IS. Who was the last great leader of the Nephites? L9. Who was the last prophet to have charge of the records 1 20, How was the brother of J a red blessed of the Lord?
KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT First Sunday, January 2, 19Z7. Uniform Fast Day Lesson.
(JenuruJ Topic: "The hixaiuple < f .lesus: What 1' lib's Us Do." Special Topic: ''Gratitude." Text: New Testament, i'salm lot).
Objective: to become happier and better children, w e must show gratitude.
Suggestions to Teachers; Before preparing this Lesson let us ask our- selves these questions: What have 1 to be thankful for/ Am 1 as thank ful as ['Should be/ Do 1 show my gratitude,' ('-latitude brings a con tented spirit. Have I one/ How can I best teach this Lessonl
Outline of Story: I. Tommy 's Home.
1. Tommy runs into the house.
Bister Peters has given him a ball for his birthday. 'i. His mother asked if he thanked her. i a ) He had forgotten t<>. 1 1. 1 ihs mother wondered if he liked the ball.
(c) He does; it was just what he wanted.
(d) Hut he didn't thank Siller |V|eis; BOM WOuld >he know
he liked n .'
.'I. 'rummy ran to thank Si>ter Peters,
3So te karere Tihema 24, 19^0
Peters, Bitting 00 the doorstep, Looks iad t.>
Tommy.
(b) Hi' slips up and tells her how thankful he is.
(c) sister Peters' faec tightens up a* she draws Tommy close t<> her.
nl) She said Bhe didnM think In- cared. 4. A little bird >ings.
(a) Tommy and Sister Peters watch and listen.
(I.) Sister Peters asks if Tommy knows what the bird is
doing, (c) Tommy replies, giving thanks to the Father. (fl) They name the things it has to lie thankful for. (e) Tommy found that little birds never forget to say thanks — a lesson for all of us. 1 I. How to Give Thanks.
1. Tommy found ways of giving thanks (ai By singing praises, hymns, etc. ( 1) ) By doing kind dec d... (c) By saying ''Thank you.'' 1 d) By being cheerful. -. Tommy wants to know who taught as to be thankful. .'!. Sister Peters tells him Jesus set the example and told us to thank our Heavenly Father.
(a) .Jesus thanked His Father for food, clothes, home, friends helpers, etc
[it) JnSUa sang B< QgS of praise.
(e) Jesus did kind deeds. (Name some, i f d ) Jesus was nappy. 4. Tommy names people to whonl we should show gratitude or give thanks.
(a) Heavenly Father.
(b) Parents.
(c) Friends, neighbours.
(d) All who do for us in making clothing, food, homes, etc. A happiness comes over Tommy.
(a) He wants to sing "Father of All" and "Father, We Thank Thee."
(b) They snug the songs.
(e) Leaned over close to Sister Peters and whispered he was always going to say "Thank You" the four ways every day. and he would be like the little bird. He wouldn't forget.
Memory (Jem: "For the Lord is good. Serve the Lord with
gladness. Rest Exercise: Let the children suggest things they could do to show people they arc thankful for what is done for them. Then let the
Tihema 22, 1920 te karere 381
children do the things they suggest. For instance, what can we do for the cow to show her we are thankful for the milk? Give her food and water. What can we do for our parents, etc.?
Suggestive songs for month — to be from Pa It}- Hill's Song Book. (Select the ones you know and sing the one most appropriate. "God's Work," p. 71. "God's Love," p. 72; also pages 10, 17, IS, 19.
Second Sunday, January 9, 1927.
Topic: "The First Thanksgiving in Utah."
Text: "History of Utah (Whitney), Vol. 1, p. 380; "Sunday Morn- ing in the Kindergarten," Lesson 70.
Time: After the first crops were gathered.
Place: Salt Lake City.
Objective: The Lord is pleased when we show our gratitude in deeds as well as in words.
Suggestions for Teachers: Lead the children to see that instead of Mary crying and making others unhappy when she left her home and p aymatcs, she could have tried to find something else to take their p.ace. Let us learn to try when that which is near and dear to us is taken from us, instead" ci: wasting time by grieving, to turn our attention to something else. Let us Learn to love everything in nature; then no matter where we are we can be happy. There is no better way of showing gratitude than by being happy, no matter when' we are or what we are doing, and by being thankful tor what we have even it it be ever st) little.
Le1 us get the habit of sharing with those less fortunate than we arc. by making others happy, m,. omy i n Thanksgiving Day, but every day
in the year.
Memory Gem: Use same as last Sunday, unless yem And a better selection.
Lest Exercise: It's Thanksgiving, and mother is getting ready to have grandfather, grandmother and the rest of the family. Let's think
of all the things that we could do to help get things ready. As the Children suggest let them art it out. After that lead them to see how
many things they have for their dinner, l wonder whai they oould do
to Bhow the Heavenly Lather that they were thankful. Yes. by thanking Mini ami by sharing with Others, so lei's li\ a nice basket and take it
tn i Mine poor | ersou or someone \\ ho is ill.
Third Sunday. January 16, 1027.
Topics A Home in the Mountains.
Mi itorj of Utah I Wnitney >. Vol I. pp. ■
"Sunday Morning In the Kindergarten," Le 18,
Time: At tin- time the Mormons were persecuted,
382 i>. KAKERE I lhema -2. 1926
Place: On the Lrail to Salt Lake Valley.
Objective: We should not only show our gratitude in words, i>u t also by our deeds.
Suggestions to Teachers: While telling the itory emphasise the thought that no matter what happens or what people do to us, we Bhould not hold feelings toward them nor say mean things aboul them. We all more or less get into the habit of finding fault. Lei us break ourselves
«it' the habit, and remember that we are not responsible for their actions.
hould pity them and pray for them. We should pray for strength
.»• might .101 full into the same rut they are in, but ask for help, that we might Btretch forth our hand and help them OUt. This is one way of showing gratitude toward our Heavenly Father. By being kind to others and by helping others show greater gratitude than uttering mere words.
Memory Gem:
'* For health and food, for love and friend*, For everything His goodness sends We thank the Heavenly Father."
— Mary J. Garland. Best Exercise: Let the children prcte:id they are going to move to a new place, where sage brush grows. Let them suggest how they can help make a new home. Let them dramatize the things they suggest.
fourth Sunday, January 23, 1927.
Topic: ''The Crickets and the (hills. " Theme: During the Early Pioneer Days. Place: salt Lake Valley.
Text: "History of I'iah" (Whitney), Vol. 1, pp. I'.ll-'MV "; "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten,'' Lesson ()!>.
Objective: We would show our gratitude by deeds as well as words
for the many blessings received.
Suggestions to Teachers: Help children to see that no matter what
trouble or danger they are confronted with, they can receive help from their Heavenly Father if they but seek Him in Faith, nothing wavering. We must not doubt when we seek for help. We must know it will be given. Also lean the children to show reverence by caring for the bird> that were given to us to he'p jir toct our crops from enemies. When Our Father in Heaven sees us caring for His creations He is pleased, and will
bless us.
Memory Gem: Same as last Sunday. Songs to be selected from list suggested in First Sunday's lesson.
Rest Exercise: Let the children pretend they are feeding the Sea Gulls. Let them run here and there to throw food to the birds who do' so much. Lei them care for them in other ways, like making bird houses.
Tihema 22. 1920 TE K.ARI£RE 383
Fifth Sunday, January 30, 1927.
Topic: The Birth of Jesus. 1 :,.-. : rod's reign.
Pla< . : In I' tlili lie .:, Judea.
Text: Matt. L:18-2f); Luke L:26-28; 2:1-7; [saiah 7:14; 9:6-7. References: ''Sunday Morning in tin Kindergart a,'3 Lesson 71. '•Jesus the Christ, ' ' pp. 79-92, 102.
Objoctiv< : The more we love the more we are willing to serve, and the greal i our rev\ ard.
■ Sugjj ■■>{'■•;,. : Lead the children to see the wonderful love Heavenly i- u . and of the waj He had of showing it by sending His Onh i down to earth to show us how to lov< One at
i. w t b k nI. Lf we are willing to follow 11 is exam]
can return to oui Heavenly Father with out hearts full of joy and happi- i --. Uso lead children to tell of many things they can do to help others ., Heavenly Father that we are grateful for His blessings and kindness.
M inory Gen;: ''Bettei than all the Christmas -'ft- that any of us i-.; 'i k.o.v, is the (iit't of Jesus to the world, many, man} years ago.*'
. ■• Luthei 's ' a 11 Hymn," D.S.S. S * B k, p. 21 l. "Once Wl" thin the Lowly Stable, ' Pattj I1 11 Soi g Bo 1-. p. 33.
.. . rcisi : L i pi ;. i.si the I \ ith the unfortunate,
such as decorating a tree foi I i sick in th hospital, sharing Lave children suggest what tht\ can put on the Lree, such as decorations a.. 1 a little gift of love.
MAKI HUI ATAWHAI. HORA s. TIMKINI. Tumuaki Bui Atawhai.
AKORANGA MO HANUERE Nil Toke Watuiie i vvhakamaori.
KO ETAHI WHAKARITENGA 1 ROTO
1 1 I, ( )KANGA 0 ll.l KARA] • 1
/. Ko te Hnihtthiga hei whakamiinga / te Whakatakotoranga
o (< I .uniii o /( If 'lit mill. Ko tciK'i whakaritenga i lupono ki te ao wairua, a he wa haringa nui hoki i roto i te rangi. No mua lata atu tenej i te tukunga iho <> te whawhai nui, i hinga ai .1 pana atu ana mi a Kutiwha me tana ope, le wahi tuatom il ,0 <» nga rangi katoa. I reira hoki .1 te Kaiaiti, n 1 una hoki 1 whiriwhiria ai ko la hei Kai Hoko mo tenei ao. biopa vs: 1 -7.
384 TE KARERE ma ?4, I926
J. A Ihu .'< MilUiih r;.
Timata ake i te tekau ma rua o ( >na tan i whakakitea te whakaaro nui o Ihu i roto 1 te Hakari o te Ka ent?a, hei kamahar; tang 1 nei mo te whakaputanga mai 0 [haraira i 10- n> i te whakaponongatanga a n-i Ihipiana.
Ko Tana merekara Luatahi i mea ia i te hakari marena- tanga i tetahi pa, ko la nei tetahi o nu;i manuhiri.
A he manuhiri whakahonore 1 roto i te whaie 0 Haimona repera. I konei tana whakawahinga a Meri i a la ki te hinu
0 roto i tetahi pouaka kohatu, ko te utu e lite ana ki te utu mo te kotahi tan e mahi ana. Maka 14:.}; Ruka 7:]/.
.?. A I/ni ic tangaia kaingit.
Ko te kairma taro i te koraha, e rima mano nga tangata i whangaia ki n^ra taro e rima me nga ika e rua. 1 whaka. akona c thu i ko:^ei:
He ttkoranga i runga i tc iilanga 0 tc rAe (order). Ko te whakanohoanga e 30 i roto i te ropu.
//<• ctkoranga i runga ; U ttkanga 0 ■ hopohjpo (rev rencc).
1 Tana tangohanga ake i taro me riga ika tiro' anga ake ki te rangi, a tukunga w] akawhetaii in ja atu hoki mo ana mea.
He akoranga . riniga 1 u t.k.mja ttaki taonga 1 economy). "Kohikohia nga toenga o nga vvhatiwhaiinga, kei maumauria tetahi w ahi."
// akorungti i runga 1 te tikar.ga 0 nga
dhuatanga uhiika-tc-otua. He whakaatu i te kaha 0 te mana Atua ki te wl \ k; hau iho ki nga mea o te whenua, a hohoro tonu te w! akaritenga, te tupu, 0 nga mea maori, Ruka 9 I: '7; Hoani 6:5-:4; puka- puka Jesus the Christ na Talmage, wN.iarangi ;5~. 4. 7. Hapa a te Ariki.
E ai ki ta nga w anga ko te kainga whakamutu-
nga a te Kai Whakaora i roto i rona tinana matemate. Te wahi, i roto i to runga ruma nui i f-iiruharama. Te wa, i te ahiahi o te Taite Ko nga mea i reira, ko te Karaiti me te Tekau ma Rua. Ko nga kai, lie taro he miiti he waina. Ko ana putake nei tera e taea te whakahaere i raro i n^a whakr- upokotanga tekau ma tahi.
1. Ko te whakaaturanga whakatuwheratanga. Ruka 22:
IS-
2. Ko te whakawhetainga me te hoatntan^a o te taro. Ruka 22; 1 9.
3. Ko te whakawhetainga me te hoatutanga o te waina. Ruka 22:20
Tihema 22, 1926 TE karere 385
4. Ko te whakakitenga o te takahanga o te whakapono o Hura. Jesus the Christ, wharangi 599.
5. Ko te kupu whakaari ki te Tekau ma Rua. Ruka 22:29-
3 •
6. Ko te tautohenga mo te tikanga kai-arahi. Ruka 22:27.
7. Ko te tikanga horoinga o nga waewae he tino tikanga whaka-u ki runga i nga mahi. "Ki te kore ahau e horoi i a koe, kahore au wahi i roto i a au." Hoani 13:8.
8. Ko te haerenga atu o Hura. Hoani 13:27.
9. Ko te kauwhau a Ihu i te wa o te Hapa. Hoani 13:34-
35-
10. Ko Tana inoi whakamutunga i te hakari, (Hoani 17: 25-26) i whakaako tuatahi ai a Ihu i te whai tikanga o te inoi i runga i Tona ingoa. Hoani 16:23-24; 17:1-2.
11. Ko te waiatatanga o te himene. Matiu 26:30.
5. Ko te kainga parakuihi i muri 0 te Aranga Mai.
Te wahi, i tahatai o te moana o Kariri i te atatu. Ko nga kai he ika tunu, me te taro. I kai tahi a Ihu me nga .Apotoro, i hao ika nei i te po katoa a kaore he ika i mau.
6. I whakaatu te Kai Whakaora ki te Poropiti ki a Hohepa Mete-
Ka tu ropu tahi la a te huihuinga ki runga ki te whenua me te nui o nga poropiti o onamata me nga apotoro. Ako. me nga Kawe. wahanga 27.
Ko te whakaturanga i nga hakari (celebrations) tetahi wahanga o te oranga nui noa atu i korerotia ra e te Kai Whakaora i a Hoani 10:10.
NGA PATAI
1. Pehea ta Hopa whakatuturutanga tera a 11m i tae ki te whakanuinga o te whakaotinga o te tauira 0 tenei ao?
2. He aha ta nga tangata i mea ai ki tc whakarite ki a Ihu i muri 0 tc kainga i whangaia c la tc 5000? Hoani (x!5.
AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. NGA KUPU I KOREROTIA E IHU
Ki te aroha koutOU ki ahau, k in man ki aku turc. Hoani 14:15.
Te tangata kci a ia nei akn tine, e puritia ana hoki e iat ko ia tc aroha ana ki ahau: ki te aioli.i tetahi ki ahau. k.i aro
haina ia e toku Matua, a ka aroha ahau ki a ia. ka whakaatu
i ahau ki a ia 1 loani I ,}:2I .
Ka rnea a Mm ki a ratou. ko ahau te taro 0 te ora: ki te
i: KARERii i ihema 22, iy2C
haere mai tetahi ki ahau, e kore raw a ia e hiakai; ki te wha- kapono hoki tetahi ki ahau. mutu ake tona mate-wai. Hoani
6:35.
He rua o nga pokiha, he kohanga 0 nga manu 0 te rangi; tena ko te Tama a te tangata hore ona waha e takoto ai tona matenga. Ruka 9: 58.
Kahore he tangata e pono te mahi ki nga rangatira toko- rua: ka kino hoki ki tetahi, ka aroha ki tetahi; ka u ranei ki tetahi, a ka whaka'.iawea ki tetahi. E koie e pono ia koutou te mahi ki te Ai.ua, ki te taonga. Matiu: 6:24.
Houhia te rongo, a e houhia ano te rongo ki a koutou. Ruka 6:37.
Ka koa te hung a tohu tangata: e tohungia hoki ratou Matiu 57-
Ki te whaka/erea noatia iho hoki e koutou nga he 0 te tangata, ka whakarerea noatia iho ano 0 koutou e to koutou Matua i te rangi. Matiu (.114.
A ki te hara tou teina ki a koe, haere, korerotia tona ha- ra ki a ia, korua anake: ki te whakarongo ki a koe, ka riro i a koe tou teina. Matiu 18:15.
Te whakawhiwhi, nui atu te hari i to te whiwhi. Mahi
20:35.
Hoatu. a ka homai ki a koutou; he n ehua pai, pehi raw a, purena tonu ta ratou e homai ai ki te kokoiu 00 koutou kaka- hu. Ko te mehua hoki e mehua ai koutou, hei mehua ano tena ki a koutou. Ruka 6:38.
He ture hou laku ka hoatu nei ki a koutou, kia aroha kou- tou tetahi ki tetahi; kia rite ki toku aroha ki a koutou, wai ho- ki kia aroha koutou tetahi ki tetahi. Hoani IJ:34-
Ma konei ka matau ai te katoa, he akonga koutou naku, me ka aroha koutou tetahi ki tetahi. Hoani 13: ,5.
Na ko taku kupu tenei ki a koutou e whakarongo mai nei, Arohaina o koutou hoa whawhai; kia pai te mahi ki te hunga e kino ana ki a koutou. Ruka 6:27.
Ko ta koutou e pai ai kia meatia e nga tangata ki a kou- tou, meatia ano e koutou ki a ratou. Ruka 9:31.
Kia a hakapaua tou ngakau, tou wairua, tou hinengaro, ki te aroha ki te Ariki. ki tou Atua Ko te tuatahi tenei, k) te kupu nui. E rite ano l:e tu.irua ki tenei, kia aroha koe ki ou hoa tata, ano ko koe. Kei runga i enei kupu e rua e iri ana te ture katoa me nga poropiti. Matiu 22:37-40.
Kia n.au te w hakapono ki te Atua. 11:22.
Kia rite ki to koutou whakapono te meatanga ki a kou-
Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 387
tou. Matiu 9:26.
Ko ahau te aranga, te ora: ko ia e whakapono ana ki a- hau, ahakoa kua mate,e ora ano. Hoani 11:25.
I haere mai ahau kia whiwhi ai ratou ki te ora, ina tona nui noa atu. Hoani 10: 10.
Haere mai ki ahau, e koutou katoa e mauiui ana, e tai- maha aua, a maku koutou e whakaokoki. Matiu 11:28.
E pahemo te rangi me te whenua; ko aku kupu ia e kore e pahemo. Ruka 21:33.
I roto i nga "Momona"
He mea tuhi e Capt. Gilbert Frankau. a na Rapata Tanapu i whakamaori.
I panuitia enei korero e whai ake nei ki te Sunday Pic- torial, koia nei tetahi o nga nupepa nunui o Ranana, Inga- rangi. Na ratou tenei tangata a Kapene Kiripata Paranikau i tono ki Uta me etahi atu takiwa o Amerika *ki te tuhi i nga tino ahuatariga i kitea ai e ia. — Nga Etita.
He korero pono mo te Pa Tote, mo te IVToe Punarua. Na Kiripata Paranikau enei korero i te wa i toro ai ia i
Amerika. E ki ana ia ko te Pa Tote tetahi taone
ataahua, pai hoki ona whakahaere, i nga taone
katoa kua kite ia. Ko tenei tangata ehara i
te "Momma."
"Ko te wahi tenei, e Pirikamu laanga."
Me titiro iho koutou i a au e titiro iho ana inanahi i te taha o nga hiwi nui, e kiia nei ko te Wasatch, i te wahi nei kei reira te kohatu whakamaharatanga a Pirikamu laanga e whakairoa nei ki ana kupu, "I his is the place," na e whaka- ae hoki koutou na ko Pirikamu laanga, kai-hanga 0 Uta, he ahakoa tekau ma ivva ana wahine. e rima tckau ma ono ana tamariki, koia he tino kai-arahi i nui ke atu i nga tangata katoa e whakatupuria ana e te whenua i tenei ra. haunga hoki a Muhorini te kai-arahi nui 0 Itari.
I te wahi turanga o tana kohatu, kaore nei ano kia hi pa te v am tekau tail 0 tana tunga tuatahitanga i taua wahi, ka kite koutou i nga malii a ona ringaringa. a tenei kai-arahi nu! kua mate nei.
Ko te wharau 0 te Mnana Tote i ata whiriwhiria nei e karapotia ana e nga maunga e tiohoia nei e te huka. 1 ko atu
ko nga tarangi maunga 0 Oka, a kei raro ko te Moana fote
388 TE tCARKKJ THhema j_\
e kanapanapa ana mai i te tonga o te ra ano he hiriwa. I te- nei taha o te roto ko te Pa I »te, punga o te iwi ''Mom on a, a o nga korero whakakinokino hoki o nga ta fata m i ratou i nga ra kua pa K i te nuinga o nga korero kikino mo
te iwi "M >m m, ■■."" he paj u katoa Ko nga whare e 1 >ngo nci koutou hei nohoanga wahine, k >re i a ko-
tahi e kitea i tenei Eiiona hou. Kua koie te t< ngala e moe maha i te wahine.
Ko Hiona i te lei ra, he pa kua tupu nui ie rangi marie, kua tino pai hoki te whakahaere o \ na iure, tac a.u ana hoki ki te ahua o nga mahi o te hahi. Ko nga whaie he kohatu te nuinga, ko nga tirifci he tino whanui, e tupuria ana tetahi taha me tetahi taha e ona rakau hei wh&kapaipai.
Whakarongo mai koutou ki nga korero mo le whaka. tun.ua o tenei pa. 1 haere ra ou ki k nei, ara a Pirikamu Iaanga me etahi o ana iwi, k >tai i rau e v> ; a teka-u ma t >ru nga tane, e toru nga Wahine, me nga tamariki e rua. Ko ratou he mea pei mai i a nga hunga kohuru i Nawu, lie taone tera na ratou (na nga ".M.niona"/ i w akatu ki te takiwa o Irinoi. Heoi, ko to ratou hekenga mai ki Le wahi e noho nei ratou i rung a i a ratou kaata okiha, ko etahi na runga mai i te hoiho, Tino whakamomori ratou kia tae ki Hiona, he ahakoa te tekau ma torn ran o nga maero hei haerenga mo ratou, i nga koraha, i nga wahi poup >u, kore raw a ratou i noho mai. Tino kino te wera o nga koraha i haere ai ratou, a ko nga wheua pawharo i hora haere ana i aua koraha, ma tonu i te n^aunga a te ra. Ko etahi o ratou i tuhituhi ki nga mahunga pawharo hei whakaatu ki nga mea to mini o ratou ki te ara e tika ai te haere ki Hiona, penei nga korero, "i haere matou ma tenei ara, ka nui te ora. Hune 2')." Heoi ko te haerenga mai i muri i a ratou o etahi mano tangata, ko nga mea rawa kore kaore nei i whiwhi ki te okiha, ki te hoiho ra- nei, i hari mai i a ratou taonga i runga i nga kaata to ki te ri- ngaringa. He nui hoki nga mea o ratou i mate i te haerenga mai ki te whenua o te kupu whakaau, heoi ko nga kaiolj (kuri mohoao) o nga mania i mohio ki to ratou tokomahata. nga (nga mea i mate nei) me nga ahuatanga i pa ki a ratou i muri mai.
Kua hauhakena ke noatia atu e nga Paeonia a ratou taewa, a kua oti ke te whakatakoto o te mapi o te tacjne, i mua o te taenga mai o te hunga too kaata. I tana w a tae noa mai ki naianei kaore ano nga tangata i mohio ki te wha- katakoto taone pera i a Pirikamu Iaanga. I timata mai i te tau
Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 389
1847 nga mahi nunui a Pirikamu Iaanga a tae atu ana ki te tau 1880. Oti pu i a ia he taone ki te koraha, a whakanohoia ana ki tetahi iwi matau, rangatira hoki. Ka tupu haere nei hoki ona taone ki te wahanga ki Uta, pera ano me lngarangi te nui. Ka mahi ia, ka ahu i te whenua, ka whakatupu hua rakau, ka keri i nga waro, i era atu mea o te whenua. Ka tupu nui nei hoki ia me tona iwi, me te mana hoki o to ratou hahi. Engari no muri mai, i te wa o te whakanuinga o Kuini Wikitoria, mo te rima tekau tau ona e kuini ana, ka timata te kino a nga tangata o waho o te hahi ki te moe punarua a te iwi "Momona." Na, ka puta te whawhai tino nui, i te mea hoki kua tino whakapumautia te tikanga moe punarua roto i te iwi nei, e rua ano nga whakatupuranga i kawe i tenei tikanga, he ahakoa kihai i mahia nuitia e nga tane katoa o te hahi, i noho pea ki te wha nga tane "Momona" i roto i te kotahi rau (4 per cent), i moe punarua.
Ko te moe punarua, kia mahara koutou, ehara i te wahi nui rawa o nga tikanga o te whakapono o te iwi "Momona." I te pahitanga o te ture whakanoa i te moe punarua a te "Mo- mona," ka meatia ko nga wahine tuatahi anake hei moe to- nu, ko etahi katoa atu kaore e maharatia he wahine pono i runga i te aronga o te ture. I- te kaha o te whakaaro o nga tane ki a ratou wahine, ka wehea i a ratou i runga i nga mahi a te kooti whakawa, katahi ka piiratia ki te Hupirimi Kooti me i kore e taea te whakakore o te ture nana nei i wehe a ratou wahine. Heoi ka whakaaetia e te Hupirimi Kooti kia whakahaerea taua kehi, no te whakahaeretanga ka hinga nga 'Momona. " Kore rawa nga tane i pai ki te whakarere i a ratou wahine, ka mea he pai ke to ratou haere ki te whare herehere i te wehea o a ratou wahine, i a ratou tamariki i whanau tika i roto i to ratou hahi.
1 te tatanga pau o te ono tau 0 nga tau 0 nga "Momona" e tukinotia ana ka murua nga whenua katoa 0 te Hahi. Heoi ka mate nei hoki. Ko nga wahine me nga tamariki a nga tane, i mua atu o te ture whakanoa i te moe punarua, ka whakaaetia e te ture, me he me a ka whakamutua iawatia e nga "Momona" i muri mai te moe punarua.
1 te timatatanga 0 te 1890 ka whakamutua rawatia te
moe punarua e te iwi "Momona," a haere nei, kua tino tatu te whakaaro o te Kawanatan.ua 0 Amerika kua iiuilu tera mahi. Ki te kitea ana nga mea e moe punarua ana e te hahi ka tapahia ki waho o te hahi, he tino mea kino raw. 1 lenei kj a ratou inaianei, B kaha ana an ki te ki e IcOTC yaw a <• kitea
390 te KARERE Tihema 22. 1936
e tetahi tangata nana ki te rapu, i roto i tc Pa Tote tetahi tangata e moe punarua ana. I tutaki au ki eta hi wahine i moea punaruatia i mua 0 te whakanoatanga 0 tana mahi, tino ngahau au ki nga korero mo ratou, engari ki te nuinga
o te ao kua peneitia hei korero tara ma ratou.
Kei te tupu rawa atu te hahi 0 te "Momona," kei te man tonu hoki ona iwi ki ona ritenga, me te tahuri inai ano hoki o nga iwi 0 waho ki to ratou hahi, me te mamae tonu 0 0 ratou ngakau i nga mahi tawai mo ratou i nga wa 0 mua.
Kia whakaatu au ki a koutou, e whakaaetia ana e nga "Momona" kia kauwhau nga tauiwi ki roto i 0 ratou whare karakia. Ko ahau i tu ki te whai korero i roto i to ratou Ta- penakara nui whakaharahara, ko te nui o nga tangata e uru ki taua whare tekau nga mano. Kei roto i taua whare he okena e kiia ana ko tetahi o nga okena tangi pai i runga i te mata o te whenua.
I ahau i reira ka haere mai ki a au tetahi apiha no nga taua a Ingarangi, ara o te Norfolk Regiment, raua ko tana tuahine ataahua whakarere. Ko te tuahine o te tangata nei katahi ano ka uru ki te hahi "Momona." Ka titiro mai ki a au te wahine nei, ka minemine ki te kata, me te w ha k a uru ano o nga tohu o te riri ki ona mata moana. Katahi ia ka oha noa mai ki a au. ka whakaatu mai i tona ingoa, heoi whakarongo tonu atu au. Koia nei ana korero ki a ahau.
"Kua rongo pea koe i nga korero moku. Ko ntja nupepa o te takiwa ki toku kainga kua ki tonu i nga korero no toku urunga ki te hahi "Momona." Ka meatia i roto i ana nupepa he mea kawhaki au, na i te rangonga o taku whaea, ko tona rerenga mai ki te whakaora i ahau. No tenei hahi hoki taku whaea. Haere kau mai taku whaea he toro i tenei wahi. Ka noho maua ka kata noa iho ki nga korero parau i taia ai ki te nupepa Kia rereke hoki enei mahi? Ka nui taku hiahia kia mutu te ta i enei mea parau, e whakaiti nei i te hunga e noho ana i runga i te rangimarie." Heoi ano nga korero a taua kotiro.
E takoto noa iho ana te tono a te "Momonatanga," ko to ratou whakapono penei nei ano i o etahi nei. Engari kore rawa au e whakapono ki tona wahi nui i puta te Atua Matua me te Tama ki tetahi tamaiti kuare noa iho ki a Hohepa Mete, i Ingarangi Hou i etahi tau torutoru i mini iho o te whawhai ki Wataru (Waterloo). Kaore ano hoki au e wha- kapono ko nga iwi "Momona," atawhai nei i a au, e pupuiu ana mo tonu ake atu i te Tohungatanga o Merekihereke. E-
Tihema 22. 1926 TE KARERE 391
ngari ki te tirohia ratou i runga i a ratou mahi, e whakatika- ia ana ratou ki te aroaro o te ao katoa.
He iwi pukumahi tenei iwi te "Momona," na me titiro e tatou, na ratou i tu ai te takiwa o Uta, a kaore ano hoki e mutu mai ta ratou whakapai i taua wahi, e tupu nui nei i te- nei ra i tenei ra.
Tino pai o ratou ritenga, ko nga mahi kikino katoa kao- re e whakar.etia ana kia mahia e o ratou tangata, ko to ratou Pukapuka o te Matauranga e puru ana i nga mahi kaipaipa, kaiwaipiro, korero tinihanga, kohukohu, me nga mahi purei hoiho, petipeti hoki.
Ko te iwi "Momona," he nui atu to ratou manawanui, to ratou manaaki ki era atu o nga whakapono, he maha hoki nga hahi o nga iwi ke i roto o Uta, e koropiko ana ki to ratou Atua, kaore e whakararurarua ana e nga "Momona," engari e waihotia ana kia mahi ana i runga i te rangimarie.
I te unga tuatahitanga atu o te Hahi Katorika ki te Pa Tote ka tae a Pirikamu Iaanga ka hoatu noa i tetahi wahi o tana whenua, me te kotahi rau pauna hei awhina i a ratou.
Ko te Kawana o Uta i enei ra, pootitia ai penei ano i a tatou e pooti nei ki nga mema o te paremete, he tangata no te whakapono Katorika, engari ko te nuinga o nga tangata pooti ki a ia he "Momona."
Ko te iwi "Momona" e utu ana i tetahi wahi whakatekau o a ratou moni, hei whakatu whare karakia, hei atawhai i te hunga rawa kore, i nga mea ano hoki e tika ana kia aroha- tia. Kaore hoki ratou i te whakaae ki nga whakahaere rere- ke pera i te Bolshevism 0 Ruhia.
Ko a ratou kaumatua e haere mai ana ki a tatou ki Inga- rangi ko ratou ano ki te utu i a ratou kai, kakahu. rerewe, i nga pukapuka hoki o te hahi e tuhaina nei e ratou.
He ahakoa te kore e rite o ago tatou whakaaro ki ago nga "Momona," e mahi nei i nga mahi 0 ta ratou ha hi i runga i te whakapono kua puta he whakakitenga hou ki a ratou. lie pai rawa me mutu a tatou mahi whakakinokino ki te iwi kaore nei he hara ki a tatou.
Na ki te kore te tangata e whakapono ki aku korero 1 ro- to i tenei pukapuka, ka ki tonu atu au ki .1 ia, he pai rau a lo haere ki te Pa Tote kia ata kite ai koC 1 te jH.no .. ;iku ko. rero. E kiia ano hoki ko te mahi a nga miliinare i tukua ki
[ngarangi he poapoa i nga wahine takakau, ka hari ki 0
ratou whare hei wahine ma ratou. Me haereere e koe Qga tiriti o tenei pa, ka at.i matakitaki ai i 11^.1 tam.iliine ataahna
392
IE KARERE
Tihema 22, 1920
a tenei iwi a te "Momona," he tino ataahua, tini hoki ana tamahine. A kia pena ka timatatia ano te moe punarua, ka pera ano i to te "Momona" aroha i timatatia i o ratou ake kainga, e kore ratou e haere ke ki Ingarangi ki te tiki wa- hine ma ratou.
0
Ko nga Manita (Monitors) o te M.A.C.
Tiata Witehira Vili Purcell
John Tuita Pauliasi Pikula
Herbert Brunt Faafeu'u Taua
Ki te Hunga Tapu me nga hoa aroha katoa, he whakama- haratanga tenei ki a koutou ko nga mahi o te kura o te M.A. C. inaianei keite piki haere tonu. I te tau kua huri ake nei i wha- katungia e te poari o te kareti etahi o nga tamariki hei kai- whakahaere i nga mahi katoa o te kura, hei awhina ana hoki i nga kai-whakaako o taua kura ki te whakatipu i tenei mea
Tihema 22, 1926
TE KARERE
393
I
394 [ ' KARERK Tihe na 22. iy26
i te pai, te rangimnrie, ki waenganui i nga tamariki katoa. E hoa ma, he ropu whiriwhiri tenei i nga take, i n?a ahuata-
nga katoa e pa ana ki te ku.a, ki 11 jj;a tamariki ano hoki. he whakapiki i nga mahi o te kura, ara ma ratou ano e whaka- haere nga mahi 0 waho o te kura.
No reira he honore tenei ki nga tamariki kei runga i tenei turanga, no te mea he tamariki ratou e whakariuingia ana e nga mahita, e nga tangata katoa ano hoki. He mea hari, he mea koa tenei ki nga matua 0 enei tamariki. n 1 te m >a kua tu a ratou tamariki hei kai-whakahaere, liei ma'.iu.iga au ho- ki mo nga tamariki 0 taua kareti.
Koia tenei ko to koutou hiahia ki a koutou tamariki i tu- kuna mai ai e koutou ki te kura kia whiwhi i te matauranga, i te whakaaro-nui, no reira hei matakitaki ma koutou i te pai, i te ataahua o nga mahi o te kura.
Ko enei tamariki kua mohio ki te whakahaere tikanga no te mea kei a ratou te mana whakahaere; ina hoki atu ratou ki o ratou kainga e kaha ana ratou ki te whakahaere tikanga i waenganui i o ratou iwi katoa E te Hunga Tapu, e nga hoa aroha, koia tenei ko te huarahi e whiwhi ai a koutou tamariki ki te matauranga me te whakaaro nui, no te mea ko te kororia o te Atua ko te matauranga. Na to koutou teina i te Rongopai.
Pita Kere
KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA.
Ko ELDER A. WRIGHT GRANT 0 Spokane, Washing- ton. 1 tae mai a Erata Karanata ki Akarana i te 8 o nga ra
0 Tihema, 1924, a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Akarana.
1 te I o nga ra o Maehe 1925 ka tu koia hei Hekeretari Kai- awhina 0 te Mihana. Ka nukuhia i te 21 o Oketopa [925 ki te takiwa o Poneke, a i te 4 o nga ra o Aperira 1929 ka nuku- hia ano ki te takiwa o Waikato mo te taha Pakeha o reira. Tukua honoretia atu i te 25 o Oketopa, 1926.
Ko ELDER LESTER S. THOMSON 0 Rexburg, Idaho. 1 tae mai a Tamihana te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1 92 4, a ka whakaritea ki te Takiwa o Hauraki mo te taha Pakeha. A i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1924, ka nukuhia ki Akarana. Ka nukuhia ano ki te takiwa o te Tai Rawhiti i te 3 o Hepetema 1924 a i te 26 o nga ra o Hurae 1925 ka whakaritea koia te tu- muaki mo reira. I tukua honoretia atu ia i te 23 o nga ra o Noema 1926.
Tiheina 22, 1926
TE KARI.RE
395
Elder Lester S. Thomson
Elder A. Wright Grant
NA TE ETITA.
E te Hunga Tapu, tena koutou. Tenei te tuku atu nei i te 'Karere" whakamutunga mo te tan 102,). Kua whakaritea hoki e matou he maramataka mo te Tan lion, kia kore ai koutou e wareware ki to koutou manu i nga marama e takoto ake nei. Heoi, kia ora koutou katoa i roto i te Kirihimete me te Tau lion Kotahi ano te kui)ii a Te Karere ki a koutou i tenei wa, Whakaritea nga ture a te Atua, me o koutou kara- ngatanga i roto i te Kingitanga. Ma tenei huarahi anake e whivvhi ai koutou ki te ora, ki te hari. ki te koa. Kaua hoki c penei, "He pakeke, he uaua, nga ara 0 te Tika," engari kia niahara ki te kupu a te Karaiti (Matin l !:.>(•). '"Me ngawari ho- ki taku ioka, he mama taku pikaunga." \o reira kia peia
atu nga hiahia taikaha o te kikokiko, kia ngakau tapatahi
tatou katoa i roto i nga mahi a te Ariki. Whakaritea te Kupu
o te Matuaranga kia poke kore ai u tatou Temepara, whaka- ritea te Whakatekau me nga takoha kia whai hea ai koutou i roto i te kingitanga me nga manaakitanga a te Atua, kia pu- rangatia he taonga ma tatou ki te rangi. Meri Kirihimete me
te Hap] Xuia ki a koutou kato.i. ma te Atua tatOU kato.i e ma- naaki i roto i te lau I lou.
X.i o koutou inn. 1 iti r.iw .1, \.i nga Etita
39° TE karkki. fihema 22, iy26
He Ripoata na Nireaha Paewai
Ki nga etita 0 Te Karere, e hoa ma tena korua e noho mai nei me tooku iwi e aroha nuitia nei e ahau i te po i te ao, mai i te Waipounamu tae noa mai ki te Aotearoa.
E te Iwi Maori, tena ra koutou. Ka nui te tangi atu 0 te ngakau i te nui o te mokemoke, i te kore Maori. Heoi.
Kei te kura ahau inaianei o te U.A.C. Ka nui te pai o tooku noho i reira, tooku kaha ki te ako, a, kei te mau etalii o nga whakaakoranga, kei te kore eta hi e mau. Ko te nuinga pea kei te mau. Ka nui te pai o nga kai-whakaako ki ahau, te tiaki, te tautoko, me te awhina i a ahau, me to ratou pi- rang] ki te korero ki a ahau me te patai mo te whenua o a in Tireni.
E rua nga kaumatua i hoki mai i \iu Tireni i te mi/iana ko Hori Henihana raua ko Erata i^redrickso.n kei konei e kura ana.
E te iwi kua tae niaua ko to >ku hoa me a maua tamariki ki te Hui Tau i tu i te 2, 3. 4, 5, 0 nga ra 0 Oket >oa, 1925. 1 te tahi o nga ra i te po, ka tu te huihuinga o nga kaumatu 1 o Niu Tireni. I reira ka kite ahau i nga kaumatua kua hoki- hoki mai i Niu Tireni. Ko Harihana, Hoijpuruku, Romeni, Matin Kauri, Pene Katata, Leo B. Sharp, SJ. ote^e, A lire J, Parry, Austin, Morrison, Garff, Miller. Patrick, ^\ e t )ver, Xitama, me etahi atu kaumatua kua warewaie ahau ki nga ingoa. Nuku pea i te waru tekau nga kai niatua. i reira hoki nga wahine.
1 te 2 o nga ra he Ratapu, a i te ata i te tekau ka tu te karakia nui. I reira te Tunuiakitanga 0 le Hahi. i reira nga Apotoro Tekau ma Rua, te Petariaka, nga 1 inuaki 0 nga Whitu Tekau, me te Hunga Tapu, 12,000 pea, kii tonu le Tapenakara, te Assembly rial 1, me nga tatau. me nga ma- rae (lawns) i te tangata.
1 ahau e whakarongo ana ki te Poropiti e kor ro ana ka hoki atu nga whakaaro ki te kainga, me tooku wawata kia rongo hoki koutou i tenei tangata e korero ana, e whakaro- ngo ana te Iu,030 tangata i tana wa ano.
1 tenei ata i korero a I imuaki Niperi raua ko Timnaki Ivins. 1 te ahiahi i korero ana a Apotoro Rihara, a Apotoro Reel Smoot, a Apotoro Raimana, a Apotoro Melvin J. Ball- arJ. Ka mutu i enei tangata ki te kore .0. I ahau e whaka- rongo ana ki enei tangata e koiero ana ko oku hoa noho ko
Tihema 22, 1920 TE KARERE 397
Wiremu Katene raua ko Hugh Geddes. 1 moe a Hiu raua ko toona hoa wahine me ta raua tama a Mohi me tona wahine i to maua whare i te po o te Paraire kua pahure ake nei. I tenei ra ka tutaki ahau ki to tatou apotoro, a Apotoro Rawiri Makei me toona hoa wahine. I pohiri ia ki a maua kia haere ki tona whare ki te kai, kia patai ano ia ki a maua mo te ahua. I runga i te mea kua tae mai te waka hei whakahoki i a maua ki Rokena 90 maero te tawhiti kahoro i taea te haere ki tona tono i tenei wa. Otira i toku kitenga tuatahi- tanga i a ia ka korero ahau mo te ahuatanga o te Maori me te take o tooku haere, he awhina i te Maori. Ka tae tooku korero mo te pai o te Poari o te Kawenatanga ki te tautoko i ahau i runga i ooku whakaaro. Ka tae hoki ooku korero mo te Hui ki Tikitiki, mo te Kura Moromona, mo tooku kupu ki a Ngata me te iwi i te hui, tukua te Kura Moromona kia haere ana i te taha o te Kura o Te Aute. Kahore e pai ko tetahi e ora, a ko tetahi e mate, me ora tahi. Heoi kahore ahau i kite i te mutunga, i hoki ahau i te po o te Ratapu ki te kura.
Kaati, he take ke tenei, e pa ana ki te whutu-paoro o Amerika. I te pureitanga o to matou kura U.A.C. ki Colo- rado, na te timuaki o te kura ahau i mau i runga i toona mo- tokaa. I purei ki te Ogden, te taone a Timuaki Angiha T. Raiti, a i kite hoki ahau i a ia. Kahore ahau i pai ki tenei purei, he patu tangata te mahi. Tekau ma tahi nga tangata ki te taha kotahi. 1 te mutunga o te purei, tekau ma rua pea nga tangata i matemate nga tinana. I waimarie i wiini ai i a matou. Mehemea he Maori te iwi e purei nei, kua mate- mate nga Pakeha. Te take, mehemea kahore te pooro i te tangata e ahei ana tetahi atu ki te tuki i tana tangata, ka- hore ra te pooro i a ia. No reira ahau i ki ai kahore e pai ma te Maori he purei i tenei ahua purei, he toa hoki te Maori ki te tuki i te tangata. Ko enei ano oku korero ki te iwi nei. Kati nei enei korero hei korerotanga ma matOU ma nga tai- tama: iki.
He wa pooti tenei mo nga mema par em ate 0 Amerika, a i konei a Matin Kauri e kauh.au ana mo te taha ki a Senator
(Apostle) Reed Smoot, Republican. I konei hoki a Erata Hoani Tatana. Kua maeriwe ke matou ka tae mai. Na i ki mai i Niu Tireni a ia e kauhau ana. Nana hoki a Takana
raua ko Takare i marena, me eta' 1 atu. Ka )G nga tail ina-
ianei i tona taenga ki kona.
(Tana te roanga)
39«
l E KARERE
1920
Erata Hon Henihano Erema Pitihana "Nik" Paewtii (Tumuaki 0 te U.A.CJ
Ko te Whakaeminga o nga Korero
|
KI TE |
EXIT A |
||
|
Ko |
nga Mahi Hui Tau |
||
|
He Mihi Aroha ki Te Puea Heran ;i |
3-6 |
||
|
Ko te Marae 0 te Hui Tau |
3^5 |
||
|
Powhiri |
66 |
||
|
Ripoata |
[98 |
||
|
Ko |
n^a Powhiri Hui Pariha |
||
|
Haki Pei |
244, |
266 |
|
|
Hauraki |
244 |
||
|
Ngapuhi |
3} |
||
|
Pei Whairangi |
244 |
||
|
Tai Rawhiti |
33, |
266 |
|
|
Taranaki |
343 |
||
|
Waikato |
32 |
||
|
Ko |
nga Ripoata Hui Atawhai |
268, |
W> |
|
Ko |
n^a Ripoata Hui Pariha |
||
|
Haki Pei |
63. |
328 |
|
|
Hauraki |
61, |
269 |
|
|
Tai Rawhiti |
92 |
||
|
Waikato |
27 |
, 99 |
|
|
Ko nga Ripoata Kauwhau Haere |
|||
|
Ani Paki |
30 |
||
|
[riparete Pomare |
J 27 |
Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 399
Paepae W. Witehira 274
Tu Geo. Stakman 59 Ko nga Ripoata K.ura Hapati
Mo te Ra nga Whaea 203, 204, 205
Ko nga Ripoata Matenga, Tanumanga
Hoani Tiu Ratima 30
Kahukore Karaka Pairama 267, 304
Katene Poutu Penekupa 64
Koro Waerea 206
Metapere Matai 161 Nga Peepi a Hemi Pohutuhutu me
Tatana Arona 330
Otene Tuehu Pom are 329
Piki Waerea 233
Piripi Matenga 306
Richard Watene 327, 330
Ta Timi Kara 315
Te Paea Cunningham 274
Tepara Christina Reti 304
Tepora Ruru 162 Ko nga Whakamihitanga
Ki a Ngapuhi Renata 174
Ki a Te Puea Herangi 320 Ko nga Ripoata Mo te Ahuatanga nga Takiwa He Kotiro Aroha
He Manaakitnga ' 201
He Marenatanga 162 Ko nga Ripoata no Hiona
"Ma nga Hua ka Mohiotia ai" 206
Nireaha Paewai 364, 396 Ko nga Ripoata Poroporoaki
Ma hi a 305
KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA
140, 203, 268, 307, 1S2, 307, 394
KO NGA TUHINGA MAI
E Mahi ana Tatou 1110 te Aha? 209
1 le Kupu Whakaatu 100
He Kauwhau Pai 90 He Morehu no te Whare 0 Iharaira 18, 54, to8
He T i ka ranei nga Hani Katoa? 356 He Whakaahua Pai 200, 235, 207 I It- Whakaaturanga mo te W hare 0 [haraira
I rotO i nga "Momona" 387
Ko nga Mahi a te Kura I lapati
hei Painga ma Tatou jo;. 236 Ko nga Pukapuka < Inamata Ko te Aranga Mai
400 TE KARERE Tihema 22, 1926
Ko te Kari o Erene 363
Ko te Maaka Tuarua 21
Ko te Merekara o nga Karoro 177
Ko te Nama a te Atua 242, 262
Ko te Takanga Atu i te Rongopai 163
Me Pehea? 2^8
Ta te Manawa Akoranga ki a Tatou 137
Te Aranga o te Hunga .viate 57
Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti 138, 168
Te Urimi me te Tumime 33 *
KO NGA RONGO KORERO
Ko te Hui Nui o Ngati Porou 96, 129, 165
Ripoata mo te Kareti
70, 131, 171, 233, 279, 329, 361, 368, 392 MAHI KURA HAPAT1
Christmas Program 338
Karakia Kirihimete 342
Concert Recitation 2, 40, 72, 112, 144,
180, 212, 246, 282, 310, 344, 370
Intermediate Department 10, 47, 80, 121,
151, 187, 222, 235, 294, 315. 349, 376
Kindergarten Department 14, 49. 82, 1 23, 154,
190, 225. 258, 297, 318, 351, 379
Korero a Ngakau 2, 40, J2, 112, 144
180, 212. 246, 282, 310, 344, 370
Maori Theological 2, 40, 72, 115, 144, l8o,
212, 246, 282. 310, 344, 370
Mothers' Day Program 112
Pakeha Theological 7, 44, 76, Ii8,
147, 183, 217, 249, 28S, 313, 347, 374,
Postlude, Prelude, Sacrement Gem I, 39, 70,
III, 143 179, 211, 245, 281, 309, H7> 369
Significance of Partaking the Sacrament 53, 88
MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 34, 66, 103, 132,
158, 194, 229, 261, 300, 323, 354, 383
NA TE ETITA
Bound Volumes 66
E Ono nga Take mo te Whakatekau 174
He Mihi 174
He Mihi Kirihimete 395
Ripoata Hui Tau 172
KO TE MUTUNGA
TE KARERE Tihema 22 1926
0
IHAIA 9:6
"Kua whanau nei hoki he tamaiti ma tatou, kua homai he tama ki a tatou."
I te ahiahi o te Ratapu, i te 5 o nga ra o Tihema, 1926, ka puta mai he tama hou ki a Tumuaki Hoani H. iinikini raua ko tona hoa wahine. Ka nui te ora o te peepi nei, me tona mama hoki. Kahore ano Ida kitea he ingoa mona i te_ nei tuhinga. Ka nui te hari me te koa i puta mai ki o raua nei ngakau, i te mea hoki kua oti ke te whakapuaki e nga takuta o Amerika e, kua kore te wahine nei e kaha ki te whakawhanau tamariki. Ma tenei ka mohio tatou tera he matauranga e nui atu ana i to nga takuta, i to nga tangata matauranga.
Kia ora koe e Sister Tinikini korua ko to peepi, kia ora hoki koe e te Tumuaki. Ma te Atua koutou ko a korua ta- mariki e manaaki e tiaki i roto i te Tail Hou. Mere Kirihi- mete me te Hapi Nuia ki a koutou katoa na nga Etita o Te Karere.
Hui Pariha ki Waipawa
E te Hunga Tapu, tena koutou. Kua tae atu te rongo 0 te pai o nga hui o te.takiwa o Heretaunga nei mai i te Wai- pounamu tae noa atu ki te pito 0 te Hiku. Na, i te mea kua whakaritea kia tu te Hui Pariha ki Waipawa a te IS me te 16 0 nga ra o Hanuere 1927, maku e whakahau atu ki te Hunga Tapu e noho tata ana kia haere mai ki te whakarite i tenei take. Kaua e riro ma Poneke, ma Ngapuhi ranei e whakaki t > tatou whare. Han*.' mai ki te whakarongo ki to tatou tu- muaki e whakamarama ana i te m, pi. Haere mai ki te ako i te tauira e mohio ai tatou ki te haere tika ki te (Drang . rb- nutanga, no te mea "E roa a ram, g tata a runga," 1 te mea hoki kua oti te whakamarama e te tumuaki kua tino tat 1 te wa inaianei 0 te haerenga kororia mai 0 to tato 1 Ariki.
Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai. Haere mai e te Hu- nga Tapu, haere mai hoki koutou e nga hoa aroha. He< to kout< »u U'in.i,
Na l\ in >i B. I leke, rumua ki rakiwa
( I e lu. id Meha, l umua k 1 Peka )
Tihema 22. 1920
1 E K ARK RE
MO TE HUI TAU E te Hunga Tapu,
Tena koutou, me o tatou whanaun^a, hoa-tata, me Qga hoa aroha. Kia tan nga manaakitanga a te Atua ki a koutou— kia u, kia matau, kia ngohengohe ki te Rongopai. Heoi nga mihi.
I tu te hui a te komiti Hui Tau i te Hui Pariha i hori ake nei o te takiwa o Heretaunga (H.B.) i tu ki Korongata. I taua hui i te marama e mate ana nga awhina Hui. Ka motini te Tumuaki Mihana (Pres. J. Howard Jenkins) kia whakahaua te Hekeretari, kia tuhi inoi ki nga Takiwa o te Mihana kia tiri (tou makamaka) riwai (taewa, parareka) nga mema o aua Takiwa e whaiwhakaaro ana ki te awhina i te Hui Tau. Ko nga hua o aua tiringa riwai hei awhina i nga kohi Hui Tau e tera tutuki mo te Hui Tau ka tu ki Waikato, i te tau e heke iho nei. Heoi, nga whakamarama.
Tenei ahau te inoi etu nei ki a koutou (ki nga Takiwa, Peka, mema, ara. ki te Hunga Tapu katoa o Aotearoa) i ru- nga i taua whiriwhiringa whakataunga kua huaina ake nei, kia wehe i tetahi, i etahi rarangi ranei o a koutou tiringa ri- wai, mo tenei take whaiwhakaaro. (Ko nga hua o aua rara- ngi me tuku ki te makete, ko nga moni e tuku mai.)
E whakahau atu ana ano hoki kia kaha ki te whakarite i tenei take. Ki te whakaaro, ma enei tu whakahaere e ora ai nga Hui Tau, ara te Hui Tau ki Waikato e heke iho nei.
WILSON PAEWAI.
Wawahanga o te Kohi Tau, Hui Tau X200
|
Bay of Islands |
15 0 |
0 |
Tamaki |
20 0 0 |
|
East Coast |
Te Hauke |
17 10 0 |
||
|
(Gisborne, etc) |
10 10 |
0 |
Taranaki |
10 0 0 |
|
Going, P. |
2 0 |
0 |
Wairarapa |
10 0 0 |
|
Hauraki |
12 10 |
0 |
Waipounamu |
600 |
|
Korongata |
10 10 |
0 |
Wairoa |
10 0 0 |
|
Moawhango |
5 0 |
0 |
Whangarei |
15 0 0 |
|
Manawatu |
5 0 |
0 |
Waikato |
20 0 0 |
|
Mahia |
5 0 |
0 |
Waipawa |
500 |
|
Nuhaka |
15 0 |
0 |
||
|
Porirua |
6 0 |
0 |
£200 0 0 |
Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE
A t€ 1 0 nga ra 0 Pepuere, 1927
Ka timata ano te mahi kura a te
MAORI AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE
Tukua mai o hereni inaianei, kia tino whaiti ai a te timatanga o te kura.
KO TE TIKANGA, utua katoatia i mua i to urunga
KO NGA EKEPENIHA
Mo te kai, ruma, hopi, kanara, etc. £16 0 0
Mo te takuta, rongoa, etc. 10 0
Mo te Kakahu Kura (Uniform) 2 2 0
Mo te rakau, neira etc. (ma nga mea
anake e ako nei ki te mahi kamura) I 0 0
Mo nga pukapuka, pene rakau, mangu-
mangu, etc. e tata ana ki te 2 0 0
Me etahi atu pauna hei hoko kakahu mo te Ratapu, hei utu hoki i te pikitia, kanikani, rare, etc.
TE KARERK i 'ihcmii 22, 1926
KO NGA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA
Ro enei etahi 0 rma pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei bo- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS
Teachers Bibles, with Ready Refereru e, Leather 25-0
New Testament & Kead\ Reference-, Leather n-0
Book of Mormon, Cloth ... 2-6 & 7-6
. Half Leather go
, Leather IO-0 & 15 0
Pearl of Great Price, Cloth. 2-0
Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0
,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0
MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS
Mauri Ready Reference, Cloth 2 o
.Leather ... 3*6
Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9
" " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in 1 11-6
" Pukapuka a Moroni ona, ("loth ... 5-0
, Leather 15-0
Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata $ Peaia UtU Nui, Cloth $-0
', Leather 1$ 0
Combination of A,B, & C Traits. Leather, Spec. Offer I 0
SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS
The Restoration of th 4-0
What Jesus Taught 5-0
Kindergarten' Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 36
Sunday- Morning In the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6
SONC BOOKS
Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3
Leather ..66
Deseret Song Books. Cloth ... 3-0
" , Leather ... 00
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0
DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS
Articles of Faith, Limp Leather. Med. Size, Talmige 8-3
Vitality of Mormonism " 4-0
Scientific Aspects ol Mormonism, Nelson o-o
Restoration of the Gospel, If idtsoe 4 o
losenh Sn;»!i's Teachings ;-6
he Young, Weed 4 6
tlmnge H-q
b-Q 2-0
Smith & Their Fulfillment. Morris 0-0
KO J. H. TINIKINJ TE KAJ TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. B.